Fema 450

Program on
Improved Seismic Safety

Provisions
of the National Institute of Building Sciences
2003 Edition
Note: The June 6, 2006 ERRATA has been incorporated into this document.
NEHRP RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS

FOR SEISMIC REGULATIONS
FOR NEW BUILDINGS
AND OTHER STRUCTURES (FEMA 450)
Part 1: Provisions
The Building Seismic Safety Council (BSSC) was established in 1979 under the auspices of the National
Institute of Building Sciences as an entirely new type of instrument for dealing with the complex
regulatory, technical, social, and economic issues involved in developing and promulgating building
earthquake hazard mitigation regulatory provisions that are national in scope. By bringing together in the
BSSC all of the needed expertise and all relevant public and private interests, it was believed that issues
related to the seismic safety of the built environment could be resolved and jurisdictional problems
overcome through authoritative guidance and assistance backed by a broad consensus.
The BSSC is an independent, voluntary membership body representing a wide variety of building
community interests. Its fundamental purpose is to enhance public safety by providing a national forum
that fosters improved seismic safety provisions for use by the building community in the planning, design,
construction, regulation, and utilization of buildings.
See the back of the Commentary volume for a full description of BSSC activities.
2003 BSSC BOARD OF DIRECTION

Chairman
Charles Thornton, Chairman/Principal, Thornton-Tomasetti Group, Inc., New York, New York
Vice Chairman
David Bonneville, Degenkolb Engineers, San Francisco, California
Secretary
Charles Carter, Chief Structural Engineer, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago,
Illinois
Ex-Officio
William W. Stewart, Stewart-Schaberg Architects, Clayton, Missouri (representing the

American Institute of Architects)
Members
J. Gregg Borchelt, Vice President, Brick Industry Association, Reston, Virginia

Edwin Dean, Nishkian Dean, Portland, Oregon
Bradford K. Douglas, Director of Engineering, American Forest and Paper Association,
Washington, D.C.
Henry Green, Executive Director, Bureau of Construction Codes and Fire Safety, State of
Michigan, Department of Labor and Economic Growth, Lansing, Michigan (representing the
National Institute of Building Sciences)
H.S. Lew, Senior Research Engineer, National Institute of Standards and Technology,
Gaithersburg, Maryland (representing Interagency Committee on Seismic Safety in
Construction)
Joseph Messersmith, Coordinating Manager, Regional Code Services, Portland Cement
Association, Rockville, Virginia (representing the Portland Cement Association)
Jim Rinner, Project Manager II, Kitchell CEM, Sacramento, California
James Rossberg, Manager, Technical Activities for the Structural Engineering Institute,
American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston Virginia
Jeffery Sciadone, Associate Director, of Engineering, Institute of Business and Home Safety,
Tampa, Florida
W. Lee Shoemaker, Director, Engineering and Research, Metal Building Manufacturers
Association, Cleveland, Ohio
Howard Simpson, Simpson Gumpertz and Heger, Arlington, Massachusetts (representing
National Council of Structural Engineers Associations)
Charles A. Spitz, Architect/Planner/Code Consultant, Wall New Jersey (representing the
American Institute of Architects)
BSSC STAFF
Claret M. Heider, Vice President for BSSC Programs

Bernard F. Murphy, Director, Special Projects
Carita Tanner, Communications/Public Relations Manager
Patricia Blasi, Administrative Assistant
NEHRP RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS

(National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program)
FOR SEISMIC REGULATIONS

FOR NEW BUILDINGS AND
OTHER STRUCTURES (FEMA 450)
2003 EDITION
Part 1: PROVISIONS
Prepared by the
Building Seismic Safety Council
for the
Federal Emergency Management Agency
BUILDING SEISMIC SAFETY COUNCIL

NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF BUILDING SCIENCES
Washington, D.C.
2004
NOTICE: Any opinions, findings, conclusions, or recommendations expressed in this publication do not
necessarily reflect the views of the Federal Emergency Management Agency. Additionally, neither
FEMA nor any of its employees make any warranty, expressed or implied, nor assume any legal liability
or responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, or usefulness of any information, product, or process
included in this publication.
This report was prepared under Contract EMW-2001-CO-0269

between the Federal Emergency Management Agency and the
National Institute of Building Sciences.
Building Seismic Safety Council activities and products are
described at the end of this report. For further information, see
the Councils website (www.bssconline.org) or contact the
Building Seismic Safety Council, 1090 Vermont, Avenue, N.W.,
Suite 700, Washington, D.C. 20005; phone 202-289-7800; fax
202-289-1092; e-mail [email protected].
Copies of this report on CD Rom may be obtained from the
FEMA Publication Distribution Facility at 1-800-480-2520.
Limited paper copies also will be available. The report can also
be downloaded in pdf form from the BSSC website at
www.bssconline.org .
The National Institute of Building Sciences and its Building
Seismic Safety Council caution users of these Provisions
documents to be alert to patent and copyright concerns especially
when applying prescriptive requirements
ii
PREFACE
One of the goals of the Department of Homeland Securitys Federal Emergency Management Agency
(FEMA) and the National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP) is to encourage design and
building practices that address the earthquake hazard and minimize the resulting risk of damage and
injury. Publication of the 2003 edition of the NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulation
of New Buildings and Other Structures and its Commentary is a fitting end to the 25th year of the NEHRP
and reaffirms FEMAs ongoing support to improve the seismic safety of construction in this country. Its
publication marks the sixth edition in an ongoing series of updating of both the NEHRP Recommended
Provisions and several complementary publications. FEMA was proud to sponsor the Building Seismic
Safety Council for this project and we encourage the widespread dissemination and voluntary use of this
state-of-the-art consensus resource document.
The 2003 edition of the NEHRP Recommended Provisions contains several significant changes,
including: a reformatting to improve its usability; introduction of a simplified design procedure, an
updating of the seismic design maps and how they are presented; a modification in the redundancy factor;
the addition of ultimate strength design provisions for foundations; the addition of several new structural
systems, including buckling restrained braced frames and steel plate shear walls; structures with damping
systems has been moved from an appendix to a new chapter; and inclusion of new or updated material
industry reference standards for steel, concrete, masonry, and wood.
The above changes are but a few of the 138 ballots submitted to the BSSC member organizations. The
number of changes continues to be significant and is a testament to the level of attention being paid to this
publication. This is due in large part to the role that the NEHRP Recommended Provisions has in the
seismic requirements in the ASCE-7 Standard Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
as well as both the International Building Code and NFPA 5000 Code. FEMA welcomes this increased
scrutiny and the chance to work with these code organizations.
Looking ahead, FEMA is contracting with BSSC for the update process that will lead to the 2008 edition
of the NEHRP Recommended Provisions. As is evidenced by the proposed date, this next update cycle
will be expanded to a five-year effort to conclude in time to input into the next update of the ASCE-7
standard. This update will include referencing of the ASCE-7 standard to avoid duplication of effort and
a significant update and revision to the Commentary along with the normal update of current material and
the inclusion of new, state-of-the-art seismic design research results.
Finally, FEMA wishes to express its deepest gratitude for the significant efforts of the over 200 volunteer
experts as well as the BSSC Board of Directors and staff who made possible the 2003 NEHRP Provisions
documents. It is truly their efforts that make these publications a reality. Americans unfortunate enough
to experience the earthquakes that will inevitably occur in this country will owe much, perhaps even their
very lives, to the contributions and dedication of these individuals to the seismic safety of new buildings.
Without the dedication and hard work of these men and women, this document and all it represents with
respect to earthquake risk mitigation would not have been possible.
Department of Homeland Security/
Federal Emergency Management Agency
iii
INTRODUCTION and ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

Since its creation in 1978, the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) has provided a
framework for efforts to reduce the risk from earthquakes. The Building Seismic Safety Council (BSSC)
is extremely proud to have been selected by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), the
lead NEHRP agency, to play a role under NEHRP in improving the seismic resistance of the built
environment. Further, the BSSC is pleased to mark the occasion of its twenty-fifth anniversary with
delivery to FEMA of the consensus-approved 2003 NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic
Regulations for New Buildings and other Structures, the seventh edition of this landmark publication.
The Provisions and its accompanying Commentary have developed over the past quarter century into
widely available, trusted, state-of-the-art seismic design resource documents with requirements that have
been adapted for use in nations model building codes and standards.
Work on the 2003 Provisions began in September 2001 when NIBS entered into a contract with FEMA
for initiation of the BSSC 2003 Provisions update effort. In mid-2001, the BSSC member organization
representatives and alternate representatives and the BSSC Board of Direction were asked to identify
individuals to serve on the 2003 Provisions Update Committee (PUC) and its Technical Subcommittees
(TSs).
The 2003 PUC and its 13 Technical Subcommittees (TS) were then established and addressed the
following topics during the update effort: design criteria and analysis, foundations and geotechnical
considerations, cast-in-place/precast concrete structures, masonry structures, steel structures, wood
structures, mechanical-electrical systems and building equipment and architectural elements, quality
assurance, low rise and residential structures, composite steel and concrete structures, energy dissipation
and base isolation, and nonbuilding structures.
Early in the update effort, a series of editorial/organizational changes were made to the 2000 version of
the Provisions to improve the documents usability and eliminate inconsistencies and duplications that
had crept in over the years; this edited document was submitted to the BSSC membership for ballot in
October 2001 and was then adopted as the document to which further update changes would be proposed.
All draft TS and PUC proposals for change were finalized in June 2003 and approved by the BSSC Board
of Direction for balloting by the BSSC member organizations. Because of time limitations, there would
be no second ballot; therefore, the BSSC Board authorized the PUC to resolve, to the extent possible,
comments submitted by the membership and to defer for reconsideration during the next update cycle any
comments that could not be resolved in the limited time available.
Of the 138 proposals submitted to the members for ballot, 137 received the required two-thirds
affirmative vote. Of those, 3 were withdrawn for reconsideration during the next update cycle and 83
required some revision in response to comments. A summary of the results of the ballot and comment
resolution process are available from the BSSC upon request and will be posted on the BSSC website
(www.bssconline.org).
As in the past, the 2003 Provisions would not now be available without the expertise, dedication, and
countless hours of effort of the more than 200 dedicated volunteers who participated in the update
process. The American people benefit immeasurably from their commitment to improving the seismic-
iv
resistance of the nations buildings. These seismic design professionals are identified in Appendix B of
the Provisions volume with list of BSSC Board members and member organizations.
I would like to acknowledge a few individuals and groups who deserve special thanks for their
contributions to this effort. As Chairman of the BSSC Board of Direction, it is my pleasure to express
heartfelt appreciation to the members of the BSSC Provisions Update Committee, especially Chairman
Ronald Hamburger, and to Michael Mahoney, the FEMA Project Officer. Special thanks also are due to
the BSSC staff who work untiringly behind the scenes to support all the groups mentioned above and
who bring the finished product forward for acceptance. Finally, I wish to thank the members of the BSSC
Board of Direction who recognize the importance of this effort and provided sage advice throughout the
update cycle. We are all proud of the 2003 NEHRP Recommended Provisions and it is my pleasure to
introduce them.
Charles Thornton
Chairman, BSSC Board of Direction 2001-2003
vi
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS................................................................................. 1
1.1 GENERAL................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 Purpose.......................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 Scope and application ................................................................................... 1
1.1.3 References..................................................................................................... 2
1.1.4 Definitions .................................................................................................... 3
1.1.5 Notation ........................................................................................................ 3
1.2 SEISMIC USE GROUPS .......................................................................................... 4
1.2.1 Seismic Use Group III .................................................................................. 4
1.2.2 Seismic Use Group II.................................................................................... 4
1.2.3 Seismic Use Group I ..................................................................................... 4
1.2.4 Multiple use .................................................................................................. 4
1.2.5 Seismic Use Group III structure access protection ....................................... 5
1.3 OCCUPANCY IMPORTANCE FACTOR ............................................................... 5
1.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY ............................................................................. 5
1.4.1 Determination of Seismic Design Category.................................................. 5
1.4.2 Site limitation for Seismic Design Categories E and F................................. 6
1.5 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY A ......................................................................... 6
1.5.1 Lateral forces ............................................................................................... 6
1.5.2 Connections .................................................................................................. 7
1.5.3 Anchorage of concrete or masonry walls...................................................... 7
1.5.4 Tanks assigned to Seismic Use Group III..................................................... 7
Chapter 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................. 9
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 9
2.1.1 Scope............................................................................................................. 9
2.1.2 References..................................................................................................... 9
2.1.3 Definitions .................................................................................................... 9
2.1.4 Notation ...................................................................................................... 11
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................... 11
2.2.1 Details of quality assurance plan ................................................................ 11
2.2.2 Contractor responsibility............................................................................. 12
2.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION......................................................................................... 12
2.3.1 Piers, piles, and caissons............................................................................. 12
2.3.2 Reinforcing steel ......................................................................................... 12
2.3.3 Structural concrete ...................................................................................... 12
2.3.4 Prestressed concrete .................................................................................... 12
2.3.5 Structural masonry ...................................................................................... 12
2.3.6 Structural steel ............................................................................................ 12
2.3.7 Structural wood........................................................................................... 13
2.3.8 Cold-formed steel ....................................................................................... 13
2.3.9 Architectural components ........................................................................... 13
2.3.10 Mechanical and electrical components ..................................................... 13
2.3.11 Seismic isolation systems ......................................................................... 14
2.4 TESTING ................................................................................................................ 14
2.4.1 Reinforcing and prestressing steel .............................................................. 14
vii
2.4.2 Structural concrete ...................................................................................... 14

2.4.3 Structural masonry ...................................................................................... 14
2.4.4 Structural steel ............................................................................................ 14
2.4.5 Mechanical and electrical equipment.......................................................... 14
2.4.6 Seismically isolated structures .................................................................... 14
2.5 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS........................................................................ 15
2.6 REPORTING AND COMPLIANCE PROCEDURES ........................................... 15
Chapter 3 GROUND MOTION........................................................................................ 17
3.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................... 17
3.1.1 Scope........................................................................................................... 17
3.1.2 References................................................................................................... 17
3.1.3 Definitions .................................................................................................. 17
3.1.4 Notation ...................................................................................................... 17
3.2.1 Site class ..................................................................................................... 19
3.2.2 Procedure selection ..................................................................................... 19
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURE ...................................................................................... 19
3.3.1 Mapped acceleration parameters................................................................. 19
3.3.2 Site coefficients and adjusted acceleration parameters............................... 19
3.3.3 Design acceleration parameters .................................................................. 38
3.3.4 Design response spectrum........................................................................... 38
3.4 SITE SPECIFIC PROCEDURE .............................................................................. 46
3.4.1 Probabilistic maximum considered earthquake .......................................... 46
3.4.2 Deterministic maximum considered earthquake......................................... 46
3.4.3 Site-specific maximum considered earthquake .......................................... 46
3.4.4 Design response spectrum........................................................................... 47
3.5 SITE CLASSIFICATION FOR SEISMIC DESIGN .............................................. 47
3.5.1 Site class definitions ................................................................................... 47
3.5.2 Steps for classifying a site........................................................................... 49
Chapter 4 STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA............................................................. 51
4.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................... 51
4.1.1 Scope........................................................................................................... 51
4.1.2 References .................................................................................................. 51
4.1.3 Definitions .................................................................................................. 51
4.1.4 Notation ...................................................................................................... 53
4.2.1 Design basis ............................................................................................... 54
4.2.2 Combination of load effects........................................................................ 54
4.3 SEISMIC-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM............................................................. 55
4.3.1 Selection and limitations............................................................................. 55
4.3.2 Configuration .............................................................................................. 62
4.3.3 Redundancy ................................................................................................ 65
4.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS .................................................................................. 66
4.4.1 Procedure selection ..................................................................................... 66
4.4.2 Application of loading ................................................................................ 67
4.5 DEFORMATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 68
4.5.1 Deflection and drift limits .......................................................................... 68
4.5.2 Seismic Design Categories B and C ........................................................... 68
4.5.3 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F ...................................................... 68
viii
4.6 DESIGN AND DETAILING REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 69

4.6.1 Seismic design Category B ......................................................................... 69
4.6.2 Seismic design Category C ......................................................................... 70
4.6.3 Seismic Design Category D, E, and F......................................................... 71
ALTERNATIVE SIMPLIFIED CHAPTER 4.................................................................. 73
Chapter 5 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS PROCEDURES ................................................ 83
5.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................... 83
5.1.1 Scope........................................................................................................... 83
5.1.2 Definitions .................................................................................................. 83
5.1.3 Notation ...................................................................................................... 84
5.2 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE .............................................. 86
5.2.1 Seismic base shear ...................................................................................... 86
5.2.2 Period determination.................................................................................. 88
5.2.3 Vertical distribution of seismic forces ........................................................ 89
5.2.4 Horizontal shear distribution....................................................................... 90
5.2.5 Overturning ................................................................................................. 91
5.2.6 Drift determination and P-delta effects....................................................... 91
5.3 RESPONSE SPECTRUM PROCEDURE............................................................... 92
5.3.1 Modeling ..................................................................................................... 92
5.3.2 Modes.......................................................................................................... 92
5.3.3 Modal properties ......................................................................................... 92
5.3.4 Modal base shear......................................................................................... 92
5.3.5 Modal forces, deflections and drifts............................................................ 94
5.3.6 Modal story shears and moments................................................................ 94
5.3.7 Design values .............................................................................................. 94
5.3.8 Horizontal shear distribution....................................................................... 95
5.3.9 Foundation overturning............................................................................... 95
5.3.10 P-delta effects............................................................................................ 95
5.4 LINEAR RESPONSE HISTORY PROCEDURE................................................... 95
5.4.1 Modeling ..................................................................................................... 95
5.4.2 Ground motion ............................................................................................ 95
5.4.3 Response parameters................................................................................... 96
5.5 NONLINEAR RESPONSE HISTORY PROCEDURE .......................................... 96
5.5.1 Modeling ..................................................................................................... 96
5.5.2 Ground motion and other loading ............................................................... 97
5.5.3 Response parameters................................................................................... 97
5.5.4 Design review ............................................................................................. 97
5.6 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERATION EFFECTS .................................................... 98
5.6.1 General........................................................................................................ 98
5.6.2 Equivalent lateral force procedure ............................................................. 98
5.6.3 Response spectrum procedure................................................................... 102
APPENDIX to Chapter 5, NONLINEAR STATIC PROCEDURE ............................... 105
Chapter 6, ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL
COMPONENT DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 111
6.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 111
6.1.1 Scope......................................................................................................... 111
6.1.2 References ................................................................................................ 111
ix
6.1.3 Definitions ................................................................................................ 113

6.1.4 Notation .................................................................................................... 114
6.2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 115
6.2.1 Seismic Design Category .......................................................................... 115
6.2.2 Component importance factor................................................................... 115
6.2.3 Consequential damage .............................................................................. 116
6.2.4 Flexibility.................................................................................................. 116
6.2.5 Component force transfer ......................................................................... 116
6.2.6 Seismic forces ........................................................................................... 116
6.2.7 Seismic relative displacements ................................................................. 117
6.2.8 Component anchorage .............................................................................. 117
6.2.9 Construction documents............................................................................ 118
6.3 ARCHITECTURAL COMPONENTS .................................................................. 118
6.3.1 Forces and displacements ......................................................................... 119
6.3.2 Exterior nonstructural wall elements and connections.............................. 119
6.3.3 Out-of-plane bending ................................................................................ 120
6.3.4 Suspended ceilings.................................................................................... 120
6.3.5 Access floors............................................................................................. 121
6.3.6 Partitions ................................................................................................... 121
6.3.7 General...................................................................................................... 122
6.3.8 Seismic drift limits for glass components ................................................. 122
6.4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS...................................... 122
6.4.1 Component period..................................................................................... 124
6.4.2 Mechanical components............................................................................ 124
6.4.3 Electrical components............................................................................... 124
6.4.4 Supports and attachments ......................................................................... 125
6.4.5 Utility and service lines ............................................................................ 126
6.4.6 HVAC ductwork ....................................................................................... 126
6.4.7 Piping systems .......................................................................................... 126
6.4.8 Boilers and pressure vessels...................................................................... 127
6.4.9 Elevators ................................................................................................... 127
Appendix to Chapter 6, ALTERNATIVE PROVISIONS FOR THE DESIGN
OF PIPING SYSTEMS.................................................................................................. 129
Chapter 7 FOUNDATION DEIGN REQUIREMENTS................................................. 133
7.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 133
7.1.1 Scope......................................................................................................... 133
7.1.2 References................................................................................................. 133
7.1.3 Definitions ................................................................................................ 133
7.1.4 Notation .................................................................................................... 133
7.2.1 Foundation components ............................................................................ 134
7.2.2 Soil capacities .......................................................................................... 134
7.2.3 Foundation load-deformation characteristics............................................ 134
7.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY B...................................................................... 134
7.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY C...................................................................... 134
7.4.1 Investigation.............................................................................................. 134
7.4.2 Pole-type structures................................................................................... 135
7.4.3 Foundation ties.......................................................................................... 135
7.4.4 Special pile requirements .......................................................................... 135
7.5 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES D, E, AND F ................................................ 136

7.5.1 Investigation ............................................................................................. 136
7.5.2 Liquefaction potential and soil strength loss............................................. 136
7.5.3 Foundation ties ......................................................................................... 137
7.5.4 Special pile and grade beam requirements................................................ 137
Appendix to Chapter 7, GEOTECHNICAL ULTIMATE STRENGTH DESIGN
OF FOUNDATIONS AND FOUNDATION LOAD-DEFORMATION
MODELING .............................................................................................................. 141
Chapter 8 STEEL STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................... 145
8.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 145
8.1.1 Scope......................................................................................................... 145
8.1.2 References................................................................................................. 145
8.1.3 Definitions ................................................................................................ 145
8.1.4 Notation .................................................................................................... 146
8.2.1 Seismic Design Categories B and C ......................................................... 146
8.2.2 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F .................................................... 146
8.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL ........................................................................................ 146
8.3.1 Material properties for determination of required strength....................... 146
8.4 COLD-FORM STEEL........................................................................................... 147
8.4.1 Modifications to references....................................................................... 147
8.4.2 Light-frame walls...................................................................................... 147
8.4.3 Prescriptive framing ................................................................................. 148
8.4.4 Steel deck diaphragms .............................................................................. 148
8.5 STEEL CABLES ................................................................................................... 148
8.6 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR BUCKLING-RESTRAINED
BRACED FRAMES .......................................................................................... 148
8.6.1 Symbols .................................................................................................... 148
8.6.2 Glossary .................................................................................................... 149
8.6.3 Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF) ............................................. 149
8.7 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR SPECIAL STEEL PLATE
WALLS ............................................................................................................. 155
8.7.1 Symbols .................................................................................................... 155
8.7.2 Glossary .................................................................................................... 156
8.7.3 Scope......................................................................................................... 156
8.7.4 Webs ......................................................................................................... 156
8.7.5 Connections of webs to boundary elements.............................................. 157
8.7.6 Horizontal and vertical boundary elements (HBE and VBE) ................... 157
Chapter 9 CONCRETE STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................... 159
9.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................. 159
9.1.1 Scope......................................................................................................... 159
9.1.2 References................................................................................................. 159
9.1.3 General definitions.................................................................................... 159
9.2.1 Classification of shear walls ..................................................................... 160
9.2.2 Modifications to ACI 318 ......................................................................... 161
9.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY B...................................................................... 164
9.3.1 Ordinary moment frames .......................................................................... 164
xi
9.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY C...................................................................... 164

9.4.1 Classification of shear walls ..................................................................... 164
9.4.2 Plain concrete............................................................................................ 164
9.5 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES D, E, AND F ................................................ 165
9.6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR SPECIAL PRECAST STRUCTURAL
WALLS BASED ON VALIDATION TESTING ................................................. 165
9.6.1 Notation .................................................................................................... 165
9.6.2 Definitions ................................................................................................ 165
9.6.3 Scope and general requirements ............................................................... 166
9.6.4 Design procedure ...................................................................................... 166
9.6.5 Test modules ............................................................................................. 167
9.6.6 Testing agency .......................................................................................... 167
9.6.7 Test method............................................................................................... 167
9.6.8 Test report ................................................................................................. 168
9.6.9 Test module acceptance criteria................................................................ 169
9.6.10 Reference ................................................................................................ 169
Appendix to Chapter 9, UNTOPPED PRECAST DIPHRAGMS .................................. 171
Chapter 10, COMPOSITE STEEL AND CONCRETE STRUCTURE DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................... 175
10.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 175
10.1.1 Scope....................................................................................................... 175
10.1.2 References............................................................................................... 175
10.1.3 Definitions .............................................................................................. 175
10.1.4 Notation .................................................................................................. 175
10.2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 175
10.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES B AND C .................................................. 175
10.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES D, E, AND F .............................................. 175
10.5 MODIFICATIONS TO AISC SEISMIC, PART II............................................. 175
10.5.1 Changes to nomenclature ........................................................................ 175
10.5.2 Changes to definitions in the AISC Glossary ......................................... 176
10.5.3 Changes to section 1-Scope .................................................................... 176
10.5.4 Changes to Section 2 Referenced Specifications, Codes and
Standards............................................................................................... 176
10.5.5 Changes to Section 3 Seismic Design Categories................................ 176
10.5.6 Changes to Section 4 Loads, Load Combinations and Nominal
Strengths ............................................................................................... 176
10.5.7 Changes to Section 5.2 Concrete and steel reinforcement................... 176
10.5.8 Changes to Section 6.3 Composite Beams........................................... 176
10.5.9 Changes to Section 6.4 Reinforced-Concrete-Encased
Composite Columns............................................................................. 176
10.5.10 Changes to Section 6.4a Ordinary Seismic System
Requirements ....................................................................................... 177
10.5.11 Changes to Section 6.5 Concrete-Filled Composite Columns ........... 177
10.5.12 Changes to Section 6.5a Concrete-Filled Composite Columns ......... 177
10.5.13 Changes to Section 7.3 Nominal Strength of Connections ................ 178
10.5.14 Changes to Section 8.2 Columns ....................................................... 179
10.5.15 Changes to Section 8.3 Composite Beams ........................................ 179
10.5.16 Changes to Section 8.4 Partially Restrained (PR) Moment
Connections .......................................................................................... 179
xii
10.5.17 Changes to Section 9.3 Beams........................................................... 179

10.5.18 Changes to Section 9.4 Moment Connections ................................... 179
10.5.19 Changes to Section 9.5 Column-Beam Moment Ratio ..................... 180
10.5.20 Changes to Section 10.2 Columns ..................................................... 180
10.5.21 Changes to Section 10.4 Moment Connections ................................. 180
10.5.22 Changes to Section 11.4 Moment Connections ................................ 180
10.5.23 Changes to Section 12.4 Braces......................................................... 180
10.5.24 Changes Title for Section 15.3.............................................................. 181
10.5.25 Changes Title for Section 16.3 ............................................................. 181
10.5.26 Add New Section 15.4 .......................................................................... 181
10.5.27 Add New Section 16.4 ......................................................................... 181
Chapter 11 MASONRY STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .......................... 183
11.1 GENERAL........................................................................................................... 183
11.1.1 Scope....................................................................................................... 183
11.1.2 References .............................................................................................. 183
11.2.1 Classification of shear walls ................................................................... 183
11.2.2 Modifications to ACI 530/ADCE 5/TMS 402 and
ACI 530.1/ASCE 5/TMS 602 ............................................................... 184
11.3 SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES OF MASONRY .............................................. 187
11.3.1 Calculation of required strength.............................................................. 187
11.3.2 Flexural yielding ..................................................................................... 187
11.3.3 Materials ................................................................................................. 187
11.3.4 Reinforcement......................................................................................... 187
11.3.5 Beams...................................................................................................... 188
11.3.6 Columns .................................................................................................. 188
11.3.7 Beam-column intersections..................................................................... 189
11.4 GLASS-UNIT MASONRY AND MASONRY VENEER.................................. 192
11.4.1 Design lateral forces and displacements ................................................. 191
11.4.2 Glass-unit masonry design ..................................................................... 191
11.4.3 Masonry veneer design .......................................................................... 191
11.5 PRESTRESSED MASONRY ............................................................................. 191
11.5.1 .............................................................................................................. 191
Chapter 12 WOOD STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.................................. 193
12.1 GENERAL........................................................................................................... 193
12.1.1 Scope....................................................................................................... 193
12.1.2 References............................................................................................... 193
12.1.3 Definitions .............................................................................................. 194
12.1.4 Notation .................................................................................................. 195
12.2 DESIGN METHODS .......................................................................................... 195
12.2.1 Seismic Design Categories B, C, and D.................................................. 195
12.2.2 Seismic Design Categories E and F ........................................................ 195
12.2.3 Modifications to AF&PA SDPWS for Seismic Design
Categories B, C, and D ......................................................................... 195
Categories E, and F............................................................................... 198
12.3 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ENGINEERED WOOD
CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................. 203
12.3.1 Framing ................................................................................................... 203
xiii
12.4 CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION .................................. 203

12.4.1 Limitations .............................................................................................. 203
12.4.2 Braced walls............................................................................................ 209
12.4.3 Detailing requirements............................................................................ 211
Chapter 13 SEISMICALLY ISOLATED STRUCTURE DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................................... 215
13.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 215
13.1.1 Scope....................................................................................................... 215
13.1.2 Definitions .............................................................................................. 215
13.1.3 Notation ................................................................................................. 216
13.2.1 Occupancy importance factor ................................................................. 218
13.2.2 Configuration ......................................................................................... 218
13.2.3 Ground motion ........................................................................................ 218
13.2.4 Procedure selection ................................................................................. 219
13.2.5 Isolation system ...................................................................................... 220
13.2.6 Structural system..................................................................................... 221
13.2.7 Elements of structures and nonstructural components............................ 221
13.3 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE .......................................... 222
13.3.1 Deformational characteristics of the isolation system ............................ 222
13.3.2 Minimum lateral displacements .............................................................. 222
13.3.3 Minimum distribution of forces .............................................................. 224
13.3.4 Vertical distribution of forces ................................................................ 225
13.3.5 Drift limits............................................................................................... 225
13.4 DYNAMIC PROCEDURES ............................................................................... 225
13.4.1 Modeling ................................................................................................. 225
13.4.2 Description of procedures ....................................................................... 226
13.4.3 Minimum lateral displacements and forces ............................................ 227
13.4.4Drift limits................................................................................................ 228
13.5 DESIGN REVIEW .............................................................................................. 228
13.6 TESTING............................................................................................................. 228
13.6.1 Prototype tests......................................................................................... 228
13.6.2 Determination of force-deflection characteristics................................. 230
13.6.3 Test specimen adequacy ......................................................................... 230
13.6.4 Design properties of the isolation system ............................................. 230
Chapter 14 NONBUILDING STRURCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS................ 233
14.1 GENERAL........................................................................................................... 233
14.1.1 Scope....................................................................................................... 233
14.1.2 References............................................................................................... 233
14.1.3 Definitions .............................................................................................. 234
14.1.4 Notation ................................................................................................. 235
14.1.5 Nonbuilding structures supported by other structures ............................ 237
14.2.1 Seismic Use Groups and importance factors .......................................... 237
14.2.2 Ground motion ....................................................................................... 238
14.2.3 Design basis ............................................................................................ 238
14.2.4 Seismic-force-resisting system selection and limitations ....................... 238
14.2.5 Structural analysis procedure selection .................................................. 241
14.2.6 Seismic weight ........................................................................................ 241
xiv
14.2.7 Rigid nonbuilding structures................................................................... 241

14.2.8 Minimum base shear .............................................................................. 241
14.2.9 Fundamental period ................................................................................ 241
14.2.10 Vertical distribution of seismic forces ................................................. 242
14.2.11 Deformation requirements ................................................................... 242
14.2.12 Nonbuilding structure classification .................................................... 242
14.3 NONBUILDING STRUCTUTRES SIMILAR TO BUILDINGS .................... 242
14.3.1 Electrical power generating facilities...................................................... 242
14.3.2 Structural towers for tanks and vessels ................................................... 242
14.3.3 Piers and wharves ................................................................................... 243
14.3.4 Pipe racks ................................................................................................ 243
14.3.5 Steel storage tanks................................................................................... 243
14.4 NONBUILDING STRUCTURES NOT SIMILAR TO BUILDINGS................ 244
14.4.1 General.................................................................................................... 244
14.4.2 Earth retaining structures ........................................................................ 244
14.4.3 Stacks and chimneys ............................................................................... 244
14.4.4 Amusement structures............................................................................. 244
14.4.5 Special hydraulic structures ................................................................... 245
14.4.6 Secondary containment systems ............................................................ 245
14.4.7 Tanks and vessels.................................................................................... 245
Appendix to Chapter 14 OTHER NONBUILDING STRUCTURES ............................ 261
Chapter 15 STRUCTURES WITH DAMPING SYSTEMS .......................................... 263
15.1 GENERAL........................................................................................................... 263
15.1.1 Scope....................................................................................................... 263
15.1.2 Definitions .............................................................................................. 263
15.1.3 Notation .................................................................................................. 264
15.2.1 Seismic Design Category A .................................................................... 267
15.2.2 System requirements............................................................................... 268
15.2.3 Ground motion ........................................................................................ 278
15.2.4 Procedure selection ................................................................................ 269
15.2.5 Damping system...................................................................................... 269
15.3 NONLINEAR PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 270
15.3.1 Nonlinear response history procedure..................................................... 270
15.3 2 Nonlinear static procedure ...................................................................... 271
15.4 RESPONSE SPECTRUM PROCEDURE........................................................... 271
15.4.1 Modeling ................................................................................................. 271
15.4.2 Seismic-force-resisting system ............................................................... 271
15.4.3 Damping system ..................................................................................... 273
15.5 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE .......................................... 274
15.5.1 Modeling ................................................................................................. 274
15.5.3 Damping system ..................................................................................... 277
15.6 DAMPED RESPONSE MODIFICATION ........................................................ 279
15.6.1 Damping coefficient ............................................................................... 279
15.6.2 Effective damping................................................................................... 279
15.6.3 Effective ductility demand ...................................................................... 281
15.6.4 Maximum effective ductility demand ..................................................... 282
15.7 SEIMIC LOAD CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA .................. 282
xv
15.7.1 Nonlinear procedures .............................................................................. 282

15.7.3 Damping system...................................................................................... 283
15.8 DESIGN REVIEW .............................................................................................. 286
15.9 TESTING............................................................................................................. 286
15.9.1 Prototype tests......................................................................................... 286
15.9.2 Production testing ................................................................................... 288
Appendix A DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE 2000 AND THE 2003 EDITIONS
OF THE NEHRP RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS ......................................... 289
Appendix B PARTICIPANTS IN THE BSSC 2003 PROVISIONS UPDATE
PROGRAM....................................................................................................... 309
xvi
Chapter 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Purpose. The NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and
Other Structures (referred to hereinafter as the Provisions) present criteria for the design and
construction of structures to resist earthquake ground motions. The purposes of these Provisions are as
follows:
1. To provide minimum design criteria for structures appropriate to their primary function and use
considering the need to protect the health, safety, and welfare of the general public by minimizing
the earthquake-related risk to life and
2. To improve the capability of essential facilities and structures containing substantial quantities of
hazardous materials to function during and after design earthquakes.
The design earthquake ground motion levels specified herein could result in both structural and
nonstructural damage. For most structures designed and constructed according to these Provisions,
structural damage from the design earthquake ground motion would be repairable although perhaps not
economically so. For essential facilities, it is expected that the damage from the design earthquake
ground motion would not be so severe as to preclude continued occupancy and function of the facility.
The actual ability to accomplish these goals depends upon a number of factors including the structural
framing type, configuration, materials, and as-built details of construction. For ground motions larger
than the design levels, the intent of these Provisions is that there be a low likelihood of structural
collapse.
1.1.2 Scope and application
1.1.2.1 Scope. These Provisions shall apply to the design and construction of structuresincluding
additions, changes of use, and alterationsto resist the effects of earthquake motions. Every structure,
and portion thereof, shall be designed and constructed to resist the effects of earthquake motions as
prescribed by these Provisions.
Exceptions:
1. Detached one- and two-family dwellings in Seismic Design Category A, B, or C (as defined in
Sec. 1.4) are exempt from all requirements of these Provisions.
2. Detached one- and two-family wood-frame dwellings that are designed and constructed in
accordance with the conventional light-frame construction requirements in Sec. 12.5 are
exempt from all other requirements of these Provisions.
3. Agricultural storage structures intended only for incidental human occupancy are exempt
from all requirements of these Provisions.
4. Structures located within those regions of Figures 3.3-1through 3.3-14 of these Provisions
having SS less than or equal to 0.15 and S1 less than or equal to 0.04 and structures assigned
to Seismic Design Category A shall only be required to comply with Sec. 1.5 of these
Provisions.
1.1.2.2 Additions. Additions shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following:
1.1.2.2.1. An addition that is structurally independent from an existing structure shall be designed and
constructed as required for a new structure in accordance with Sec. 1.1.2.1.
2003 Provisions, Chapter 1
1.1.2.2.2. An addition that is not structurally independent from an existing structure shall be designed
and constructed such that the entire structure complies with the seismic-force-resistance requirements
for new structures unless all of the following conditions are satisfied:
1. The addition complies with the requirements for new structures, and
2. The addition does not increase the seismic forces in any structural element of the existing structure
by more than 5 percent, unless the capacity of the element subject to the increased forces is still in
compliance with these Provisions, and
3. The addition does not decrease the seismic resistance of any structural element of the existing
structure to less than that required for a new structure.
1.1.2.3 Change of use. Where a change of use results in a structure being reclassified to a higher
Seismic Use Group, the structure shall comply with the requirements of Section 1.1.2.1 for a new
structure.
Exception: Where a change of use results in a structure being reclassified from Seismic Use
Group I to Seismic Use Group II, compliance with these Provisions is not required if the
structure is located where SDS is less than 0.3.
1.1.2.4 Alterations. Alterations are permitted to be made to any structure without requiring the
structure to comply with these Provisions provided the alterations comply with the requirements for a
new structure. Alterations that increase the seismic force in any existing structural element by more
then 5 percent or decrease the design strength of any existing structural element to resist seismic forces
by more than 5 percent shall not be permitted unless the entire seismic-force-resisting system is
determined to comply with these Provisions for a new structure. All alterations shall comply with these
Provisions for a new structure.
Exception: Alterations to existing structural elements or additions of new structural elements
that are not required by these Provisions and are initiated for the purpose of increasing the
strength or stiffness of the seismic-force-resisting system of an existing structure need not be
designed for forces in accordance with these Provisions provided that an engineering analysis is
submitted indicating the following:
1. The design strengths of existing structural elements required to resist seismic forces is not
reduced,
2. The seismic force to required existing structural elements is not increased beyond their
design strength,
3. New structural elements are detailed and connected to the existing structural elements as
required by these Provisions, and
4. New or relocated nonstructural elements are detailed and connected to existing or new
structural elements as required by these Provisions.
1.1.2.5 Alternate materials and alternate means and methods of construction. Alternate materials
and alternate means and methods of construction to those prescribed in these Provisions are permitted if
approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Substantiating evidence shall be submitted demonstrating
that the proposed alternate, for the purpose intended, will be at least equal in strength, durability, and
seismic resistance.
1.1.3 References. The following reference document shall be used for loads other than earthquakes
and for combinations of loads as indicated in this chapter:
ASCE 7
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, American Society of
Civil Engineers, 1998.
General Provisions
1.1.4 Definitions
Addition: An increase in the building area, aggregate floor area, height, or number of stories of a
structure.
Alteration: Any construction or renovation to an existing structure other than an addition.
Component: A part or element of an architectural, electrical, mechanical, or structural system.
Dead load: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Design earthquake ground motion: The earthquake effects that structures are specifically
proportioned to resist as defined in Chapter 3.
Essential facility: A facility or structure required for post-earthquake recovery.
Hazardous material: A material that is highly toxic or potentially explosive and in sufficient quantity
to pose a significant life-safety threat to the general public if an uncontrolled release were to occur.
Live load: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Occupancy importance factor: A factor assigned to each structure according to its Seismic Use Group
as prescribed in Sec. 1.3.
Owner: Any person, agent, firm, or corporation having a legal or equitable interest in the property.
Seismic Design Category: A classification assigned to a structure based on its Seismic Use Group and
the severity of the design earthquake ground motion at the site.
Seismic-force-resisting system: That part of the structural system that has been considered in the
design to provide the required resistance to the shear prescribed herein.
Seismic forces: The assumed forces prescribed herein, related to the response of the structure to
earthquake motions, to be used in the design of the structure and its components.
Seismic Use Group: A classification assigned to the structure based on its use as defined in Sec. 1.2.
Structure: That which is built or constructed.
1.1.5 Notation
Fx
The design lateral force applied at level x.
I
The occupancy importance factor as defined in Sec. 1.3.
S1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SD1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
The seismic weight, including the total dead load and applicable portions of other loads as
required by these Provisions.
wx
The portion of the seismic weight, W, located or assigned to Level x.
Level x The level under consideration; x = 1 designates the first level above the base.
1.2 SEISMIC USE GROUPS

All structures shall be assigned to one of the following Seismic Use Groups:
1.2.1 Seismic Use Group III. Seismic Use Group III structures are those having essential facilities that
are required for post-earthquake recovery and those containing substantial quantities of hazardous
substances including:
1. Fire, rescue, and police stations
2. Hospitals
3. Designated medical facilities having emergency treatment facilities
4. Designated emergency preparedness centers
5. Designated emergency operation centers
6. Designated emergency shelters
7. Power generating stations or other utilities required as emergency back-up facilities for Seismic Use
Group III facilities
8. Emergency vehicle garages and emergency aircraft hangars
9. Designated communication centers
10. Aviation control towers and air traffic control centers
11. Structures containing sufficient quantities of toxic or explosive substances deemed to be hazardous
to the public
12. Water treatment facilities required to maintain water pressure for fire suppression.
1.2.2 Seismic Use Group II. Seismic Use Group II structures are those that have a substantial public
hazard due to occupancy or use including:
1. Covered structures whose primary occupancy is public assembly with a capacity greater than 300
persons
2. Educational structures through the 12th grade with a capacity greater than 250 persons
3. Day care centers with a capacity greater than 150 persons
4. Medical facilities with greater than 50 resident incapacitated patients not otherwise designated a
Seismic Use Group III structure
5. Jails and detention facilities
6. All structures with a capacity greater than 5,000 persons
7. Power generating stations and other public utility facilities not included in Seismic Use Group III
and required for continued operation
8. Water treatment facilities required for primary treatment and disinfection for potable water
9. Waste water treatment facilities required for primary treatment.
1.2.3 Seismic Use Group I. Seismic Use Group I structures are those not assigned to Seismic Use
Groups III or II.
1.2.4 Multiple use. Structures having multiple uses shall be assigned the classification of the use
having the highest Seismic Use Group except that in structures having two or more portions which are
structurally separated in accordance with Sec. 4.5.1, each portion shall be separately classified. Where a
structurally separated portion of a structure provides access to, egress from, or shares life safety
General Provisions
components with another portion having a higher Seismic Use Group, the lower portion shall be
assigned the same rating as the higher.
1.2.5 Seismic Use Group III structure access protection. Where operational access to a Seismic Use
Group III structure is required through an adjacent structure, the adjacent structure shall comply with the
requirements for Seismic Use Group III structures. Where operational access is less than 10 ft (3 m)
from an interior lot line or less than 10 ft (3 m) from another structure, access protection from potential
falling debris shall be provided by the owner of the Seismic Use Group III structure.
1.3 OCCUPANCY IMPORTANCE FACTOR

An occupancy importance factor, I, shall be assigned to each structure in accordance with Table 1.3-1.
Table 1.3-1 Occupancy Importance Factors
Seismic Use Group
1.0
II
1.25
III
1.5
1.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY

Each structure shall be assigned to a Seismic Design Category in accordance with Sec. 1.4.1. Seismic
Design Categories are used in these Provisions to determine permissible structural systems, limitations
on height and irregularity, those components of the structure that must be designed for seismic
resistance, and the types of lateral force analysis that must be performed.
1.4.1 Determination of Seismic Design Category. All structures shall be assigned to a Seismic
Design Category based on their Seismic Use Group and the design spectral response acceleration
parameters, SDS and SD1, determined in accordance with Chapter 3 of these Provisions. Each structure
shall be assigned to the more severe Seismic Design Category determined in accordance with Tables
1.4-1 and 1.4-2, irrespective of the fundamental period of vibration of the structure, T. If the alternate
design procedure of Alternative Simplified Chapter 4 is used, the Seismic Design Category shall be
determined from Table 1.4-1 alone, and the value of SDS shall be that determined in Sec Alt. 4.6.1.
Exception: The Seismic Design Category is permitted to be determined from Table 1.4-1 alone
when all of the following apply:
1. In each of the two orthogonal directions, the approximate fundamental period of the structure,
Ta, determined in accordance with Section 5.2.2.1, is less than 0.8Ts, where Ts is determined in
accordance with Section 3.3.4 and
2. In each of the two orthogonal directions, the fundamental period of the structure used to
calculate the story drift is less than Ts and
3. Equation 5.2-2 is used to determine the seismic response coefficient, Cs and
4. The diaphragms are rigid or for diaphragms that are flexible, the distance between vertical
elements of the seismic force-resisting system does not exceed 40 feet.
Table 1.4-1 Seismic Design Category Based on SDS

Seismic Use Group
Value of SDS
I
II
A
A
SDS < 0.167
B
B
0.167 # SDS < 0.33
C
C
0.33 # SDS < 0.50
a
D
Da
0.50 # SDS
a
See footnote to Table 1.4-2.
III
A
C
D
Da
Table 1.4-2 Seismic Design Category Based on SD1

Seismic Use Group
Value of SD1
II
III
SD1 < 0.067
0.067 # SD1 < 0.133
0.133 # SD1 < 0.20
0.20 # SD1
Da
Da
Da
a
Seismic Use Group I and II structures located on sites with S1 greater than or equal to 0.75 shall be
assigned to Seismic Design Category E and Seismic Use Group III structures located on such sites shall
be assigned to Seismic Design Category F.
1.4.2 Site limitation for Seismic Design Categories E and F. A structure assigned to Seismic Design
Category E or F shall not be sited where there is the potential for an active fault to cause rupture of the
ground surface at the structure.
Exception: Detached one- and two-family dwellings of light-frame construction.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY A

Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category A shall satisfy the requirements of this section.
The effects on the structure and its components due to the forces prescribed in this section shall be taken
as E and combined with the effects of other loads in accordance with the load combinations of ASCE 7.
1.5.1 Lateral forces. Each structure shall be analyzed for the effects of static lateral forces applied
independently in each of two orthogonal directions. In each direction, the static lateral forces at all
levels shall be applied simultaneously. The force at each level shall be determined using Eq. 1.5-1 as
follows:
Fx = 0.01wx
where:
Fx =
the design lateral force applied at Level x,
wx =
the portion of the seismic weight, W, located or assigned to Level x, and
(1.5-1)
General Provisions
W =
the seismic weight, including the total dead load and applicable portions of other loads
listed below:
1.
In areas used for storage, a minimum of 25 percent of the floor live load shall be
applicable. Floor live load in public garages and open parking structures is not
applicable.
2.
Where an allowance for partition load is included in the floor load design, the
actual partition weight or a minimum weight of 10 psf (500 Pa/m2) of floor area,
whichever is greater, shall be applicable.
3.
Total operating weight of permanent equipment.
4.
In areas where the design flat roof snow load does not exceed 30 pounds per
square foot, the effective snow load is permitted to be taken as zero. In areas
where the design snow load is greater than 30 pounds per square foot and where
siting and load duration conditions warrant and where approved by the authority
having jurisdiction, the effective snow load is permitted to be reduced to not less
than 20 percent of the design snow load.
1.5.2 Connections. All parts of the structure between separation joints shall be interconnected, and the
connections shall be capable of transmitting the seismic forces induced by the parts being connected.
Any smaller portion of the structure shall be tied to the remainder of the structure with elements having
a strength of not less than 5 percent of the portion=s weight.
A positive connection for resisting a horizontal force acting parallel to the member shall be provided for
each beam, girder, or truss to its support. The connection shall have a minimum strength of 5 percent of
the reaction due to dead load and live load.
1.5.3 Anchorage of concrete or masonry walls. Concrete or masonry walls shall be connected, using
reinforcement or anchors, to the roof and all floors and members that provide lateral support for the wall
or that are supported by the wall. The connection shall be capable of resisting a seismic lateral force
induced by the wall of 100 pounds per lineal foot (1500 N/m ). Walls shall be designed to resist
bending between connections where the spacing exceeds 4 ft (1.2 m).
1.5.4 Tanks assigned to Seismic Use Group III. Tanks assigned to Seismic Use Group III, according
to Table 14.2-2, shall comply with the freeboard requirements of Sec. 14.4.7.5.3. For tanks in Seismic
Design Category A it shall be permitted to take SDS equal to 0.166 and SD1 equal to 0.066 without
determining the site class.
This page intentionally left blank.
Chapter 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope. This chapter provides minimum requirements for quality assurance for seismic-forceresisting systems and designated seismic systems. These requirements supplement the testing and
inspection requirements contained in the reference standards given elsewhere in these Provisions.
2.1.2 References. The following documents shall be used as specified in this chapter.
ACI 318
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, American Concrete Institute,

1999.
ACI 530
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530-99/ASCE 5-99/TMS

402-99), American Concrete Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers/The Masonry
Society, 1999.
ACI 530.1
Specifications for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1-99/ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-99),

American Concrete Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers/The Masonry Society,
1999.
AISC LRFD
Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,
American Institute of Steel Construction, 1993.
AISC Seismic Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Part I, American Institute of Steel
Construction, 1997, including Supplement No. 2 (2000).
ASTM A 435
Standard Specification for Straight Beam Ultrasound Examination of Steel Plates

(A 435-90), American Society for Testing and Materials, 1996.
ASTM A 615
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement (A 615/A 615M-96a), American Society for Testing and Materials, 1996.
ASTM A 898
Standard Specification for Straight Beam Ultrasound Examination for Rolled Steel
Structural Shapes (A 898/A 898M-91), American Society for Testing and Materials,
1996.
2.1.3 Definitions
Approval: The written acceptance by the authority having jurisdiction of documentation that establishes
the qualification of a material, system, component, procedure, or person to fulfill the requirements of
these Provisions for the intended use.
Boundary elements:
In wood construction, members at the boundaries of diaphragms and shear walls to which sheathing
transfers forces. Such elements include chords and drag struts at diaphragm and shear wall
perimeters, interior openings, discontinuities, and re-entrant corners.
In concrete and masonry construction, portions along wall and diaphragm edges strengthened by
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement and/or structural steel members.
Component: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Construction documents: The written, graphic, electronic, and pictorial documents describing the
design, locations, and physical characteristics of the project required to verify compliance with these
Provisions.

Continuous special inspection: A full-time observation of the work by an approved special inspector
who is present in the area where work is being performed.
Designated seismic system: Those architectural, mechanical, and electrical systems and their
components that require design in accordance with Sec. 6.1 and that have a component importance
factor, Ip, greater than 1.
Design strength: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Diaphragm: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Drag strut: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Glazed curtain wall: See Sec. 6.1.3.
Glazed storefront: See Sec. 6.1.3.
Intermediate moment frame: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Isolation system: See Sec. 13.1.2.
Isolator unit: See Sec. 13.1.2.
Moment frame: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Partition: See Sec. 5.1.2.
Periodic special inspection: The part-time or intermittent observation of the work by an approved
special inspector who is present in the area where work has been or is being performed.
Quality Assurance: The systematic program of special inspections, structural observations, testing and
reporting which provides the independent documentation that the project is constructed in accordance with
the construction documents.
Quality Assurance Plan: A detailed, written procedural document, prepared by one or more registered
design professionals, that establishes the systems and components subject to special inspection and
testing.
Quality Control: The operational procedures provided by contractors to ensure compliance with the
construction documents and regulatory requirements.
Registered design professional: An architect or engineer, registered or licensed to practice professional
architecture or engineering, as defined by statuary requirements of the professional registrations laws of
the state in which the project is to be constructed.
Seismic Design Category: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Seismic-force-resisting system: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Seismic Use Group: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Shear panel: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Shear wall: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Special inspection: The observation of the work by the special inspector to determine compliance with
the approved construction documents and these Provisions.
Special inspector: A person or persons approved by the authority having jurisdiction as being qualified
to perform special inspection required by the approved quality assurance plan. The quality assurance
personnel of a fabricator are permitted to be approved by the authority having jurisdiction as a special
inspector.
Special moment frame: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Story: See Sec. 4.1.3.
10
Quality Assurance
Structural observations: The visual observations performed by the registered design professional in
responsible charge (or another registered design professional) to determine that the seismic-forceresisting system is constructed in general conformance with the construction documents.
Structure: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Testing agency: A company or corporation that provides testing and/or inspection services. The person
in responsible charge of the special inspector and the testing services shall be a registered design
professional.
Tie-down: See Sec. 12.1.3.
Veneer: Facing or ornamentation of brick, concrete, stone, tile, or similar materials attached to a
backing.
2.1.4 Notation
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

As required in this section, a quality assurance plan shall be submitted to the authority having
jurisdiction. A quality assurance plan, special inspection, and testing as set forth in this chapter shall be
provided for the following:
1. The seismic-force-resisting systems in structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E, or F.
2. Designated seismic systems in structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E, or F.
Exception: Structures that comply with item a and item b and with either item c or item d of the
following criteria are exempt from the preparation of a quality assurance plan but are not exempt
from special inspection or testing requirements:
a. The structure is assigned to Seismic Use Group I.
b. The structure does not have any of the following irregularities as defined in Tables 4.3-2 and
4.3-3:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Torsional irregularity,
Extreme torsional irregularity,
Nonparallel systems,
Stiffness irregularitysoft story,
Stiffness irregularityextreme soft story,
Discontinuity in capacityweak story.
c. The structure is constructed of light wood framing or light gauge cold-formed steel framing, SDS
does not exceed 0.5, and the height of the structure does not exceed 35 ft above grade.
d. The structure is constructed using a reinforced masonry structural system or reinforced concrete
structural system, SDS does not exceed 0.5, and the height of the structure does not exceed 25 ft
above grade.
2.2.1 Details of quality assurance plan. The registered design professional in responsible charge of the
design of a seismic-force-resisting system or a designated seismic system shall be responsible for the
portion of the quality assurance plan applicable to that system. The quality assurance plan shall include:
1. A listing of the seismic-force-resisting systems and designated seismic systems that are subject to
quality assurance in accordance with this chapter.
2. The required special inspection and testing.
3. The type and frequency of testing.
11

4. The type and frequency of special inspection.
5. The frequency and distribution of testing and special inspection reports.
6. The structural observations to be performed.
7. The frequency and distribution of structural observation reports.
2.2.2 Contractor responsibility. Each contractor responsible for the construction of a seismic-forceresisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the quality assurance plan shall
submit a written contractor's statement of responsibility to the authority having jurisdiction and to the
owner prior to the commencement of work on the system or component. The contractor's statement of
responsibility shall contain the following:
1. Acknowledgment of awareness of the requirements contained in the quality assurance plan;
2. Acknowledgment that control will be exercised to obtain conformance with the construction
documents approved by the authority having jurisdiction;
3. Procedures for exercising control within the contractor's organization, the method and frequency of
reporting, and the distribution of the reports; and
4. Identification and qualifications of the person(s) exercising such control and their position(s) in the
organization.
2.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION

The owner shall employ a special inspector who, at a minimum, shall perform the following inspections:
2.3.1 Piers, piles, and caissons. Continuous special inspection during driving of piles and placement of
concrete in piers, piles, and caissons. Periodic special inspection during construction of drilled piles,
piers, and caissons including the placement of reinforcing steel.
2.3.2 Reinforcing steel
2.3.2.1. Periodic special inspection during and upon completion of the placement of reinforcing steel in
intermediate moment frames, in special moment frames, and in shear walls.
2.3.2.2. Continuous special inspection during the welding of reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial
forces in intermediate moment frames and special moment frames, in boundary elements of concrete
shear walls, and during welding of shear reinforcement.
2.3.3 Structural concrete. Periodic special inspection during and on completion of the placement of
concrete in intermediate moment frames, in special moment frames, and in boundary elements of shear
walls.
2.3.4 Prestressed concrete. Periodic special inspection during the placement and after completion of
placement of prestressing steel and continuous special inspection during all stressing and grouting
operations and during the placement of concrete.
2.3.5 Structural masonry
2.3.5.1. Periodic special inspection during the preparation of mortar, the laying of masonry units, and
placement of reinforcement, and prior to placement of grout.
2.3.5.2. Continuous special inspection during the welding of reinforcement, grouting, consolidation,
reconsolidation, and placement of bent-bar anchors as required by Sec. 11.6.4.1.
2.3.6 Structural steel
2.3.6.1. Continuous special inspection for all structural welding.
Exception: Periodic special inspection is permitted for single-pass fillet or resistance welds and
welds loaded to less than 50 percent of their design strength provided the qualifications of the
12
Quality Assurance
welder and the welding electrodes are inspected at the beginning of the work and all welds are
inspected for compliance with the approved construction documents at the completion of
welding.
2.3.6.2. Periodic special inspection in accordance with AISC LRFD for installation and tightening of
fully tensioned high-strength bolts in slip-critical connections and in connections subject to direct
tension. Bolts in connections identified as not being slip-critical or subject to direct tension need not be
inspected for bolt tension other than to ensure that the plies of the connected elements have been brought
into snug contact.
2.3.7 Structural wood
2.3.7.1. Continuous special inspection during all field gluing operations of elements of the seismicforce-resisting system.
2.3.7.2. Periodic special inspection for nailing, bolting, anchoring, and other fastening of components
within the seismic-force-resisting system including drag struts, braces, and tie-downs.
2.3.7.3. Periodic special inspection for wood shear walls, shear panels, and diaphragms that are included
in the seismic-force-resisting system and for which the Provisions require the spacing of nails, screws, or
fasteners for wood sheathing to be 4 in. or less on center.
2.3.8 Cold-formed steel framing
2.3.8.1. Periodic special inspections during all welding operations of elements of the seismic-forceresisting system.
2.3.8.2. Periodic special inspections for screw attachment, bolting, anchoring, and other fastening of
components within the seismic-force-resisting system, including struts, braces, and tie-downs.
2.3.9 Architectural components. Special inspection for architectural components shall be as follows:
1. Periodic special inspection during the erection and fastening of exterior cladding, interior and
exterior nonbearing walls, and interior and exterior veneer in Seismic Design Category D, E, or F.
Exceptions:
a. Architectural components less than 30 ft (9 m) above grade or walking surface
b. Cladding and veneer weighing 5 lb/ft2 (24.5 N/m2) or less
c. Interior nonbearing walls weighing 15 lb/ft2 (73.5 N/m2) or less.
2. Periodic special inspection during erection of glass 30 ft (9 m) or more above an adjacent grade or
walking surface in glazed curtain walls, glazed storefronts, and interior glazed partitions in Seismic
Design Category D, E, or F.
3. Periodic special inspection during the anchorage of access floors, suspended ceiling grids, and
storage racks 8 ft (2.4 m) or more in height in Seismic Design Category D, E, or F.
2.3.10 Mechanical and electrical components. Special inspection for mechanical and electrical
components shall be as follows:
1. Periodic special inspection during the anchorage of electrical equipment for emergency or standby
power systems in Seismic Design Category C, D, E, or F;
2. Periodic special inspection during the installation of anchorage of all other electrical equipment in
Seismic Design Category E or F;
3. Periodic special inspection during installation for flammable, combustible, or highly toxic piping
systems and their associated mechanical units in Seismic Design Category C, D, E, or F;
13

4. Periodic special inspection during the installation of HVAC ductwork that will contain hazardous
materials in Seismic Design Category C, D, E, or F; and
5. Periodic special inspection during the installation of vibration isolation systems where the
construction documents call for a nominal clearance (air gap) between the equipment support frame
and restraint less than or equal to 0.25 inches.
2.3.11 Seismic isolation system. Periodic special inspection during the fabrication and installation of
isolator units and energy dissipation devices if used as part of the seismic isolation system.
2.4 TESTING
The special inspector shall be responsible for verifying that the testing requirements are performed by an
approved testing agency for compliance with the following:
2.4.1 Reinforcing and prestressing steel. Special testing of reinforcing and prestressing steel shall be
as follows:
2.4.1.1. Examine certified mill test reports for each shipment of reinforcing steel used to resist flexural
and axial forces in reinforced concrete intermediate frames, special moment frames, and boundary
elements of reinforced concrete shear walls or reinforced masonry shear walls and determine
conformance with the construction documents.
2.4.1.2. Where ASTM A 615 reinforcing steel is used to resist earthquake-induced flexural and axial
forces in special moment frames and in wall boundary elements of shear walls in structures assigned to
Seismic Design Category D, E, or F, verify that the requirements of Sec. 21.2.5 of ACI 318 have been
satisfied.
2.4.1.3. Where ASTM A 615 reinforcing steel is to be welded, verify that chemical tests have been
performed to determine weldability in accordance with Sec. 3.5.2 of ACI 318.
2.4.2 Structural concrete. Samples of structural concrete shall be obtained at the project site and tested
in accordance with requirements of ACI 318.
2.4.3 Structural masonry. Quality assurance testing of structural masonry shall be in accordance with
the requirements of ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
2.4.4 Structural steel. The testing needed to establish that the construction is in conformance with
these Provisions shall be included in a quality assurance plan. The minimum testing contained in the
quality assurance plan shall be as required in AISC Seismic and the following requirements:
2.4.4.1 Base metal testing. Base metal thicker than 1.5 in. (38 mm), where subject to through-thickness
weld shrinkage strains, shall be ultrasonically tested for discontinuities behind and adjacent to such welds
after joint completion. Any material discontinuities shall be accepted or rejected on the basis of ASTM A
435 or ASTM A 898 (Level 1 Criteria) and criteria as established by the registered design professional in
responsible charge and the construction documents.
2.4.5 Mechanical and electrical equipment. As required to ensure compliance with the seismic design
requirements herein, the registered design professional in responsible charge shall clearly state the
applicable requirements on the construction documents. Each manufacturer of designated seismic system
components shall test or analyze the component and its mounting system or anchorage as required and
shall submit evidence of compliance for review and acceptance by the registered design professional in
responsible charge of the designated seismic system and for approval by the authority having
jurisdiction. The evidence of compliance shall be by actual test on a shake table, by three-dimensional
shock tests, by an analytical method using dynamic characteristics and forces, by the use of experience
data (i.e., historical data demonstrating acceptable seismic performance), or by more rigorous analysis
providing for equivalent safety. The special inspector shall examine the designated seismic system and
shall determine whether the anchorages and label conform with the evidence of compliance.
14
Quality Assurance
2.4.6 Seismically isolated structures. Isolation system components shall be tested in accordance with
Sec 13.6.
2.5 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS

Structural observations shall be provided for those structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E,
or F where one or more of the following conditions exist:
1. The structure is included in Seismic Use Group II or Seismic Use Group III or
2. The height of the structure is greater than 75 ft above the base or
3. The structure is in Seismic Design Category E or F and Seismic Use Group I and is greater than two
stories in height.
Observed deficiencies shall be reported in writing to the owner and the authority having jurisdiction.
2.6 REPORTING AND COMPLIANCE PROCEDURES

Each special inspector shall furnish copies of inspection reports, noting any work not in compliance with
the approved construction documents and corrections made to previously reported work to the authority
having jurisdiction, registered design professional in responsible charge, the owner, the registered design
professional preparing the quality assurance plan, and the contractor. All deficiencies shall be brought to
the immediate attention of the contractor for correction.
At completion of construction, each special inspector shall submit a report certifying that all inspected
work was completed substantially in compliance with the approved construction documents. Work not
in compliance with the approved construction documents shall be described in the report.
At completion of construction, the contractor shall submit a final report to the authority having
jurisdiction certifying that all construction work incorporated into the seismic-force-resisting system and
other designated seismic systems was constructed substantially in compliance with the approved
construction documents.
15
This page is intentionally left blank.
16
Chapter 3
GROUND MOTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope. All structures shall be designed for the earthquake ground motions prescribed in this
chapter. If the alternate design procedure of Alternative Simplified Chapter 4 is used, the values of Fa,
SMS, and SDS shall be as determined in that Alternate Chapter, and values for Fv, SM1, and SD1 need not
be determined.
ASTM D 1586 Standard Test Method for Penetration Test and Split-barrel Sampling of Soils (D
1586-99), American Society for Testing and Materials, 2003.
ASTM D 2166 Standard Test Method for Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil (D
ASTM D 2216 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of
Soil and Rock by Mass (D 2216-98), American Society for Testing and Materials,
2003.
ASTM D 2850 Standard Test Method for Unconsolidated-Undrained Triaxial Compression Test on
Cohesive Soils in (D 2850-03), American Society for Testing and Materials, 2003.
ASTM D 4318 Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils (D
3.1.3 Definitions
Active fault: A fault for which there is an average historic slip rate of 1 mm per year or more and
geographic evidence of seismic activity within Holocene times (past 11,000 years).
Characteristic earthquake: An earthquake assessed for an active fault having a magnitude equal to
the best-estimate of the maximum magnitude capable of occurring on the fault, but not less than the
largest magnitude that has occurred historically on the fault.
Design earthquake ground motion: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Maximum considered earthquake ground motion: The most severe earthquake effects considered
by these Provisions as defined in this chapter.
Site Class: A classification assigned to a site based on the types of soils present and their properties
as defined in Sec. 3.5.1.
Site coefficients: The values of Fa and Fv indicated in Tables 3.3-1 and 3.3-2, respectively.
3.1.4 Notation
dc
The total thickness of cohesive soil layers in the top 100 ft (30 m); see Sec. 3.5.1.
di
The thickness of any soil or rock layer i (between 0 and 100 ft [30 m]); see Sec. 3.5.1.
ds
The total thickness of cohesionless soil layers in the top 100 ft (30 m); see Sec. 3.5.1.
Fa
Short-period site coefficient (at 0.2 sec period); see Sec. 3.3.2.
17
Fv
Long-period site coefficient (at 1.0 second period); see Sec. 3.3.2.
Thickness of soil.
Standard penetration resistance, ASTM D1586-99.
Ni
Standard penetration resistance of any soil or rock layer i (between 0 and 100 ft (30m); see
Sec.3.5.1.
Average standard penetration resistance for the top 100 ft (30 m); see Sec. 3.5.1.
Average standard penetration resistance of cohesionless soil layers for the top 100 ft (30 m);
see Sec. 3.5.1.
PI
Plasticity index, ASTM D4318.
S1
The mapped, maximum considered earthquake, 5-percent-damped, spectral response

acceleration parameter at a period of one second as determined in Sec. 3.3.1.
Sa
The design spectral response acceleration at any period as defined in this chapter.
SaM
The maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at any period as defined
in this chapter.
SD1
The design, 5-percent-damped, spectral response acceleration parameter at a period of one

second as defined in Sec. 3.3.3.
SDS
The design, 5-percent-damped, spectral response acceleration parameter at short periods as

defined in Sec. 3.3.3.
SM1
The maximum considered earthquake, 5-percent-damped, spectral response acceleration

parameter at a period of one second adjusted for site class effects as defined in Sec. 3.3.2.
SMS
The maximum considered earthquake, 5-percent-damped, spectral response acceleration

parameter at short periods adjusted for site class effects as defined in Sec. 3.3.2.
SS
The mapped, maximum considered earthquake, 5-percent-damped, spectral response

acceleration parameter at short periods as determined in Sec. 3.3.1.
su
Undrained shear strength, ASTM D2166 or ASTM D2850.
sui
Undrained shear strength of any cohesive soil layer i (between 0 and 100 ft (30 m); see Sec.
3.5.1.
su
Average undrained shear strength in top 100 ft. (30 m); see Sec. 3.5.1.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
T0
0.2SD1/SDS
TL
Long-period transition period as defined in Sec. 3.3.4.
TS
SDI/SDS.
vs
The shear wave velocity at small shear strains (equal to 10-3 percent strain or less).
vsi
The shear wave velocity of any soil or rock layer i (between 0 and 100 ft (30m); see Sec.
3.5.1.
vs
The average shear wave velocity at small shear strains in the top 100 ft (30 m); see Sec. 3.5.1.
Moisture content (in percent), ASTM D2216.
ch
18
Ground Motion

As used in these Provisions, spectral acceleration parameters are coefficients corresponding to spectral
accelerations in terms of g, the acceleration due to gravity.
3.2.1 Site Class. For all structures, the site shall be classified in accordance with Sec. 3.5.
3.2.2 Procedure selection
Ground motions, represented by response spectra and parameters associated with those spectra, shall
be determined in accordance with the general procedure of Sec. 3.3 or the site-specific procedure of
Sec. 3.4. Ground motions for structures on class F sites and for seismically isolated structures on sites
with S1 greater than 0.6 shall be determined using the site-specific procedure of Sec. 3.4.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURE
3.3.1 Mapped acceleration parameters. The parameters SS and S1 shall be determined from the
respective 0.2 sec and 1.0 sec spectral response accelerations shown on Figures 3.3-1 through Figures
3.3-14.
3.3.2 Site coefficients and adjusted acceleration parameters. The maximum considered
earthquake (MCE) spectral response acceleration parameters SMS and SM1, adjusted for site class
effects, shall be determined using Eq. 3.3-1 and 3.3-2, respectively:
S MS = Fa S S
(3.3-1)
S M1 = Fv S1
(3.3-2)
and
where Fa and Fv are defined in Tables 3.3-1 and 3.3-2, respectively.
Table 3.3-1 Values of Site Coefficient Fa

Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter at 0.2 Second
Period a
Site Class
SS 0.25
SS = 0.50
SS = 0.75
SS = 1.00
SS 1.25
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.1
1.0
2.5
1.7
1.2
0.9
0.9
___b
___b
___b
___b
___b
F
a
Use straight line interpolation for intermediate values of SS.
b
Site-specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analyses shall be performed.
19
20
Ground Motion
21
22
Ground Motion
23
24
Ground Motion
25
26
Ground Motion
27
28
Ground Motion
29
30
Ground Motion
31
32
Ground Motion
33
34
Ground Motion
35
36
Ground Motion
37

Table 3.3-2 Values of Site Coefficient Fv
Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter at 1 Second
Period a
Site Class
S1 0.1
S1 = 0.2
S1 = 0.3
S1 = 0.4
S1 0.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
2.4
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.5
3.5
3.2
2.8
2.4
2.4
___b
___b
___b
___b
___b
F
Use straight line interpolation for intermediate values of S1.
b
Site-specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analyses shall be performed.
a
3.3.3 Design acceleration parameters. The parameters SDS and SD1 shall be determined from Eq.
3.3-3 and 3.3-4, respectively:
2
S DS = S MS
3
(3.3-3)
and
2
S D1 = S M1
3
(3.3-4)
3.3.4 Design response spectrum. Where a design response spectrum is required by these Provisions
and site-specific procedures are not used, the design response spectrum shall be developed as indicated
in Figure 3.3-15 and as follows:
1. For periods less than or equal to T0, Sa shall be taken as given by Eq. 3.3-5:
S
S a = 0.6 DS T + 0.4S DS
T0
(3.3-5)
2. For periods greater than or equal to T0 and less than or equal to TS, Sa shall be taken as equal to SDS.
3. For periods greater than TS and less then or equal to TL, Sa shall be taken as given by Eq. 3.3-6:
S
S a = D1
T
(3.3-6)
4. For periods greater than TL , Sa shall be taken as given by Eq. 3.3-7.
Sa =
S D1T L
2
T
(3.3-7)
where:
38
SDS =
the design spectral response acceleration parameter at short periods
SD1 =
the design spectral response acceleration parameter at 1 second period
the fundamental period of the structure (sec)
T0 =
0.2SD1/SDS
TS =
SD1/SDS
Ground Motion
TL = Long-period transition period shown in Figure 3.3-16 (conterminous U.S. except
California), Figure 3.3-17 (California), Figure 3.3-18 (Alaska), Figure 3.3-19
(Hawaii), Figure 3.3-20 (Puerto Rico), and Figure 3.3-21 (Guam and Tutuila).
S DS
Spectral Response Acceleration, Sa (g)
Sa =
S D1
T
S D1
Sa =
S D1 TL
T2
0
0
T0
TS
1.01
TL
Period, T (sec)
Figure 3.3-15 Long-Period transition Period.
39
40
Ground Motion
41
42
Ground Motion
43
44
Ground Motion
45
3.4 SITE-SPECIFIC PROCEDURE

A site-specific study shall account for the regional tectonic setting, geology, and seismicity, the
expected recurrence rates and maximum magnitudes of earthquakes on known faults and source zones,
the characteristics of ground motion attenuation, near-fault effects if any on ground motions, and the
effects of subsurface site conditions on ground motions. The study shall incorporate current scientific
interpretations, including uncertainties, for models and parameter values for seismic sources and
ground motions. The study shall be documented in a report.
3.4.1 Probabilistic maximum considered earthquake. Where site-specific procedures are utilized,
the probabilistic maximum considered earthquake ground motion shall be taken as that motion
represented by a 5-percent-damped acceleration response spectrum having a 2 percent probability of
exceedance in a 50 year period.
3.4.2 Deterministic maximum considered earthquake. The deterministic maximum considered

earthquake spectral response acceleration at each period shall be taken as 150 percent of the largest
median 5-percent-damped spectral response acceleration computed at that period for characteristic
earthquakes on all known active faults within the region. For the purposes of these Provisions, the
ordinates of the deterministic maximum considered earthquake ground motion response spectrum shall
not be taken lower than the corresponding ordinates of the response spectrum determined in
accordance with Figure 3.4-1, where Fa and Fv are determined using Tables 3.3-1 and 3.3-2, with the
value of SS taken as 1.5 and the value of S1 taken as 0.6.
S aM = 1.5 Fa
1
SaM = 0.6
Fv
T
0
0
Period, T1 (sec)
Figure 3.4-1 Deterministic Lower Limit on Maximum Considered Earthquake

3.4.3 Site-specific maximum considered earthquake. The site-specific maximum considered
earthquake spectral response acceleration at any period, SaM, shall be taken as the lesser of the spectral
response accelerations from the probabilistic maximum considered earthquake ground motion of Sec.
3.4.1 and the deterministic maximum considered earthquake ground motion of Sec. 3.4.2.
3.4.4 Design response spectrum. Where site-specific procedures are used to determine the
maximum considered earthquake ground motion, the design spectral response acceleration at any
period shall be determined from Eq. 3.4-1:
46
Ground Motion
2
SaM
(3.4-1)
3
and shall be greater than or equal to 80 percent of Sa determined in accordance with Sec. 3.3.4. For
sites classified as Site Class F requiring site-specific evaluations (Note b to Tables 3.3-1 and 3.3-2 and
Sec. 3.5.1), the design spectral response acceleration at any period shall be greater than or equal to 80
percent of Sa determined for Site Class E in accordance with Sec. 3.3.4.
Sa =
3.4.5 Design acceleration parameters. Where the site-specific procedure is used to determine the
design response spectrum in accordance with Section 3.4.4, the parameter SDS shall be taken as the
spectral acceleration, Sa , obtained from the site-specific spectrum at a period of 0.2 second, except that
it shall not be taken as less than 90 percent of the peak spectral acceleration, Sa , at any period larger
than 0.2 second. The parameter SD1 shall be taken as the greater of the spectral acceleration, Sa , at a
period of 1 second or two times the spectral acceleration, Sa , at a period 2 seconds. The parameters
SMS and SM1 shall be taken as 1.5 times SDS and SD1, respectively. The values so obtained shall not be
taken as less than 80 percent of the values obtained from the general procedure of Section 3.3.
3.5 SITE CLASSIFICATION FOR SEISMIC DESIGN

Where the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the Site Class in accordance
with Sec. 3.5.1, it shall be permitted to assume Site Class D unless the authority having jurisdiction
determines that Site Class E or F could apply at the site or in the event that Site Class E or F is
established by geotechnical data.
3.5.1 Site Class definitions. The Site Classes are defined as follows:
A Hard rock with measured shear wave velocity, v s > 5,000 ft/sec (1500 m/s)
B Rock with 2,500 ft/sec < v s 5,000 ft/sec (760 m/s < v s 1500 m/s)
C Very dense soil and soft rock with 1,200 ft/sec < v s 2,500 ft/sec (360 m/s < v s 760 m/s) or
with either N > 50 or s u > 2,000 psf (100 kPa)
D Stiff soil with 600 ft/sec v s 1,200 ft/sec (180 m/s v s 360 m/s) or with either 15 N
50 or 1,000 psf s u 2,000 psf (50 kPa s u 100 kPa)
E
A soil profile with v s < 600 ft/sec (180 m/s) or with either
N < 15, s u < 1,000 psf, or any profile with more than 10 ft (3 m) of soft clay defined as soil with
PI > 20, w 40 percent, and su < 500 psf (25 kPa)
F
Soils requiring site-specific evaluations:

1. Soils vulnerable to potential failure or collapse under seismic loading such as liquefiable soils,
quick and highly sensitive clays, collapsible weakly cemented soils.
Exception: For structures having fundamental periods of vibration less than or equal
to 0.5 second, site-specific evaluations are not required to determine spectral
accelerations for liquefiable soils. Rather, the Site Class may be determined in
accordance with Sec. 3.5.2, assuming liquefaction does not occur, and the
corresponding values of Fa and Fv determined from Tables 3.3-1 and 3.3-2.
2. Peat and/or highly organic clays (H > 10 ft [3 m] of peat and/or highly organic clay, where H
= thickness of soil)
3. Very high plasticity clays (H > 25 ft [8 m] with PI > 75)
4. Very thick, soft/medium stiff clays (H > 120 ft [36 m]) with su < 1,000 psf (50 kPa)
The parameters used to define the Site Class are based on the upper 100 ft (30 m) of the site profile.
Profiles containing distinctly different soil and rock layers shall be subdivided into those layers
47

designated by a number that ranges from 1 to n at the bottom where there are a total of n distinct layers
in the upper 100 ft (30 m). The symbol i then refers to any one of the layers between 1 and n.
where:
vsi = the shear wave velocity in ft/sec (m/s).

di = the thickness of any layer (between 0 and 100 ft [30 m]).
n
vs =
i =1
n
(3.5-1)
di
i =1 vsi
where
d
i =1
is equal to 100 ft (30 m).
Ni = the Standard Penetration Resistance determined in accordance with ASTM D 1586, as directly
measured in the field without corrections, and shall not be taken greater than 100 blows/ft. Where
refusal is met for a rock layer, Ni shall be taken as 100 blows/ft.
n
N=
d
i =1
n
(3.5-2)
di
i =1 N i
where Ni and di in Eq. 3.5-2 are for cohesionless soil, cohesive soil, and rock layers.
N ch =
ds
di
i =1 N i
(3.5-3)
where Ni and di in Eq. 3.5-3 are for cohesionless soil layers only,
m
and
d
i =1
= ds
ds = the total thickness of cohesionless soil layers in the top 100 ft (30 m).
sui = the undrained shear strength in psf (kPa), determined in accordance with ASTM D 2166 or
D 2850, and shall not be taken greater than 5,000 psf (250 kPa).
su =
dc
di
i =1 sui
k
where
d
i =1
= dc .
dc = the total thickness of cohesive soil layers in the top 100 ft (30 m).
PI = the plasticity index, determined in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
w = the moisture content in percent, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2216.
48
(3.5-4)
Ground Motion
3.5.2 Steps for classifying a site
Step 1: Check for the four categories of Site Class F requiring site-specific evaluation. If the site
corresponds to any of these categories, classify the site as Site Class F and conduct a sitespecific evaluation.
Step 2: Check for the existence of a total thickness of soft clay > 10 ft (3 m) where a soft clay layer is
defined by: su < 500 psf (25 kPa), w 40 percent, and PI > 20. If these criteria are satisfied,
classify the site as Site Class E.
Step 3: Categorize the site using one of the following three methods with v s, N and s u computed in all
cases as specified in Sec. 3.5.1:
a. v s for the top 100 ft (30 m) (v s method)

b.
N for the top 100 ft (30 m) ( N method)
c.
N ch for cohesionless soil layers (PI < 20) in the top 100 ft (30 m) and average s u for
cohesive soil layers (PI > 20) in the top 100 ft (30 m) (s u method)
Table 3.5-1 Site Classification
Site Class
v s
N or N ch
s ua
< 600 fps

( < 180 m/s)
< 15
< 1,000 psf

( < 50 kPa)
600 to 1,200 fps

(180 to 360 m/s)
15 to 50
1,000 to 2,000 psf

(50 to 100 kPa)
> 1,200 to 2,500 fps

(360 to 760 m/s)
> 50
> 2,000
( > 100 kPa)
If the s u method is used and the N ch and s u criteria differ, select the category with the softer soils
(for example, use Site Class E instead of D).
Assignment of Site Class B shall be based on the shear wave velocity for rock. For competent rock
with moderate fracturing and weathering, estimation of this shear wave velocity shall be permitted.
For more highly fractured and weathered rock, the shear wave velocity shall be directly measured or
the site shall be assigned to Site Class C.
Assignment of Site Class A shall be supported by either shear wave velocity measurements on site or
shear wave velocity measurements on profiles of the same rock type in the same formation with an
equal or greater degree of weathering and fracturing. Where hard rock conditions are known to be
continuous to a depth of 100 ft (30 m), surficial shear wave velocity measurements may be
extrapolated to assess v s.
Site Classes A and B shall not be used where there is more than 10 ft (3 m) of soil between the rock
surface and the bottom of the spread footing or mat foundation.
49
50
Chapter 4
STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope. The structural design criteria to be used in the design of buildings and other structures
and their components shall be as prescribed in this chapter. As an alternative, the seismic analysis and
design procedures of Alternative Simplified Chapter 4 shall be permitted to be used in lieu of the
requirements of this chapter, subject to all of the limitations contained in the Alternate Chapter 4.
4.1.2 References. The following reference documents shall be used as indicated in this chapter.
ACI 318

1999, excluding Appendix A.
AISC ASD
Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings, American Institute of Steel Construction, 1989.
AISC LRFD
Construction, 1997, including Supplement No. 2 (2000).
AISI
Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members, American Iron
and Steel Institute, 1996, including Supplement No. 1 (2000).
ASCE 7
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, American Society of Civil
Engineers, 1998.
4.1.3 Definitions
Base: The level at which the horizontal seismic ground motions are considered to be imparted to the
structure.
Base shear: Total design lateral force at the base.
Bearing wall: An exterior or interior wall providing support for vertical loads.
Bearing wall system: A structural system with bearing walls providing support for all or major
portions of the vertical loads. Shear walls or braced frames provide seismic-force resistance.
Braced frame: An essentially vertical truss that is provided to resist the effects of horizontal loads.
Building: Any structure whose use could include shelter of human occupants.
Building frame system: A structural system with an essentially complete space frame system
providing support for vertical loads. Seismic-force resistance is provided by shear walls or braced
frames.
Cantilevered column system: A seismic-force-resisting system in which lateral forces are resisted
entirely by columns acting as cantilevers from the foundation.
Collector: See drag strut.
51

Concentrically braced frame (CBF): A braced frame in which the members are subjected primarily to
axial forces.
Dead load: The gravity load due to the weight of all permanent structural and nonstructural
components such as walls, floors, roofs, and the operating weight of fixed service equipment.
Design strength: Nominal strength multiplied by the strength reduction factor, .
Diaphragm: A roof, floor, or other membrane system acting to transfer lateral forces to the vertical
resisting elements. Diaphragms are classified as either flexible or rigid according to the requirements of
Sec. 4.3.2.1 and 12.4.1.1.
Drag strut: A diaphragm or shear wall boundary element parallel to the applied load that collects and
transfers diaphragm shear forces to the vertical force-resisting elements or distributes forces within the
diaphragm or shear wall.
Dual frame system: A structural system with an essentially complete space frame system providing
support for vertical loads. Seismic force resistance is provided by a moment resisting frame and shear
walls or braced frames as prescribed in Sec. 4.3.1.1
Eccentrically braced frame (EBF): A braced frame in which at least one end of each diagonal
connects to a beam a short distance from a beam-column joint or from another diagonal.
Height: Distance measured from the base of the structure as defined in sec. 4.1.3 to the roof level.
Intermediate moment frame: A moment frame of reinforced concrete satisfying the detailing
requirements of ACI 318, of structural steel satisfying the detailing requirements of AISC Seismic, or of
composite construction satisfying the requirements of AISC Seismic.
Inverted pendulum-type structure: Structures that have a large portion of their mass concentrated
near the top and, thus, have essentially one degree of freedom in horizontal translation. The structures
are usually T-shaped with a single column supporting the beams or framing at the top.
Joint: See Sec. 9.1.3.
Live load: The load superimposed by the use and/or occupancy of the structure not including the wind
load, earthquake load, or dead load.
Moment frame: A frame provided with restrained connections between the beams and columns to
permit the frame to resist lateral forces through the flexural rigidity and strength of its members.
Nominal strength: Strength of a member or cross section calculated in accordance with the
requirements and assumptions of the strength design methods of these Provisions (or the reference
standards) before application of any strength reduction factors.
Ordinary concentrically braced frame (OCBF): A steel concentrically braced frame in which
members and connections are designed in accordance with the provisions of Ref. 8-3 without
modification.
Ordinary moment frame: A moment frame of reinforced concrete conforming to the requirements of
ACI 318 exclusive of Chapter 21, of structural steel satisfying the detailing requirements of AISC
Seismic, or of composite construction satisfying the requirements of AISC Seismic.
Plain concrete: See Sec. 9.1.3.
Reinforced concrete: See Sec. 9.1.3.
Required strength: Strength of a member, cross section, or connection required to resist factored loads
or related internal moments and forces in such combinations as stipulated by these Provisions.
52
Structural Design Criteria

Seismic forces: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Shear panel: A floor, roof, or wall component sheathed to act as a shear wall or diaphragm.
Shear wall: A wall designed to resist lateral forces parallel to the plane of the wall.
Space frame system: A structural system composed of interconnected members, other than bearing
walls, that is capable of supporting vertical loads and that also may provide resistance to shear.
Special concentrically braced frame (SCBF): A steel or composite steel and concrete concentrically
braced frame in which members and connections are designed for ductile behavior
Special moment frame: A moment frame of reinforced concrete satisfying the detailing requirements
of ACI 318, of structural steel satisfying the detailing requirements of AISC Seismic, of composite
construction satisfying the requirements of AISC Seismic, or of masonry construction satisfying the
requirements of Sec. 11.7.
Special Shear plate steel wall: A shear wall composed of steel webs and structural steel boundary
elements.
Story: The portion of a structure between the tops of two successive finished floor surfaces or, for the
topmost story, between the finished floor surface and the top of the roof structural element.
Story drift ratio: The story drift, as determined in Sec. 5.2.6, 5.3.5, or 5.4.3, divided by the story
height.
Subdiaphragm: A portion of a diaphragm used to transfer wall anchorage forces to the diaphragm
cross ties.
Wall: A component that is used to enclose or divide space and is inclined at an angle of at least 60
degrees from the horizontal plane.
4.1.4 Notation
Cd
The deflection amplification factor as given in Table 4.3-1.
The effect of dead load.
The effect of horizontal and vertical earthquake-induced forces.
Fi
The portion of the seismic base shear, V, induced at Level i.
Fp
The seismic design force applicable to a particular structural component.
Fpx
The diaphragm design force at Level x.
hsx
The story height below Level x = hx - hx-i.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Level i The building level referred to by the subscript i; i = 1 designates the first level above the base.
Level n The level that is uppermost in the main portion of the of the building.
QE
The effect of horizontal seismic forces.
The response modification coefficient as given in Table 4.3-1.
SD1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
53

T
The period of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest as
determined in Sec. 5.2.2.
Vx
See Sec. 5.1.3.
Wc
Weight of wall.
Wp
Weight of structural component.
wi
The portion of the seismic weight, W, located at or assigned to Level i.
wpx
The weight tributary to the diaphragm at Level x.

Level x See Sec. 1.1.5.
The design story drift as determined in Sec. 5.2.6, 5.3.5, or 5.4.3.
The allowable story drift as specified in Sec. 4.5.1.
The deflection of Level x at the center of the mass at and above Level x.
The redundancy factor as defined in Sec. 4.3.3.
Overstrength factor as given in Table 4.3-1.

4.2.1 Design basis. The structure shall include complete lateral and vertical-force-resisting systems
capable of providing adequate strength, stiffness, and energy dissipation capacity to withstand the
design ground motions within the prescribed limits of deformation and strength demand. The design
ground motions shall be assumed to occur along any direction of the structure. The adequacy of the
structural systems shall be demonstrated through construction of a mathematical model and evaluation
of this model for the effects of the design ground motions. This evaluation shall be based on analysis in
which design seismic forces are distributed and applied throughout the height of the structure in
accordance with Sec. 4.4. The corresponding structural deformations and internal forces in all members
of the structure shall be determined and evaluated against acceptance criteria contained in these
Provisions. Approved alternative procedures based on general principles of engineering mechanics and
dynamics are permitted to be used to establish the seismic forces and their distribution. If an alternative
procedure is used, the corresponding internal forces and deformations in the members shall be
determined using a model consistent with the procedure adopted.
Individual members shall be provided with adequate strength at all sections to resist the shears, axial
forces, and moments determined in accordance with these Provisions, and connections shall develop the
strength of the connected members or the forces indicated above. The deformation of the structure shall
not exceed the prescribed limits.
A continuous load path, or paths, with adequate strength and stiffness shall be provided to transfer all
forces from the point of application to the final point of resistance. The foundation shall be designed to
accommodate the forces developed or the movements imparted to the structure by the design ground
motions. In the determination of the foundation design criteria, special recognition shall be given to the
dynamic nature of the forces, the expected ground motions, and the design basis for strength and energy
dissipation capacity of the structure.
The design of a structure shall consider the potentially adverse effect that the failure of a single member,
connection, or component of the seismic-force-resisting system would have on the stability of the
structure.
4.2.2 Combination of load effects. The effects on the structure and its components due to gravity
loads and seismic forces shall be combined in accordance with the factored load combinations as
presented in ASCE 7 except that the effect of seismic loads, E, shall be as defined in this section.
54

4.2.2.1 Seismic load effect. The effect of seismic load, E, shall be defined by Eq. 4.2-1 as follows for
load combinations in which the effects of gravity loads and seismic loads are additive:
E = QE + 0.2 S DS D
(4.2-1)
where:
E
the effect of horizontal and vertical earthquake-induced forces,
the redundancy factor,
QE
the effect of horizontal seismic forces,
SDS
the design spectral response acceleration parameter at short periods as defined in Sec.
3.3.3, and
the effect of dead load.
The effect of seismic load, E, shall be defined by Eq. 4.2-2 as follows for load combinations in which
the effects of gravity counteract seismic load:
E = QE 0.2S DS D
(4.2-2)
where E, , QE, SDS, and D are as defined above.

4.2.2.2 Seismic load effect with overstrength. Where specifically required by these Provisions, the
design seismic force on components sensitive to the effects of structural overstrength shall be as defined
by Eq. 4.2-3 and 4.2-4 for load combinations in which the effects of gravity are respectively additive
with or counteractive to the effect of seismic loads:
E = 0 QE + 0.2S DS D
(4.2-3)
E = 0 QE 0.2S DS D
(4.2-4)
where E, QE, SDS, and D are as defined above and 0 is the system overstrength factor as given in
Table 4.3-1.
The term 0QE calculated in accordance with Eq. 4.2-3 and 4.2-4 need not exceed the maximum force
that can develop in the element as determined by a rational, plastic mechanism analysis or nonlinear
response analysis utilizing realistic expected values of material strengths.
4.3 SEISMIC-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM

4.3.1 Selection and limitations. The basic lateral and vertical seismic-force-resisting system shall
conform to one of the types indicated in Table 4.3-1 subject to the system limitations and height limits,
based on Seismic Design Category, indicated in the table. Each type is subdivided based on types of
vertical elements used to resist lateral seismic forces. The appropriate values of R, 0, and Cd indicated
in Table 4.3-1 shall be used in determining the base shear, element design forces, and design story drift
as indicated in these Provisions.
Seismic-force-resisting systems that are not contained in Table 4.3-1 shall be permitted if analytical and
test data are submitted that establish the dynamic characteristics and demonstrate the lateral force
resistance and energy dissipation capacity to be equivalent to the structural systems listed in Table 4.3-1
for equivalent values of R, 0, and Cd.
Additional limitations and framing requirements are indicated in this chapter and in elsewhere in these
Provisions for structures assigned to the various Seismic Design Categories.
55

Table 4.3-1 Design Coefficients and Factors for Basic Seismic-Force-Resisting Systems
Basic Seismic-Force-Resisting System
Detailing Reference Section
0 b
Cd
System Limitations and Height Limits (ft)

by Seismic Design Category d
B
De
Ee
Ff
Bearing Wall Systems

Special reinforced concrete shear walls
9.2.1.6
NL
NL
160
160
100
Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls
9.2.1.4
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
Detailed plain concrete shear walls
9.2.1.2
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
Ordinary plain concrete shear walls
9.2.1.1
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
NL
NL
40
40
40k
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
11.5.6.3
NL
NL
160
160
100
Intermediate reinforced masonry shear walls
11.5.6.2
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls
11.5.6.1
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
Detailed plain masonry shear walls
11.4.4.2
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
Ordinary plain masonry shear walls
11.4.4.1
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
Prestressed masonry shear walls
11.9
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
Light-frame walls with shear panels
8.4, 12.3.3, 12.4
NL
NL
65
65
65
Light-frame walls with diagonal braces
8.4.2
NL
NL
65
65
65
AISC Seismic, Part I, Sec. 15
NL
NL
160
160
100
Intermediate precast shear walls
9.2.1.5
Ordinary precast shear walls
9.2.1.3
Special reinforced masonry shear walls
Building Frame Systems

Steel eccentrically braced frames with moment-resisting
connections at columns away from links
56
Steel eccentrically braced frames with non-moment-resisting

connections at columns away from links
Buckling-Restrained Braced Frames, non-momentresisting beam-column connections

Buckling-Restrained Braced Frames, moment-resisting
Beam-column connections
Ra
Cd c

B
De
Ee
Ff
NL
NL
160
160
100
NL
NL
160
160
100
NL
NL
160
160
100
Special steel concentrically braced frames
NL
NL
160
160
100
Ordinary steel concentrically braced frames
NL
NL
35 g
35 g
NP g
9.2.1.6
NL
NL
160
160
100
9.2.1.4
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
9.2.1.2
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
9.2.1.1
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
9.2.1.5
NL
NL
40
40
40k
9.2.1.3
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
Composite eccentrically braced frames
AISC Seismic, Part II, Sec. 14
NL
NL
160
160
100
Composite concentrically braced frames
NL
NL
160
160
100
Ordinary composite braced frames
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
Composite steel plate shear walls
NL
NL
160
160
100
NL
NL
160
160
100
Special steel plate shear walls

Special composite reinforced concrete shear walls with steel
elements
NL
NL
160
160
100
Ordinary composite reinforced concrete shear walls with steel

elements
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
57
0 b
Cd

B
De
Ee
Ff
11.5.6.3
NL
NL
160
160
100
11.5.6.2
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
11.5.6.1
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
11.4.4.2
NL
NP
Np
NP
NP
11.4.4.1
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
11.9
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
8.4, 12.3.3, 12.4
NL
NL
160
160
160
Special steel moment frames
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Special steel truss moment frames
NL
NL
160
100
NP
Intermediate steel moment frames
NL
NL
35 h
NP h
NP i
Ordinary steel moment frames
NL
NL
NP h
NP h
NP i
Special reinforced concrete moment frames
9.2.2.2 & ACI 318, Chapter 21
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Intermediate reinforced concrete moment frames
9.2.2.3 & ACI 318, Chapter 21
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
Ordinary reinforced concrete moment frames
9.3.1 & ACI 318, Chapter 21
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
Special composite moment frames
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Intermediate composite moment frames
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
Composite partially restrained moment frames
160
160
100
NP
NP
Ordinary composite moment frames
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
Moment Resisting Frame Systems
58
Special masonry moment frames
Cd

B
De
Ee
Ff
11.7
NL
NL
160
160
100
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Dual Systems with Special Moment Frames (See Sec.

4.3.1.1.)
Steel eccentrically braced frames
Buckling-Restrained Braced Frame
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
9.2.1.4
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
9.2.1.3
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
Composite eccentrically braced frames
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL

NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Special composite reinforced concrete shear walls with steel

elements
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL

elements
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
11.5.6.3
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
11.5.6.2
NL
NL
NL
NP
NP
NL
NL
35 h
NP h, i
NP h, i
Dual Systems with Intermediate Moment Frames (See Sec.

4.3.1.1.)
Special steel concentrically braced frames j
59
Cd

B
De
Ee
Ff
9.2.1.4
NL
NL
160
100
100
9.2.1.3
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
11.5.6.1
NL
160
NP
NP
NP
11.5.6.2
NL
NL
160
NP
NP
NL
NL
160
100
NP
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP

elements
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Ordinary steel moment frames
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
Special reinforced concrete moment frames
ACI 318, Chapter 21
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Steel Systems Not Specifically Detailed for Seismic

Resistance
AISC ASD, AISC LRFD, AISI
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
Inverted Pendulum Systems and Cantilevered Column

Systems
Response modification coefficient, R, for use throughout these Provisions.

The tabulated value of 0 may be reduced by subtracting for structures with flexible diaphragms, but shall not be taken as less than 2.0 for any structure.
c
Deflection amplification factor, Cd, for use throughout these Provisions.
d
NL = not limited and NP = not permitted. If using metric units, 100 ft approximately equals 30 m and 160 ft approximately equals 50 m.
e
See Sec. 4.3.1.4.1 for a description of building systems limited to buildings with a height of 240 ft (70 m) or less.
f
See Sec. 4.3.1.6 for building systems limited to buildings with a height of 160 ft (50 m) or less.
g
Steel ordinary braced frames are permitted in single story buildings up to a height of 65 ft when the dead load of the roof does not exceed 20 psf and in penthouse structures.
h
See limitations in Section Nos. 4.3.1.4.4 , 4.3.1.4.5 , and 4.3.1.5.2.
i
See limitations in Section Nos. 4.3.1.6.1 and 4.3.1.6.2.
j
Ordinary moment frame is permitted to be used in lieu of intermediate moment frame in Seismic Design Categories B and C.
b
For intermediate precast shear wall buildings the dead load of the roof system shall not exceed 20 psf.
60

4.3.1.1 Dual system. For a dual system, the moment frame shall be capable of resisting at least 25
percent of the design forces. The total seismic force resistance is to be provided by the combination of
the moment frame and the shear walls or braced frames in proportion to their rigidities.
4.3.1.2 Combinations of framing systems. Different seismic-force-resisting systems are permitted
along the two orthogonal axes of the structure. Combinations of seismic-force-resisting systems shall
comply with the requirements of this section.
4.3.1.2.1 R and 0 factors. In any given direction, the value of R at any story shall not exceed the
lowest value of R in the same direction above that story excluding penthouses. For other than dual
systems, where a combination of different structural systems is utilized to resist lateral forces in the
same direction, the value of R used in that direction shall not be greater than the least value of any of the
systems utilized in the same direction. If a system, other than a dual system, with a value of R less than
5 is used as part of the seismic-force-resisting system in any direction of the structure, the lowest such
value shall be used for the entire structure. The system overstrength factor, 0, in the direction under
consideration at any story shall not be less than the largest value of this factor for the seismic-forceresisting system in the same direction considered above that story.
Exceptions: The requirements of this section need not be applied where one of the following
conditions is satisfied:
1. Supported structural systems with a weight equal to or less than 10 percent of the weight of
the structure.
2. Detached one- and two-family dwellings of light-frame construction.
4.3.1.2.2 Detailing of common components. The detailing requirements for the higher response
modification coefficient, R, shall be used for structural components common to systems having different
response modification coefficients.
4.3.1.3 Seismic Design Categories B and C. The structural framing system for structures assigned to
Seismic Design Category B or C shall comply with the system limitations and building height limits in
Table 4.3-1.
4.3.1.4 Seismic Design Category D. The structural framing system for structures assigned to Seismic
Design Category D shall comply with Sec. 4.3.1.3 and the additional requirements of this section.
4.3.1.4.1 Building height limits. The height limits in Table 4.3-1 are permitted to be increased to 240
ft (70 m) in buildings that have steel braced frames or concrete cast-in-place shear walls if such
buildings are configured such that the braced frames or shear walls arranged in any one plane conform
to the following:
1. The braced frames or cast-in-place special reinforced concrete shear walls in any one plane shall
resist no more than 60 percent of the total seismic forces in each direction, neglecting torsional
effects, and
2. The seismic force in any braced frame or shear wall resulting from torsional effects shall not
exceed 20 percent of the total seismic force in that braced frame or shear wall.
4.3.1.4.2 Interaction effects. Moment resisting frames that are enclosed or adjoined by more rigid
elements not considered to be part of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be designed so that the
action or failure of those elements will not impair the vertical load and seismic force resisting capability
of the frame. The design shall consider and provide for the effect of these rigid elements on the
structural system at structure deformations corresponding to the design story drift, , as determined in
Sec. 5.2.6.1. In addition, the effects of these elements shall be considered where determining whether a
structure has one or more of the irregularities defined in Sec. 4.3.2.
4.3.1.4.3 Special moment frames. A special moment frame that is used but not required by Table
4.3-1 is permitted to be discontinued and supported by a more rigid system with a lower response
61

modification coefficient, R, provided the requirements of Sec. 4.6.1.6 and 4.6.3.2 are met. Where a
special moment frame is required by Table 4.3-1 as part of a dual system, the frame shall be continuous
to the foundation.
For structures with seismic-force-resisting systems in any direction comprised solely of special moment
frames, the seismic-force-resisting system shall be configured such that the value of is 1.0
4.3.1.4.4 Single Story Steel Ordinary and Intermediate Moment Frame Limitations.
Single story steel OMF and IMF are permitted up to a height of 65ft. (19.8 m) where the dead load
supported by and tributary to the roof does not exceed 20 psf. In addition the dead loads, tributary to
the moment frame, of the exterior wall more than 35 ft. (10.8 m) above the base shall not exceed 20
psf.
4.3.1.4.5 Other Steel Ordinary and Intermediate Moment Frame Limitations. Steel OMF not
meeting the limitations in Sec. 4.3.1.4.4 are permitted within light frame construction up to a height of
35 ft. (10.8m) where neither the roof nor the floor dead load supported by and tributary to the moment
frames exceeds 35 psf. In addition the dead load of the exterior walls tributary to the moment frame
shall not exceed 20 psf.
Steel IMF not meeting the limitations in Sec. 4.3.1.4.4 are permitted to a height of 35ft. (10.8m)
4.3.1.5 Seismic Design Category E. The structural framing system for a structure assigned to Seismic
Design Category E shall comply with Sec. 4.3.1.4 and the additional requirements of this section.
4.3.1.5.1 Plan or vertical irregularities. Structures having plan irregularity Type 1b of Table 4.3-2 or
vertical irregularities Type 1b or 5 of Table 4.3-3 shall not be permitted.
4.3.1.5.2 Steel Intermediate Moment Frame Limitations.
Steel IMF not meeting the limitations in Section 4.3.1.4.4 are permitted to a height of 35 ft. (10.8 m)
providing neither the roof nor the floor dead load supported by and tributary to the moment frames
exceeds 35 psf. In addition the dead load of the exterior walls tributary to the moment frame shall not
exceed 20 psf.
4.3.1.6 Seismic Design Category F. The structural framing system for a structure assigned to Seismic
Design Category F shall comply with Sec. 4.3.1.5 and the additional requirements of this section. The
height limits given in Sec. 4.3.1.4.1 shall be reduced from 240 ft to 160 ft (70 to 50 m).
4.3.1.6.1 Single Story Steel Ordinary and Intermediate Moment Frame Limitations.
Single story steel OMF and IMF are permitted up to a height of 65 where the dead load supported by
and tributary to the roof does not exceed 20 psf. In addition the dead load of the exterior walls
tributary to the moment frame shall not exceed 20 psf.
4.3.1.6.2 Other Steel Intermediate Moment Frame Limitations.
Steel IMF not meeting the limitations in Sec. 4.3.1.4.4 are permitted in light frame construction to a
height of 35 ft. (10.8 m) providing neither the roof nor the floor dead load supported by and tributary to
the moment frames exceeds 35 psf. In addition the dead load of the exterior walls tributary to the
moment frame shall not exceed 20 psf.
4.3.2 Configuration. Diaphragm behavior shall be classified as indicated in this section. Structures
shall be classified as regular or irregular, based on the plan and vertical configuration, in accordance
with this section.
4.3.2.1 Diaphragm flexibility. A diaphragm shall be considered flexible for determining distribution
of horizontal forces when the computed maximum in-plane deflection of the diaphragm itself under
lateral load is more than two times the average deflection of adjoining vertical elements of the lateral
force-resisting system of the associated story under equivalent tributary lateral load. The loadings used
for this calculation shall be those prescribed by Sec. 5.2.
62

Exception: Diaphragms constructed of untopped steel decking, wood structural panels, or
similar panelized construction shall be considered flexible in structures having concrete or
masonry shear walls.
4.3.2.2 Plan irregularity. Structures having one or more of the features listed in Table 4.3-2 shall be
designated as having plan structural irregularity and shall comply with the requirements in the sections
referenced in Table 4.3-2.
4.3.2.3 Vertical irregularity. Structures having one or more of the features listed in Table 4.3-3 shall
be designated as having vertical irregularity and shall comply with the requirements in the sections
referenced in Table 4.3-3.
Exceptions:
1. Structural irregularities of Types 1a, 1b, or 2 in Table 4.3-3 do not apply where no story
drift ratio under design lateral load is greater than 130 percent of the story drift ratio of the
next story above. Torsional effects need not be considered in the calculation of story drifts
for the purpose of this determination. The story drift ratio relationship for the top 2 stories
of the structure are not required to be evaluated.
2. Irregularity Types 1a, 1b, and 2 of Table 4.3-3 are not required to be considered for 1-story
structures or for 2-story structures assigned to Seismic Design Category B, C, or D.
63

Table 4.3-2 Plan Structural Irregularities
Reference
Section
Seismic Design
Category
Application
4.4.1
D, E, and F
4.6.3.2
D, E, and F
5.2.4.3 and
5.2.6.1
C, D, E, and F
4.3.1.5.1
E and F
4.4.1
4.6.3.2
D
D
5.2.4.3 and
5.2.6.1
C, D, E, and F
Re-entrant Corners
Plan configurations of a structure and its lateral force-resisting
system contain re-entrant corners, where both projections of the
structure beyond a re-entrant corner are greater than 15 percent
of the plan dimension of the structure in the given direction.
4.6.3.2
D, E, and F
Diaphragm Discontinuity
Diaphragms with abrupt discontinuities or variations in
stiffness, including those having cutout or open areas greater
than 50 percent of the gross enclosed diaphragm area, or
changes in effective diaphragm stiffness of more than 50
percent from one story to the next.
4.6.3.2
D, E, and F
4.6.1.7
B, C, D, E, and F
4.6.3.2
D, E, and F
4.4.2.2
C, D, E, and F
Irregularity Type and Description

1a Torsional Irregularityto be considered when diaphragms
are not flexible
Torsional irregularity shall be considered to exist when the
maximum story drift, computed including accidental torsion, at
one end of the structure transverse to an axis is more than 1.2
times the average of the story drifts at the two ends of the
structure.
1b Extreme Torsional Irregularityto be considered when
diaphragms are not flexible
Extreme torsional irregularity shall be considered to exist when
the maximum story drift, computed including accidental
torsion, at one end of the structure transverse to an axis is more
than 1.4 times the average of the story drifts at the two ends of
the structure.
2
64
Out-of-Plane Offsets
Discontinuities in a lateral force resistance path, such as out-ofplane offsets of the vertical elements.
Nonparallel Systems
The vertical lateral force-resisting elements are not parallel to
or symmetric about the major orthogonal axes of the seismicforce-resisting system.
Table 4.3-3 Vertical Structural Irregularities

Reference
Section
Seismic Design
Category
Application
4.4.1
D, E, and F
4.3.1.5.1
E and F
4.4.1
2 Weight (Mass) Irregularity

Mass irregularity shall be considered to exist where the
effective mass of any story is more than 150 percent of the
effective mass of an adjacent story. A roof that is lighter than
the floor below need not be considered.
4.4.1
D, E, and F
3 Vertical Geometric Irregularity

Vertical geometric irregularity shall be considered to exist
where the horizontal dimension of the lateral force-resisting
system in any story is more than 130 percent of that in an
adjacent story.
4.4.1
D, E, and F
4.6.1.7
B, C, D, E, and F
4.6.3.2
D, E, and F
4.3.1.5.1
E and F
4.6.1.6
B, C, and D
Irregularity Type and Description

1a Stiffness IrregularitySoft Story
A soft story is one in which the lateral stiffness is less than 70
percent of that in the story above or less than 80 percent of the
average stiffness of the three stories above.
1b Stiffness IrregularityExtreme Soft Story
An extreme soft story is one in which the lateral stiffness is less
than 60 percent of that in the story above or less than 70 percent
of the average stiffness of the three stories above.
4 In-Plane Discontinuity in Vertical Lateral Force Resisting

Elements
An in-plane offset of the lateral force-resisting elements greater
than the length of those elements or a reduction in stiffness of
the resisting element in the story below.
5 Discontinuity in CapacityWeak Story
A weak story is one in which the story lateral strength is less
than 80 percent of that in the story above. The story strength is
the total strength of all seismic-resisting elements sharing the
story shear for the direction under consideration.
4.3.3 Redundancy. A redundancy factor, , shall be assigned to the seismic force-resisting system in
each of two orthogonal directions for all structures in accordance with this section, based on the extent
of structural redundancy inherent in the seismic-force-resisting system.
4.3.3.1 Seismic Design Categories B, and C. For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category B or
C, the value of may be taken as 1.0.
4.3.3.2 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F. For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category
D, E, or F, shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0, provided that at each story resisting more than 35
percent of the base shear in the direction of interest the seismic-force-resisting system meets the
following redundancy requirements:
65

1. Systems with braced frames: Removal of an individual brace, or connection thereto, would not
result in more than a 33 percent reduction in story strength, nor create an extreme torsional
irregularity (plan structural irregularity Type 1b).
2. Systems with moment frames: Loss of moment resistance at the beam-to-column connections at
both ends of a single beam would not result in more than a 33 percent reduction in story strength,
nor create an extreme torsional irregularity (plan structural irregularity Type 1b).
3. Systems with shear walls or wall piers: Removal of a shear wall or wall pier with a height-tolength-ratio greater than 1.0 within any story, or collector connections thereto, would not result in
more that a 33 percent reduction in story strength, nor create an extreme torsional irregularity (plan
structural irregularity Type 1b).
4. All other systems: No requirements.
For structures not meeting items 1,2,3, and 4 above permitting equal to 1.0, shall be taken as 1.3.
Exception: The structure shall be permitted to be designed using a taken as 1.0, provided that
at each story that resists more than 35 percent of the base shear the seismic force-resisting
system is regular in plan with at least two bays of primary seismic force-resisting elements
located at the perimeter framing on each side of the structure in each orthogonal direction. The
number of bays for a shear wall shall be calculated as the length of wall divided by the story
height.
4.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

A structural analysis in accordance with the requirements of this section shall be made for all structures.
All members of the structures seismic-force-resisting system and their connections shall have adequate
strength to resist the forces, QE, predicted by the analysis, in combination with other loads as required
by Sec. 4.2.2.
4.4.1 Procedure selection. The structural analysis required by Sec. 4.4 shall consist of one of the types
permitted in Table 4.4-1, based on the assigned Seismic Design Category and the structural
characteristics (seismic-force-resisting system, fundamental period of vibration, and configuration).
With the approval of the authority having jurisdiction, use of an alternative, generally accepted
procedure shall be permitted.
66
Equivalent Lateral Force

Procedure, Sec. 5.2
Response Spectrum
Procedure, Sec. 5.3
Linear Response History

Procedure, Sec. 5.4
Nonlinear Response History

Procedure, Sec. 5.5
Table 4.4-1 Analysis Procedures
B, C
Regular or irregular
D, E, F
All structures of light-frame construction; and

structures with T < 3.5Ts that are regular or
have only plan irregularities Type 2, 3, 4, or 5
of Table 4.3-2 or vertical irregularities Type 4
or 5 of Table 4.3-3
NP
Seismic
Structural Characteristics
Design
Category
All other structures

P indicates permitted; NP indicates not permitted.
4.4.2 Application of loading. The directions of application of seismic forces used in the design shall
be those that will produce the most critical load effects. The procedures indicated in this section for
various Seismic Design Categories shall be deemed to satisfy this requirement.
4.4.2.1 Seismic Design Category B. For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category B, the design
seismic forces are permitted to be applied separately in each of two orthogonal directions and
orthogonal interaction effects may be neglected.
4.4.2.2 Seismic Design Category C. Loading applied to structures assigned to Seismic Design
Category C shall, as a minimum, conform to the requirements of Sec. 4.4.2.1 and the requirements of
this section. Structures that have plan irregularity Type 5 in Table 4.3-2 shall be analyzed for seismic
forces using a three-dimensional representation and either of the following procedures:
1. The structure shall be analyzed using the equivalent lateral force procedure of Sec. 5.2, the response
spectrum procedure of Sec. 5.3, or the linear response history procedure of Sec. 5.4 as permitted
under Sec. 4.4.1 with the loading applied independently in any two orthogonal directions and the
most critical load effect due to direction of application of seismic forces on the structure may be
assumed to be satisfied if components and their foundations are designed for the following
combination of prescribed loads: 100 percent of the forces for one direction plus 30 percent of the
forces for the perpendicular direction; the combination requiring the maximum component strength
shall be used.
2. The structure shall be analyzed using the linear response history procedure of Sec. 5.4 or the
nonlinear response history procedure of Sec. 5.5 as permitted by Sec. 4.4.1 with simultaneous
application of ground motion in each of two orthogonal directions.
67

4.4.2.3 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F. Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E,
or F shall be analyzed for seismic forces using a three-dimensional representation and either of the
procedures described in Sec. 4.4.2.2. Two dimensional analysis shall be permitted where diaphragms
are flexible and the structure does not have plan irregularity Type 5 of Table 4.3-2.
4.5 DEFORMATION REQUIREMENTS

4.5.1 Deflection and drift limits. The design story drift, , as determined in Sec. 5.2.6, 5.3.5, or 5.4.3,
shall not exceed the allowable story drift, a, as obtained from Table 4.5-1 for any story. For structures
with significant torsional deflections, the maximum drift shall include torsional effects. All portions of
the structure shall be designed and constructed to act as an integral unit in resisting seismic forces unless
separated structurally by a distance sufficient to avoid damaging contact under total deflection, x , as
determined in Sec. 5.2.6.1.
Table 4.5-1 Allowable Story Drift, a ab
Seismic Use Group
Structure
I
II
III
Structures, other than those using masonry seismic-force-resisting 0.025 hsx c

systems, four stories or less in height with interior walls, partitions,
ceilings, and exterior wall systems that have been designed to
accommodate the story drifts
0.020 hsx
0.015 hsx
Masonry cantilever shear wall structures d
0.010 hsx
0.010 hsx
0.010 hsx
Other masonry shear wall structures
0.007 hsx
0.007 hsx
0.007 hsx
Special masonry moment frames
0.013 hsx
0.013 hsx
0.010 hsx
All other structures
0.020 hsx
0.015 hsx
0.010 hsx
hsx is the story height below Level x.

For SDC D,E and F, the allowable story drift shall comply with the requirements of Sec.4.5.3.
c
There shall be no drift limit for single-story structures with interior walls, partitions, ceilings, and
exterior wall systems that have been designed to accommodate the story drifts.
d
Structures in which the basic structural system consists of masonry shear walls designed as vertical
elements cantilevered from their base or foundation support which are so constructed that moment
transfer between shear walls (coupling) is negligible.
b
4.5.2 Seismic Design Categories B and C. The deflection in the plane of the diaphragm, as
determined by engineering analysis, shall not exceed the permissible deflection of the attached
elements. Permissible deflection shall be a deflection that permits the attached elements to maintain
their structural integrity under the individual loading and to continue to support the prescribed loads.
4.5.3 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F. Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E,
or F shall comply with Sec. 4.5.2 and the additional requirements of this section. Every structural
component not included as part of the seismic-force-resisting system in the direction under
consideration shall be designed to be adequate for the effects of gravity loads in combination with the
induced moments and shears resulting from the design story drift, , as determined in accordance with
Sec. 5.2.6.1.
Exception: Beams and columns and their connections not designed as part of the seismicforce-resisting system but meeting the detailing requirements for either intermediate moment
frames or special moment frames are permitted to be designed to be adequate for the effects of
68

gravity loads in combination with the induced moments and shears resulting from the
deformation of the building under the application of the design seismic forces.
Where determining the moments and shears induced in components that are not included as part of the
seismic-force-resisting system in the direction under consideration, the stiffening effects of adjoining
rigid structural and nonstructural elements shall be considered and a rational value of member and
restraint stiffness shall be used.
For systems with moment frames the design story drift , as determined in Sec. 5.2.6, 5.3.5, or 5.4.3,
shall not exceed a / for any story. shall be calculated per Sec.4.3.3.
4.6 DESIGN AND DETAILING REQUIREMENTS

The design and detailing of the components of the seismic-force-resisting system shall comply with the
requirements of this section. Foundation design shall comply with the applicable requirements of
Chapter 7. The materials and the systems composed of those materials shall comply with applicable
requirements and limitations found elsewhere in these Provisions.
4.6.1 Seismic Design Category B. The design and detailing of structures assigned to Seismic Design
Category B shall comply with the requirements of this section.
4.6.1.1 Connections. All parts of the structure between separation joints shall be interconnected, and
the connections shall be capable of transmitting the seismic force, Fp, induced by the parts being
connected. Any smaller portion of the structure shall be tied to the remainder of the structure with
elements having a strength of 0.133 times SDS times the weight of the smaller portion or 5 percent of the
portion's weight, whichever is greater.
each beam, girder, or truss to its support. The connection shall have a minimum strength of 5 percent of
the reaction due to dead load and live load.
4.6.1.2 Anchorage of concrete or masonry walls. Concrete or masonry walls shall be connected,
using reinforcement or anchors, to the roof and all floors and members that provide lateral support for
the wall or that are supported by the wall. The connection shall be capable of resisting a seismic lateral
force induced by the wall of 100 pounds per lineal foot (1500 N/m ). Walls shall be designed to resist
bending between connections where the spacing exceeds 4 ft (1.2 m).
4.6.1.3 Bearing walls. Exterior and interior bearing walls and their anchorage shall be designed for a
force equal to 40 percent of SDS times the weight of wall, Wc, normal to the surface, with a minimum
force of 10 percent of the weight of the wall. Interconnection of wall elements and connections to
supporting framing systems shall have sufficient ductility, rotational capacity, or strength to resist
shrinkage, thermal changes, and differential foundation settlement where combined with seismic forces.
4.6.1.4 Openings. Where openings occur in shear walls, diaphragms or other plate-type elements,
reinforcement at the edges of the openings shall be designed to transfer the stresses into the structure.
The edge reinforcement shall extend into the body of the wall or diaphragm a distance sufficient to
develop the force in the reinforcement.
4.6.1.5 Inverted pendulum-type structures. Supporting columns or piers of inverted pendulum-type
structures shall be designed for the bending moment calculated at the base determined using the
procedures given in Sec. 5.2 and varying uniformly to a moment at the top equal to one-half the
calculated bending moment at the base.
4.6.1.6 Discontinuities in vertical system. Structures with vertical irregularity Type 5 as defined in
Table 4.3-3, shall not be over the lesser of 2 stories or 30 ft (9 m) in height where the weak story has a
calculated strength of less than 65 percent of the strength of the story above.
69

Exception: The height limit shall not apply where the weak story is capable of resisting a total
seismic force equal to 75 percent of the deflection amplification factor, Cd, times the design
force prescribed in Sec. 5.2.
4.6.1.7 Columns supporting discontinuous walls or frames. Columns supporting discontinuous
walls or frames of structures having plan irregularity Type 4 of Table 4.3-2 or vertical irregularity Type
4 of Table 4.3-3 shall have the design strength to resist the maximum axial force that can develop in
accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.2.
4.6.1.8 Collector elements. Collector elements shall be provided and shall be capable of transferring
the seismic forces originating in other portions of the structure to the element providing the resistance to
those forces.
4.6.1.9 Diaphragms. Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist the following seismic
forces: A minimum force equal to 20 percent of SDS times the weight of the diaphragm and other
elements of the structure attached thereto plus the portion of the seismic shear force at that level, Vx,
required to be transferred to the components of the vertical seismic-force-resisting system because of
offsets or changes in stiffness of the vertical components above and below the diaphragm.
Diaphragms shall provide for both the shear and bending stresses resulting from these forces.
Diaphragms shall have ties or struts to distribute the wall anchorage forces into the diaphragm.
Diaphragm connections shall be positive, mechanical or welded type connections.
4.6.1.10 Anchorage of nonstructural systems. Where required by Chapter 6, all portions or
components of the structure shall be anchored for the seismic force, Fp, prescribed therein.
4.6.2 Seismic Design Category C. Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C shall comply
with the requirements of Sec. 4.6.1 and the requirements of this section.
4.6.2.1 Anchorage of concrete or masonry walls. In addition to the requirements of Sec. 4.6.1.2,
concrete or masonry walls shall be anchored in accordance with this section. The anchorage shall
provide a positive direct connection between the wall and floor, roof, or supporting member capable of
resisting horizontal forces specified in this section for structures with flexible diaphragms or of Sec.
6.2.2 (using ap equal to 1.0 and Rp equal to 2.5) for structures with diaphragms that are not flexible.
Anchorage of walls to flexible diaphragms shall have the strength to develop the out-of-plane force
given by Eq. 4.6-1 as follows:
F p = 0.8S DS IW p
(4.6-1)
where:
Fp
the design force in the individual anchors,
SDS
the design spectral response acceleration parameter at short periods as defined in Sec.
3.3.3,
the occupancy importance factor as defined in Sec. 1.3, and
Wp
the weight of the wall tributary to the anchor.
Diaphragms shall be provided with continuous ties or struts between diaphragm chords to distribute
these anchorage forces into the diaphragms. Added chords are permitted to be used to form
subdiaphragms to transmit the anchorage forces to the main continuous cross ties. The maximum
length-to-width ratio of the structural subdiaphragm shall be 2.5 to 1. Connections and anchorages
capable of resisting the prescribed forces shall be provided between the diaphragm and the attached
components. Connections shall extend into the diaphragm a sufficient distance to develop the force
transferred into the diaphragm.
70

In wood diaphragms, the continuous ties shall be in addition to the diaphragm sheathing. Anchorage
shall not be accomplished by use of toe nails or nails subject to withdrawal nor shall wood ledgers of
framing be used in cross-grain bending or cross-grain tension. The diaphragm sheathing shall not be
considered as effectively providing the ties or struts required by this section.
In metal deck diaphragms, the metal deck shall not be used as the continuous ties required by this
section in the direction perpendicular to the deck span.
Diaphragm to wall anchorage using embedded straps shall be attached to or hooked around the
reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated so as to effectively transfer forces to the reinforcing steel.
4.6.2.2 Collector elements. In addition to the requirements of Sec. 4.6.1.8, collector elements, splices,
and their connections to resisting elements shall be designed to resist the forces defined in Sec. 4.2.2.2.
Exception: In structures or portions thereof braced entirely by light-frame shear walls,
collector elements, splices, and connections to resisting elements are permitted to be designed to
resist the forces determined in accordance with Sec. 4.6.3.4.
4.6.3 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F. Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E,
or F shall conform to the requirements of Sec. 4.6.2 and to the requirements of this section.
4.6.3.1 Vertical seismic forces. The vertical component of earthquake ground motion shall be
considered in the design of horizontal cantilever and horizontal prestressed components. The load
combinations used in evaluating such components shall include E as defined by Eq. 4.2-1 and 4.2-2.
Horizontal cantilever structural components shall be designed for a minimum net upward force of 0.2
times the dead load in addition to the applicable load combinations of Sec. 4.2.2.
4.6.3.2 Plan or vertical irregularities. The design shall consider the potential for adverse effects
where the ratio of the strength provided in any story to the strength required is significantly less than
that ratio for the story immediately above and the strengths shall be adjusted to compensate for this
effect.
For structures having a plan structural irregularity of Type 1a, 1b, 2, 3, or 4 in Table 4.3-2 or a vertical
structural irregularity of Type 4 in Table 4.3-3, the design forces determined from the structural analysis
performed in accordance with Sec. 4.4 shall be increased 25 percent for connections of diaphragms to
vertical elements and to collectors. Collector forces determined in accordance with Sec. 4.6.3.4 (but not
those determined in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.2) shall be subject to this increase.
4.6.3.3 Collector elements. In addition to the requirements of Sec. 4.6.2.2, collector elements, splices,
and their connections to resisting elements shall resist the forces determined in accordance with Sec.
4.6.3.4.
4.6.3.4 Diaphragms. Diaphragms shall be designed to resist design seismic forces determined in
accordance with Eq. 4.6-2 as follows:
n
Fpx =
F
i=x
n
w
i= x
wpx
(4.6-2)
where:
Fpx
the diaphragm design force at Level x,
Fi
the design force applied to Level i,
wi
the weight tributary to Level i, and
wpx
the weight tributary to the diaphragm at Level x.
71

The force determined from Eq. 4.6-2 need not exceed 0.4SDSIwpx but shall not be less than 0.2SDSIwpx.
Where the diaphragm is required to transfer design seismic force from the vertical-resisting elements
above the diaphragm to other vertical-resisting elements below the diaphragm due to offsets in the
placement of the elements or to changes in relative lateral stiffness in the vertical elements, these forces
shall be added to those determined from Eq. 4.6-2.
72
ALTERNATIVE SIMPLIFIED CHAPTER 4:

ALTERNATIVE STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA
FOR SIMPLE BEARING WALL OR BUILDING FRAME SYSTEMS
Alt.4.1 GENERAL
Alt. 4.1.1 Simplified design procedure. Simple bearing wall and building frame systems and their
components meeting the qualifications of this section shall be permitted to be designed as prescribed in
this chapter as an alternative to the Provisions of Chapter 4, and 5. This chapter also provides alternative
procedures for determining site class and site coefficients. The Seismic Design Category shall be
determined from Table 1.4-1 using the value of SDS from Section Alt. 4.6.1. Application of this
Alternative Simplified Chapter is subject to all of the following limitations:
1.
Structure shall qualify for Seismic Use Group I.
2.
The Site Class, defined in Sec. 3.5, shall not be Class E or F.
3.
Structure shall not exceed three stories in height above grade.
4.
Seismic-force resisting system shall be either a Bearing Wall System or Building Frame System,
as indicated in Alt. Table 4.3.1
5.
The structure shall have at least two lines of lateral resistance in each of two major axis
directions.
6.
At least one line of resistance shall be provided on each side of the center of mass in each
direction.
7.
The sum of the strengths of the lines of resistance on each side of the center of mass shall equal at
least 40 percent of the story shear.
8.
For buildings with a diaphragm that is not flexible, the distance between the center of rigidity and
the center of mass parallel to each major axis shall not exceed 15 percent of the greatest width of
the diaphragm parallel to that axis.
9.
Lines of resistance of the lateral-force-resisting system shall be oriented at angles of no more than
15 degrees from alignment with the major orthogonal horizontal axes of the building.
10. The alternative simplified design procedure shall be used for each major orthogonal horizontal
axis direction of the building.
11. System irregularities caused by in-plane or out-of-plane offsets of lateral force-resisting elements
shall not be permitted.
12. The lateral-load-resistance of any story shall not be less than 80 percent of the story above.
Alt. 4.1.2 References. The reference documents listed in Sec 4.1.2 shall be used as indicated in this
Simplified Alternate Chapter 4.
73
2003 Provisions, Alternative Simplified Chapter 4

Alt. 4.1.3 Definitions. The definitions listed in Sec. 4.1.3 shall be used for this Alternative Simplified
Chapter 4 in addition to the following:
Major orthogonal horizontal directions: The orthogonal directions that overlay the majority of lateral
force resisting elements.
Alt. 4.1.4 Notation
D
The effect of dead load.
The effect of horizontal and vertical earthquake-induced forces.
Fi
The portion of the seismic base shear, V, induced at Level i.
Fp
The seismic design force applicable to a particular structural component.
Fx
See Sec. 1.1.5.
hi
The height above the base to Level i.
hx
The height above the base to Level x.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Level i
The building level referred to by the subscript i; i = 1 designates the first level above the
base.
Level n
The level that is uppermost in the main portion of the of the building.
Level x
See Sec. 1.1.5.
QE
The effect of horizontal seismic forces.
The response modification coefficient as given in Table 4.3-1.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SS
See Sec 3.3.1.
The total design shear at the base of the structure in the direction of interest, as determined
using the procedure of A4.6.1
Vx
The seismic design shear in Story x. See Sec. A4.6.3.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Wc
Weight of wall.
Wp
Weight of structural component.
wi
The portion of the seismic weight, W, located at or assigned to Level i.
wx
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Alt. 4.2 DESIGN BASIS

Alt. 4.2.1 General. The structure shall include complete lateral and vertical-force-resisting systems
capable of providing adequate strength, stiffness, and energy dissipation capacity to withstand the
design ground motions within the prescribed limits of strength demand. The adequacy of the structural
systems shall be demonstrated through construction of a mathematical model and evaluation of this
model for the effects of the design ground motions. This evaluation shall consist of a linear elastic
analysis in which design seismic forces are distributed and applied throughout the height of the structure
in accordance with the procedures of Sec. Alt. 4.6. The corresponding internal forces in all members of
the structure shall be determined and evaluated against acceptance criteria contained in these Provisions.
74
Alternative Structural Design Criteria for Simple Bearing Wall or Building Frame Systems
Individual members shall be provided with adequate strength to resist the shears, axial forces, and
moments determined in accordance with these Provisions. A continuous load path, or paths, with
adequate strength and stiffness shall be provided to transfer all forces from the point of application to
the final point of resistance. The foundation shall be designed to accommodate the forces developed or
the movements imparted to the structure by the design ground motions.
Alt. 4.2.2 Combination of Load Effects. The effects on the structure and its components due to
gravity loads and seismic forces shall be combined in accordance with the factored load combinations as
presented in ASCE 7-02, except that the effect of seismic loads, E, shall be as defined herein.
Alt. 4.2.2.1 Seismic load effect. The effect of seismic load E shall be defined by Eq. Alt. 4.2-1 as
follows for load combinations in which the effects of gravity loads and seismic loads are additive:
E = QE + 0.2SDSD
(Alt. 4.2-1)
where:
E
= the effect of horizontal and vertical earthquake-induced forces,
SDS = the design spectral response acceleration at short periods obtained from
Sec. Alt. 4.6.1
D
= the effect of dead load, and
QE = the effect of horizontal seismic forces.

The effect of seismic load E shall be defined by Eq. Alt. 4.2-2 as follows for load combinations in which
the effects of gravity counteract seismic load:
E = QE - 0.2SDSD
(Alt.4.2-2)
where E, QE, SDS, and D are as defined above.

Alt. 4.2.2.2 Seismic load effect with overstrength. Where specifically required by these Provisions,
the design seismic force on components sensitive to the effects of structural overstrength shall be as
defined by Eq. 4.2-3 and 4.2-4 for load combinations in which the effects of gravity are respectively
additive with or counteractive to the effect of seismic loads:
E = 0 QE + 0.2S DS D
(Alt. 4.2-3)
E = 0 QE 0.2S DS D
(Alt. 4.2-4)
where E, QE, SDS, and D are as defined above. 0 shall be taken as 2-1/2.
Alt. 4.3 SEISMIC-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM

Alt. 4.3.1 Selection and Limitations. The basic lateral and vertical seismic-force-resisting system shall
conform to one of the types indicated in Alt. Table 4.3.1. Each type is subdivided by the type of vertical
element used to resist lateral seismic forces. The appropriate response modification coefficient, R,
indicated in Alt.Table 4.3.1 shall be used in determining the base shear and element design forces as
indicated in these Provisions.
Special framing and detailing requirements are indicated in Sec. Alt. 4.5 and in Chapters 8, 9, 10, 11,
and 12 for structures assigned to the various Seismic Design Categories.
Alt. Table 4.3-1 Design Coefficients and Factors for Basic Seismic-Force-Resisting Systems
75
Detailing Reference
Section
System Limitations by
Seismic Design
Category b
Ra
B
D,E
Bearing Wall Systems

9.2.1.6
9.2.1.4
NP
9.2.1.2
NP
NP
9.2.1.1
NP
NP
9.2.1.5
9.2.1.3
NP
NP
11.5.6.3
11.5.6.2
NP
11.5.6.1
NP
NP
11.4.4.2
NP
NP
11.4.4.1
NP
NP
11.9
NP
NP
8.4, 12.3.3, 12.4
Light-frame walls with diagonal braces
8.4.2
AISC Seismic, Part I, Sec.

13
Ordinary steel concentrically braced frames
AISC Seismic, Part I, Sec.

14
9.2.1.6
Building Frame Systems
76
9.2.1.4
NP
9.2.1.2
NP
NP
9.2.1.1
NP
NP
9.2.1.5
9.2.1.3
NP
NP
AISC Seismic, Part II, Sec.

12

13
NP

17
Special composite reinforced concrete shear walls with

steel elements

16
Ordinary composite reinforced concrete shear walls with

steel elements

15
NP
11.5.6.3
11.5.6.2
NP
11.5.6.1
NP
NP
11.4.4.2
NP
Np
11.4.4.1
NP
NP
11.9
NP
NP
8.4, 12.3.3, 12.4
Steel Systems Not Specifically Detailed for Seismic

Resistance (Concentric Braced Frame systems only)
AISC ASD, AISC LRFD,

AISI
NP
Response modification coefficient, R, for use throughout these Provisions.
P = Permitted and NP = Not Permitted.
Alt. 4.3.1.1 Combinations of Framing Systems. A combination of different structural systems shall not
be utilized to resist lateral forces in the same direction. Seismic-force-resisting systems are permitted to
77

differ between the two major horizontal axes of the structure, provided that systems shall not be vertically
combined from story to story.
Exception: Penthouses and other rooftop-supported structures weighing less than 25% of the roof
level need not be considered a story. The limitations of Sec 4.1.1 do not apply to these structures.
The value of R used for combinations of different systems shall not be greater than the least value
of any of the systems utilized in the same direction. The systems utilized may differ from those of
the supporting structure below.
Alt. 4.3.1.1.2 Combination Framing Detailing Requirements. The detailing requirements of Sec. Alt.
4.5 required by the higher response modification coefficient, R, shall be used for structural components
common to systems having different response modification coefficients.
Alt. 4.3.2 Diaphragm Flexibility. Diaphragms constructed of untopped steel decking, wood structural
panels or similar panelized construction may be considered flexible.
Alt. 4.4 APPLICATION OF LOADING The effects of the combination of loads shall be
considered as prescribed in Sec. Alt. 4.2.2. The design seismic forces are permitted to be applied
separately in each orthogonal direction and the combination of effects from the two directions need not be
considered. Reversal of load shall be considered.
Alt. 4.5 DESIGN AND DETAILING REQUIREMENTS The design and detailing of the
components of the seismic-force-resisting system shall comply with the requirements of this section.
Foundation design shall conform to the applicable requirements of Chapter 7. The materials and the
systems composed of those materials shall conform to the applicable requirements and limitations found
elsewhere in these Provisions.
Alt. 4.5.1 Connections. All parts of the structure between separation joints shall be inter-connected, and
the connection shall be capable of transmitting the seismic force, Fp, induced by the parts being
connected. Any smaller portion of the structure shall be tied to the remainder of the structure with
elements having a strength of 0.20 times the short period design spectral response acceleration coefficient,
SDS, times the weight of the smaller portion or 5 percent of the portions weight, whichever is greater.
each beam, girder, or truss to its support. The connections shall have a minimum strength of 5 percent of
the dead load and live load reaction.
Alt. 4.5.2 Openings or Re-entrant Building Corners. Except where as otherwise specifically provided
for in these provisions, openings in shear walls, diaphragms or other plate-type elements, shall be
provided with reinforcement at the edges of the openings designed to transfer the stresses into the
structure. The edge reinforcement shall extend into the body of the wall or diaphragm a distance
sufficient to develop the force in the reinforcement.
Alt. 4.5.3 Collector Elements. Collector elements shall be provided with adequate strength to transfer
the seismic forces originating in other portions of the structure to the element providing the resistance to
those forces. Collector elements, splices, and their connections to resisting elements shall be designed to
resist the forces defined in Sec. Alt. 4.2.2.2.
Exception: In structures or portions thereof braced entirely by light-frame shear walls, collector
elements, splices, and connections to resisting elements are permitted to be designed to resist forces
in accordance with Sec. Alt. 4.5.4.
Alt. 4.5.4 Diaphragms. Floor and roof diaphragms shall be designed to resist the design seismic forces
at each level, Fx , calculated in accordance with Sec. Alt. 4.6.2. When the diaphragm is required to
transfer design seismic forces from the vertical-resisting elements above the diaphragm to other vertical-
78
resisting elements below the diaphragm due to changes in relative lateral stiffness in the vertical
elements, the transferred portion of the seismic shear force at that level, Vx, shall be added to the
diaphragm design force. Diaphragms shall provide for both the shear and bending stresses resulting from
these forces. Diaphragms shall have ties or struts to distribute the wall anchorage forces into the
diaphragm. Diaphragm connections shall be positive, mechanical or welded type connections.
Alt. 4.5.5 Anchorage of Concrete or Masonry Walls
Alt. 4.5.5.1 Seismic Design Category B. Concrete or masonry walls shall be connected, using
reinforcement or anchors, to the roof and all floors and members that provide lateral support for the wall
or that are supported by the wall. The connection shall be capable of resisting a seismic lateral force
induced by the wall of 100 pounds per lineal foot (1500 K/m). Walls shall be designed to resist bending
between connections where the spacing exceeds 4 ft (1.2 m).
Alt. 4.5.5.2 Seismic Design Category C and D. In addition to the requirements of Sec. Alt 4.5.5.1,
concrete or masonry walls shall be anchored in accordance with this section.. The anchorage shall
provide a positive direct connection between the wall and floor, roof, or supporting member capable of
resisting horizontal forces specified in this section for structures with flexible diaphragms or of Sec. 6.2.2
(using ap equal to 1.0 and Rp equal to 2.5) for structures with diaphragms that are not flexible.
Anchorage of walls to flexible diaphragms shall have the strength to develop the out-of-plane force given
by Eq. A4.5-1:
Fp=0.8SDSWp
(Alt. 4.5-1)
where:
Fp = the design force in the individual anchors,
SDS = the design spectral response acceleration at short periods per Sec. Alt. 4.6.1, and
Wp =
the weight of the wall tributary to the anchor
Diaphragms shall be provided with continuous ties or struts between diaphragm chords to distribute these
anchorage forces into the diaphragms. Added chords are permitted to be used to form subdiaphragms to
transmit the anchorage forces to the main continuous cross ties. The maximum length to width ratio of
the structural subdiaphragm shall be 2-1/2 to 1. Connections and anchorages capable of resisting the
prescribed forces shall be provided between the diaphragm and the attached components. Connections
shall extend into the diaphragm a sufficient distance to develop the force transferred into the diaphragm.
In wood diaphragms, the continuous ties shall be in addition to the diaphragm sheathing. Anchorage shall
not be accomplished by use of toe nails or nails subject to withdrawal nor shall wood ledgers of framing
be used in cross-grain bending or cross-grain tension. The diaphragm sheathing shall not be considered
effective as providing the ties or struts required by this section.
In metal deck diaphragms, the metal deck shall not be used as the continuous ties required by this section
in the direction perpendicular to the deck span.
Diaphragm to wall anchorage using embedded straps shall be attached to or hooked around the
reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated so as to effectively transfer forces to the reinforcing steel.
Alt. 4.5.6 Bearing Walls. Exterior and interior bearing walls and their anchorage shall be designed for a
force equal to 40 percent of the short period design spectral response acceleration SDS times the weight of
wall, Wc, normal to the surface, with a minimum force of 10 percent of the weight of the wall.
Interconnection of wall elements and connections to supporting framing systems shall have sufficient
ductility, rotational capacity, or sufficient strength to resist shrinkage, thermal changes, and differential
foundation settlement when combined with seismic forces.
79

Alt. 4.5.7 Anchorage of Nonstructural Systems. When required by Chapter 6, all portions or
components of the structure shall be anchored for the seismic force, Fp, prescribed therein.
Alt. 4.6 SIMPLIFIED LATERAL FORCE ANALYSIS PROCEDURE An equivalent lateral

force analysis shall consist of the application of equivalent static lateral forces to a linear mathematical
model of the structure. The lateral forces applied in each direction shall sum to a total seismic base shear
given by Sec. Alt. 4.6.1 and shall be distributed vertically in accordance with Sec. Alt. 4.6.2. For
purposes of analysis, the structure shall be considered fixed at the base.
Alt. 4.6.1 Seismic Base Shear
The seismic base shear, V, in a given direction shall be determined in accordance with formula Alt. 4.6-1:
V =
125
. SDS
W
R
(Alt. 4.6-1)
where:
SDS =
2/3FaSs, where Fa may be taken as 1.0 for rock sites, 1.4 for soil sites, or determined in
accordance with Section 3.3.2. For the purpose of this section, sites may be considered to
be rock if there is no more than 10 ft (3 m) of soil between the rock surface and the bottom
of spread footing or mat foundation. In calculating SDS, Ss need not be taken larger than 1.5.
R =
the response modification factor from Table A4.3.1 and
W =
the total dead load and applicable portions of other loads listed below:
1.
In areas used for storage, a minimum of 25 percent of the floor live load shall be
applicable. The live load may be reduced for tributary area as permitted by the
structural code administered by the authority having jurisdiction. Floor live load in
public garages and open parking structures is not applicable.
2. Where an allowance for partition load is included in the floor load design, the actual
partition weight or a minimum weight of 10 psf (500 Pa/m2) of floor area, whichever is
greater, shall be applicable.
3. Total operating weight of permanent equipment.
4. In areas where the design flat roof snow load does not exceed 30 pounds per
square foot, the effective snow load is permitted to be taken as zero. In areas
where the design snow load is greater than 30 pounds per square foot and where
siting and load duration conditions warrant and when approved by the authority
having jurisdiction, the effective snow load is permitted to be reduced to not less
than 20 percent of the design snow load.
Alt. 4.6.2 Vertical distribution. The forces at each level shall be calculated using the following formula:
Fx =
125
. SDS
wx
R
(Alt. 4.6-2)
where wx = the portion of the effective seismic weight of the structure, W at Level x.
Alt. 4.6.3 Horizontal Shear Distribution. The seismic design story shear in any story, Vx (kip or kN),
shall be determined from the following equation:
80
Vx =
(Alt. 4.6-3)
i= x
where Fi = the portion of the seismic base shear, V (kip or kN) induced at Level i.
Alt. 4.6.3.1 Flexible Diaphragm Structures. The seismic design story shear in stories of structures with
flexible diaphragms, as defined in Sec. Alt. 4.3.2, shall be distributed to the vertical elements of the lateral
force resisting system using tributary area rules. Two- dimensional analysis shall be permitted where
diaphragms are flexible.
Alt. 4.6.3.2 Structures with Diaphragms that are not Flexible. For structures with diaphragms that are
not flexible, as defined in Sec. Alt. 4.3.2, the seismic design story shear, Vx, (kip or kN) shall be
distributed to the various vertical elements of the seismic-force-resisting system in the story under
consideration based on the relative lateral stiffnesses of the vertical elements and the diaphragm.
Alt. 4.6.3.2.1 Torsion. The design of structures with diaphragms that are not flexible shall include the
torsional moment, Mt (kip-ft or KN-m) resulting from eccentric location of the masses.
Alt. 4.6.4 Overturning. The structure shall be designed to resist overturning effects caused by the
seismic forces determined in Sec. Alt. 4.6.2. At any story, the increment of overturning moment in the
story under consideration shall be distributed to the various vertical force-resisting elements in the same
proportion as the distribution of the horizontal shears to those elements.
The overturning moments at Level x, Mx (kip-ft or kN-m) shall be determined from the following
equation:
M x = F i ( hi h x )
n
i= x
(Alt.4.6-4)
where:
Fi = the portion of the seismic base shear, V, induced at Level i, and
hi and hx = the height (ft or m) from the base to Level i or x.
The foundations of structures shall be designed for 75% of the foundation overturning design moment, Mf
(kip-ft or kN-m) at the foundation-soil interface.
Alt. 4.6.5 Drift Limits and Building Separation. Structural drift need not be calculated. When a drift
value is needed for use in material standards to determine structural separations between buildings, for
design of cladding, or for other design requirements, it shall be taken as 1% of building height. All
portions of the structure shall be designed to act as an integral unit in resisting seismic forces unless
separated structurally by a distance sufficient to avoid damaging contact under the total deflection, X,, as
defined in Sec 5.2.6.1.
81
82
Chapter 5
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS PROCEDURES
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope. This chapter provides minimum requirements for the structural analysis procedures
prescribed in Sec. 4.4.1. If the alternate design procedure of Alternative Simplified Chapter 4 is used,
this chapter does not apply.
5.1.2 Definitions
Base: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Base shear: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Building: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Eccentrically braced frame (EBF): See Sec. 4.1.3.
Inverted pendulum-type structures: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Maximum considered earthquake ground motion: See Sec. 3.1.3.
Moment frame: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Nominal strength: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Occupancy importance factor: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Partition: A nonstructural interior wall that spans from floor to ceiling, to the floor or roof structure
immediately above, or to subsidiary structural members attached to the structure above.
P-delta effect: The secondary effect on shears and moments of structural members induced due to
displacement of the structure.
Registered design professional: See Sec. 2.1.3.
Required strength: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Seismic response coefficient: Coefficient CS as determined in Sec. 5.2.2.1.
83

Story shear: The summation of design lateral forces at levels above the story under consideration.
5.1.3 Notation
Ao
The area of the load-carrying foundation.
AB
The base area of the structure.
Ai
The area of shear wall i.
Ax
The torsional amplification factor.
ad
The incremental factor related to P-delta effects in Sec. 5.2.6.2.
Cd
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Cr
The approximate period coefficient given in Sec. 5.2.2.1.
CS
The seismic response coefficient.
CSm
The modal seismic response coefficient determined in Sec. 5.3.4.
Cu
Coefficient for upper limit on calculated period given in Table 5.2-1.
Cvx
The vertical distribution factor given in Sec. 5.2.3.
Cvxm
The vertical distribution factor in the mth mode given in Sec. 5.3.5.
Cw
The effective shear wall area coefficient defined in Sec. 5.2.2.1.
Ds
The total depth of the stratum in Eq. 5.6-10.
Fi
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Fx
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Fxm
The portion of the seismic base shear, Vm, induced at a Level x as determined in Sec. 5.3.5.
vs2/g = the average shear modulus for the soils beneath the foundation at large strain levels.
Go
vso2/g = the average shear modulus for the soils beneath the foundation at small strain levels.
hi
The height above the base to Level i.
hn
The height above the base to the highest level of the structure.
hx
The height above the base to Level x.
The effective height of the structure as defined in Sec. 5.6.2.1.1.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Io
The static moment of inertia of the load-carrying foundation, see Sec. 5.6.2.1.1.
The distribution exponent given in Sec. 5.2.3.
The stiffness of the fixed-base structure as defined in Sec. 5.6.2.1.1.
Ky
The lateral stiffness of the foundation as defined in Sec. 5.6.2.1.1.
The rocking stiffness of the foundation as defined in Sec. 5.6.2.1.1.
Li
The length of shear wall i.
L0
The overall length of the side of the foundation in the direction being analyzed, Sec. 5.6.2.1.2.
M0, M01 The overturning moment at the foundation-soil interface as determined in Sec. 5.2.5 and 5.3.6.
84
Structural Analysis Procedures
Mt
The torsional moment resulting from the location of the building masses, Sec. 5.2.4.1.
Mta
The accidental torsional moment as determined in Sec. 5.2.4.2.
A subscript denoting the mode of vibration under consideration; i.e., m=1 for the fundamental
mode.
Number of stories.
Px
The total unfactored vertical design load at and above level x.
QE
See Sec. 4.1.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
ra
The characteristic foundation length defined by Eq. 5.6-7.
rm
The characteristic foundation length as defined by Eq. 5.6-8.
S1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
Sam
The design spectral response acceleration at the period corresponding to mode m.
SD1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
T%
The effective period of the flexibly supported structure as determined by Eq. 5.6-3.
Ta
The approximate fundamental period of the building as determined in Sec. 5.2.2.1.
Tm
The period of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest.
The total design shear at the base of the structure in the direction of interest, as determined
using the procedure of Sec. 5.2, including Sec. 5.2.1.
V1
The portion of seismic base shear, V, contributed by the fundamental mode.
Vt
The design value of the seismic base shear as determined in Sec. 5.3.7.
Vx
The seismic design shear in Story x.
V%
The total design base shear including consideration of soil-structure interaction.
The reduction in V as determined in Sec. 5.6.2.1.
V1
The reduction of V1 as determined in Sec. 5.6.3.1.
vs
See Sec. 3.1.4.
vso
The average shear wave velocity for the soils beneath the foundation at small strain levels.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
The effective seismic weight as defined in Sec. 5.6.2.1 and 5.6.3.1.
Wm
The effective seismic weight of the mth mode of vibration of the structure determined in
accordance with Eq. 5.3-2.
wi
See Sec. 4.1.4.
wx
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Level x See Sec. 1.1.5.
The relative weight density of the structure and the soil as determined in Sec. 5.6.2.1.1.
85
The dynamic foundation stiffness modifier for rocking (see Commentary).
The fraction of critical damping for the coupled structure-foundation system, determined in
Sec. 5.6.2.1.2.
The foundation damping factor as specified in Sec. 5.6.2.1.2.
The average unit weight of soil.
The member inelastic deformations.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
%m
The modal story drift including the effects of soil-structure interaction.
avg
The average of the displacements at the extreme points of the structure at Level x.
max
The maximum displacement at Level x.
xm
The modal deflection of Level x at the center of the mass at and above Level x, as determined
by Eq. 5.3-8.
x1
The modified modal deflections (for the first mode) as determined by Eq. 5.6-14.
xm
The modified modal deflections (for mode m) as determined by Eq. 5.6-15.
The stability coefficient for P-delta effects as determined in Sec. 5.2.6.2.
max
The maximum permitted stability coefficient as determined by Eq. 5.2-17.
The overturning moment reduction factor.
The strength reduction, capacity reduction, or resistance factor.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
5.2 EQUIVALENT LATERAL FORCE PROCEDURE

An equivalent lateral force analysis shall consist of the application of equivalent static lateral forces to a
linear mathematical model of the structure. The lateral forces applied in each direction shall sum to a
total seismic base shear given by Sec. 5.2.1 and shall be distributed vertically in accordance with Sec.
5.2.3. For purposes of analysis, the structure shall be considered fixed at the base.
5.2.1 Seismic base shear. The seismic base shear, V, in a given direction shall be determined in
accordance with the following equation:
V = CsW
(5.2-1)
where:
Cs =
the seismic response coefficient determined in accordance with Sec. 5.2.1.1 and
W =
the total dead load and applicable portions of other loads listed below:
1. In areas used for storage, a minimum of 25 percent of the floor live load shall be
applicable. Floor live load in public garages and open parking structures is not
applicable.
2. Where an allowance for partition load is included in the floor load design, the actual
partition weight or a minimum weight of 10 psf (0.500 kN/m2) of floor area, whichever
is greater, shall be applicable.
3. Total operating weight of permanent equipment.
86

4. In areas where the design flat roof snow load does not exceed 30 pounds per square
foot, the effective snow load is permitted to be taken as zero. In areas where the design
snow load is greater than 30 psf (1.4 kN/m2), where siting and load duration conditions
warrant, and where approved by the authority having jurisdiction, the effective snow
load is permitted to be reduced to not less than 20 percent of the design snow load.
5.2.1.1 Calculation of seismic response coefficient. The seismic response coefficient, Cs, shall be
determined in accordance with the following equation:
Cs =
S DS
R I
(5.2-2)
where:
SDS =
the design spectral response acceleration parameter in the short period range as determined
from Sec. 3.3.3,
the response modification factor from Table 4.3-1, and
the occupancy importance factor determined in accordance with Sec. 1.3.
The value of the seismic response coefficient computed in accordance with Eq. 5.2-2 need not exceed
the following:
Cs =
S D1
forT TL
T (R I )
CS =
S D 1T L
forT > T L
T 2 (R / I )
(5.2-3)
(5.2-4)
where R and I are as defined above and
SD1 =
the design spectral response acceleration parameter at a period of 1.0 second as determined
from Sec. 3.3.3,
the fundamental period of the structure (in seconds) determined in Sec. 5.2.2, and
TL =
Long-period transition period (in seconds) determined in Sec. 3.3.1
Cs shall not be taken less than 0.01.

For buildings and structures located where S1 is equal to or greater than 0.6g, Cs shall not be taken less
than:
Cs =
0.5S1
R I
(5.2-5)
where R and I are as defined above and

S1 =
the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration parameter

determined in accordance with Sec. 3.3.1.
For regular structures 5 stories or less in height and having a period, T, of 0.5 seconds or less, the
seismic response coefficient, Cs, shall be permitted to be calculated using values of 1.5 and 0.6,
respectively, for the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration parameters
SS and S1.
A soil-structure interaction reduction is permitted where determined using Sec. 5.6 or other generally
accepted procedures approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
87

5.2.2 Period determination. The fundamental period of the building, T, in the direction under
consideration shall be established using the structural properties and deformational characteristics of the
resisting elements in a properly substantiated analysis. The fundamental period, T, so calculated, shall
not exceed the product of Cu, from Table 5.2-1, and Ta, calculated in accordance with Sec. 5.2.2.1. As
an alternative to performing an analysis to determine the fundamental period of the structure, T, it shall
be permitted to use the approximate period equations of Sec. 5.2.2.1 directly.
Table 5.2-1 Coefficient for Upper Limit on Calculated Period
Note:
Value of SD1 a
Cu
SD1 0.4
1.4
SD1 = 0.3
1.4
SD1 = 0.2
1.5
SD1 = 0.15
1.6
SD1 0.1
1.7
Use straight line interpolation for intermediate values of SD1.
5.2.2.1 Approximate fundamental period. The approximate fundamental period, Ta, in seconds, shall
be determined from the following equation:
Ta = Cr hn
(5.2-6)
where hn is the height in feet (meters) above the base to the highest level of the structure and the values
of Cr and x shall be determined from Table 5.2-2.
Table 5.2-2 Values of Approximate Period Parameters Cr and x

Structure Type
Cr
Moment resisting frame systems of steel in which the

frames resist 100 percent of the required seismic force and
are not enclosed or adjoined by more rigid components
that will prevent the frames from deflecting where
subjected to seismic forces.
0.028
(metric 0.0724)
0.8
Moment resisting frame systems of reinforced concrete in

which the frames resist 100 percent of the required
seismic force and are not enclosed or adjoined by more
rigid components that will prevent the frames from
deflecting where subjected to seismic forces.
0.016
(metric 0.0466)
0.9
Eccentrically braced steel frames and buckling restrained

braced frames
0.03
(metric 0.0731)
0.75
All other structural systems
0.02
(metric 0.0488)
0.75
88

Alternatively, the approximate fundamental period, Ta, in seconds, is permitted to be determined from
the following equation for concrete and steel moment resisting frame structures not exceeding 12 stories
in height and having a minimum story height of not less than 10 ft (3 m):
Ta = 0.1N
(5.2-7)
where N = number of stories.

The approximate fundamental period, Ta, in seconds, for masonry or concrete shear wall structures is
permitted to be determined from the following equation:
Ta =
0.0019
hn
Cw
(5.2-8)
where Cw is a coefficient related to the effective shear wall area and hn is as defined above. The metric
equivalent of Eq. 5.2-8 is:
Ta =
0.0062
hn
Cw
The coefficient Cw shall be calculated from the following equation:

2
Ai
100 n hn
Cw =

2
AB i =1 hi
hi
1 + 0.83
Li
(5.2-9)
where:
AB =
the base area of the structure,
Ai =
the area of shear wall i,
Li =
the length of shear wall i,
hn =
the height above the base to the highest level of the structure,
hi =
the height of shear wall i, and
the number of shear walls in the building effective in resisting lateral forces in the direction
under consideration.
5.2.3 Vertical distribution of seismic forces. The lateral force, Fx, induced at any level shall be
determined from the following equations:
Fx = CvxV
(5.2-10)
and
Cvx =
wx hxk
(5.2-11)
wi hik
i =1
where:
Cvx
vertical distribution factor,
total design lateral force or shear at the base of the structure,
wi and wx
the portion of the total gravity load of the structure, W, located or assigned to Level
i or x,
89

hi and hx
the height from the base to Level i or x, and
an exponent related to the effective fundamental period of the structure as follows:

For structures having a period of 0.5 seconds or less, k = 1
For structures having a period of 2.5 seconds or more, k = 2
For structures having a period between 0.5 and 2.5 seconds, k shall be determined
by linear interpolation between 1 and 2 or may be taken equal to 2.
5.2.4 Horizontal shear distribution. The seismic design story shear in any story, Vx, shall be
determined from the following equation:
n
Vx = Fi
(5.2-12)
i=x
where Fi = the portion of the seismic base shear, V, induced at Level i.

The seismic design story shear, Vx, shall be distributed to the various vertical elements of the seismicforce-resisting system in the story under consideration based on the relative lateral stiffnesses of the
vertical resisting elements and the diaphragm.
5.2.4.1 Inherent torsion. The distribution of lateral forces at each level shall consider the effect of the
inherent torsional moment, Mt, resulting from eccentricity between the locations of the center of mass
and the center of rigidity.
5.2.4.2 Accidental torsion. In addition to the inherent torsional moment, the distribution of lateral
forces also shall include accidental torsional moments, Mta, caused by an assumed displacement of the
mass each way from its actual location by a distance equal to 5 percent of the dimension of the structure
perpendicular to the direction of the applied forces.
5.2.4.3 Dynamic amplification of torsion. For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D,
E, or F, where Type 1 torsional irregularity exists as defined in Table 4.3-2, the effects of torsional
irregularity shall be accounted for by multiplying the sum of Mt plus Mta at each level by a torsional
amplification factor, Ax, determined from the following equation:

Ax = max
1.2
avg
where:
max
the maximum displacement at Level x, and
avg
the average of the displacements at the extreme points of the structure at Level x.
(5.2-13)
The torsional amplification factor, Ax, is not required to exceed 3.0. The more severe loading for each
element shall be considered for design.
5.2.5 Overturning. The structure shall be designed to resist overturning effects caused by the seismic
forces determined in Sec. 5.2.3. At any story, the increment of overturning moment in the story under
consideration shall be distributed to the various vertical force resisting elements in the same proportion
as the distribution of the horizontal shears to those elements.
The overturning moments at Level x, Mx, shall be determined from Eq. 5.2-14 as follows:
n
M x = Fi ( hi hx )
i=x
where:
90
(5.2-14)

Fi
the portion of the seismic base shear, V, induced at Level i, and
hi and hx
the height from the base to Level i or x.
The foundations of structures, except inverted pendulum-type structures, shall be permitted to be

designed for three-fourths of the foundation overturning design moment, M0, determined using Eq. 5.214 at the foundation-soil interface.
5.2.6 Drift determination and P-delta limit. Story drifts shall be determined in accordance with this
section. Determination of story drifts shall be based on the application of the design seismic forces to a
mathematical model of the physical structure. The model shall include the stiffness and strength of all
elements that are significant to the distribution of forces and deformations in the structure and shall
represent the spatial distribution of the mass and stiffness of the structure. In addition, the model shall
comply with the following:
1. Stiffness properties of reinforced concrete and masonry elements shall consider the effects of
cracked sections and
2. For steel moment resisting frame systems, the contribution of panel zone deformations to overall
story drift shall be included.
5.2.6.1 Story drift determination. The design story drift, , shall be computed as the difference of the
deflections at the center of mass at the top and bottom of the story under consideration.
Exception: For structures of Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F having plan irregularity
Type 1a or 1b of Table 4.3-2, the design story drift, , shall be computed as the largest
difference of the deflections along any of the edges of the structure at the top and bottom of the
story under consideration.
The deflections of Level x, x, shall be determined in accordance with following equation:
x =
Cd xe
I
(5.2-15)
where:
Cd
the deflection amplification factor from Table 4.3-1,
xe
the deflections determined by an elastic analysis, and
the occupancy importance factor determined in accordance with Sec. 1.3.
The elastic analysis of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be made using the prescribed seismic
design forces of Sec. 5.2.3.
For determining compliance with the story drift limits of Sec. 4.5.1, it shall be permitted to determine
the elastic drifts, xe, using seismic design forces based on the computed fundamental period of the
structure without the upper limit (CuTa) specified in Sec. 5.2.2.
Where nonlinear analysis is required by Sec. 5.2.6.2 and the nonlinear static procedure is used, the
design story drift, , shall be determined according to Sec. A5.2.4.
5.2.6.2 P-delta limit. stability coefficient, , as determined for each level of the structure by the
following equation, shall not exceed 0.10:
Px I
Vx hsx Cd
(5.2-16)
where:
91

Px
the total vertical design load at and above Level x. Where calculating the vertical
design load for purposes of determining P-delta effects, the individual load factors need
not exceed 1.0.
the design story drift calculated in accordance with Sec. 5.2.6.1.
= the occupancy importance factor determined in accordance with Sec.1.3
Vx
the seismic shear force acting between Level x and x - 1.
hsx
the story height below Level x.
Cd
the deflection amplification factor from Table 4.3-1.
Exception: The stability coefficient , shall be permitted to exceed 0.10 if the resistance to lateral
forces is determined to increase continuously in a monotonic nonlinear static (pushover) analysis
to the target displacement as determined in Sec. A5.2.3. P-delta effects shall be included in the
analysis.
5.3 RESPONSE SPECTRUM PROCEDURE

A modal response spectrum analysis shall consist of the analysis of a linear mathematical model of the
structure to determine the maximum accelerations, forces, and displacements resulting from the dynamic
response to ground shaking represented by the design response spectrum. The analysis shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements of this section. For purposes of analysis, the structure
shall be permitted to be considered to be fixed at the base or, alternatively, it shall be permitted to use
realistic assumptions with regard to the stiffness of foundations. The symbols used in this section have
the same meaning as those for similar terms used in Sec. 5.2 but with the subscript m denoting quantities
relating to the mth mode.
5.3.1 Modeling. A mathematical model of the structure shall be constructed that represents the spatial
distribution of mass and stiffness throughout the structure. For regular structures with independent
orthogonal seismic-force-resisting systems, independent two-dimensional models are permitted to be
constructed to represent each system. For irregular structures or structures without independent
orthogonal systems, a three-dimensional model incorporating a minimum of three dynamic degrees of
freedom consisting of translation in two orthogonal plan directions and torsional rotation about the
vertical axis shall be included at each level of the structure. Where the diaphragms are not rigid
compared to the vertical elements of the lateral-force-resisting system, the model should include
representation of the diaphragms flexibility and such additional dynamic degrees of freedom as are
required to account for the participation of the diaphragm in the structures dynamic response. In
addition, the model shall comply with the following:
1. Stiffness properties of concrete and masonry elements shall consider the effects of cracked sections
and
2. The contribution of panel zone deformations to overall story drift shall be included for steel moment
frame resisting systems.
5.3.2 Modes. An analysis shall be conducted to determine the natural modes of vibration for the
structure including the period of each mode, the modal shape vector , the modal participation factor,
and modal mass. The analysis shall include a sufficient number of modes to obtain a combined modal
mass participation of at least 90 percent of the actual mass in each of two orthogonal directions.
5.3.3 Modal properties. The required periods, mode shapes, and participation factors of the structure
shall be calculated by established methods of structural analysis for the fixed-base condition using the
masses and elastic stiffnesses of the seismic-force-resisting system.
5.3.4 Modal base shear. The portion of the base shear contributed by the mth mode, Vm, shall be
determined from the following equations:
92

Vm = CsmWm
(5.3-1)
n w
i im
Wm = i =n1
2
wi im
(5.3-2)
i =1
where:
Csm
the modal seismic response coefficient as determined in this section,
Wm
the effective modal gravity load including portions of the live load as defined in Sec.
5.2.1,
wi
the portion of the total gravity load of the structure at Level i, and
im
the displacement amplitude at the ith level of the structure where vibrating in its mth
mode.
The modal seismic response coefficient, Csm, shall be determined in accordance with the following
equation:
Csm =
Sam
R I
(5.3-3)
where:
Sam
The design spectral response acceleration at period Tm determined from either Sec. 3.3.4
or Sec. 3.4.4,
the response modification factor determined from Table 4.3-1,
the occupancy importance factor determined in accordance with Sec. 1.3, and
Tm
the modal period of vibration (in seconds) of the mth mode of the structure.
Exceptions:
1. Where the standard design response spectrum of Sec. 3.3.4 is used for structures on Site
Class D, E or F soils, the modal seismic design coefficient, Csm, for modes other than the
fundamental mode that have periods less than 0.3 seconds is permitted to be determined by
the following equation:
Csm =
0.4S DS
(1 + 5Tm )
R I
(5.3-4)
where SDS is as defined in Sec. 3.3.3 and R, I, and Tm are as defined above.
2. Where the standard design response spectrum of Sec. 3.3.4 is used for structures where any
modal period of vibration, Tm, exceeds TL, the modal seismic design coefficient, Csm, for that
mode is permitted to be determined by the following equation:
C sm =
S D1T L
R
( I ) T 2m
(5.3-5)
where R, I, and Tm are as defined above and SD1 is the design spectral response
acceleration parameter at a period of 1 second as determined in Sec. 3.3.3. and TL is the
Long-period transition period as defined in Sec. 3.3.4.
93

The reduction due to soil-structure interaction as determined in Sec. 5.6.3 shall be permitted to be used.
5.3.5 Modal forces, deflections, and drifts. The modal force, Fxm, at each level shall be determined by
the following equations:
Fxm = CvxmVm
(5.3-6)
and
Cvxm =
wx xm
n
wiim
(5.3-7)
i =1
where:
Cvsm
the vertical distribution factor in the mth mode,
Vm
the total design lateral force or shear at the base in the mth mode,
wi, wx =
the portion of the total gravity load, W, located or assigned to Level i or x,
xm
the displacement amplitude at the xth level of the structure where vibrating in its mth
mode, and
im
the displacement amplitude at the ith level of the structure where vibrating in its mth
mode.
The modal deflection at each level, xm, shall be determined by the following equations:
xm =
Cd xem
I
(5.3-8)
and
2
g T F
xem = 2 m xm
4 wx
(5.3-9)
where:
Cd
the deflection amplification factor determined from Table 4.3-1,
xem
the deflection of Level x in the mth mode at the center of the mass at Level x determined
by an elastic analysis,
the acceleration due to gravity,
the occupancy importance factor determined in accordance with Sec. 1.3,
Tm
the modal period of vibration, in seconds, of the mth mode of the structure,
Fxm
the portion of the seismic base shear in the mth mode, induced at Level x, and
wx
the portion of the total gravity load of the structure, W, located or assigned to Level x.
The modal drift in a story, m, shall be computed as the difference of the deflections, xm, at the top and
bottom of the story under consideration.
5.3.6 Modal story shears and moments. The story shears, story overturning moments, and the shear
forces and overturning moments in vertical elements of the structural system at each level due to the
seismic forces determined from the appropriate equation in Sec. 5.3.5 shall be computed for each mode
by linear static methods.
5.3.7 Design values. The design value for the modal base shear, Vt; each of the story shear, moment,
and drift quantities; and the deflection at each level shall be determined by combining their modal
94

values as obtained from Sec. 5.3.5 and 5.3.6. The combination shall be carried out by taking the square
root of the sum of the squares of each of the modal values or by the complete quadratic combination
technique. The complete quadratic combination shall be used where closely spaced periods in the
translational and torsional modes will result in cross-correlation of the modes.
A base shear, V, shall be calculated using the equivalent lateral force procedure in Sec. 5.2. For the
purpose of this calculation, the fundamental period of the structure, T, in seconds, shall not exceed the
coefficient for upper limit on the calculated period, Cu, times the approximate fundamental period of the
structure, Ta. Where the design value for the modal base shear, Vt, is less than 85 percent of the
calculated base shear, V, using the equivalent lateral force procedure, the design story shears, moments,
drifts, and floor deflections shall be multiplied by the following modification factor:
0.85
V
Vt
(5.3-10)
where:
V
Vt =
the equivalent lateral force procedure base shear calculated in accordance with this section
and Sec. 5.2 and
the modal base shear calculated in accordance with this section.
Where soil-structure interaction is considered in accordance with Sec. 5.6, the value of V may be taken
as the reduced value of V.
5.3.8 Horizontal shear distribution. The distribution of horizontal shear shall be in accordance with
the requirements of Sec. 5.2.4 except that amplification of torsion per Sec. 5.2.4.3 is not required for
that portion of the torsion included in the dynamic analysis model.
5.3.9 Foundation overturning. The foundation overturning moment at the foundation-soil interface
shall be permitted to be reduced by 10 percent.
5.3.10 P-delta effects. The P-delta effects shall be determined in accordance with Sec. 5.2.6. The
story drifts and story shears shall be determined in accordance with Sec. 5.2.6.1.
5.4 LINEAR RESPONSE HISTORY PROCEDURE

A linear response history analysis shall consist of an analysis of a linear mathematical model of the
structure to determine its response, through methods of numerical integration, to suites of ground
motion acceleration histories compatible with the design response spectrum for the site. The analysis
shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of this section. For the purposes of analysis, the
structure shall be permitted to be considered to be fixed at the base or, alternatively, it shall be permitted
to use realistic assumptions with regard to the stiffness of foundations.
5.4.1 Modeling. Mathematical models shall conform to the requirements of Sec. 5.3.1.
5.4.2 Ground motion. A suite of not fewer than three appropriate ground motions shall be used in the
analysis. Ground motion shall conform to the requirements of this section.
5.4.2.1 Two-dimensional analysis. Where two-dimensional analyses are performed, each ground
motion shall consist of a horizontal acceleration history selected from an actual recorded event.
Appropriate acceleration histories shall be obtained from records of events having magnitudes, fault
distance, and source mechanisms that are consistent with those that control the maximum considered
earthquake. Where the required number of appropriate recorded ground motion records are not
available, appropriate simulated ground motion records shall be used to make up the total number
required. The ground motions shall be scaled such that for each period between 0.2T and 1.5T (where T
is the natural period of the structure in the fundamental mode for the direction of response being
analyzed) the average of the five-percent-damped response spectra for the suite of motions is not less
95

than the corresponding ordinate of the design response spectrum, determined in accordance with Sec.
3.3.4 or 3.4.4.
5.4.2.2 Three-dimensional analysis. Where three-dimensional analysis is performed, ground motions
shall consist of pairs of appropriate horizontal ground motion acceleration components that shall be
selected and scaled from individual recorded events. Appropriate ground motions shall be selected from
events having magnitudes, fault distance, and source mechanisms that are consistent with those that
control the maximum considered earthquake. Where the required number of recorded ground motion
pairs are not available, appropriate simulated ground motion pairs shall be used to make up the total
number required. For each pair of horizontal ground motion components, an SRSS spectrum shall be
constructed by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the five-percent-damped response
spectra for the components (where an identical scale factor is applied to both components of a pair).
Each pair of motions shall be scaled such that for each period between 0.2T and 1.5T (where T is the
natural period of the fundamental mode of the structure) the average of the SRSS spectra from all
horizontal component pairs is not less than 1.3 times the corresponding ordinate of the design response
spectrum, determined in accordance with Sec. 3.3.4 or 3.4.4.
5.4.3 Response parameters. For each ground motion analyzed, the individual response parameters
shall be scaled by the quantity I/R where I is the occupancy importance factor determined in accordance
with Sec. 1.3 and R is the response modification coefficient selected in accordance with Sec. 4.3-1. The
maximum value of the base shear, Vi, member forces, QEi, and the interstory drifts, i, at each story
scaled as indicated above shall be determined. Where the maximum scaled base shear predicted by the
analysis, Vi, is less than that given by Eq. 5.2-4 or, in Seismic Design Categories E and F, Eq. 5.2-5, the
scaled member forces, QEi, shall be additionally scaled by the factor V/Vi where V is the minimum base
shear determined in accordance with Eq. 5.2-4 or, for structures in Seismic Design Category E or F, Eq.
5.2-5.
If at least seven ground motions are analyzed, the design member forces, QE, used in the load
combinations of Sec. 4.2.2 and the design interstory drift, , used in the evaluation of drift in
accordance with Sec. 4.5.1 shall be permitted to be taken, respectively, as the average of the scaled QEi
and i values determined from the analyses and scaled as indicated above. If fewer than seven ground
motions are analyzed, the design member forces, QE, and the design interstory drift, , shall be taken as
the maximum value of the scaled QEi and i values determined from the analyses.
Where these Provisions require the consideration of the seismic load effect with overstrength as defined
in Sec. 4.2.2.2, the value of 0QE need not be taken larger than the maximum of the unscaled value, QEi,
obtained from the suite of analyses.
5.5 NONLINEAR RESPONSE HISTORY PROCEDURE

A nonlinear response history analysis shall consist of an analysis of a mathematical model of the
structure that directly accounts for the nonlinear hysteretic behavior of the structures components to
determine its response, through methods of numerical integration, to suites of ground motion
acceleration histories compatible with the design response spectrum for the site. The analysis shall be
performed in accordance with the requirements of this section.
5.5.1 Modeling. A mathematical model of the structure shall be constructed that represents the spatial
distribution of mass throughout the structure. The hysteretic behavior of elements shall be modeled
consistent with suitable laboratory test data and shall account for all significant yielding, strength
degradation, stiffness degradation, and hysteretic pinching indicated by such test data. Strength of
elements shall be based on expected values considering material overstrength, strain hardening, and
hysteretic strength degradation. Linear properties, consistent with the provisions of Section 5.3.1 shall
be permitted to be used for those elements demonstrated by the analysis to remain within their linear
range of response. The structure shall be assumed to have a fixed base or, alternatively, it shall be
96

permitted to use realistic assumptions with regard to the stiffness and load carrying characteristics of the
foundations consistent with site-specific soils data and rational principles of engineering mechanics.
For regular structures with independent orthogonal seismic-force-resisting systems, independent twodimensional models shall be permitted to be constructed to represent each system. For structures having
plan irregularity Type 1a, 1b, 4, or 5 of Table 4.3-2 or structures without independent orthogonal
systems, a three-dimensional model incorporating a minimum of three dynamic degrees of freedom
consisting of translation in two orthogonal plan directions and torsional rotation about the vertical axis
at each level of the structure shall be used. Where the diaphragms are not rigid compared to the vertical
elements of the lateral-force-resisting system, the model shall include representation of the diaphragms
flexibility and such additional dynamic degrees of freedom as are required to account for the
participation of the diaphragm in the structures dynamic response.
5.5.2 Ground motion and other loading. Ground motion shall conform to the requirements of Sec.
5.4.2. The structure shall be analyzed for the effects of these ground motions simultaneously with the
effects of dead load in combination with not less than 25 percent of the required live loads.
5.5.3 Response parameters. For each ground motion analyzed, individual response parameters
consisting of the maximum value of the individual member forces, QEi, member inelastic deformations,
i, and story drifts, i, shall be determined.
If at least seven ground motions are analyzed, the design values of member forces, QE, member inelastic
deformations, , and story drift, , shall be permitted to be taken, respectively, as the average of the
scaled QEi,, i, and i values determined from the analyses. If fewer than seven ground motions are
analyzed, the design member forces, QE, design member inelastic deformations, , and the design story
drift, , shall be taken as the maximum value of the scaled QEi, i, and i values determined from the
analyses.
5.5.3.1 Member strength. The adequacy of members to resist the load combinations of Sec 4.2.2 need
not be evaluated.
Exception: Where the Provisions require the consideration of the seismic load effect with
overstrength, determined in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.2, the maximum value of QEi obtained
from the suite of analyses shall be taken in place of the quantity 0QE.
5.5.3.2 Member deformation. The adequacy of individual members and their connections to
withstand the design deformations, , predicted by the analyses shall be evaluated based on laboratory
test data for similar components. The effects of gravity and other loads on member deformation
capacity shall be considered in these evaluations. Member deformation shall not exceed two thirds of
the lesser of: the value that results in loss of ability to carry gravity loads or the value at which member
strength has deteriorated to less than the 67 percent of the peak strength.
5.5.3.3 Story drift. The design story drifts, , obtained from the analyses shall not exceed 125 percent
of the drift limit specified in Sec. 4.5.1.
5.5.4 Design review. A review of the design of the seismic-force-resisting system and the supporting
structural analyses shall be performed by an independent team consisting of registered design
professionals in the appropriate disciplines and others with experience in seismic analysis methods and
the theory and application of nonlinear seismic analysis and structural behavior under extreme cyclic
loads. The design review shall include, but need not be limited to, the following:
1. Review of any site-specific seismic criteria employed in the analysis including the development of
site-specific spectra and ground motion time histories,
2. Review of acceptance criteria used to demonstrate the adequacy of structural elements and systems
to withstand the calculated force and deformation demands, together with laboratory and other data
used to substantiate such criteria,
97

3. Review of the preliminary design including the determination of the target displacement of the
structure and the margins remaining beyond these displacements, and
4. Review of the final design of the entire structural system and all supporting analyses.
5.6 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION EFFECTS

5.6.1 General. The requirements set forth in this section are permitted to be used to incorporate the
effects of soil-structure interaction in the determination of the design earthquake forces and the
corresponding displacements of the structure when the model used for structural response analysis does
not directly incorporate the effects of foundation flexibility (i.e., the model corresponds to a fixed-base
condition with no foundation springs). The use of these requirements will decrease the design values of
the base shear, lateral forces, and overturning moments but may increase the computed values of the
lateral displacements and the secondary forces associated with the P-delta effects.
The requirements for use with the equivalent lateral force procedure are given in Sec. 5.6.2 and those for
use with the response spectrum procedure are given in Sec. 5.6.3. The provisions in Sec. 5.6 shall not
be used if a flexible-base, rather than a fixed base, foundation is directly modeled in the structural
response analysis.
5.6.2 Equivalent lateral force procedure. The following requirements are supplementary to those
presented in Sec. 5.2.
5.6.2.1 Base shear. To account for the effects of soil-structure interaction, the base shear, V,
determined from Eq. 5.2-1 may be reduced to:
V% = V V
(5.6-1)
where the reduction, V, shall be computed as follows:

0.4
0.05
W
V = Cs C% s
%

where:
(5.6-2)
Cs =
the seismic response coefficient computed from Eq. 5.2-2 using the fundamental natural
period of the fixed-base structure as specified in Sec. 5.2.2,
C% s =
the seismic response coefficient computed from Eq. 5.2-2 using the effective period of the
flexibly supported structure defined in Sec. 5.6.2.1.1,
% =
the fraction of critical damping for the structure-foundation system determined in Sec.
5.6.2.1.2, and
W =
the effective gravity load of the structure, which shall be taken as 0.7W, except that for
structures where the gravity load is concentrated at a single level, it shall be taken equal to
W.
The reduced base shear, V% , shall in no case be taken less than 0.7V.
5.6.2.1.1 Effective building period. The effective period of the flexibly supported structure, T% , shall
be determined as follows:
2
k K y h
~
1+
T = T 1+
K y
K
where:
98
(5.6-3)

T
k =
the fundamental period of the structure as determined in Sec. 5.2.2;

the stiffness of the fixed-base structure, defined by the following:
W
k = 4 2 2
gT
(5.6-4)
h =
the effective height of the structure which shall be taken as 0.7 times the total height, hn,
except that for structures where the gravity load is effectively concentrated at a single level,
it shall be taken as the height to that level;
Ky =
the lateral stiffness of the foundation defined as the horizontal force at the level of the
foundation necessary to produce a unit deflection at that level, the force and the deflection
being measured in the direction in which the structure is analyzed;
K =
the rocking stiffness of the foundation defined as the moment necessary to produce a unit
average rotation of the foundation, the moment and rotation being measured in the direction
in which the structure is analyzed; and
the acceleration due to gravity.
The foundation stiffnesses, Ky and K, shall be computed by established principles of foundation

mechanics (see the Commentary) using soil properties that are compatible with the soil strain levels
associated with the design earthquake motion. The average shear modulus, G, for the soils beneath the
foundation at large strain levels and the associated shear wave velocity, vs, needed in these computations
shall be determined from Table 5.6-1 where:
vso =
the average shear wave velocity for the soils beneath the foundation at small strain levels
(10-3 percent or less),
Go =
v2so/g = the average shear modulus for the soils beneath the foundation at small strain
levels, and
the average unit weight of the soils.
Table 5.6-1 Values of G/Go and vs/vso

SDS/2.5
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.30
Value of G/Go
0.81
0.64
0.49
0.42
Value of vs/vso
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.65
Alternatively, for structures supported on mat foundations that rest at or near the ground surface or are
embedded in such a way that the side wall contact with the soil cannot be considered to remain effective
during the design ground motion, the effective period of the structure may be determined from:
25 ra h 1.12ra h 2
T% = T 1 +
1 +
vs2T 2
rm3
(5.6-5)
where:
the relative weight density of the structure and the soil, defined by:
99
W
A0 h
=
ra and rm
(5.6-6)
characteristic foundation lengths, defined by:
ra =
A0
(5.6-7)
and
rm = 4
4I0
(5.6-8)
where:
Ao = the area of the foundation,
Io
= the static moment of the foundation about a horizontal centroidal axis normal to the
direction in which the structure is analyzed, and
= dynamic foundation stiffness modifier for rocking (see Commentary).

5.6.2.1.2 Effective damping. The effective damping factor for the structure-foundation system, % ,
shall be computed as follows:
= 0 +
0.05
~ 3
T

T

(5.6-9)
where 0 = the foundation damping factor as specified in Figure 5.6-1.

For values of SDS/2.5 between 0.10 and 0.20, values of 0 shall be determined by linear interpolation
between the solid lines and the dashed lines of Figure 5.6-1.
The quantity r in Figure 5.6-1 is a characteristic foundation length that shall be determined as follows:
For
h
0.5, r = ra
L0
For
h
1.0, r = rm
L0
For intermediate values of
h
, r shall be determined by linear interpolation.
L0
where:
100
L0
the overall length of the side of the foundation in the direction being analyzed, and
ra and rm
characteristic foundation lengths, defined in Sec. 5.6.2.1.1.
Figure 5.6-1 Foundation Damping Factor

Exception: For structures supported on point bearing piles and in all other cases where the
foundation soil consists of a soft stratum of reasonably uniform properties underlain by a much
stiffer, rock-like deposit with an abrupt increase in stiffness, the factor o in Eq. 5.6-9 shall be
replaced by:
2
4D
0 = %s 0
vsT
(5.6-10)
4 Ds
~
if vsT <1, where Ds is the total depth of the stratum.
The value of % computed from Eq. 5.6-9, with or without the adjustment represented by Eq. 5.6-10,
shall in no case be taken less than 0.05 or greater than 0.20.
5.6.2.2 Vertical distribution of seismic forces. The distribution over the height of the structure of the
reduced total seismic force, V% , shall be considered to be the same as for the fixed-base structure.
5.6.2.3 Other effects. The modified story shears, overturning moments, and torsional effects about a
vertical axis shall be determined as for structures without interaction using the reduced lateral forces.
The modified deflections, %x , shall be determined as follows:
x =
V M 0 hx
+ x
V K
(5.6-11)
101

where:
M0 =
the overturning moment at the base determined in accordance with Sec. 5.2.5 using the
unmodified seismic forces and not including the reduction permitted in the design of the
foundation,
hx =
the height above the base to the level under consideration, and
x =
the deflections of the fixed-base structure as determined in Sec. 5.2.6.1 using the
unmodified seismic forces.
The modified story drifts and P-delta effects shall be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of
Sec. 5.2.6 using the modified story shears and deflections determined in this section.
5.6.3 Response spectrum procedure. The following requirements are supplementary to those
presented in Sec. 5.3.
5.6.3.1 Modal base shears. To account for the effects of soil-structure interaction, the base shear
corresponding to the fundamental mode of vibration, V1, is permitted to be reduced to:
~
V1 = V1 V1
(5.6-12)
The reduction, V1, shall be computed in accordance with Eq. 5.6-2 with W taken as equal to the
gravity load W1 defined by Eq. 5.3-2, Cs computed from Eq. 5.3-3 using the fundamental period of the
fixed-base structure, T1, and C% computed from Eq. 5.3-3 using the fundamental period of the flexibly
s
supported structure, T%1 .

The period T%1 shall be determined from Eq. 5.6-3, or from Eq. 5.6-5 where applicable, taking T = T%1 ,
evaluating k from Eq. 5.6-4 with W = W1 , and computing h as follows:
n
h=
wii1hi
i =1
n
wii1
i =1
(5.6-13)
The above designated values of W , h , T, and T% also shall be used to evaluate the factor from
Eq. 5.6-6 and the factor o from Figure 5.6-1. No reduction shall be made in the shear components
contributed by the higher modes of vibration. The reduced base shear, V%1 , shall in no case be taken less
than 0.7V1.
5.6.3.2 Other modal effects. The modified modal seismic forces, story shears, and overturning
moments shall be determined as for structures without interaction using the modified base shear, V%1 ,
instead of V1. The modified modal deflections, % , shall be determined as follows:
xm
x1 =
V1 M 0 hx
+ x1
V1 K
(5.6-14)
and
xm = xm for m = 2, 3, K
(5.6-15)
where:
Mo1 =
102
the overturning base moment for the fundamental mode of the fixed-base structure, as
determined in Sec. 5.3.6 using the unmodified modal base shear V1, and

xm
the modal deflections at Level x of the fixed-base structure as determined in Sec. 5.3.5
using the unmodified modal shears, Vm.
The modified modal drift in a story, %m , shall be computed as the difference of the deflections, %xm , at
the top and bottom of the story under consideration.
5.6.3.3 Design values The design values of the modified shears, moments, deflections, and story drifts
shall be determined as for structures without interaction by taking the square root of the sum of the
squares of the respective modal contributions. In the design of the foundation, the overturning moment
at the foundation-soil interface determined in this manner may be reduced by 10 percent as for
structures without interaction.
The effects of torsion about a vertical axis shall be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of
Sec. 5.2.4 and the P-delta effects shall be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 5.2.6.1,
using the story shears and drifts determined in Sec. 5.6.3.2.
103
104
Appendix to Chapter 5
NONLINEAR STATIC PROCEDURE
PREFACE: This appendix addresses nonlinear static analysis, a seismic analysis procedure also
sometimes known as pushover analysis, for review and comment and for adoption into a subsequent
edition of the Provisions.
Although nonlinear static analysis has only recently been included in design provisions for new
building construction, the procedure itself is not new and has been used for many years in both
research and design applications. For example, nonlinear static analysis has been used for many
years as a standard methodology in the design of the offshore platform structures for hydrodynamic
effects and has been adopted recently in several standard methodologies for the seismic evaluation
and rehabilitation of building structures, including the Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for
New Steel Moment-Frame Buildings (FEMA-350, 2000a), Prestandard and Commentary for the
Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings (FEMA 356, 2000b) and Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of
Concrete Buildings (ATC 40, 1996). Nonlinear static analysis forms the basis for earthquake loss
estimation procedures contained in HAZUS (NIBS, 1999), FEMAs nationally applicable
earthquake loss estimation model. Although it does not explicitly appear in the Provisions, the
nonlinear static analysis methodology also forms the basis for the equivalent lateral force
procedures contained in the provisions for base-isolated structures and structures with dampers.
One of the controversies surrounding the introduction of this methodology into the Provisions
relates to the determination of the limit deformation (sometimes called a target displacement).
Several methodologies for estimating the amount of deformation induced in a structure by
earthquake-induced ground shaking have been proposed and are included in various adoptions of
the procedure. The approach presented in this appendix is based on statistical correlations of the
displacements predicted by linear and nonlinear dynamic analyses of structures, which is similar to
that contained in FEMA 356.
A second controversy relates to the limited availability of consensus-based acceptance criteria to be
used to determine the adequacy of a design once the forces and deformations produced by design
earthquake ground shaking are estimated. It should be noted that this limitation applies equally to
the nonlinear response history approach, which already has been adopted into building codes.
Nonlinear static analysis provides a simplified method of directly evaluating nonlinear response of
structures to strong earthquake ground shaking that can be an attractive alternative to the more
complex procedures of nonlinear response history analysis. It is hoped that exposure of this
approach
through inclusion in this appendix will allow the necessary consensus to be developed to permit
later integration into the Provisions as such.
Users of this appendix also should consult the Commentary for guidance. Please direct all feedback
on this appendix and its commentary to the BSSC.
A5.1 GENERAL
A5.1.1 Scope. This appendix provides guidelines for the use of the nonlinear static procedure for the
analysis and design of structures.
A5.1.2 Definitions
105
2003 Provisions, Appendix to Chapter 5

Capacity curve: A plot of the total applied lateral force, Vj, versus the lateral displacement of the
control point, j, as determined in a nonlinear static analysis.
Control point: A point used to index the lateral displacement of the structure in a nonlinear static
analysis, determined according to Sec. 5.2.1.
Effective Yield Displacement: The displacement of the control point at the intersection of the first and
second branches of a bilinear curve that is fitted to the capacity curve according to Sec. A5.2.3.
Effective Yield Strength: The total applied lateral force at the intersection of the first and second
branches of a bilinear curve that is fitted to the capacity curve according to Sec. A5.2.3.
Target displacement: An estimate of the maximum expected displacement of the control point
calculated for the design earthquake ground motion.
A5.1.3 Notation
Cd
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Cs
See Sec. 5.1.3
C0
A modification factor to relate the displacement of the control point to the displacement of a
representative single-degree-of-freedom system, as determined by Eq. A5.2-3.
C1
A modification factor to account for the influence of inelastic behavior on the response of the
system, as determined by Eq. A5.2-4.
acceleration of gravity.
The increment of lateral loading.
QE
See Sec. 4.1.4.
QEi
individual member forces, determined according to Sec. A5.2.9.1
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Rd
The system ductility factor as determined by Eq. A5.2.-5.
Sa
See Sec. 3.1.4.
T1
The fundamental period of the structure in the direction under consideration.
Te
The effective fundamental period of the structure in the direction under consideration, as
determined according to Sec. A5.2.3.
TS
See Sec. 3.1.4.

106
Nonlinear Static Procedure
Vj
The total applied lateral force at load increment j.
V1
The total applied lateral force at the first increment of lateral load.
Vy
The effective yield strength determined from a bilinear curve fitted to the capacity curve
according to Sec. A5.2.3.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
wi
See Sec. 4.1.4.
The design story drift as determined in Sec. A5.2.6.
The deformations for member i.
The displacement of the control point at load increment j.
The target displacement of the control point, determined according to Sec. A5.2.5.
The displacement of the control point at the first increment of lateral load.
The effective yield displacement of the control point determined from a bilinear curve fitted to
the capacity curve according to Sec. A5.2.3.
The amplitude of the shape vector at Level i, determined according to Sec. A5.2.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
A5.2 NONLINEAR STATIC PROCEDURE

Where the nonlinear static procedure is used to design structures, the requirements of this section shall
apply.
A5.2.1 Modeling. A mathematical model of the structure shall be constructed to represent the spatial
distribution of mass and stiffness of the structural system considering the effects of component
nonlinearity for deformation levels that exceed the proportional limit. P-Delta effects shall be included
in the analysis.
For regular structures with independent orthogonal seismic-force-resisting systems, independent twodimensional models shall be permitted to be used to represent each system. For structures having plan
irregularities Types 4 and 5 as defined in Table 4.3-2 or structures without independent orthogonal
systems, a three-dimensional model incorporating a minimum of three degrees of freedom for each level
of the structure, consisting of translation in two orthogonal plan directions and torsional rotation about
the vertical axis, shall be used. Where the diaphragms are not rigid compared to the vertical elements of
the seismic-force-resisting system, the model should include representation of the diaphragm flexibility.
Unless analysis indicates that a component remains elastic, a nonlinear force deformation model shall be
used to represent the stiffness of the component before onset of yield, the yield strength, and the
stiffness properties of the component after yield at various levels of deformation. The properties of
nonlinear component models shall be consistent with principles of mechanics or laboratory data.
Properties representing component behavior before yield shall be consistent with the provisions of
Sec. 5.3.1. Strengths of elements shall not exceed expected values considering material overstrength
and strain hardening. The properties of elements and components after yielding shall account for
strength and stiffness degradation due to softening, buckling, or fracture as indicated by principles of
mechanics or test data. The model for columns should reflect the influence of axial load where axial
loads exceed 15 percent of the compression strength. The structure shall be assumed to have a fixed
base or, alternatively, it shall be permitted to use realistic assumptions with regard to the stiffness and
load-carrying characteristics of the foundations, consistent with site-specific soil data and rational
principles of engineering mechanics.
107

A control point shall be selected for each model. For structures without penthouses, the control point
shall be at the center of mass of the highest level of the structure. For structures with penthouses, the
control point shall be at the center of mass of the level at the base of the penthouse.
A5.2.2 Analysis. The structure shall be analyzed for seismic actions occurring simultaneously with the
effects of dead load in combination with not less than 25 percent of the required design live loads,
reduced as permitted for the area of a single floor. The lateral forces shall be applied at the center of
mass of each level and shall be proportional to the distribution obtained from a modal analysis for the
fundamental mode of response in the direction under consideration. The lateral loads shall be increased
incrementally in a monotonic manner.
At the j-th increment of lateral loading, the total lateral force applied to the model shall be characterized
by the term Vj . The incremental increases in applied lateral force should be in steps that are sufficiently
small to permit significant changes in individual component behavior (such as yielding, buckling or
failure) to be detected. The first increment in lateral loading shall result in linear elastic behavior. At
each analysis step, the total applied lateral force, Vj, the lateral displacement of the control point, j, and
the forces and deformations in each component shall be recorded. The analysis shall be continued until
the displacement of the control point is at least 150 percent of the target displacement determined in
accordance with Sec. A5.2.5. The structure shall be designed so that the total applied lateral force does
not decrease in any analysis increment for control point displacements less than or equal to 125 percent
of the target displacement.
A5.2.3 Effective yield strength and effective period. A bilinear curve shall be fitted to the capacity
curve, such that the first segment of the bilinear curve coincides with the capacity curve at 60 percent of
the effective yield strength, the second segment coincides with the capacity curve at the target
displacement, and the area under the bilinear curve equals the area under the capacity curve, between
the origin and the target displacement. The effective yield strength, Vy, corresponds to the total applied
lateral force at the intersection of the two line segments. The effective yield displacement, y,
corresponds to the control point displacement at the intersection of the two line segments.
The effective fundamental period, Te, shall be determined using Eq. A5.2-1 as follows:
Te = T1
V1 / 1
Vy / y
(A5.2-1)
where V1, 1, and T1 are determined for the first increment of lateral load.
A5.2.4 Shape vector. The shape vector shall be equal to the first mode shape of the structure in the
direction under consideration, determined by a modal analysis of the structure at the first increment of
lateral load, and normalized to have unit amplitude at the level of the control point. It shall be permitted
to substitute the deflected shape of the structure at the step at which the control point displacement is
equal to the effective yield displacement in place of the mode shape, for determination of the shape
vector.
A5.2.5 Target displacement. The target displacement of the control point, T, shall be determined
using Equation A5.2-2 as follows:
2
T
T = C 0 C1 S a e g
2
(A5.2-2)
where the spectral acceleration, Sa, is determined from either Sec. 3.3.4 or Sec. 3.4.4 at the effective
fundamental period, Te, g is the acceleration of gravity, and the coefficients C0 and C1 are determined as
follows.
The coefficient C0 shall be calculated using Equation A5.2-3 as:
108
Nonlinear Static Procedure

n
C0 =
w
i =1
n
i i
(A5.2-3)
w
i =1
2
i i
where:
wi = the portion of the seismic weight, W, at Level i, and
i = the amplitude of the shape vector at Level i.

Where the effective fundamental period of the structure in the direction under consideration, Te, is
greater than Ts, as defined in Sec. 3.3.4 or Sec. 3.4.4, the coefficient C1 shall be taken as 1.0. Otherwise,
the value of the coefficient C1 shall be calculated using Eq. A5.2-4 as follows:
C1 =
1
Rd
( Rd 1)Ts
1 +
Te
(A5.2-4)
where Rd is given by Eq. A5.2-5 as follows:
Rd =
Sa
Vy / W
(A5.2-5)
and Ts and Vy are defined above, Sa is the design spectral acceleration at the effective fundamental
period, Te, and W is defined in Sec. 5.2.
A5.2.6 Story drift. The design story drift, , taken as the value obtained for each story at the step at
which the target displacement is reached shall not exceed the drift limit specified in Sec. 4.5.1
multiplied by 0.85R/Cd.
A5.2.7 Member strength. In addition to satisfying the requirements of this Appendix, member
strengths also shall satisfy the requirements of Sec. 4.2.2 using E = 0, except that Section 4.2.2.2 shall
apply where these Provisions specifically require the consideration of structural overstrength on the
design seismic force.
Where these Provisions require the consideration of structural overstrength according to Sec.
4.2.2.2, the value of the individual member forces, QEi obtained from the analysis at the target
displacement shall be taken in place of the quantity 0QE.
A5.2.8 Distribution of design seismic forces. The lateral forces used for design of the members shall
be applied at the center of mass of each level and shall be proportional to the distribution obtained from
a modal analysis for the fundamental mode of response in the direction under consideration.
A5.2.9 Detailed evaluation. Sec. A5.2.9.1 and Sec. A5.2.9.2 need not be satisfied if the effective yield
strength exceeds the product of the system overstrength factor as given in Table 4.3-1 and the seismic
base shear determined in Sec. 5.2.1, modified to use the effective fundamental period Te in place of T
for the determination of Cs.
A5.2.9.1 Required member force and deformation. For each nonlinear static analysis the design
response parameters, including the individual member forces, QEi, and member deformations, i, shall be
taken as the values obtained from the analysis at the step at which the target displacement is reached.
A5.2.9.2 Member. The adequacy of individual members and their connections to withstand the
member forces, QEi, and member deformations, i, shall be evaluated based on laboratory test data for
similar components. The effects of gravity and other loads on member deformation capacity shall be
considered in these evaluations. The deformation of a member supporting gravity loads shall not exceed
109

(i) two-thirds of the deformation that results in loss of ability to support gravity loads, and (ii) two-thirds
of the deformation at which the member strength has deteriorated to less than the 70 percent of the peak
strength of the component model. The deformation of a member not required for gravity load support
shall not exceed two-thirds of the value at which member strength has deteriorated to less than 70% of
the peak strength of the component model. Alternatively, it shall be permissible to deem member
deformation to be acceptable if the deformation does not exceed the value determined using the
acceptance criteria for nonlinear procedures given in the Prestandard and Commentary for the Seismic
Rehabilitation of Buildings (FEMA 356) for the Life Safety performance level.
Member forces shall be deemed acceptable if not in excess of expected capacities.
A5.2.10 Design review. An independent team composed of at least two members, consisting of
registered design professionals in the appropriate disciplines and others, with experience in seismic
analysis methods and the theory and application of nonlinear seismic analysis and structural behavior
under earthquake loading, shall perform a review of the design of the seismic force resisting system and
the supporting structural analyses. The design review shall include (i) review of any site-specific
seismic criteria employed in the analysis including the development of site-specific spectra, and (ii)
review of the determination of the target displacement and effective yield strength of the structure.
For those structures with effective yield strength less than the product of the system overstrength factor
as given in Table 4.3-1 and the seismic base shear determined in Sec. 5.2.1, modified to use the effective
fundamental period Te in place of T for the determination of Cs, the design review shall further include,
but need not be limited to, the following:
1. Review of acceptance criteria used to demonstrate the adequacy of structural elements and systems
to withstand the calculated force and deformation demands, together with that laboratory and other data
used to substantiate such criteria. Review of the acceptance criteria for nonlinear procedures given in the
Prestandard and Commentary for the Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings (FEMA 356) shall be at the
discretion of the design review team.
2.
Review of the final design of the entire structural system and all supporting analyses.
The design review team shall issue a report that identifies, within the scope of the review, significant
concerns and any departures from general conformance with the Provisions.
REFERENCES
ATC 40 (SSC, 1996) Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Concrete Buildings, SSC Report No. 96-01,
Seismic Safety Commission, State of California, Sacramento, California. Developed by the Applied
Technology Council, Redwood City, California.
FEMA 350 (FEMA, 2000a), Recommended Seismic Design Criteria for New Steel Moment-Frame
Buildings, Federal Emergency Management Agency, Washington, D.C.
FEMA 356 (FEMA, 2000b), Prestandard and Commentary for the Seismic Rehabilitation of Buildings,
Federal Emergency Management Agency, Washington, D.C.
HAZUS (NIBS, 1999), HAZUS99 Technical Manual, National Institute of Building Science,
Washington, D.C. Developed by the Federal Emergency Management Agency through agreements with
the National Institute of Building Sciences.
110
Chapter 6
ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope. This chapter establishes minimum design criteria for nonstructural components that are
permanently attached to structures and for their supports and attachments.
Exception: The following components are exempt from the requirements of this chapter.
1. Architectural components in Seismic Design Category B, other than parapets supported by
bearing walls or shear walls, where the component importance factor, Ip, is equal to 1.0.
2. Mechanical and electrical components in Seismic Design Category B.
3. Mechanical and electrical components in Seismic Design Category C where the importance
factor, Ip, is equal to 1.0.
4. Mechanical and electrical components in Seismic Design Category D, E, or F where the
component importance factor, Ip, is equal to 1.0 and both of the following conditions apply:
a. flexible connections between the components and associated ductwork, piping, and conduit
are provided, and
b. components are mounted at 4 ft (1.22 m) or less above a floor level and weigh 400 lb (1780
N) or less.
5. Mechanical and electrical components in Seismic Design Category C, D, E, or F where the
component importance factor, Ip, is equal to 1.0 and both the following conditions apply:
a. flexible connections between the components and associated ductwork, piping, and conduit
are provided, and
b. the components weigh 20 lb (95 N) or less or, for distribution systems, weigh 5 lb/ft (7
N/m) or less.
Design criteria for storage racks, storage tanks, and nonbuilding structures that are supported by other
structures are provided in Chapter 14.
Where the individual weight of supported components and nonbuilding structures with periods greater
than 0.06 seconds exceeds 25 percent of the total seismic weight W, the structure shall be designed
considering interaction effects between the structure and the supported components.
Testing shall be permitted to be used in lieu of analysis methods outlined in this chapter to determine the
seismic capacity of components and their supports and attachments. Thus, adoption of a nationally
recognized standard, such as AC-156, is acceptable so long as the seismic capacities equal or exceed the
demands determined in accordance with Sec. 6.2.
6.1.2 References
6.1.2.1 Use of Standards. Where a reference standard provides a basis for the earthquake-resistant
design of a particular type of system or component, that standard may be used, subject to the following
conditions:
1. The design earthquake forces shall not be less than those determined in accordance with Sec. 6.2.6.
2. Each components seismic interactions with all other connected components and with the
supporting structure shall be accounted for in the design. The component shall accommodate drifts,
111

deflections, and relative displacements determined in accordance with the applicable sections of the
Provisions
6.1.2.2 Adopted References. The following references are adopted and are to be considered part of
these Provisions to the extent referred to in this chapter:
ASME A17.1
1996.
Safety Code For Elevators And Escalators, American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
ASME B31.1
Power Piping, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2001.
ASME B31.3
Process Piping, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2002.
ASME B31.4
Liquid Transportation Systems for Hydrocarbons, Liquid Petroleum Gas, Anhydrous

Ammonia, and Alcohols, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2002.
ASME B31.5
Refrigeration Piping, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2001.
ASME B31.8
Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems, American Society of Mechanical

Engineers, 1995.
ASME B31.9
Building Services Piping, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1996.
ASME B31.11 Slurry Transportation Piping Systems, American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
1989 (reaffirmed, 1998).
ASME BPV
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, American Society of Mechanical Engineers,

including addenda through 2002.
IEEE-344
Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class I E Equipment for Nuclear

Power Generating Stations, Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, 1987.
NFPA-13
Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems, National Fire Protection Association,
2000, including TIA 02-1 (NFPA 13) (SC 03-7-8 / Log No. 748).
6.1.2.3 Other references. The following references are developed within the industry and represent
acceptable procedures for design and construction:
AAMA 501.6 Recommended Dynamic Test Method for Determining the Seismic Drift Causing Glass
Fallout from a Wall System, American Architectural Manufacturers Association, 2001.
AC-156
Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Nonstructural Components

(AC 156), International Conference of Building Officials Evaluation Service, 2000.
ASHRAE
Handbook, Seismic Restraint Design, American Society of Heating, Ventilating, and

Air Conditioning, 1999.
CISCA 0-2
Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings, Seismic
Zones 0-2, Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association, 1991.
CISCA 3-4
Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings, Seismic
Zones 3-4, Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association, 1991.
SMACNA 95
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association, 1995.
SMACNA 80
Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association, 1980.
SMACNA 98
Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association, 1991, including Appendix B, 1998.
112
Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Component Design Requirements

6.1.3 Definitions
Appendage: An architectural component such as a canopy, marquee, ornamental balcony, or statuary.
Attachments: Means by which components and their supports are secured and connected to the
seismic-force-resisting system of the structure. Such attachments include anchor bolts, welded
connections, and mechanical fasteners.
Construction documents: See Sec. 2.1.3.
Deformability: The ratio of the ultimate deformation to the limit deformation.
Enclosure: An interior space surrounded by walls.
Flexible component: Component, including its attachments, having a fundamental period greater than
0.06 sec.
Glazed curtain wall: A nonbearing wall that extends beyond the edges of the building floor slabs and
includes a glazing material installed in the curtain wall framing.
Glazed partition: A partition that includes a glazing material installed in its framing.
Glazed storefront: A nonbearing wall that is installed between floor slabs, typically including
entrances, and includes a glazing material installed in the storefront framing.
Grade plane: A reference plane representing the average of the finished ground level adjoining the
structure at the exterior walls. Where the finished ground level slopes away from the exterior walls, the
reference plane shall be established by the lowest points within the area between the buildings and the
lot line or, where the lot line is more than 6 ft (1829 mm) from the structure between the structure and a
point 6 ft (1829 mm) from the structure.
Hazardous material: See Sec. 1.1.4.
High deformability element: An element whose deformability is not less than 3.5 when subjected to
four fully reversed cycles at the limit deformation.
Limit deformation: Two times the initial deformation that occurs at a load equal to 40 percent of the
maximum strength.
Limited deformability element: An element that is neither a low deformability nor a high
deformability element.
Low deformability element: An element whose deformability is 1.5 or less.
Nonbearing wall: An exterior or interior wall that does not provide support for vertical loads other
than its own weight or as permitted by the building code administered by the authority having
jurisdiction.
Nonbuilding structure: See Sec. 14.1.3.
Nonstructural wall: All walls other than bearing walls or shear walls.
Owner: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Partition: See Sec. 5.1.2.
Rigid component: Component, including its attachments, having a fundamental period less than or
equal to 0.06 sec.
113

Special inspector: See Sec. 2.1.3.
Supports: Those structural members, assemblies of members, or manufactured elements, including
braces, frames, legs, lugs, snuggers, hangers, saddles, or struts, that transmit loads between the
nonstructural components and the structure.
Ultimate deformation: The deformation at which failure occurs and which shall be deemed to occur if
sustainable load reduces to 80 percent or less of the maximum strength.
Utility or service interface: The connection of the structures mechanical and electrical distribution
systems to the utility or service companys distribution system.
6.1.4 Notation
The torsional amplification factor determined using Eq. 5.2-13
Ax
ai
Acceleration at Level i obtained by modal analysis.
ap
The component amplification factor selected, as appropriate, from Table 6.3-1 or 6.4-1.
bp
The width of the rectangular glass.
c1
The clearance (gap) between vertical glass edges and the frame.
c2
The clearance (gap) between horizontal glass edges and the frame.
Dclear
The relative horizontal (drift) displacement, measured over the height of the glass panel under
consideration, which causes initial glass-to-frame contact. For rectangular glass panels within a
rectangular wall frame, Dclear is given by Eq. 6.3-2.
Dp
Relative seismic displacement that the component must be designed to accommodate as defined
in Sec. 6.2.7.
Fp
The seismic design force applicable to a particular nonstructural component.
Acceleration due to gravity.
The average roof height of structure above the base.
hp
The height of the rectangular glass.
hsx
Story height used in the definition of the allowable drift,)a, in Table 4.5-1. Note that )a/hsx is
the allowable drift index.
Ip
The component importance factor as prescribed in Sec. 6.2.2.
Kp
The stiffness of the system comprising the component and its supports and attachments,
determined in terms of load per unit deflection at the center of gravity of the component.
QE
The effect of horizontal seismic forces. See Sec. 4.1.4.
Response modification coefficient. See Sec. 4.1.4.
Rp
The component response modification factor selected, as appropriate, from Table 6.3-1 or 6.4-1.
SD1
The design, 5-percent-damped, spectral response acceleration parameter at a period of 1 second

as defined in Sec. 3.3.3.
114

SDS
The short period spectral acceleration parameter, determined in Sec. 3.3.3.
Tp
The fundamental period of a component (including its supports and attachments) as defined in
Sec. 6.4.1.
Wp
Operating weight of a nonstructural component.
Height above the base of the upper support attachment (at level x).
Height above the base of lower support attachment (at level y).
The height above the base of the point of attachment of the component, but z shall not be taken
less than 0 and the value of z/h need not exceed 1.0.
aA
Allowable story drift for structure A, as defined in Table 4.5-1.
aB
Allowable story drift for structure B, as defined in Table 4.5-1.
fallout The relative seismic displacement (drift) at which glass fallout from the curtain wall, storefront
xA
or partition occurs.
Deflection at level x of structure A, determined in accordance with Sec. 5.2.6, 5.3.5, or 5.4.3.
yA
Deflection at level y of structure A, determined in accordance with Sec. 5.2.6, 5.3.5, or 5.4.3.
yB
Deflection at level y of structure B, determined in accordance with Sec. 5.2.6, 5.3.5, or 5.4.3.
The redundancy factor as defined in Sec. 4.3.3.
6.2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Nonstructural components shall satisfy the requirements of this section. In addition to these general
requirements, the requirements indicated in Table 6.2-1 shall apply.
Table 6.2-1 Additional Requirements for Nonstructural Components
Provisions Reference
Component Type
Quality
Assurance
Design
Architectural components, including their supports

and attachments
2.3.9
6.3
Mechanical and electrical components, including

their supports and attachments
2.3.10
2.4.5
6.4
6.2.1 Seismic Design Category. For the purposes of this chapter, components shall be assigned to the
same Seismic Design Category as the structure that they occupy or to which they are attached.
6.2.2 Component importance factor. All components shall be assigned a component importance
factor as indicated in this section. The component importance factor, Ip, shall be taken as 1.5 if any of
the following conditions apply:
1. The component is required to function after an earthquake,
2. The component contains hazardous materials, or
3. The component is in or attached to a Seismic Use Group III structure and it is needed for continued
operation of the facility or its failure could impair the continued operation of the facility.
All other components shall be assigned a component importance factor, Ip, equal to 1.0.
115

6.2.3 Consequential damage. The functional and physical interrelationship of components and their
effect on each other shall be considered so that the failure of an essential or nonessential architectural,
mechanical, or electrical component shall not cause the failure of an essential architectural, mechanical,
or electrical component.
6.2.4 Flexibility. The design and evaluation of components, supports, and attachments shall consider
their flexibility as well as their strength.
6.2.5 Component force transfer. Components shall be attached such that the component forces are
transferred to the structure. Component attachments that are intended to resist seismic forces shall be
bolted, welded, or otherwise positively fastened without consideration of frictional resistance produced
by the effects of gravity. A continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness between the
component and the supporting structure shall be verified. Local elements of the supporting structure
shall be designed for the component forces where such forces control the design of the elements or their
connections. In this instance, the component forces shall be those determined in Section 6.2.6, except
that modifications to Fp and Rp due to anchorage conditions need not be considered. The design
documents shall include sufficient information concerning the attachments to verify compliance with the
requirements of these Provisions.
6.2.6 Seismic forces. The seismic design force, Fp, applied in the horizontal direction shall be centered
at the components center of gravity and distributed relative to the component's mass distribution and
shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 6.2-1 as follows:
Fp =
0.4a p S DSW p
z
1 + 2
Rp I p
h
(6.2-1)
Exception: If the component period, Tp , is greater than Tflx where Tflx = (1 + 0.25 z/h) SD1 /SDS , the
value of Fp may be reduced by the ratio of Tflx / Tp.
In lieu of the forces determined in accordance with Eq. 6.2-1, accelerations at any level may be
determined by the response spectrum procedure of Sec. 5.3 with R equal to 1.0, in which case seismic
forces shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 6.2-2 as follows:
Fp = Ax
ai a pW p
Rp I p
(6.2-2)
Fp is not required to be taken as greater than:

Fp = 1.6S DS I pW p
(6.2-3)
Exception: If the component period, Tp , is greater than Tflx where Tflx = (1 + 0.25 z/h) SD1 /SDS ,
the upper limit value of Fp may be reduced by the ratio of Tflx / Tp.
and Fp shall not be taken as less than:

Fp = 0.3S DS I pW p
(6.2-4)
The force Fp shall be independently applied in each of two orthogonal horizontal directions in
combination with service loads. In addition, the nonstructural component shall be designed for a
concurrent vertical force 0.2SDS Wp. The reliability/redundancy factor, , and the overstrength factor
o are not applicable.
Where wind loads on nonstructural exterior walls or building code horizontal loads on interior partitions
exceed Fp, such loads shall govern the strength design, but the detailing requirements and limitations
prescribed in this chapter shall apply.
6.2.6.1 Allowable Stress Design. Where an adopted reference provides a basis for the earthquakeresistant design of a particular type of system or component, and the same reference defines acceptance
116

criteria in terms of allowable stresses rather than strengths, that reference shall be permitted to be used.
The allowable stress load combination shall consider dead, live, operating, and earthquake loads. The
earthquake loads determined in accordance with the Provisions shall be multiplied by a factor of 0.7.
The allowable stress design load combinations of ASCE 7 need not be used. The component or system
shall also accommodate the relative displacements specified in Section 6.2.7.
6.2.6.2 Seismic Design Force. The seismic design force, Fp, shall be centered at the components
center of gravity and distributed relative to the component's mass distribution and shall be determined in
6.2.7 Seismic relative displacements. The relative seismic displacements, Dp, for use in component
design shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 6.2-5 as follows:
D p = xA yA
(6.2-5)
Dp is not required to be taken greater than:

Dp = ( X Y )
aA
(6.2-6)
hsx
For two connection points on separate structures, A and B, or separate structural systems, one at level x
and the other at level y, Dp shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 6.2-7 as follows:
D p = xA + yB
(6.2-7)
Dp is not required to be taken as greater than:

Dp =
X aA Y aB
+
hsx
hsx
(6.2-8)
The effects of relative seismic displacement shall be considered in combination with displacement
caused by other loads as appropriate.
6.2.8 Component anchorage. Components shall be anchored in accordance with the requirements of
this section and the anchorage shall satisfy the requirements for the parent material as set forth
elsewhere in these Provisions.
6.2.8.1 Design forces. The forces in the connected part shall be determined based on the prescribed
forces for the component specified in Sec. 6.2.6. The value of Rp used in Sec. 6.2.6 to determine the
forces in the connected part shall not exceed 1.5 unless:
a. The component anchorage is designed to be governed by the strength of a ductile steel element, or
b. The design of anchors in concrete used for the component anchorage is based on Sec. 9.6.4.4.3
whereby post-installed anchors shall be pre-qualified for seismic applications per ACI 355.2-01.
6.2.8.2 Anchors in concrete or masonry. Anchors embedded in concrete or masonry shall be
proportioned to carry the least of the following:
1. The design strength of the connected part,

2. 1.3 times the force in the connected part due to the prescribed forces, and
3. The maximum force that can be transferred to the connected part by the component structural
system.
6.2.8.3 Installation conditions. Determination of forces in anchors shall take into account the
expected conditions of installation including eccentricities and prying effects.
117

6.2.8.4 Multiple anchors. Determination of force distribution of multiple anchors at one location shall
take into account the stiffness and ductility of the connected system and its ability to redistribute loads
to other anchors in the group Designs of anchorage in concrete in accordance with Sec. 9.6 shall be
considered to satisfy this requirement.
6.2.8.5 Power actuated fasteners. Power actuated fasteners shall not be used for tension load
applications in Seismic Design Category D, E, or F unless approved for such loading.
6.2.9 Construction documents. Where design of nonstructural components or their supports and
attachments is required by these Provisions (as indicated in Table 6.2-1), such design shall be shown in
construction documents prepared by a registered design professional for use by the owner, building
officials, contractors, and inspectors. Such documents shall include a quality assurance plan as required
by Sec. 2.2.
6.3 ARCHITECTURAL COMPONENTS

Architectural components, and their supports and attachments, shall satisfy the requirements of this
section. Appropriate coefficients shall be selected from Table 6.3-1.
Exception: Components supported by chains or otherwise suspended from the structure are not
required to satisfy the seismic force and relative displacement requirements provided they meet all
of the following criteria:
1. The design load for such items shall be equal to 1.4 times the operating weight acting down with
a simultaneous horizontal load equal to 1.4 times the operating weight. The horizontal load shall be
applied in the direction that results in the most critical loading for design.
2. Seismic interaction effects shall be considered in accordance with Sec.6.2.3.
3. The connection to the structure shall allow a 360-degree range of horizontal motion.
Table 6.3-1 Coefficients for Architectural Components

apa
Architectural Component or Element
Interior nonstructural walls and partitions

Plain masonry walls
All other walls and partitions
Rp
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Cantilever elements, braced (to structural frame) above their centers of mass
Parapets
Chimneys and stacks
Exterior nonstructural walls b
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
Exterior nonstructural wall elements and connections b

Wall element
Body of wall-panel connections
Fasteners of the connecting system
1.0
1.0
1.25
2.5
2.5
1.0
Veneer
High deformability elements and attachments
Low deformability elements and attachments
1.0
1.0
2.5
1.5
Penthouses (except where framed by an extension of the building frame)
2.5
3.5
Cantilever Elements, unbraced or braced (to structural frame) below their centers of
mass
Parapets and cantilevered interior nonstructural walls
Chimneys and stacks where laterally supported by structures
118

Ceilings
All
1.0
2.5
Cabinets
Storage cabinets and laboratory equipment
1.0
2.5
Access floors
Special access floors
All other
1.0
1.0
2.5
1.5
Appendages and ornamentation
2.5
2.5
Signs and billboards
2.5
2.5
Other rigid components

Limited deformability elements and attachments
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.5
2.5
1.5
Other flexible components

2.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.5
a
A lower value for ap is permitted where justified by detailed dynamic analysis. The value for ap shall
not be less than 1.0. The value of ap equal to 1.0 is for rigid components and rigidly attached
components. The value of ap equal to 2.5 is for flexible components and flexibly attached components.
b
Where flexible diaphragms provide lateral support for concrete or masonry walls or partitions, the
design forces for anchorage to the diaphragm shall be as specified in Sec. 4.6.2.1.
6.3.1 Forces and displacements. All architectural components, and their supports and attachments,
shall be designed for the seismic forces defined in Sec. 6.2.6.
Architectural components that could pose a life-safety hazard shall be designed to accommodate the
seismic relative displacements defined in Sec. 6.2.7. Architectural components shall be designed
considering vertical deflection due to joint rotation of horizontally cantilevered structural members.
6.3.2 Exterior nonstructural wall elements and connections. Exterior nonstructural wall panels or
elements that are attached to or enclose the structure shall be designed to accommodate the seismic
relative displacements defined in Sec. 6.2.7 and movements due to temperature changes. Such elements
shall be supported by means of positive and direct structural supports or by mechanical connections and
fasteners in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Connections and panel joints shall allow for a relative movement between stories of not less than
the calculated story drift Dp or 1/2 in. (13 mm), whichever is greater.
2. Connections to permit movement in the plane of the panel for story drift shall be sliding connections
using slotted or oversized holes, connections that permit movements by bending of steel, or other
connections that provide equivalent sliding or ductile capacity.
3. Bodies of connectors shall have sufficient deformability and rotation capacity to preclude fracture of
the concrete or low deformation failures at or near welds.
4. All fasteners in the connecting system such as bolts, inserts, welds, and dowels and the body of the
connectors shall be designed for the seismic force Fp determined by Eq. 6.2-3, using values of ap
and Rp taken from Table 6.3-1, applied at the center of mass of the panel.
5. Where anchorage is achieved using flat straps embedded in concrete or masonry, such straps shall
be attached to or hooked around reinforcing steel or otherwise terminated so as to effectively
transfer forces to the reinforcing steel.
119

Glass in glazed curtain walls and storefronts shall be designed and installed in accordance with Sec.
6.3.7.
6.3.3 Out-of-plane bending. Transverse or out-of-plane bending or deformation of a component or
system that is subjected to forces as determined in Sec. 6.2.6 shall not exceed the deflection capacity of
the component or system.
6.3.4 Suspended ceilings. Suspended ceilings shall satisfy the requirements of this section.
6.3.4.1 Seismic forces. The weight of the ceiling, Wp, shall include the ceiling grid and panels; light
fixtures if attached to, clipped to, or laterally supported by the ceiling grid; and other components which
are laterally supported by the ceiling. Wp shall not be taken as less than 4 psf (0.2 kN/m2).
The seismic force, Fp, shall be transmitted through the ceiling attachments to the building structural
elements or the ceiling-structure boundary.
6.3.4.2 Industry standard construction. Unless designed in accordance with Sec. 6.3.4.3, suspended
ceilings shall be designed and constructed in accordance with this section.
6.3.4.2.1 Seismic Design Category C. Suspended ceilings in Seismic Design Category C shall be
designed and installed in accordance with CISCA 0-2, except that seismic forces shall be determined in
accordance with Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.3.4.1.
Sprinkler heads and other penetrations in Seismic Design Category C shall have a minimum clearance
of 1/4 in. (6 mm) on all sides.
6.3.4.2.2 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F. Suspended ceilings in Seismic Design Category D,
E, or F shall be designed and installed in accordance with CISCA 3-4 and the requirements of this
section.
1. A heavy-duty T-bar grid system shall be used.

2. The width of the perimeter supporting closure angle shall not be less than 2.0 in. (50 mm). In each
orthogonal horizontal direction, one end of the ceiling grid shall be attached to the closure angle.
The other end in each horizontal direction shall have a 3/4 in. (19 mm) clearance from the wall and
shall rest upon and be free to slide on a closure angle.
3. For ceiling areas exceeding 1000 ft2 (93m2), horizontal restraint of the ceiling to the structural
system shall be provided by means of splay wires. The tributary areas of the horizontal restraints
shall be approximately equal.
Exception: Rigid braces are permitted to be used instead of diagonal splay wires. Braces and
the attachments to the structural system above shall be adequate to limit relative lateral
deflections at the point of attachment to the ceiling grid to less than 1/4 in. (6 mm) when
subjected to the loads prescribed in Sec. 6.2.6.
4. For ceiling areas exceeding 2500 ft2 (230 m2), a seismic separation joint or full height partition that
breaks the ceiling into areas not exceeding 2500 ft2 shall be provided unless structural analyses of
the ceiling bracing system for the prescribed seismic forces demonstrate that ceiling system
penetrations and closure angles provide sufficient clearance to accommodate the additional
movement. Each area shall be provided with closure angles in accordance with Item 2 and
horizontal restraints or bracing in accordance with Item 3.
5. Except where rigid braces are used to limit lateral deflections, sprinkler heads and other penetrations
shall have a 2 in. (50 mm) oversized ring, sleeve, or adapter through the ceiling tile to allow for free
movement of at least 1 in. (25 mm) in all horizontal directions. Alternatively, a swing joint that can
accommodate 1 in. (25 mm) of ceiling movement in all horizontal directions is permitted to be
provided at the top of the sprinkler head extension.
6. Changes in ceiling elevation shall be provided with positive bracing.
120

7. Cable trays and electrical conduits shall be supported independently of the ceiling.
8. Suspended ceilings shall be subject to the special inspection requirements of Sec. 2.3.9 of these
Provisions.
6.3.4.3 Integral construction. As a alternative to providing large clearances around sprinkler system
penetrations through ceiling systems, the sprinkler system and ceiling grid are permitted to be designed
and tied together as an integral unit. Such a design shall consider the mass and flexibility of all
elements involved, including: ceiling system, sprinkler system, light fixtures, and mechanical (HVAC)
appurtenances. Such design shall be performed by a registered design professional.
6.3.5 Access floors
6.3.5.1 General. Access floors shall satisfy the requirements of this section. The weight of the access
floor, Wp, shall include the weight of the floor system, 100 percent of the weight of all equipment
fastened to the floor, and 25 percent of the weight of all equipment supported by, but not fastened to the
floor. The seismic force, Fp, shall be transmitted from the top surface of the access floor to the
supporting structure.
Overturning effects of equipment fastened to the access floor panels also shall be considered. The
ability of slip on heads for pedestals shall be evaluated for suitability to transfer overturning effects of
equipment.
Where checking individual pedestals for overturning effects, the maximum concurrent axial load shall
not exceed the portion of Wp assigned to the pedestal under consideration.
6.3.5.2 Special access floors. Access floors shall be considered to be special access floors if they are
designed in accordance with the following considerations:
1. Connections transmitting seismic loads consist of mechanical fasteners, anchors complying with the
requirements of Sec.9.6, welding, or bearing. Design load capacities comply with recognized
design codes and/or certified test results.
2. Seismic loads are not transmitted by power actuated fasteners, adhesives, or by friction produced
solely by the effects of gravity.
3. The bracing system shall be designed considering the destabilizing effects of individual members
buckling in compression.
4. Bracing and pedestals are of structural or mechanical shape produced to ASTM specifications that
specify minimum mechanical properties. Electrical tubing shall not be used.
5. Floor stringers that are designed to carry axial seismic loads and are mechanically fastened to the
supporting pedestals are used.
6.3.6 Partitions. Partitions that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 ft (1.8 m) in
height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. Such bracing shall be independent of any
ceiling splay bracing. Bracing shall be spaced to limit horizontal deflection at the partition head to be
comparable with ceiling deflection requirements as determined in Sec. 6.3.4 for suspended ceilings and
Sec. 6.3.1 for other systems.
Glass in glazed partitions shall be designed and installed in accordance with Sec. 6.3.7.
6.3.7 General. Glass in glazed curtain walls, glazed storefronts and glazed partitions shall meet the
relative displacement requirement of Eq. 6.3-1:
fallout 1.25 I Dp or 0.5 in. (13mm), whichever is greater.
(6.3-1)
Dp, the relative seismic displacement that the glazed curtain walls, glazed storefronts or glazed partitions
component must be designed to accommodate (Eq. 6.2-5) shall be determined over the height of the
121

glass component under consideration.
Exceptions:
1.
Glass with sufficient clearances from its frame such that physical contact between the
glass and frame will not occur at the design drift, as demonstrated by Eq. 6.3-2, shall be
exempted from the provisions of Eq. 6.3-1:
Dclear 1.25 Dp
(6.3-2)
Where:
h pc 2
D clear = 2c1 1 +
b p c1
2.
Fully tempered monolithic glass in Seismic Use Groups I and II located no more than
10 ft (3 m) above a walking surface shall be exempted from the provisions of Eq. 6.3-1.
3.
Annealed or heat-strengthened laminated glass in single thickness with interlayer no

less than 0.030 in. (0.76 mm) that is captured mechanically in a wall system glazing
pocket, and whose perimeter is secured to the frame by a wet glazed gunable curing
elastomeric sealant perimeter bead of 1/2 in. (13 mm) minimum glass contact width, or
other approved anchorage system, shall be exempted from the provisions of Eq. 6.3-1.
6.3.8 Seismic Drift Limits for Glass Components. fallout , the drift causing glass fallout from the curtain
wall, storefront or partition, shall be determined in accordance with AAMA 501.6, or by engineering
analysis.
6.4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Mechanical and electrical components, and their supports and attachments, shall satisfy the
requirements of this section. Appropriate coefficients shall be selected from Table 6.4-1.
Exception: Light fixtures, lighted signs, and ceiling fans not connected to ducts or piping, that are
supported by chains or otherwise suspended from the structure, are not required to satisfy the
seismic force and relative displacement requirements provided they meet all of the following
criteria:
1. The design load for such items shall be 1.4 times the operating weight acting down with a
simultaneous horizontal load equal to 1.4 times the operating weight. The horizontal load
shall be applied in the direction which results in the most critical loading for design.
2. Seismic interaction effects shall be considered in accordance with Sec. 6.2.3.
3. The connection to the structure shall allow a 360-degree range of horizontal motion.
As an alternative to the analysis methods outlined in this section, testing is an acceptable method to
determine the seismic capacity of components, and their supports and attachments. Thus, adaptation of
a nationally recognized standard is acceptable so long as the seismic capacities equal or exceed the
demands determined in accordance with Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.2.7.
Table 6.4-1 Coefficients for Mechanical and Electrical Components

Mechanical or Electrical Component or Elementb
General Mechanical
122
apa
Rp

Boilers and Furnaces
Pressure vessels on skirts and free-standing
Stacks
Cantilevered chimneys
Other
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Manufacturing and Process Machinery

General
Conveyors (non-personnel)
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
Piping Systems
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.5
2.5
1.5
HVAC System Component

Vibration isolated
Non-vibration isolated
Mounted in-line with ductwork
Other
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Elevator Components
1.0
2.5
Escalator Components
1.0
2.5
Trussed Towers (free-standing or guyed)
2.5
2.5
General Electrical
Distribution systems (bus ducts, conduit, cable tray)
Equipment
2.5
1.0
5
2.5
Lighting Fixtures
1.0
1.5
A lower value for ap is permitted where justified by detailed dynamic analysis. The value for ap shall
not be less than 1.0. The value of ap equal to 1.0 is for rigid components and rigidly attached
components. The value of ap equal to 2.5 is for flexible components and flexibly attached components.
b
Components mounted on vibration isolators shall have a bumper restraint or snubber in each horizontal
direction. The design force shall be taken as 2Fp if the nominal clearance (air gap) between the
equipment support frame and restraint is greater than 0.25 in. If the nominal clearance specified on the
construction documents is not greater than 0.25 in., the design force may be taken as Fp.
Where design of mechanical and electrical components for seismic effects is required, consideration
shall be given to the dynamic effects of the components, their contents, and where appropriate, their
supports. In such cases, the interaction between the components and the supporting structures,
including other mechanical and electrical components, shall also be considered.
Some complex equipment such as valve operators, turbines and generators, and pumps and motors are
permitted to be functionally connected by mechanical links that are not capable of transferring the
seismic loads or accommodating seismic relative displacements. Such items may require special design
considerations such as a common rigid support or skid.
6.4.1 Component period. Where the dynamic response of a mechanical or electrical component
(including its supports and attachments) can reasonably be approximated by a spring-and-mass singledegree-of-freedom system, the fundamental period of the component, Tp, may be determined using
Eq. 6.4-1 as follows:
123

Tp = 2
Wp
Kpg
(6.4-1)
Alternatively, the fundamental period of the component, Tp, may be determined from experimental test
data or by a properly substantiated analysis.
6.4.2 Mechanical components. Mechanical components with Ip greater than 1.0 shall be designed for
the seismic forces and relative displacements defined in Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.2.7 and shall satisfy the
following additional requirements:
1. Provision shall be made to eliminate seismic impact for components vulnerable to impact, for
components constructed of nonductile materials, and in cases where material ductility will be
reduced due to service conditions (such as low temperature applications).
2. The possibility of loads imposed on components by attached utility or service lines, due to
differential movement of support points on separate structures, shall be evaluated.
3. Where mechanical components contain a sufficient quantity of hazardous material to pose a danger
if released and for boilers and pressure vessels not designed in accordance with ASME BPV, the
design strength for seismic loads in combination with other service loads and appropriate
environmental effects (such as corrosion) shall be based on the following material properties:
a. For mechanical components constructed with ductile materials (such as steel, aluminum, or
copper), 90 percent of the minimum specified yield strength.
b. For threaded connections in components constructed with ductile materials, 70 percent of the
minimum specified yield strength.
c. For mechanical components constructed with nonductile materials (such as plastic, cast iron, or
ceramics), 25 percent of the minimum specified tensile strength.
d. For threaded connections in components constructed with nonductile materials, 20 percent of
the minimum specified tensile strength.
4. Where piping or HVAC ductwork components are attached to structures that could displace relative
to one another and for isolated structures where such components cross the isolation interface, the
components shall be designed to accommodate the seismic relative displacements defined in Sec.
6.2.7.
6.4.3 Electrical components. Electrical components with Ip greater than 1.0 shall be designed for the
seismic forces and relative displacements defined in Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.2.7 and shall satisfy the following
additional requirements:
1. Provision shall be made to eliminate seismic impact between components.

2. Evaluate loads imposed on the components by attached utility or service lines which are also
attached to separate structures.
3. Batteries on racks shall have wrap-around restraints to ensure that the batteries will not fall from the
rack. Spacers shall be used between restraints and cells to prevent damage to cases. Racks shall be
evaluated for sufficient lateral load capacity.
4. Internal coils of dry type transformers shall be positively attached to their supporting substructure
within the transformer enclosure.
5. Electrical control panels, computer equipment, and other items with slide-out components shall have
a latching mechanism to hold the components in place.
6. Electrical cabinet design shall comply with the applicable National Electrical Manufacturers
Association (NEMA) standards. Cut-outs in the lower shear panel that do not appear to have been
124

made by the manufacturer and are judged to reduce significantly the strength of the cabinet shall be
specifically evaluated.
7. The attachments for additional external items weighing more than 100 lb (445 N) shall be
specifically evaluated if not provided by the manufacturer.
8. Where conduit, cable trays, or similar electrical distribution components are attached to structures
that could displace relative to one another and for isolated structures where such components cross
the isolation interface, the components shall be designed to accommodate the seismic relative
displacements defined in Sec. 6.2.7.
6.4.4 Supports and attachments
Supports and attachments for mechanical and electrical components shall be designed for the seismic
forces defined in Sec. 6.2.6 and shall satisfy the requirements found elsewhere in these Provisions, as
appropriate, for the materials comprising the means of attachment.
Supports for components shall be designed to accommodate the seismic relative displacements between
points of support as determined in accordance with Sec. 6.2.7. Supports for components may be forged
or cast so as to form an integral part of the mechanical or electrical component. Attachments between
the component and its supports, except where integral, shall be designed to accommodate both the
forces and displacements determined in accordance with Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.2.7. Where Ip is greater than
1.0, the effect of load transfer on the component wall at the point of attachment shall be evaluated.
The following additional requirements shall apply:
1. Supports and attachments that transfer seismic loads shall be constructed of materials suitable for
the application and shall be designed and constructed in accordance with a nationally recognized
standard specification, such as those listed in Sec. 6.1.2.
2. Seismic supports shall be constructed so that support engagement is maintained.
3. Friction clips shall not be used for anchorage attachment.
4. Oversized plate washers extending to the component wall shall be used at bolted connections
through the sheet metal base if the base is not reinforced with stiffeners or is not judged to be
capable of transferring the required loads.
5. Where weak-axis bending of cold-formed steel supports is relied on for the seismic load path, such
supports shall be specifically evaluated.
6. Components mounted on vibration isolators shall have a bumper restraint or snubber in each
horizontal direction, and vertical restraints shall be provided where required to resist overturning.
Isolator housings and restraints shall be constructed of ductile materials. (See additional design
force requirements in Table 6.4-1.) A viscoelastic pad or similar material of appropriate thickness
shall be used between the bumper and components to limit the impact load.
7. Expansion anchors shall not be used for non-vibration isolated mechanical equipment rated over 10
hp (7.45 kW).
Exception: Undercut expansion anchors are permitted.
8. The supports for electrical distribution components shall be designed for the seismic forces and
relative displacements defined in Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.2.7 if any of the following conditions apply:
a. Supports are cantilevered up from the floor;
b. Supports include bracing to limit deflection;
c. Supports are constructed as rigid welded frames;
d. Attachments into concrete utilize non-expanding insets, powder driven fasteners, or cast iron
125

embedments; or
e. Attachments utilize spot welds, plug welds, or minimum size welds as defined by AISC.
9. For boilers and pressure vessels, attachments to concrete shall be suitable for cyclic loads.
6.4.5 Utility and service lines. At the interface of adjacent structures or portions of the same structure
that may move independently, utility lines shall be provided with adequate flexibility to accommodate
the anticipated differential movement between the ground and the structure. Differential displacements
shall be determined in accordance with Sec. 6.2.7.
The possible interruption of utility service shall be considered in relation to designated seismic systems
in Seismic Use Group III, as defined in Sec. 1.2.1. Specific attention shall be given to the vulnerability
of underground utilities and utility interfaces between the structure and the ground in all situations
where the assigned Site Class is E or F and SDS is greater than or equal to 0.4.
6.4.6 HVAC ductwork. Seismic restraints are not required for HVAC ducts with Ip equal to 1.0 if
either of the following conditions is met for the full length of each duct run:
1. HVAC ducts are suspended from hangers, all hangers are 12 in. (305 mm) or less in length as
measured from the point of attachment to the duct to the point of attachment on the supporting
structure and the hangers are detailed to avoid significant bending of the hangers and their
attachments; or
2. HVAC ducts have a cross-sectional area of less than 6 ft2 (0.6 m2).
HVAC duct systems fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA 80, SMACNA 95, and
SMACNA 98 shall be deemed to satisfy the seismic bracing requirements of these Provisions.
Components that are installed in-line with the duct system and have an operating weight greater than 75
lb (334 N), such as fans, heat exchangers, and humidifiers, shall be supported and laterally braced
independently of the duct system and such braces shall be designed for the seismic forces defined in
Sec. 6.2.6. Appurtenances, such as dampers, louvers, and diffusers, shall be positively attached with
mechanical fasteners. Unbraced piping attached to in-line equipment shall be provided with adequate
flexibility to accommodate differential displacements.
6.4.7 Piping systems. Piping systems shall satisfy the requirements of this section except that elevator
system piping shall satisfy the requirements of Sec. 6.4.9.
6.4.7.1 Fire protection sprinkler systems. Fire protection sprinkler systems shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with NFPA-13. Fire protection sprinkler systems in Seismic Design Category
C designed and constructed in accordance with NFPA-13 shall be deemed to satisfy the seismic force
and relative displacement requirements of these Provisions.
In Seismic Design Categories D, E and F, fire protection sprinkler systems designed and constructed in
accordance with NFPA-13 shall meet the following additional criteria:
6.4.7.1.1 The spacing of longitudinal sway bracing and transverse sway bracing specified in NFPA 13
Section 9.3.5 shall be reduced by multiplying the maximum brace spacing permitted in NFPA 13
Section 9.3.5 by 0.8W p / Fp . The value of 0.8W p / Fp shall not be taken as greater than 1.0.
6.4.7.2 Other piping systems. Where the seismic design forces and displacements specified in ASME
B31.1, ASME B31.3, ASME B31.4, ASME B31.5, ASME B31.8, ASME B31.9, and ASME B31.11 are
comparable to those determined using these Provisions, the use of these standards for seismic design of
piping systems shall be permitted.
Exception: Piping systems with Ip greater than 1.0 shall not be designed using the simplified
analysis procedures found in Sec. 919.4.1 (a) of ASME B31.9.
Piping systems with Ip greater than 1.0 also shall satisfy the following requirements:
126

1. Under design loads and displacements, piping shall not be permitted to impact other components.
2. Piping shall accommodate the effects of relative displacements that may occur between piping
support points on the structure or the ground and other mechanical or electrical equipment or other
piping.
Seismic supports for other piping shall be constructed so that support engagement is maintained, and
attachments shall be designed in accordance with Sec. 6.2.8.
Seismic supports are not required for other piping systems where one of the following conditions is met:
1. Piping is supported by rod hangers, all hangers in the pipe run are 12 in. (305 mm) or less in length
from the top of the pipe to the supporting structure, the hangers are detailed to avoid bending of the
hangers and their attachments, and the pipe can accommodate the expected deflections; or
2. High deformability piping is used, provision is made to avoid impact with larger piping or
mechanical components or to protect the piping in the event of such impact, and the following size
requirements are satisfied:
a. In Seismic Design Category D, E, or F, where Ip is greater than 1.0, the nominal pipe size shall
be 1 in. (25 mm) or less,
b. In Seismic Design Category C, where Ip is greater than 1.0, the nominal pipe size shall be 2 in.
(51 mm) or less, and
c. In Seismic Design Category D, E, or F, where Ip is equal to 1.0, the nominal pipe size shall be 3
in. (76 mm) or less.
6.4.8 Boilers and pressure vessels. Boilers and pressure vessels designed in accordance with ASME
BPV shall be deemed to satisfy the seismic force and relative displacement requirements of these
Provisions provided that the forces and displacements defined in Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.2.7 are used in lieu of
the seismic forces and displacements defined in ASME BPV. Supports and attachments for boilers and
pressure vessels are still subject to the requirements of these Provisions.
6.4.9 Elevators. Elevators designed in accordance with the seismic provisions of ASME A17.1 shall
be deemed to satisfy the requirements of this chapter except that they also shall satisfy the additional
requirements of this section.
6.4.9.1 Elevators and hoistway structural systems. Elevators and hoistway structural systems shall
be designed for the seismic forces and relative displacements defined in Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.2.7.
6.4.9.2 Elevator machinery and controller supports and attachments. Supports and attachments for
elevator machinery and controllers shall be designed for the seismic forces and relative displacements
defined in Sec. 6.2.6 and 6.2.7.
6.4.9.3 Seismic switches. Seismic switches shall be provided for all elevators that operate with a speed
of 150 ft/min (46 m/min) or greater, including those which satisfy the requirements of ASME A17.1.
Seismic switches shall provide an electrical signal indicating that structural motions are of such a
magnitude that the operation of elevators may be impaired. The seismic switch shall be located at or
above the highest floor serviced by the elevator. The seismic switch shall have two horizontal
perpendicular axes of sensitivity. Its trigger level shall be set to 30 percent of the acceleration of gravity
in facilities where the loss of the use of an elevator is a life-safety issue.
Upon activation of the seismic switch, elevator operations shall comply with the provisions of ASME
A17.1. The elevator may be used after the seismic switch has triggered provided that:
1. The elevator shall operate no faster than the service speed,
2. The elevator shall be operated remotely from top to bottom and back to top to verify that it is
operable, and
127

3. The individual putting the elevator back in service shall ride the elevator from top to bottom and
back to top to verify acceptable performance.
6.4.9.4 Retainer plates. Retainer plates are required at the top and bottom of the car and
counterweight.
128
ALTERNATIVE PROVISIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF PIPING
SYSTEMS
BACKGROUND: As currently written, the Provisions do not recognize discrete levels of

performance that may be relevant to the seismic design of piping systems, particularly for
essential facilities. This Appendix provides preliminary criteria for the establishment of such
performance criteria and their use in the assessment and design of piping systems. The
performance criteria, from least restrictive to most severe, are: position retention, leak tightness
and operability. In particular, the interaction of systems and interface with the relevant piping
design standards is addressed.
A6.1 DEFINITIONS
Leak Tightness: The condition of a piping system characterized by containment of contents, or
maintenance of a vacuum, with no discernable leakage.
Operability: The condition of a piping system characterized by leak tightness as well as continued
delivery, shutoff or throttle of pipe contents flow by means of unimpaired operation of equipment and
components such as pumps, compressors and valves.
Position Retention: The condition of a piping system characterized by the absence of collapse or fall of
any part of the system.
A6.2 DESIGN APPROACH

The seismic design of piping systems is determined on the basis of Seismic Design Category, Ip, and
pipe size, as provided in Table A6.2-1. For each case in table A6.2-1, the procedure for seismic
qualification is specified in Sec.A.6.5.
Where IP = 1.0, the piping system is not criticalritical and is required to maintain position retention.
Where IP = 1.5, the piping system is critical and is required to exhibit leak tightness and may be required
to maintain operability.
129
Seismic
Design
Category
B
C or D
E or F
Table A6.2-1 Seismic Design Requirements

IP = 1.5
IP = 1.0
Pipe Size > 4 inch
Pipe Size > 4 inch
Pipe Size 4 inch
Pipe Size 4 inch
(SI: 102 mm)
(SI: 102 mm)
(SI: 102 mm)
(SI: 102 mm)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Bracing (A6.5.2.2)
Restraints
(A6.5.2.3)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Bracing (A6.5.2.2)
Restraints
(A6.5.2.3)
Operabilitya
(A6.5.2.4)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Bracing (A6.5.2.2)
Restraints
(A6.5.2.3)
Operabilitya
(A6.5.2.4)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Bracing (A6.5.2.2)
Restraints
(A6.5.2.3)
Operabilitya
(A6.5.2.4)
Interactions
(A6.5.4.2.1)
Analysis
(A6.5.2.5)
Restraints
(A6.5.2.3)
Operabilitya
(A6.5.2.4)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Bracing (A6.5.2.2)
Restraints
(A6.5.2.3)
Operabilitya
(A6.5.2.4)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Analysis
(A6.5.2.5)
Restraints
(A6.5.2.3)
Operabilitya
(A6.5.2.4)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Analysis
(A6.5.2.5)
Restraints
(A6.5.2.3)
Operabilitya
(A6.5.2.4)
Interactions
(A6.5.2.1)
Leak tightness is the default requirement. Operability applies only where specified by design.
A6.3 SYSTEM COEFFICIENTS

A6.3.1 Deformability. Piping systems shall be classified as either high-, limited-, or low-deformability
systems.
All materials in high-deformability piping systems shall have an elongation at rupture of at least 10
percent at the operating temperature, and pipes and pipe components used in high-deformability systems
shall be joined by welding or by bolted flanges.
Systems containing components with an elongation at rupture of less than 10 percent at the operating
temperature, or having joints that rely only on friction, shall be classified as low-deformability systems.
Systems that are neither high-nor low-deformability systems shall be classified as limited deformability
systems. Systems with threaded connections shall be classified as limited- or low-deformability systems.
A6.3.2 Seismic Coefficients. The seismic coefficients aP and RP are specified in Table 6.4.1 for high-,
limited-, and low-deformability piping systems.
A6.4 SEISMIC DEMAND

A6.4.1 Seismic demand on a piping system consists of applied forces and relative displacements.
A6.4.2 Seismic forces shall be determined as specified in Sec. 6.2.6.
130
Alternative Provisions for the Design of Piping Systems

A6.4.3 Seismic relative displacements at points of attachments of pipe restraints to the structure shall be
determined as specified in Sec. 6.2.7.
A6.5 SEISMIC QUALIFICATION

A6.5.1 Elevator system piping shall satisfy the provisions of Sec.6.4.9. ASME B31 pressure piping
systems shall satisfy the provisions of the applicable ASME B31 code section. Fire sprinkler systems
shall satisfy the provisions of Sec.A6.5.2.6.
A6.5.2 The seismic qualification of piping systems depends on the Design Approach selected in A6.2.
A6.5.2.1 Where interactions are specified they shall be evaluated in accordance with Sec.6.2.3.
A6.5.2.2 Where bracing is specified, the pipe must be seismically restrained. Lateral restraints shall be
provided (a) to limit the bending stress in the pipe to yield at the operating temperature and (b) to limit
the rotations at articulated joints within the manufacturer limits. Unlike analysis (Sec. A6.5.2.5), bracing
does not require a detailed analysis of the piping system; the distance between seismic restraints may be
established based on beam approximations of the pipe spans. The effect of seismic restrains on
operating loads (thermal expansion and contraction, weight) shall be considered.
A6.5.2.3 Where restraints are specified, the pipe seismic restraints as well as their welds and anchorage
attachment to the structure shall comply with the provisions of Chapters 8 to 12. Supports shall be
constructed so that support engagement is maintained considering both lateral and vertical seismic
forces.
A6.5.2.4 Where operability is specified, the equipment and components that must perform an active
function that involves moving parts (such as pumps, compressors, fans and valve operators) shall
comply with the requirements of Sec.2.4.5.
A6.5.2.5 Where analysis is specified, the piping system shall be analyzed by static or dynamic methods.
The maximum calculated elastic stress due to the earthquake loads and concurrent weight and pressure
shall be limited to 1.5SY (where SY is the minimum specified material yield stress at normal operating
temperature) and the rotations at articulated joints shall be within the manufacturer limits. The analysis
shall include the effects of stress intensification factors as determined in the ASME B31 pressure piping
code, and corrosion effects.
A6.5.2.6 Fire protection sprinkler systems shall meet the following requirements:
A6.5.2.6.1 Fire protection sprinkler systems in Seismic Design Categories A, B and C designed and
constructed in accordance with NFPA-13 shall be deemed to satisfy the seismic force and relative
displacement requirements of these Provisions.
A6.5.2.6.2 In Seismic Design Categories D, E and F, fire protection sprinkler systems designed and
constructed in accordance with NFPA 13 shall also meet the following additional criteria:
1. The spacing of longitudinal sway bracing and transverse sway bracing specified in NFPA 13
Sec. 9.3.5 shall be reduced by multiplying the maximum brace spacing permitted in NFPA 13
Sec. 9.3.5 by 0.8W p / Fp . The value of 0.8W p / Fp shall not be taken as greater than 1.0.
131
132
Chapter 7
FOUNDATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Scope. This chapter includes only those foundation requirements that are specifically related to
seismic resistant construction. It assumes compliance with all other basic requirements which include,
but are not limited to, requirements for the extent of the foundation investigation, fills to be present or to
be placed in the area of the structure, slope stability, subsurface drainage, settlement control, and soil
bearing and lateral soil pressure recommendations for loads acting without seismic forces.
7.1.2 References. The following document shall be used as specified in this chapter.
ACI 318

2002.
AISC-Seismic Seismic Provisions For Structural Steel Buildings, American Institute of Steel
Construction May 21, 2002
7.1.3 Definitions.
Basement: Any story below the lowest story above grade.
Longitudinal reinforcement ratio: Area of the longitudinal reinforcement divided by the
cross-sectional area of the concrete.
Owner: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Pile: Deep foundation components including piers, caissons, and piles.
Pile cap: Foundation elements to which piles are connected, including grade beams and mats.
Reinforced concrete: See Sec. 9.1.3.
Site Class: See Sec. 3.1.3.
Wall: See Sec. 4.1.3.
7.1.4 Notation
Ach
Cross sectional-area of a component measured to the outside of the special lateral

reinforcement.
Ag
Gross cross sectional-area of a component.
f c
Specified compressive strength of concrete used in design.

133
fyh
Specified yield stress of the special lateral reinforcement.
hc
The core dimension of a component measured to the outside of the special lateral reinforcement.
Axial load on pile calculated in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
Spacing of transverse reinforcement measured along the length of an element.

The resisting capacities of the foundations, subjected to the load combinations prescribed elsewhere in
these Provisions, shall meet the requirements of this chapter.
7.2.1 Foundation components. The strength and detailing of foundation components under seismic
loading conditions, including foundation elements and attachments of the foundation elements to the
superstructure, shall comply with the requirements of Chapters 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12, unless otherwise
specified in this chapter. The strength of foundation components shall not be less than that required for
load combinations that do not include seismic load effects.
7.2.2 Soil capacities. The capacity of the foundation soil in bearing or the capacity of the interface
between pile, pier, or caisson and the soil shall be sufficient to support the structure with all prescribed
loads, without seismic forces, taking due account of the settlement that the structure can withstand. For
the load combinations including seismic load effects as specified in Sec. 4.2.2, the soil capacities must
be sufficient to resist loads at acceptable strains considering both the short duration of loading and the
dynamic properties of the soil.
7.2.3. Foundation load-deformation characteristics. Where permitted for the linear analysis
procedures in Chapter 5, the load-deformation characteristics of the foundation-soil system (foundation
stiffness) shall be modeled in accordance with the requirements of this section. The linear loaddeformation behavior of foundations shall be represented by an equivalent linear stiffness using soil
properties that are compatible with the soil strain levels associated with the design earthquake motion.
The strain-compatible shear modulus, G, and the associated strain-compatible shear wave velocity, vS,
needed for the evaluation of equivalent linear stiffness shall be determined using the criteria in Sec.
5.6.2.1.1 or based on a site-specific study. Parametric variations of not less than 50% increase and
decrease in stiffness shall be incorporated in dynamic analyses unless smaller variations can be justified
based on field measurements of dynamic soil properties or direct measurements of dynamic foundation
stiffness.
7.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY B

Any construction meeting the requirements of Sec. 7.1 and 7.2 is permitted to be used for structures
assigned to Seismic Design Category B.
7.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY C

Foundations for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C shall comply with Sec. 7.3 and the
additional requirements of this section.
7.4.1 Investigation. An investigation shall be conducted and a written report shall be provided that
shall include, in addition to the requirements of Sec. 7.1 and the evaluations required in Sec. 7.2.2, the
results of an investigation to determine the potential hazards due to slope instability, liquefaction,
differential settlement, and surface displacement due to faulting or lateral spreading, all as a result of
earthquakes. The report shall contain recommendations for appropriate foundation designs or other
measures to mitigate the effects of the above hazards. Where deemed appropriate by the authority
having jurisdiction, a report is not required when prior evaluations of nearby sites with similar soil
conditions provide sufficient direction relative to the proposed construction.
134
Foundation Design Requirements

7.4.2 Pole-type structures. Construction employing posts or poles as columns embedded in earth or
embedded in concrete footings in the earth are permitted to be used to resist both axial and lateral loads.
The depth of embedment required for posts or poles to resist seismic forces shall be determined by
means of the design criteria established in the foundation investigation report.
7.4.3 Foundation ties. Individual pile caps, drilled piers, or caissons shall be interconnected by ties.
All ties shall be capable of carrying, in tension or compression, a force equal to the product of the larger
pile cap or column load times SDS divided by 10 unless it can be demonstrated that equivalent restraint
can be provided by reinforced concrete beams within slabs on grade or reinforced concrete slabs on
grade or confinement by competent rock, hard cohesive soils, very dense granular soils, or other
approved means.
7.4.4 Special pile requirements. The following special requirements for piles, piers, or caissons are
in addition to all other requirements in the code administered by the authority having jurisdiction.
All concrete piles and concrete filled pipe piles shall be connected to the pile cap by embedding the pile
reinforcement in the pile cap for a distance equal to the development length as specified in ACI 318 as
modified by Chapter 9 of these Provisions. The pile cap connection can be made by the use of
field-placed dowel(s) anchored in the concrete pile. For deformed bars, the development length is the
full development length for compression or tension, in the case of uplift, without reduction in length for
excess area.
Ends of rectangular hoops, spirals, and ties shall be terminated with seismic hooks as defined in Sec.
21.1 of ACI 318 turned into the confined concrete core. The ends of circular spirals and hoops shall be
terminated with 90-degree hooks turned into the confined concrete core.
For resistance to uplift forces, anchorage of steel pipe (or round HSS), concrete filled steel pipe, or H
piles to the pile cap shall be made by means other than concrete bond to the bare steel section.
Exception: Anchorage of concrete filled steel pipe piles is permitted to be accomplished using
deformed bars developed into the concrete portion of the pile.
Where a minimum length for reinforcement or the extent of closely spaced confinement reinforcement is
specified at the top of the pile, provisions shall be made so that those specified lengths or extents are
maintained after pile cut-off.
7.4.4.1 Uncased concrete piles. The longitudinal reinforcement ratio for uncased cast-in-place
concrete drilled or augered piles, piers, or caissons shall not be less than 0.0025 throughout the largest
region defined as follows: the top one-third of the pile length, the top 10 ft (3 m) below the ground, or
the flexural length of the pile. The flexural length shall be taken as the length from the top of the pile to
the lowest point where the calculated flexural demand exceeds 0.4 times the concrete section cracking
moment. The longitudinal reinforcing shall extend beyond the flexural length of the pile by the tension
development length. Longitudinal reinforcement shall consist of at least four bars and shall be confined
with closed ties or equivalent spirals with a diameter of not less than 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) and spaced not
more than 16 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar. Within three pile diameters of the
bottom of the pile cap, transverse confinement reinforcing shall be spaced not more than the lesser of
eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar or 6 in. (150 mm).
7.4.4.2 Metal-cased concrete piles. Reinforcement requirements are the same as for uncased concrete
piles.
Exception: Spiral welded metal casing of a thickness not less than No. 14 gauge may be
considered to provide concrete confinement equivalent to the closed ties or equivalent spirals
required in an uncased concrete pile, provided that the metal casing is adequately protected
against possible deleterious action due to soil constituents, changing water levels, or other
factors indicated by boring records of site conditions.
135

7.4.4.3 Concrete-filled pipe. The longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the top of the pile shall not be
less than 0.01 and such reinforcement shall extend into the pile at least two times the length required for
embedment into the pile cap.
7.4.4.4 Precast (non-prestressed) concrete piles. The longitudinal reinforcement ratio for precast
concrete piles shall not be less than 0.01. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be full length and shall be
confined with closed ties or equivalent spirals with a diameter of not less than 3/8 in. (9.5mm) and
spaced not more than the lesser of 16 times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar or 8 in. (200
mm). Within three pile diameters of the bottom of the pile cap, transverse confinement reinforcing shall
be spaced not more than the lesser of eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar or 6 in.
(152 mm).
7.4.4.5 Precast-prestressed piles. Transverse reinforcement shall consist of circular hoops or spirals.
For the upper 20 ft (6 m) of the pile, the volumetric ratio of transverse reinforcement shall not be less
than the larger of 0.007 or that required by Eq. 7.4-1 as follows:
s = 0.12
f c
f yh
(7.4-1)
Where:
s =
f c =
fyh =
volumetric ratio of transverse reinforcement (volume of transverse reinforcement divided by

volume of enclosed core),
specified compressive strength of concrete, psi (Mpa), and
yield strength of transverse reinforcement, which shall not be taken greater than 85,000 psi
(586 MPa).
Below the 20 ft (6 m) point, the amount of transverse reinforcement shall not be less than one-half that
required by Eq. 7.4-1.
7.5 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES D, E, AND F

Foundations for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E, or F shall comply with Sec. 7.4
and the additional requirements of this section. Concrete foundation components shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with Sec. 21.8 of ACI 318, except as modified by the requirements of this
section.
Exception: Detached one- and two-family dwellings of light-frame construction not exceeding two
stories in height above grade need only comply with the requirements for Sec.7.4 and Sec. 7.5.3.
7.5.1 Investigation. In addition to requirements of Sec. 7.4.1, the investigation and report shall include
the determination of lateral pressures on basement and retaining walls due to earthquake motions.
7.5.2 Liquefaction potential and soil strength loss. The geotechnical report shall describe the
likelihood and potential consequences of liquefaction and soil strength loss (including estimates of
differential settlement, lateral movement, lateral loads on foundations, reduction in foundation soilbearing capacity, increases in lateral pressures on retaining walls, and flotation of embedded structures)
and shall discuss mitigation measures. Such measures shall be given consideration in the design of the
structure and can include, but are not limited to, ground stabilization, selection of appropriate
foundation type and depths, selection of appropriate structural systems to accommodate anticipated
displacements and forces, or any combination of these measures.
The potential for liquefaction and soil strength loss shall be evaluated for site peak ground accelerations,
magnitudes, and source characteristics consistent with the design earthquake ground motions. Peak
ground acceleration is permitted to be determined based on a site-specific study taking into account soil
136

amplification effects or, in the absence of such a study, peak ground accelerations shall be assumed
equal to SDS/2.5.
7.5.3 Foundation ties. Individual spread footings founded on soil assigned to Site Class E or F shall
be interconnected by ties designed in accordance with Sec. 7.4.3.
7.5.4 Special pile and grade beam requirements. Piling shall be designed and constructed to
withstand the maximum curvatures resulting from earthquake ground motions and structural response.
Curvatures shall include the effects of free-field soil strains (without the structure), modified for soilpile interaction, coupled with pile deformations induced by lateral pile resistance to structure seismic
forces. Concrete piles in Site Class E or F shall be designed and detailed in accordance with Sec.
21.4.4.1, 21.4.4.2, and 21.4.4.3 of ACI 318 within seven pile diameters of the pile cap and of the
interfaces between strata that are hard or stiff and strata that are liquefiable or are composed of soft to
medium-stiff clay.
Section 21.10.3.3 of ACI 318 need not apply where grade beams have the required strength to resist the
forces from the load combinations of Section 4.2.2.2. Section 21.10.4.4(a) of ACI 318 need not apply
to concrete piles.
Design of anchorage of piles into the pile cap shall consider the combined effect of axial forces due to
uplift and bending moments due to fixity to the pile cap. For piles required to resist uplift forces or
provide rotational restraint, anchorage into the pile cap shall be capable of developing the following:
1. In the case of uplift, the least of: the nominal tensile strength of the longitudinal reinforcement in a
concrete pile, the nominal tensile strength of a steel pile, the nominal uplift strength of the soil-pile
interface times 1.3, or the axial tension force calculated in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.2. The
nominal uplift strength of the soil-pile interface shall be taken as the ultimate frictional or adhesive
force that can be developed between the soil and the pile.
2. In the case of rotational restraint, the lesser of: the load effects (axial forces, shear forces, and
moments) calculated in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.2, or development of the nominal axial, bending,
and shear strength of the pile.
Splices of pile segments shall be capable of developing the lesser of: the nominal strength of the pile
section, or the axial forces, shear forces, and moments calculated in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.2.
Pile moments, shears, and lateral deflections used for design shall be established considering the
interaction of the pile and soil. Where the ratio of the depth of embedment of the pile to the pile
diameter or width is less than or equal to 6, the pile may be assumed to be flexurally rigid with respect
to the soil.
Where the center-to-center spacing of piles in the direction of the lateral force is less than eight pile
diameters, the effects of such spacing on the lateral response of the piles shall be included. Where the
center-to-center spacing of piles is less than three pile diameters, the effects of such spacing on the
vertical response of the piles shall be included.
Batter piles shall be capable of resisting forces and moments calculated in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.2.
Where vertical and batter piles act jointly to resist foundation forces as a group, these forces shall be
distributed to the individual piles in accordance with their relative horizontal and vertical rigidities and
the geometric distribution of the piles within the group. The connection between batter piles and grade
beams or pile caps shall be capable of developing the nominal strength of the pile acting as a short
column.
7.5.4.1 Uncased concrete piles. The longitudinal reinforcement ratio for uncased cast-in-place
concrete drilled or augered piles, piers, or caissons shall not be less than 0.005 throughout the largest
region defined as follows: the top one-half of the pile length, the top 10 ft (3 m) below the ground, or
the flexural length of the pile. The flexural length shall be taken as the length of pile to a point where
0.4 times the concrete section cracking moment exceeds the calculated flexural demand at that point.
137

Longitudinal reinforcement shall consist of at least four bars and shall be confined with closed ties or
equivalent spirals at a spacing of not more than the least of: 12 times the diameter of the smallest
longitudinal bar, one-half the diameter of the section, or 12 in. (300 mm). Ties shall have a diameter of
not less than 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) where the pile diameter is less than or equal to 20 in. (500 mm) and not
less than 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) for piles of larger diameter. Within three pile diameters of the bottom of the
pile cap, transverse confinement reinforcing shall satisfy Sec. 21.4.4.1, 21.4.4.2, and 21.4.4.3 of ACI
318. Where the assigned Site Class is A, B, C, or D and the soil is not subject to liquefaction, it shall be
permitted to use a transverse spiral reinforcing ratio of not less than one-half of that required in Sec.
21.4.4.1(a) of ACI 318.
7.5.4.2 Metal-cased concrete piles. Reinforcement requirements are the same as for uncased concrete
piles.
Exception: Spiral welded metal-casing of a thickness not less than No. 14 gauge may be
considered to provide concrete confinement equivalent to the closed ties or equivalent spirals
required in an uncased concrete pile, provided that the metal casing is adequately protected
against possible deleterious action due to soil constituents, changing water levels, or other
factors indicated by boring records of site conditions.
7.5.4.3 Precast (non-prestressed) concrete piles. Within three pile diameters of the bottom of the pile
cap, transverse confinement reinforcing shall satisfy Sec. 21.4.4.1, 21.4.4.2, and 21.4.4.3 of ACI 318.
Where the assigned Site Class is A, B, C, or D and the soil is not subject to liquefaction, it shall be
permitted to use a transverse spiral reinforcing ratio of not less than one-half of that required in Sec.
21.4.4.1(a) of ACI 318.
7.5.4.4 Precast-prestressed piles. The requirements of ACI 318 need not apply, unless specifically
referenced.
Where the total pile length in the soil is 35 ft (11 m) or less, transverse confinement reinforcement shall
be provided throughout the length of the pile. Where the pile length exceeds 35 ft (11 m), transverse
confinement reinforcement shall be provided throughout the largest region defined as follows: the top
35 ft (11 m) below the ground, or the distance from the underside of the pile cap to the first point of zero
curvature plus three times the least pile dimension. The transverse confinement reinforcement shall be
spiral or hoop reinforcement with a center-to-center spacing not greater than the least of: one-fifth of the
least pile dimension, six times the diameter of the longitudinal tendons, or 8 in. (200 mm).
Where the transverse confinement reinforcement consists of spirals or circular hoops, the volumetric
ratio of transverse reinforcement shall not be less than that required by Eq. 7.5-1 and 7.5-2, but need not
exceed 0.021.
f c Ag
1.4 P
1 0.5 +
f yh Ach
f cAg

(7.5-1)
f c
1.4 P
0.5 +
f yh
f cAg
(7.5-2)
s = 0.25
s = 0.12
where:
s =
f c =
138
volumetric ratio of transverse reinforcement (volume of transverse reinforcement divided by

volume of enclosed core),
specified compressive strength of concrete,
fyh =
yield strength of transverse reinforcement, which shall not be taken greater than 85,000 psi
(586 MPa),
Ag =
pile cross-sectional area,

Ach =
core area defined by outside diameter of the transverse reinforcement, and
axial load on pile calculated in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.
Where the transverse confinement reinforcement consists of rectangular hoops and cross ties, the total
cross-sectional area of transverse reinforcement shall not be less than that required by Eq. 7.5-3 and
7.5-4.
f Ag
1.4 P
Ash = 0.3shc c
1 0.5 +
f yh Ach
f cAg

(7.5-3)
f
1.4 P
Ash = 0.12 shc c 0.5 +
f yh
f cAg
(7.5-4)
where:
s
hc =
f c =
fyh =
spacing of transverse reinforcement measured along length of pile,

cross-sectional dimension of pile core measured center-to-center of hoop reinforcement,
specified compressive strength of concrete, and
yield strength of transverse confinement reinforcement, which shall not be taken greater
than 70,000 psi (483 Mpa).
Outside of the length of the pile requiring transverse confinement reinforcement, spiral or hoop
reinforcement with a volumetric ratio not less than one-half of that required for transverse confinement
reinforcement shall be provided.
Circular spiral reinforcement shall be spliced by lapping one full turn and bending the end of the spiral
to a 90-degree hook or by use of a mechanical or welded splice complying with Sec. 12.14.3 of ACI
318. The required amount of spiral reinforcement shall be permitted to be obtained by providing an
inner and outer spiral.
Hoops and cross ties shall have a diameter of not less than 3/8 in. (9.5 mm). Rectangular hoop ends
shall terminate at a corner with seismic hooks.
7.5.4.5 Steel Piles. Design and detailing of H-piles shall conform to the provisions of AISC Seismic
and the following. The connection between steel piles (including unfilled steel pipe piles) and pile caps
shall be designed for a tensile force no smaller than 10 percent of the nominal compression strength of
the pile.
Exception: The pile connection need not meet this requirement where it can be demonstrated that
the pile connection has the strength to resist the axial forces and moments calculated in accordance
with Sec. 4.2.2.2.
139
140
GEOTECHNICAL ULTIMATE STRENGTH DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS AND
FOUNDATION LOAD-DEFORMATION MODELING
PREFACE: This appendix introduces ultimate strength design (USD) procedures for the
geotechnical design of foundations for trial use and evaluation by design professionals prior to
adoption into a subsequent edition of the Provisions. Similarly, the appendix also introduces
criteria for the modeling of load-deformation characteristics of the foundation-soil system
(foundation stiffness) for those analysis procedures in Chapter 5 that permit the use of realistic
assumptions for foundation stiffness rather than the assumption of a fixed base.
Current practice for geotechnical foundation design is based on allowable stresses with allowable
foundation load capacities for dead plus live loads based on limiting long-term static settlements
and providing a large factor of safety. In current practice, allowable soil stresses for dead plus live
loads are typically increased by one-third for load combinations that include wind or seismic
forces. The allowable stresses for dead plus live loads are often far below ultimate soil capacity.
This Provisions appendix and the associated Commentary appendix provide criteria and guidance
for the direct use of ultimate foundation load capacity for load combinations that include seismic
forces. The acceptance criteria covers both the analyses for fixed-base assumptions and analyses
for linear and nonlinear modeling of foundation stiffness for flexible-base assumptions.
Although USD for foundations has not previously been included in design provisions for new
buildings, the same basic principles used in this appendix have been adapted to generate guidelines
for the seismic evaluation and retrofit design of existing buildings (FEMA 273, FEMA 356, and
ATC 40). The criteria and procedures presented herein for the nonlinear modeling of foundation
stiffness, combining a linear or multilinear stiffness and a limiting load capacity based on ultimate
soil strength, are essentially the same as those presented in the FEMA and ATC publications
identified above.
With respect to the adoption of USD procedures for geotechnical foundation design, the primary
issue considered by the Provision Update Committee and the BSSC member organizations has
been the impact of the proposed USD procedures on the size of foundations and consequent effect
on the potential for foundation rocking and building performance. TS3 has conducted a limited
number of design examples, a synopsis of which is presented at the end of the Commentary for the
Appendix to Chapter 7. The example results illustrate the expected effects of the methodology, in
that relative foundation sizes from USD vs ASD are related to the factor of safety on load capacity
under vertical dead plus live loads. When factors of safety are high, smaller foundations result
from USD, but when factors of safety are low, it is possible that foundations may be larger using
USD. Additional examples, including nonlinear dynamic analyses incorporating nonlinear loaddeformation models for foundation soil stiffness and capacity, are warranted to further evaluate
and possibly refine the methodology and criteria. It is hoped that trial usage of the methodologies
presented herein will allow the necessary consensus to be developed to permit later incorporation
into the Provisions. Please direct feed-back on this appendix and its commentary to the BSSC.
A7.1 GENERAL
A7.1.1 Scope. This appendix includes only those foundation requirements that are specifically related
to seismic resistant construction. It assumes compliance with all other basic requirements which
include, but are not limited to, requirements for the extent of the foundation investigation, fills to be
present or to be placed in the area of the structure, slope stability, subsurface drainage, settlement
141
control, and soil bearing and lateral soil pressure recommendations for loads acting without seismic
forces.
A7.1.2 Definitions
Allowable foundation load capacity: See Sec. A 7.2.2.
Ultimate foundation load capacity: See Sec. A 7.2.2.
A7.1.3 Notation
Qas
Allowable foundation load capacity.
Qus
Ultimate foundation load capacity.
The strength reduction, capacity reduction, or resistance factor.
A7.2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

The resisting capacities of the foundations, subjected to the load combinations prescribed elsewhere
in these Provisions, shall meet the requirements of this appendix.
A7.2.1 Foundation components. The strength and detailing of foundation components under seismic
loading conditions, including foundation elements and attachments of the foundation elements to the
superstructure, shall comply with the requirements of Chapters 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12, unless otherwise
specified in this chapter. The strength of foundation components shall not be less than that required
for load combinations that do not include seismic load effects.
A7.2.2. Foundation load capacities. The vertical capacity of foundations (footings, piles, piers,
mats or caissons) as limited by the soil shall be sufficient to support the structure for all prescribed
load combinations without seismic forces, taking into account the settlement that the structure can
withstand while providing an adequate factor of safety against failure. Such capacities are defined as
allowable foundation load capacities, Qas. For load combinations including seismic load effects as
specified in Sec. 4.2.2, vertical, lateral, and rocking load capacities of foundations as limited by the
soil shall be sufficient to resist loads with acceptable deformations, considering the short duration of
loading, the dynamic properties of the soil, and the ultimate load capacities, Qus, of the foundations
under vertical, lateral, and rocking loading.
A7.2.2.1 Determination of ultimate foundation load capacities. Ultimate foundation load
capacities shall be determined by a qualified geotechnical engineer based on geotechnical site
investigations that include field and laboratory testing to determine soil classification and soil strength
parameters, and/or capacities based on insitu testing of prototype foundations. For competent soils
that do not undergo strength degradation under seismic loading, strength parameters for static loading
conditions shall be used to compute ultimate load capacities for seismic design. For sensitive
cohesive soils or saturated cohesionless soils, the potential for earthquake induced strength
degradation shall be considered.
Ultimate foundation load capacities, Qus, under vertical, lateral, and rocking loading shall be
determined using accepted foundation design procedures and principles of plastic analysis.
Calculated ultimate load capacities, Qus, shall be best-estimated values using soil properties that are
representative average values for individual foundations. Best-estimated values of Qus shall be
reduced by resistance factors () to reflect uncertainties in site conditions and in the reliability of
analysis methods. The factored foundation load capacity, Qus, shall then be used to check
acceptance criteria, and as the foundation capacity in foundation nonlinear load-deformation models.
If ultimate foundation load capacities are determined based on geotechnical site investigations
including laboratory or in-situ tests, -factors equal to 0.8 for cohesive soils and 0.7 for cohesionless
soils shall be used for vertical, lateral, and rocking resistance for all foundation types. If ultimate
142
Geotechnical Ultimate Strength design of Foundations and Foundation Load-deformation Modeling

foundation load capacities are determined based on full-scale field-testing of prototype foundations,
-factors equal to 1.0 for cohesive soils and 0.9 for cohesionless soils are permitted.
A7.2.2.2 Acceptance criteria. For linear analysis procedures (Sec. 5.2, 5.3, and 5.4), factored
foundation load capacities, Qus, shall not be exceeded for load combinations that include seismic
load effects.
For the nonlinear response history procedure (Sec. 5.5) and the nonlinear static procedure (Appendix
to Chapter 5), if the factored foundation load capacity, Qus, is reached during seismic loading, the
potential significance of associated transient and permanent foundation displacements shall be
evaluated. Foundation displacements are acceptable if they do not impair the continuing function of
Seismic Use Group III structures or the life safety of any structure.
For nonlinear analysis procedures, an additional evaluation of structural behavior shall be performed
to check potential changes in structural ductility demands due to higher than anticipated foundation
capacity. For this additional evaluation, values of Qus shall be increased by the factor 1/.
A7.2.3 Foundation load-deformation modeling. Where permitted for the analysis procedures in
Chapter 5 and the Appendix to Chapter 5, the load-deformation characteristics of the foundation-soil
system (foundation stiffness), if included in the analysis, shall be modeled in accordance with the
requirements of this section. For linear analysis methods, the linear load-deformation behavior of
foundations shall be represented by an equivalent linear stiffness using soil properties that are
compatible with the soil strain levels associated with the design earthquake motion. The straincompatible shear modulus, G, and the associated strain-compatible shear wave velocity, vS, needed
for the evaluation of equivalent linear stiffness shall be determined using the criteria in Sec. 5.6.2.1.1
or based on a site-specific study. Parametric variations of not less than 50 percent increase and
decrease in stiffness shall be incorporated in dynamic analyses unless smaller variations can be
justified based on field measurements of dynamic soil properties or direct measurements of dynamic
foundation stiffness.
For nonlinear analysis methods, the nonlinear load-deformation behavior of the foundation-soil
system may be represented by a bilinear or multilinear curve having an initial equivalent linear
stiffness and a limiting foundation capacity. The initial equivalent linear stiffness shall be determined
as described above for linear analysis methods. The limiting foundation capacity shall be taken as the
factored foundation load capacity, Qus. Parametric variations in analyses shall include: (1) a
reduction in stiffness of 50 percent combined with a limiting foundation capacity, Qus, and (2) an
increase in stiffness of 50 percent combined with a limiting foundation capacity equal to Qus
increased by a factor 1/.
143
This page is intentionally left blank
144
Chapter 8
STEEL STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 Scope. The design, construction, and quality of steel components that resist seismic forces shall
comply with the requirements of this chapter.
AISC ASD
Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings, American Institute of Steel Construction, 1989 including supplement No. 1,
(2001).
AISC LRFD
Construction, 2002.
AISINASPEC North American Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural
Members, American Iron and Steel Institute, 2001.
AISIGP
Standard for Cold-Formed Steel FramingGeneral Provisions, American Iron and

Steel Institute, 2001
AISIPM
Standard for Cold-Formed Steel FramingPrescriptive Method for One and TwoFamily Dwellings, American Iron and Steel Institute, 2001,
ASCE 8
Specification for the Design of Cold-formed Stainless Steel Structural Members,

American Society of Civil Engineers, 2002.
SJI
Standard Specification, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist
Girders, Steel Joist Institute, 2002.
ASCE 19
Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings, American Society of Civil

Engineers, 1996.
AWS D1.1
Structural Welding CodeBSteel, American Welding Society, 2000.
ASTM A 653
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot-dip Process (A 653-97a), American Society for Testing and
Materials, 1997.
ASTM A 792
Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-dip Process
(A 792-97a), American Society for Testing and Materials, 1997.
ASTM A 875
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy-Coated by the Hot-dip Process
(A 875-97a), American Society for Testing and Materials, 1997.
8.1.3 Definitions
145

Light-framed wall: See Sec. 12.1.3.
Light-framed shear wall: See Sec. 12.1.3.
Shear panel: See Sec. 4.1.3.
8.1.4 Notation
R
See Sec. 4.1.4.
T3
Net tension in steel cable due to dead load, prestress, and seismic load (Sec. 8.5).
T4
Net tension in steel cable due to dead load, prestress, live load, and seismic load (Sec. 8.5).
See Sec. 5.1.3.
See Sec. 4.1.4.

8.2.1 Seismic Design Categories B and C. Steel structures assigned to Seismic Design Category B or
C shall be of any construction permitted by the references in Sec. 8.1.2. An R factor as set forth in
Table 4.3-1 for the appropriate steel system is permitted where the structure is designed and detailed in
accordance with the requirements of AISC Seismic, as modified in Sec. 8.3, or in accordance with Sec.
8.4.1 and 8.4.2, for light-frame cold-formed steel wall systems. Systems not detailed in accordance with
the above shall use the R factor in Table 4.3-1 designated for Steel Systems Not Specifically Detailed
for Seismic Resistance.
8.2.2 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F. Steel structures assigned to Seismic Design Category
D, E, or F shall be designed and detailed in accordance with AISC Seismic as modified in Sec. 8.3.
Light-frame cold-formed steel wall systems shall be designed and detailed in accordance with Sec.
8.4.2.
8.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL

8.3.1 Material properties for determination of required strength. Revise Table I-6-1 of AISC
Seismic, as follows:
1. For the Application titled Hot-rolled structural shapes and bars, All other grades, change
the Ry value from 1.1 to 1.2.
For the Application titled All other products, change the Ry value from 1.1 to 1.2.
146
Steel Structure Design Requirements
8.4 COLD-FORMED STEEL

The design of cold-formed carbon or low-alloy steel members to resist seismic loads shall be in
accordance with the requirements of AISI NASPEC and AISI General and the design of cold-formed
stainless steel structural members to resist seismic loads shall be in accordance with the requirements of
ASCE 8, except as modified by this section.
8.4.1 Modifications to references
Modify Sec. 1.5.2 of ASCE 8 by substituting a load factor of 1.0 in place of 1.5 for nominal earthquake
load.
8.4.2 Light-frame walls. Where required in Sec. 8.2.1 or 8.2.2, cold-formed steel stud walls designed
in accordance with AISI NASPEC, AISI-GP and ASCE 8 shall also comply with the requirements of
this section.
8.4.2.1 Boundary members. All boundary members, chords, and collectors shall be designed to
transmit the specified induced axial forces.
8.4.2.2 Connections. Connections for diagonal bracing members, top chord splices, boundary
members, and collectors shall have a design strength equal to or greater than the nominal tensile strength
of the members being connected or 0 times the design seismic force. The pull-out resistance of screws
shall not be used to resist seismic forces.
8.4.2.3 Braced bay members. In stud systems where the lateral forces are resisted by diagonal braces,
the vertical and diagonal members in braced bays shall be anchored such that the bottom tracks are not
required to resist uplift forces by bending of the track or track web. Both flanges of studs shall be
braced to prevent lateral torsional buckling. In shear wall systems, the vertical boundary members shall
be anchored so the bottom track is not required to resist uplift forces by bending of the track web.
8.4.2.4 Diagonal braces. Provision shall be made for pretensioning or other methods of installation of
tension-only bracing to guard against loose diagonal straps.
8.4.2.5 Shear walls. Nominal shear strengths for shear walls framed with cold-formed steel studs are
given in Table 8.4-1. Design shear strength shall be determined by multiplying the nominal shear
strength by a factor of 0.55. The height to length ratio of wall systems listed in Table 8.4-1 shall not
exceed 2:1. In structures over one story in height, the assemblies in Table 8.4-1 shall not be used to
resist horizontal loads contributed by forces imposed by masonry or concrete construction.
Panel thicknesses shown in Table 8.4-1 shall be considered to be minimums. No panels less than 24 in.
wide shall be used. Plywood or oriented strand board structural panels shall be of a type that is
manufactured using exterior glue. Framing members, blocking or strapping shall be provided at the
edges of all sheets. Fasteners along the edges in shear panels shall be placed not less than 3/8 in. (9.5
mm) in from panel edges. Perimeter members at openings shall be provided and shall be detailed to
distribute the shearing stresses. Wood sheathing shall not be used to splice such members.
Studs shall be a minimum 1-5/8 in. (41 mm) by 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) with a 3/8-in. (9.5 mm) return lip.
Track shall be a minimum 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) by 3-1/2 in. (89 mm). Both studs and track shall have a
minimum uncoated base metal thickness of 0.033 in. (0.84 mm), shall not have an uncoated base metal
thickness greater than 0.048 in. (1.22 mm), and shall satisfy the requirements for ASTM A 653 SS,
Grade 33, ASTM A 792 SS, Grade 33, or ASTM A 875 SS, Grade 33. Panel end studs and their uplift
anchorage shall have the design strength to resist the forces determined by the seismic loads determined
using Eq. 4.2-3 and Eq. 4.2-4.
147

Framing screws shall be No. 8 x 5/8 in. (16 mm) wafer head self-drilling. Plywood and OSB screws
shall be a minimum No. 8 x 1 in. (25 mm) bugle head. Where horizontal straps are used to provide
blocking they shall be a minimum 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) wide and of the same material as the stud and
track. Such straps shall have a thickness at least as great as the thicker of that of the stud and the track.
Table 8.4-1 Nominal Shear Strength (plf)a
for Shear Walls Framed with Cold-formed Steel Studs
Fastener Spacing at Panel
Edges (in.)b
Assembly Description
15/32 rated Structural I sheathing (4-ply)
plywood one side c
Framing
Spacing
780
990
1465
1625
24 in. o.c.
7/16 in. oriented strand board one side c

700
915
1275
1700
24 in. o.c.
a
For metric: 1 in. = 25.4 mm, 1 plf = 14.6 N/m.
b
Screws in the field of the panel shall be installed 12 in. o.c. unless otherwise shown.
c
Both flanges of the studs shall be braced in accordance with Sec. 8.4.2.3.
8.4.3 Prescriptive framing
One and two family dwellings are permitted to be designed and constructed in accordance to the
provisions in the AISIPM subject to the limitations therein.
8.4.4 Steel deck diaphragms. Steel deck diaphragms shall be made from materials which satisfy the
requirements of AISI and ASCE 8. Nominal strengths shall be determined in accordance with approved
analytical procedures or with test procedures prepared by a registered design professional experienced
in testing of cold-formed steel assemblies and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Design
strengths shall be determined by multiplying the nominal strength by a resistance factor, , equal to 0.60
(for mechanically connected diaphragms) and equal to 0.50 (for welded diaphragms). The steel deck
installation for the structure, including fasteners, shall comply with the test assembly arrangement.
Quality standards established for the nominal strength test shall be the minimum standards required for
the steel deck installation, including fasteners.
8.5 STEEL CABLES

The design strength of steel cables shall be determined in accordance with ASCE 19 except as modified
by these Provisions. A load factor of 1.1 shall be applied to the prestress force included in T3 and T4 as
defined in Sec. 3.1.2 of ASCE 19. In Sec. 3.2.1 of ASCE 19, item (c) shall be replaced with 1.5 T3
and item (d) shall be replaced with 1.5 T4.
8.6 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED

FRAMES
The following shall be used in conjunction with AISC Seismic.
8.6.1 Symbols
Asc
Area of the yielding segment of steel core, in.2 (BRBF)
Pysc
Axial yield strength of steel core, kips (BRBF)
Qb
Maximum unbalanced load effect applied to beam by braces, kips. (BRBF)
Compression strength adjustment factor (BRBF)
Tension strength adjustment factor. (BRBF)
148

8.6.2
Glossary
Buckling Restrained Braced Frame (BRBF): A diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements of
Sec. 8.6.3 in which all members of the bracing system are subjected primarily to axial forces and in
which the limit state of compression buckling of braces is precluded at forces and deformations
corresponding to 1.5 times the Design Story Drift.
Buckling-Restraining System: A system of restraints that limits buckling of the steel core in BRBF. This
system includes the casing on the steel core and structural elements adjoining its connections. The bucklingrestraining system is intended to permit the transverse expansion and longitudinal contraction of the steel
core for deformations corresponding to 1.5 times the Design Story Drift.
Casing: An element that resists forces transverse to the axis of the brace thereby restraining buckling of
the core. The casing requires a means of delivering this force to the remainder of the bucklingrestraining system. The casing resists little or no force in the axis of the brace.
Steel Core: The axial-force-resisting element of braces in BRBF. The steel core contains a yielding
segment and connections to transfer its axial force to adjoining elements; it may also contain projections
beyond the casing and transition segments between the projections and yielding segment.
8.6.3
BUCKLING-RESTRAINED BRACED FRAMES (BRBF)
8.6.3.1 Scope. Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF) are expected to withstand significant
inelastic deformations when subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the Design
Earthquake. BRBF shall meet the requirements in this section.
8.6.3.2 Bracing Members
8.6.3.2.1 Composition: Bracing members shall be composed of a structural steel core and a system that
restrains the steel core from buckling.
8.6.3.2.1.1 Steel core. The steel core shall be designed to resist the entire axial force in the brace.
8.6.3.2.1.1.1 Required strength of steel core. The required axial strength of the brace shall not exceed the
design strength of the steel core, Pysc,
where = 0.9
Pysc = Fy Asc
Fy = specified minimum yield strength of steel core
Asc = net area of steel core
8.6.3.2.1.1.2 Detailing
8.6.3.2.1.1.2.1. Plates used in the steel core that are 2 in. thick or greater shall satisfy the minimum
toughness requirements of Sec. 6.3 (AISC Seismic).
8.6.3.2.1.1.2.2. Splices in the steel core are not permitted.
8.6.3.2.1.2 Buckling-restraining system. The buckling-restraining system shall consist of the casing
for the steel core. In stability calculations, beams, columns, and gussets connecting the core shall be
considered parts of this system.
8.6.3.2.1.2.1 Restraint. The buckling-restraining system shall limit local and overall buckling of the
149

steel core for deformations corresponding to 1.5 times the Design Story Drift. The buckling-restraining
system shall not be permitted to buckle within deformations corresponding to 1.5 times the Design Story
Drift.
8.6.3.2.2 Testing. The design of braces shall be based upon results from qualifying cyclic tests in
accordance with the procedures and acceptance criteria of Sec. 8.6.3.7. Qualifying test results shall
consist of at least two successful cyclic tests: one is required to be a test of a brace subassemblage that
includes brace connection rotational demands complying with Sec. 8.6.3.7.4 and the other shall be either
a uniaxial or a subassemblage test complying with Sec. 8.6.3.7.5. Both test types are permitted to be
based upon one of the following:
8.6.3.2.2.1 Types of qualifying tests
8.6.3.2.2.1.1. Tests reported in research or documented tests performed for other projects that are
demonstrated to reasonably match project conditions.
8.6.3.2.2.1.2. Tests that are conducted specifically for the project and are representative of project
member sizes, material strengths, brace-end connection configurations, and matching assembly and
quality control processes.
8.6.3.2.2.2 Applicability. Interpolation or extrapolation of test results for different member sizes shall
be justified by rational analysis that demonstrates stress distributions and magnitudes of internal strains
that are consistent with or less severe than the tested assemblies and that considers the adverse effects of
larger material and variations in material properties. Extrapolation of test results shall be based upon
similar combinations of steel core and buckling-restraining system sizes. Tests shall be permitted to
qualify a design when the provisions of Sec. 8.6.3.7 are met.
8.6.3.2.2.3 Compression strength adjustment factor (). Shall be calculated as the ratio of the
maximum compression force to the maximum tension force of the Test Specimen measured from the
qualification tests specified in Sec. 8.6.3.7.6.3 for the range of deformations corresponding to 1.5 times
the Design Story Drift. The larger value of from the two required brace qualification tests shall be
used. In no case shall be taken as less than 1.0.
8.6.3.2.2.4 Tension strength sdjustment factor (). Shall be calculated as the ratio of the maximum
tension force measured from the qualification tests specified in Sec. 8.6.3.7.6.3 (for the range of
deformations corresponding to 1.5 times the Design Story Drift) to the nominal yield strength of the
Test Specimen. The larger value of from the two required qualification tests shall be used. Where the
tested steel core material does not match that of the prototype, shall be based on coupon testing of the
prototype material.
8.6.3.2.3 Quality assurance. The buckling restrained brace manufacturer shall establish a Quality
Assurance Plan that complies with Sec. 16 (AISC Seismic) and the Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges. The brace manufacturer shall submit the proposed Quality Assurance Plan to
the Engineer of Record for review and approval. The fabrication of buckling restrained braces shall
meet the requirements of the approved Quality Assurance Plan. Only buckling restrained braces
meeting all applicable requirements of the approved Quality Assurance Plan will be used in
construction.
8.6.3.3 Bracing connections
8.6.3.3.1 Required strength. The required strength of bracing connections in tension and compression
(including beam-to-column connections if part of the bracing system) shall be RyPysc.
Exception: The factor Ry need not be applied if Pysc is established using yield stress determined
from a coupon test or mill certificate.
150

8.6.3.3.2 Gusset Plate. The design of connections shall include considerations of local and overall
buckling.
8.6.3.4 Special requirements related to bracing configuration
8.6.3.4.1 V-type and inverted-V-type bracing. V-type and inverted-V-type braced frames shall meet the
following requirements:
8.6.3.4.1.1. A beam that is intersected by braces shall be continuous between columns and shall be
designed to resist the effects of load combinations stipulated by the Applicable Building Code,
assuming the bracing is not present. For load combinations that include seismic, a load Qb shall be
substituted for the term E. Qb is the maximum load effect applied to the beam by the braces. This
vertical and horizontal load effect shall be calculated using Pysc for the brace in compression and
Pysc for the brace in tension. The required flexural strength for the load combinations that include
seismic shall not exceed My as defined in AISC LRFD Chapter F.
8.6.3.4.1.2 Beam stiffness. Beam deflections under the load combination D+Qb (as defined in 16.4a.1.)
shall not exceed L/240, where L is the beam span between column lines.
8.6.3.4.1.3. Deformation. For the purposes of brace design and testing, the calculated maximum
deformation of braces shall be increased by including the effect of the vertical deflection of the beam
under the loading defined in Sec.8.6.3.4.1.1
8.6.3.4.1.4. Lateral support of the beam shall be provided when required for stability. The analysis shall
include consideration of Qb and the axial force in the beam.
8.6.3.4.2 K-Type Bracing. K-type braced frames are not permitted for BRBF.
8.6.3.5 Columns. Columns in BRBF shall meet the following requirements:
8.6.3.5.1 Width-thickness Ratios. Compression elements of columns shall satisfy the width-thickness
limitations in Table I-8-1(AISC Seismic).
8.6.3.5.2 Splices. In addition to meeting the requirements in Sec. 8.3 (AISC Seismic), column splices in
BRBF shall be designed to develop at least the nominal shear strength of the smaller connected member
and 50 percent of the flexural strength of the smaller connected member. Splices shall be located in the
middle one-third of the column clear height.
8.6.3.5.3 Required Strength. In addition to the requirements in Sec. 8.3 (AISC Seismic), the required
strength of columns in BRBF shall be determined from load combinations as stipulated in the
Applicable Building Code, except that the seismic axial forces shall be determined from the maximum
brace forces that can be introduced at each level. The maximum brace tension force shall be taken as
Pysc. The maximum brace compression force shall be taken as Pysc. The required column strength
need not exceed the maximum force that can be delivered by the system.
8.6.3.6 Beams. Beams in BRBF shall meet the following requirements:
8.6.3.6.1 Width-thickness ratios. Compression elements of beams shall satisfy the width-thickness
limitations in Table I-8-1 (AISC Seismic).
8.6.3.6.2 Required Strength. The required strength of beams shall include the effects of dead and live
loads in conjunction with axial forces corresponding to the maximum brace forces. The maximum
brace tension force shall be taken as Pysc. The maximum brace compression force shall be taken as
Pysc.
8.6.3.7 Qualifying Cyclic Tests Of Buckling-Restrained Braces
8.6.3.7.1 Scope and purpose. This Appendix includes requirements for qualifying cyclic tests of
individual buckling-restrained braces and buckling-restrained brace subassemblages, when required in
these provisions. The purpose of the testing of individual braces is to provide evidence that a buckling151

restrained brace satisfies the requirements for strength and inelastic deformation in these provisions; it
also permits the determination of maximum brace forces for design of adjoining elements. The purpose
of testing of the brace subassemblage is to provide evidence that the brace-design can satisfactorily
accommodate the deformation and rotational demands associated with the design. Further, the
subassemblage test is intended to demonstrate that the hysteretic behavior of the brace in the
subassemblage is consistent with that of the individual brace elements tested uniaxially.
Alternative testing requirements are permitted when approved by the Engineer of Record and the
regulatory agency.
This Appendix provides only minimum recommendations for simplified test conditions. If conditions in
the actual building so warrant, additional testing shall be performed to demonstrate satisfactory and
reliable performance of buckling-restrained braces during actual earthquake ground motions.
8.6.3.7.2 Symbols. The numbers in parenthesis after the definition of a symbol refers to the Section
number in which the symbol is first used.
Db
Deformation quantity used to control loading of test specimen (total brace end rotation for the
subassemblage test specimen; total brace axial deformation for the brace test specimen) (Sec.
8.6.3.7.6).
Dbm
Value of deformation quantity, Db, corresponding to the design story drift (Sec. 8.6.3.7.6).
Dby
Value of deformation quantity, Db, at first significant yield of test specimen (Sec. 8.6.3.7.6).
8.6.3.7.3 Definitions
Brace Test Specimen: A single buckling-restrained brace element used for laboratory testing intended
to model the brace in the Prototype.
Design Methodology: A set of step-by-step procedures, based on calculation or experiment, used to
determine sizes, lengths, and details in the design of buckling-restrained braces and their connections.
Inelastic Deformation: The permanent or plastic portion of the axial displacement in a bucklingrestrained brace, divided by the length of the yielding portion of the brace, expressed in percent.
Prototype: The brace, connections, members, steel properties, and other design, detailing, and
construction features to be used in the actual building frame.
Subassemblage Test Specimen: The combination of the brace, the connections and testing apparatus
that replicate as closely as practical the axial and flexural deformations of the brace in the Prototype.
Test Specimen: Brace Test Specimen or Subassemblage Test Specimen.
8.6.3.7.4 Subassemblage test specimen. The subassemblage test specimen shall satisfy the following
requirements:
1. The mechanism for accommodating inelastic curvature in the subassemblage test specimen brace
shall be the same as that of the prototype. The rotational deformation demands on the
subassemblage Test Specimen brace shall be equal to or greater than those of the Prototype.
2. The axial yield strength of the steel core of the brace in the subassemblage test specimen shall not be
less than of that of the prototype as determined from mill certificate or coupon test.
3. The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel core projection of the subassemblage test
specimen brace shall be the same as that of the brace in the Prototype.
4. The same documented design methodology shall be used for design of the subassemblage and brace
and of the Prototype and for comparison of the rotational deformation demands on the
subassemblage brace and on the prototype in the construction.
152

5. The calculated margins of safety for the prototype connection design, steel core projection stability,
overall buckling and other relevant subassemblage test specimen brace construction details,
excluding the gusset plate, for the Prototype, shall equal or exceed those of the subassemblage test
specimen construction.
6. Lateral bracing of the subassemblage test specimen shall replicate the lateral bracing in the
prototype.
7. The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be manufactured in accordance with the same
quality control and assurance processes and procedures.
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this section shall be permitted subject to qualified peer
review and building official approval.
8.6.3.7.5 Brace test specimen. The brace test specimen shall replicate as closely as is practical the
pertinent design, detailing, construction features, and material properties of the prototype.
8.6.3.7.5.1 Design of brace test specimen. The same documented design methodology shall be used
for the brace test specimen and the prototype. The design calculations shall demonstrate, at a minimum,
the following requirements:
1. The calculated margin of safety for stability against overall buckling for the prototype shall equal or
exceed that of the brace test specimen.
2. The calculated margins of safety for the brace test specimen and the prototype shall account for
differences in material properties, including yield and ultimate stress, ultimate elongation, and
toughness.
8.6.3.7.5.2 Manufacture of brace test specimen. The brace test specimen and the prototype shall be
manufactured in accordance with the same quality control and assurance processes and procedures.
8.6.3.7.5.3 Similarity of brace test specimen and prototype. The brace test specimen shall meet the
following requirements:
1. The cross-sectional shape and orientation of the steel core shall be the same as that of the prototype.
2. The axial yield strength of the steel core of the brace test specimen shall not vary by more than 50
percent from that of the prototype as determined from mill certificates or coupon tests.
3. The material for, and method of, separation between the steel core and the buckling restraining
mechanism in the brace test specimen shall be the same as that in the prototype.
Extrapolation beyond the limitations stated in this section shall be permitted subject to qualified peer
review and building official approval.
8.6.3.7.5.4 Connection details. The connection details used in the brace test specimen shall represent
the Prototype connection details as closely as practical.
8.6.3.7.5.5 Materials
1. Steel core: The following requirements shall be satisfied for the steel core of the brace test
specimen:
a. The nominal yield stress of the prototype steel core shall be the same as that of the brace
test specimen.
b. The yield strength of the material of the steel core in the prototype shall not exceed 110
percent of that of the brace test specimen as determined from mill certificates or coupon
tests.
c. The specified minimum ultimate stress and strain of the prototype steel core shall meet
153

or exceed those of the brace test specimen.
2. Buckling-restraining mechanism: Materials used in the buckling-restraining mechanism of the
brace test specimen shall be the same as those used in the prototype.
8.6.3.7.5.6 Welds. The welds on the test specimen shall replicate those on the prototype as close as
practical. The following parameters shall be the same or more stringent in the prototype as in the test
specimen: welding procedure specification, minimum filler metal toughness, welding positions, and
inspection and nondestructive testing requirements and acceptance criteria.
8.6.3.7.5.7 Bolts. The bolted portions of the brace test specimen shall replicate the bolted portions of
the prototype as closely as possible.
8.6.3.7.6 Loading history
8.6.3.7.6.1 General requirements. The test specimen shall be subjected to cyclic loads according to
the requirements prescribed on Sec. 8.3.7.6.2 and 8.3.7.6.3. Additional increments of loading beyond
those described in Sec. 8.3.7.6.3 are permitted. Each cycle shall include a full tension and full
compression excursion to the prescribed deformation.
8.6.3.7.6.2 Test Control. The test shall be conducted by controlling the level of axial or rotational
deformation, (Db) imposed on the test specimen. As an alternate, the maximum rotational deformation
may be applied and maintained as the protocol is followed for axial deformation.
8.6.3.7.6.3 Loading sequence. Loads shall be applied to the test specimen to produce the following
deformations, where the deformation is the steel core axial deformation for the Test Specimen and the
rotational deformation demand for the subassemblage test specimen brace:
1.
6 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to Db = Dby
2.
4 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to Db = 0.50 Dbm
3.
4 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to Db = 1 Dbm
4.
2 cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to Db = 1.5 Dbm
5.
Additional complete cycles of loading at the deformation corresponding to Db = 1 Dbm as
required for the Brace Test Specimen to achieve a cumulative inelastic axial deformation of at least 140
times the yield deformation (not required for the subassemblage test specimen).
The design story drift shall not be taken as less than 0.01 times the story height for the purposes of
calculating Dbm. Dbm need not be taken as greater than 5Dby.
Other loading sequences are permitted to be used to qualify the test specimen when they are
demonstrated to be of equal or greater severity in terms of maximum and cumulative inelastic
deformation.
8.6.3.7.7 Instrumentation. Sufficient instrumentation shall be provided on the test specimen to permit
measurement or calculation of the quantities listed in Sec. 8.6.3.7.9.
8.6.3.7.8 Materials testing requirements
8.6.3.7.8.1 Tension testing requirements. Tension testing shall be conducted on samples of steel
taken from the same material as that used to manufacture the steel core. Tension-test results from
certified mill test reports shall be reported but are not permitted to be used in place of specimen testing
for the purposes of this Section. Tension-test results shall be based upon testing that is conducted in
accordance with Sec. 8.6.3.7.8.2.
8.6.3.7.8.2 Methods of tension testing. Tension testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM
A6, ASTM A370, and ASTM E8, with the following exceptions:
154

1. The yield stress, Fy, that is reported from the test shall be based upon the yield strength definition in
ASTM A370, using the offset method of 0.002 strain.
2. The loading rate for the tension test shall replicate, as closely as is practical, the loading rate used
for the Test Specimen.
8.6.3.7.9 Test reporting requirements
For each Test Specimen, a written test report meeting the requirements of this section shall be prepared.
The report shall thoroughly document all key features and results of the test. The report shall include the
following information:
1. A drawing or clear description of the test specimen, including key dimensions, boundary conditions
at loading and reaction points, and location of lateral bracing if any.
2. A drawing of the connection details showing member sizes, grades of steel, the sizes of all
connection elements, welding details including filler metal, the size and location of bolt holes, the
size and grade of bolts, and all other pertinent details of the connections.
3. A listing of all other essential variables as listed in Sec. 8.6.3.7.4 or 8.6.3.7.5 as appropriate.
4. A listing or plot showing the applied load or displacement history.
5. A plot of the applied load versus the deformation (Db). The method used to determine the
deformations shall be clearly shown. The locations on the Test Specimen where the loads and
deformations were measured shall be clearly identified.
6. A chronological listing of significant test observations, including observations of yielding, slip,
instability, transverse displacement along the Test Specimen and fracture of any portion of the Test
Specimen and connections, as applicable.
7. The results of the material tests specified in Sec. 8.6.3.7.8.
8. The manufacturing quality control and quality-assurance plans used for the fabrication of the test
specimen. These shall be included with the welding procedure specifications and welding inspection
reports.
Additional drawings, data, and discussion of the test specimen or test results are permitted to be included in
the report.
8.6.3.7.10 Acceptance criteria. At least one subassemblage test shall be performed to satisfy the
requirements of Sec. 8.6.3.7.4. At least one brace test shall be performed to satisfy the requirements of
Sec. 8.6.3.7.5. Within the required protocol range all tests shall satisfy the following requirements:
1. The plot showing the applied load vs. displacement history shall exhibit stable, repeatable behavior
with positive incremental stiffness.
2. There shall be no fracture, brace instability or brace end connection failure.
3. For brace tests, each cycle to a deformation greater than Dby the maximum tension and compression
forces shall not be less than 1.0 Pysc.
4. For brace tests, each cycle to a deformation greater than Dby the ratio of the maximum compression
force to the maximum tension force shall not exceed 1.3.
Other acceptance criteria may be adopted for the brace test specimen or subassemblage test specimen
subject to qualified peer review and building official approval.
8.7 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR SPECIAL STEEL PLATE WALLS

The following shall be used in conjunction with AISC Seismic.
155

8.7.1 Symbols
tw
Thickness of the web
Lcf
Clear distance between vertical boundary elements (VBEs) flanges.
Distance between horizontal boundary elements (HBE) centerlines.
Ab
The average of the cross-sectional area of a HBE bounding the panel.
Ac
The average of the cross-sectional area of a VBE bounding the panel.
Ic
Moment of inertia of a VBE.
Distance between VBE centerlines.
Angle of web yielding.
8.7.2 Glossary
Webs: The slender unstiffened steel plates connected to surrounding horizontal and vertical boundary
elements to resist lateral loads.
Horizontal boundary elements are structural shapes oriented horizontally and framing the Webs of
special steel plate walls.
Vertical boundary elements are structural shapes oriented vertically and framing the Webs of special
steel plate walls.
Panel: Each Web and its surrounding elements constitute a panel.
8.7.3 Scope. Special steel plate walls (SSPWs) are expected to withstand significant inelastic deformations
in the Webs when subjected to the forces resulting from the motions of the design earthquake. The HBEs
and VBEs adjacent to the webs shall be designed to remain essentially elastic under the maximum forces
that can be generated by the fully yielded webs, except that plastic hinging at the ends of HBEs is permitted.
SSPWs shall meet the requirements in this section.
8.7.4 Webs
8.7.4.1
The nominal strength of a panel is given by:
Vn = 0.42 Fy tw Lcf sin2
where :
tw is the thickness of the web,
Lcf is the clear distance between VBE flanges, and
is given by
1+
tan 4 =
tw L
2 Ac
1
h3
+
1 + t w h
A
I
L
360
c
b
where:
h
= the distance between HBE centerlines,
Ab = cross-sectional area of a HBE,
156

Ac = cross-sectional area of a VBE,
Ic
= moment of inertia of a VBE, and
L = the distance between VBE centerlines.

The panel design strength shall be Vn, where is 0.9.
8.7.4.2 Panel aspect ratio. The ratio of panel length to height, L/h, shall be greater than 0.8, but shall not
exceed 2.5.
8.7.4.3 Openings in webs. Openings in webs shall be bounded on all sides by HBEs and VBEs
extending the full width and height of the panel respectively, unless otherwise justified by testing and
analysis.
8.7.4.4 Maximum slenderness ratio for plates. The maximum width-thickness ratio of plate elements
shall be 25 E / Fy . The width shall be taken as the shortest distance between boundary elements.
8.7.5 Connections of webs to boundary elements. The required strength of Web connections to the
surrounding HBEs and VBEs shall equal the expected yield strength, in tension, of the Web
calculated at an angle .
8.7.6 Horizontal and vertical boundary elements (HBEs and VBEs)
8.7.6.1 Strength of boundary elements. In addition to the requirements of Sect. 8.3 of AISC Seismic,
the required strength of VBEs shall be the based upon of the forces corresponding to the expected yield
strength (in tension) of the Web calculated at an angle .
The required strength of HBEs shall be the greater of the forces corresponding to the expected yield
strength (in tension) of the Web calculated at an angle or that determined from the load combinations
in ASCE 7 assuming the web provides no support for gravity loads.
8.7.6.2 HBE to VBE connections. HBE to VBE connections shall be made with HBE flanges welded
to VBE. HBE webs may be bolted or welded to VBE. Partial joint penetration welds are not permitted at
the HBE flange weld. The connection shall have a required strength Mu of at least 1.1RyMp of the HBE.
The required shear strength Vu of a HBE-to-VBE connection shall be determined from the load
combinations as stipulated in the ASCE 7 except that the required shear strength shall not be less than
the shear corresponding to moments at each end equal to 1.1RyMp together with the shear resulting from
the expected tensile strength of the Webs yielding at an angle .
8.7.6.3 Boundary elements compactness. The width-thickness ratios of HBEs and VBEs shall comply
with the requirements in Table I-8-1(AISC Seismic)
Modify Footnotes b and c to Table I-8-1(AISC Seismic) by including SSPW to both footnotes.
8.7.6.4 Lateral Bracing. HBEs shall be laterally braced at all intersections with VBEs and at a
spacing not to exceed 0.086 ryEs /Fy . Both flanges of HBEs shall be braced either directly or
indirectly. The required strength of lateral bracing shall be at least 2 percent of the HBEs flange
nominal strength, Fybftf. The required stiffness of all lateral bracing shall be determined in accordance
with Equations C3-8 or C3-10 as applicable in the AISC LRFD. In these equations, Mu shall be
computed as RyZFy.
8.7.6.5 VBE splices. VBE splices shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 8.4 (AISC Seismic).
8.7.6.6 Panel zones. The VBE panel zone next to the top and base horizontal boundary elements of the
SSPW shall comply with the requirements in Sec. 9.3 (AISC Seismic).
8.7.6.7 Stiffness of vertical boundary elements. The VBE shall have moments of inertia about an axis
perpendicular to the direction of the web plate, Ic, not less than 0.00307 tw h4 / L.
157
158
Chapter 9
CONCRETE STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
9.1 GENERAL
9.1.1 Scope. The quality and testing of concrete and steel (reinforcing and anchoring) materials and the
design and construction of concrete components that resist seismic forces shall comply with the
requirements of ACI 318 except as modified in this chapter.
ACI 318

2002.
ACI T1.1
Acceptance Criteria for Moment Frames Based on Structural Testing, American

Concrete Institute, 2001.
ATC-24
Guidelines for Seismic Testing of Components of Steel Structures, Applied

Technology Council, 1992.
9.1.3 General definitions

Base: See Sec. 4.1.3. Base is defined as base of structure in Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Basement: See Sec. 7.1.3.
Boundary elements: See Sec. 2.1.3.and Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Confined region: The portion of a reinforced concrete component in which the concrete is confined by
closely spaced special transverse reinforcement restraining the concrete in directions perpendicular to
the applied stress.
Coupling beam: A beam that is used to connect adjacent concrete wall elements to make them act
together as a unit to resist lateral loads.
Diaphragm: See Sec. 4.1.3. Diaphragm is defined as structural diaphragm in Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Intermediate moment frame: See Sec. 4.1.3 and Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Joint: See Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Moment frame: See Sec. 4.1.3 and Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Ordinary moment frame: See Sec. 4.1.3 and Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Plain concrete: See Sec. 2.1 of ACI 318.
Reinforced concrete: See Sec. 2.1 of ACI 318.
159
2003 Provisions Chapter 9

Seismic-force-resisting system: See Sec. 1.1.4. Seismic-force-resisting system is defined as lateralforce-resisting system in Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Seismic forces: See Sec. 1.1.4. Seismic forces are defined as specified lateral forces in Sec. 21.1 of
ACI 318.
Shear wall: See Sec. 4.1.3. Shear walls are defined as structural walls in Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Special moment frame: See Sec. 4.1.3 and Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318.
Special transverse reinforcement: Reinforcement composed of spirals, closed stirrups, or hoops and
supplementary cross-ties provided to restrain the concrete and qualify the portion of the component,
where used, as a confined region.

9.2.1 Classification of shear walls. Structural concrete shear walls that resist seismic forces shall be
classified in accordance with this section.
9.2.1.1 Ordinary plain concrete shear walls. Ordinary plain concrete shear walls shall satisfy the
requirements of Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318 for ordinary structural plain concrete walls.
9.2.1.2 Detailed plain concrete shear walls. Detailed plain concrete shear walls above the base shall
satisfy the requirements of Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318 for ordinary structural plain concrete walls and contain
reinforcement as follows:
Vertical reinforcement of at least 0.20 in.2 (129 mm2) in cross-sectional area shall be provided
continuously from support to support at each corner, at each side of each opening, and at the ends of
walls. The reinforcement required by Sec. 22.6.6.5 of ACI 318 shall be provided.
Horizontal reinforcement of at least 0.20 in.2 (129 mm2) in cross-sectional area shall be provided:
1. Continuously at structurally connected roof and floor levels and at the top of walls,
2. At the bottom of load-bearing walls or in the top of foundations where doweled to the wall, and
3. At a maximum spacing of 120 in. (3050 mm).
Reinforcement at the top and bottom of openings, where used in determining the maximum spacing
specified in Item 3 above, shall be continuous in the wall.
Basement, foundation, or other walls below the base shall be reinforced as required by Sec. 22.6.6.5 of
ACI 318.
9.2.1.3 Ordinary precast shear walls. Ordinary precast shear walls shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec.21.1 of ACI 318 for ordinary precast structural walls. See Sec. 9.2.2.1.1.
9.2.1.4 Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls. Ordinary reinforced concrete shear walls shall
satisfy the requirements of Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318 for ordinary reinforced concrete structural walls. See
Sec. 9.2.2.1.1.
9.2.1.5 Intermediate precast shear walls. Intermediate precast shear walls shall satisfy the
requirements of both Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318 and Sec. 9.2.2.5 for intermediate precast structural walls.
9.2.1.6 Special reinforced concrete shear walls. Special reinforced concrete shear walls shall satisfy
the requirements of Sec. 21.1 of ACI 318 for special reinforced concrete structural walls or for special
precast structural walls.
160
Concrete Structure Design Requirements

9.2.2 Modifications to ACI 318
9.2.2.1 General
9.2.2.1.1 Additional or modified definitions. Add or modify the following definitions in Sec. 21.1 of
ACI 318:
Design displacement: Design story drift as specified in Sec. 5.2.6.1 of the 2003 NEHRP
Recommended Provisions.
Design load combinations: Combinations of factored loads and forces specified in Sec. 9.2 or C.2
where seismic load E is specified in Sec. 4.2.2 of the 2003 NEHRP Recommended Provisions.
Ordinary precast structural wall: A wall incorporating precast concrete elements and complying
with the requirements of Chapters 1 through 18 with the requirements of Chapter 16 superseding those
of Chapter 14.
Ordinary reinforced concrete structural wall: A cast-in-place wall complying with the requirements
of Chapters 1 through 18.
Wall pier: A wall segment with a horizontal length-to-thickness ratio of at least 2.5, but not exceeding
6, whose clear height is at least two times its horizontal length.
9.2.2.1.2 Additional notation. Add or modify the following notation in Sec. 21.0 of ACI 318:
m
= Cds. Also equal to u of ACI 318.
= design level response displacement, which is the total drift or total story drift that
occurs
when the structure is subjected to the design seismic forces.
9.2.2.1.3 Scope: Delete Sec. 21.2.1.2, 21.2.1.3, and 21.2.1.4 of ACI 318 and replace with the
following:
21.2.1.2 For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category A or B, provisions of Chapters 1
through 18 and 22 shall apply except as modified by the requirements of Chapter 9 of the 2003
NEHRP Recommended Provisions. Where the design seismic loads are computed using
provisions for intermediate or special concrete systems, the requirements of Chapter 21 for
intermediate or special systems, as applicable, shall be satisfied.
21.2.1.3 For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, intermediate or special
moment frames, ordinary or special reinforced concrete structural walls, or intermediate or
special precast structural walls shall be used to resist seismic forces induced by earthquake
motions. Where the design seismic loads are computed using the provisions for intermediate or
special concrete systems, the requirements of Chapter 21 for special systems, as applicable,
shall be satisfied.
21.2.1.4 For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E or F, special moment frames,
special structural walls, diaphragms, trusses and foundations complying with Sec. 21.2 through
21.10, or intermediate precast structural walls complying with 21.13, shall be used to resist
earthquake motions. Frame members not proportioned to resist earthquake forces shall comply with
Sec. 21.11.
9.2.2.1.4. Delete Sec. 21.2 of ACI 318 and replace with following:
21.2.5 Reinforcement in members resisting earthquake-induced forces.
21.2.5.1 Deformed reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in the
frame members and in structural wall boundary elements shall comply with ASTM A 706. ASTM
A 615 Grades 40 and 60 reinforcement shall be permitted in these members if:
161

(a) The actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed the specified yield strength by
more than 18,000 psi (retests shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 3000 psi);
and
(b) The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile yield strength is not less
than 1.25.
21.2.5.2 Prestressing steel resisting earthquake-induced flexural and axial loads in frame members
shall comply with ASTM A 421 or ASTM A 722. The average prestress, fpc, calculated for an area
equal to the members shortest cross-sectional dimension multiplied by the perpendicular dimension
shall not exceed the lesser of 700 psi or f c / 6 at plastic hinge regions.
21.2.9 Anchorages for post-tensioning tendons.
21.2.9 Anchorages for unbonded post-tensioning tendons resisting earthquake induced forces in
structures in regions of moderate or high seismic risk, or assigned to intermediate or high seismic
performance or design categories shall withstand, without failure, 50 cycles of loading between 40
and 85 percent of the specified tensile strength of the prestressing steel.
9.2.2.2 Special moment frames. Add the following new Sec. 21.3.2.5 to ACI 318:
21.3.2.5 Unless the special moment frame is qualified for use through structural testing as
required by 21.6.3, for flexural members, prestressing steel shall not provide more than one quarter
of the strength for either positive or negative moment at the critical section in a plastic hinge
location and shall be anchored at or beyond the exterior face of a joint.
9.2.2.3 Special reinforced concrete shear walls
9.2.2.3.1. In Sec. 21.7.3 of ACI 318, change factored load combinations to design load
combinations.
9.2.2.3.2. Add a new Sec. 21.7.10 to ACI 318 which reads as follows:
21.7.10 Wall piers and wall segments
21.7.10.1: Wall piers not designed as part of a special moment frame shall have transverse
reinforcement designed to satisfy the requirements of Sec. 21.7.10.2.
Exceptions: This requirement need not be applied in the following conditions:
1. Wall piers that satisfy Sec. 21.11, and

2. Wall piers along a wall line within a story where other shear wall segments provide lateral
support to the wall piers and such segments have a total stiffness of at least six times the
sum of the stiffness of all the wall piers.
21.7.10.2: Transverse reinforcement with seismic hooks at both ends shall be designed to resist
the shear forces determined from Sec. 21.4.5.1. Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not
exceed 6 in. (152 mm). Transverse reinforcement shall be extended beyond the pier clear height for
at least 12 in. (304mm).
21.7.10.3 Wall segments with a horizontal length-to-thickness ratio less than 2.5 shall be designed
as columns.
9.2.2.4 Special structural walls constructed using precast concrete . Add a new Sec. 21.8.2 to ACI
318 as follows:
21.8.2 Wall systems not meeting the requirements of 21.8.1 shall be permitted if substantiating
experimental evidence and analysis meets the requirements of Sec. 9. 6 of the 2003 NEHRP
Recommended Provisions.
162

9.2.2.5 Intermediate precast structural walls. Delete existing Sec. 21.13.3 of ACI 318 and replace
with following:
21.13.3 Connections that are designed to yield shall be capable of maintaining 80 percent of their
design strength at the deformation induced by design displacement, or shall use type 2 mechanical
splices.
21.13.4 Elements of the connection that are not designed to yield shall develop at least 1.5 Sy.
21.13.5 Wall piers not designed as part of a moment frame shall have transverse reinforcement
designed to resist the shear forces determined from Sec. 21.12.3. Spacing of transverse
reinforcement shall not exceed 8 in., and (b) six times the diameter of the longitudinal
reinforcement. Transverse reinforcement shall be extended beyond the pier clear height for at least
12 in.
Exception: The above requirement need not apply in the following situations:
1. Wall piers that satisfy Sec. 21.11, and

2. Wall piers along a wall line within a story where other shear wall segments provide lateral
support to the wall piers and such segments have a total stiffness of at least six times the
sum of the stiffnesses of all the wall piers.
Wall segments with a horizontal length-to-thickness ratio less than 2.5 shall be designed as
columns.
9.2.2.6 Foundations. Delete Sec. 21.10.1.1 of ACI 318 and replace with following:
21.10.1.1 Foundations resisting earthquake-induced forces or transferring earthquake-induced
forces between a structure and the ground shall comply with requirements of 21.10 and other
applicable provisions except as modified by Chapter 7 of the 2003 NEHRP Recommended
Provisions.
9.2.2.7 Frame members that are not part of the seismic-force-resisting system. Delete
Sec.21.11.2.2 of ACI 318 and replace with following:
21.11.2.2 . Members with factored gravity axial forces exceeding Agfc'/10 shall satisfy 21.4.3,
21.4.4.1(c), 21.4.4.3, and 21.4.5. The maximum longitudinal spacing of ties shall be so for the full
column height. The spacing, so, shall not be more than six diameters of the smallest longitudinal bar
enclosed or 6 in. (152 mm), whichever is smaller. Lap splices of longitudinal reinforcement in such
members need not satisfy 21.4.3.2 in structures where the seismic-force-resisting system does not
include special moment frames.
9.2.2.8 Anchoring to Concrete
9.2.2.8.1. Delete Sec. D.3.3.2 of ACI 318 and replace with following:
D.3.3.2 In structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F, post-installed structural
anchors for use under D.2.3 shall have passed the Simulated Seismic Tests of ACI 355.2.
D.3.3.3 In structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F, the design strength of

anchors shall be taken as 0.75 Nn and 0.75Vn, where is given in D 4.4 when the load
combinations of Sec. 9.2 are used and in D 4.5 when the load combinations of Appendix C are used,
and Nn and Vn are determined in accordance with D.4.1.
D 3.3.4 In structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C, D, E or F, anchors shall be

designed to be governed by tensile or shear strength of a ductile steel element, unless D.3.3.5 is
satisfied.
163

9.2.2.8.4. Delete Sec. D 3.3.5 of ACI 318 and replace with following:
D 3.3.5 Instead of D 3.3.4, the attachment that the anchor is connecting to the structure shall be
designed so that the attachment undergoes ductile yielding at a load level corresponding to anchor
forces no greater than the design strength of anchors specified in D.3.3.3, or the minimum design
strength of the anchors shall be at least 2.5 times the factored forces transmitted by the attachment.
9.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY B

Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category B shall satisfy the requirements of Sec.21.2.1.2 of ACI
318 and this section.
9.3.1 Ordinary moment frames. Flexural members of all ordinary moment frames forming part of the
seismic-force-resisting system shall be designed in accordance with Sec. 7.13.2 of ACI 318. For such
elements, at least two main flexural reinforcing bars shall be provided continuously, top and bottom,
throughout the beams and shall extend through or be developed within exterior columns or boundary
elements.
Columns of ordinary moment frames having a clear-height-to-maximum-plan-dimension ratio of 5 or

less shall be designed for shear in accordance with Sec. 21.12.3 of ACI 318.

Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category C shall satisfy the requirements for Seismic Design
Category B, Sec. 21.2.1.3 of ACI 318 and the additional requirements of this section.
9.4.1 Discontinuous members. Columns supporting reactions from discontinuous stiff members such
as walls shall be designed for the seismic load effects defined in Sec. 4.2.2.2 and shall be provided with
transverse reinforcement at the spacing so as defined in Sec. 2.12.5.2 of ACI 318 over their full height
beneath the level at which the discontinuity occurs. This transverse reinforcement shall be extended
above and below the column as required in Sec. 21.4.4.5 of ACI 318.
9.4.2 Plain concrete. Plain concrete members shall comply with the requirements of ACI 318 and the
additional requirements and limitations of this section.
9.4.2.1 Walls. Ordinary and detailed plain concrete walls are not permitted.
Exception: In detached one- and two-family dwellings three stories or less in height constructed
with stud bearing walls, plain concrete basement, foundation, or other walls below the base are
permitted. Such walls shall have reinforcement in accordance with Sec. 22.6.6.5 of ACI 318.
9.4.2.2 Footings. Isolated footings of plain concrete supporting pedestals or columns are permitted
provided the projection of the footing beyond the face of the supported member does not exceed the
footing thickness.
Exception: In detached one- and two-family dwellings three stories or less in height constructed
with stud bearing walls, the projection of the footing beyond the face of the supported member shall
be permitted to exceed the footing thickness.
Plain concrete footings supporting walls shall be provided with no less than two continuous longitudinal
reinforcing bars. Bars shall not be smaller than No. 4 (13 mm) and shall have a total area of not less
than 0.002 times the gross cross-sectional area of the footing. For footings that exceed 8 in. in
thickness, a minimum of one bar shall be provided at the top and bottom of the footing. For foundation
systems consisting of plain concrete footing and plain concrete stemwall, a minimum of one bar shall be
provided at the top of the stemwall and at the bottom the footing. Continuity of reinforcement shall be
provided at corners and intersections.
164

Exceptions:
1. In detached one- and two-family dwellings three stories or less in height and constructed with stud
bearing walls, plain concrete footings supporting walls shall be permitted without longitudinal
reinforcement.
2. Where a slab-on-ground is cast monolithically with the footing, one No. 5 (16 mm) bar is permitted
to be located at either the top or bottom of the footing.
9.4.2.3 Pedestals. Plain concrete pedestals shall not be used to resist lateral seismic forces.

Structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E, or F shall satisfy the requirements for Seismic
Design Category C and Sec. 21.2.1.4 of ACI 318.
9.6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR SPECIAL PRECAST STRUCTURAL WALLS

BASED ON VALIDATION TESTING
9.6.1 Notation
Symbols additional to those in Chapter 21 of ACI 318 are defined.

Emax=
maximum lateral resistance of test module determined from test results (forces or moments).
En =
nominal lateral resistance of test module calculated using specified geometric properties of test
members, specified yield strength of reinforcement, specified compressive strength of concrete,
a strain compatibility analysis or deformation compatibility analysis for flexural strength and a
strength reduction factor of 1.0.
Ent =
Calculated lateral resistance of test module using the actual geometric properties of test
members, the actual strengths of reinforcement, concrete, and coupling devices, obtained by
testing per 9.6.7.7, 9.6.7.8, and.9.6.7.9; and a strength reduction factor of 1.0.
drift ratio.
relative energy dissipation ratio.
9.6.2 Definitions
Definitions additional to those in Chapter 21 of ACI 318 are defined.

9.6.2.1 Coupling Elements. Devices or beams connecting adjacent vertical boundaries of structural
walls and used to provide stiffness and energy dissipation for the connected assembly greater than the
sum of those provided by the connected walls acting as separate units.
9.6.2.2 Drift ratio. Total lateral deformation of the test module divided by the height of the test
module.
9.6.2.3 Global toughness. The ability of the entire lateral force resisting system of the prototype
structure to maintain structural integrity and continue to carry the required gravity load at the maximum
lateral displacements anticipated for the ground motions of the maximum considered earthquake.
9.6.2.4 Prototype structure. The concrete wall structure for which acceptance is sought.
9.6.2.5 Relative energy dissipation ratio. Ratio of actual to ideal energy dissipated by test module
during reversed cyclic response between given drift ratio limits, expressed as the ratio of the area of the
hysteresis loop for that cycle to the area of the circumscribing parallelograms defined by the initial
stiffnesses during the first cycle and the peak resistances during the cycle for which the relative energy
dissipation ratio is calculated Sec. 9.6.9.1.3.
9.6.2.5 Test module. Laboratory specimen representing the critical walls of the prototype structure.
See 9.6.5.
165

9.6.3 Scope and general requirements
9.6.3.1 These provisions define minimum acceptance criteria for new precast structural walls, including
coupled precast structural walls, designed for regions of high seismic risk or for structures assigned to
high seismic performance or design categories, where acceptance is based on experimental evidence and
mathematical analysis.
9.6.3.2. These provisions are applicable to precast structural walls, coupled or uncoupled, with height to
length, hw/lw, ratios equal to or greater than 0.5. These provisions are applicable for either prequalifying
precast structural walls for a specific structure or prequalifying a new precast wall type for construction
in general.
9.6.3.3. Precast structural walls shall be deemed to have a response that is at least equivalent to the
response of monolithic structural walls designed in accordance with Sec.21.2 and 21.7 of ACI 318, and
the corresponding structural walls of the prototype structure shall be deemed acceptable, when all of the
conditions in Sec. 9.6.3.3.1 through 9.6.3.3.5 are satisfied.
9.6.3.3.1. The prototype structure satisfies all applicable requirements of these provisions and of ACI
318 except Sec.21.7.
9.6.3.3.2. Tests on wall modules satisfy the conditions in Sec. 9.6.4 and 9.6.9.
9.6.3.3.3. The prototype structure is designed using the design procedure substantiated by the testing
program.
9.6.3.3.4. The prototype structure is designed and analyzed using effective initial properties consistent
with those determined in accordance with Sec. 9.6.7.11, and the prototype structure meets the drift
limits of these provisions.
9.6.3.3.5. The structure as a whole, based on the results of the tests of Sec. 9.6.3.3.2 and analysis, is
demonstrated to have adequate global toughness (the ability to retain its structural integrity and support
its specified gravity loads) through peak displacements equal to or exceeding the story-drift ratios
specified in Sec.9.6.7.4, 9.6.7.5 or 9.6.7.6, as appropriate.
9.6.4 Design procedure
9.6.4.1. Prior to testing, a design procedure shall be developed for the prototype structure and its walls.
That procedure shall account for effects of material non-linearity, including cracking, deformations of
members and connections, and reversed cyclic loading. The design procedure shall include the
procedures specified in Sec. 9.6.4.1.1 through 9.6.4.1.4 and shall be applicable to all precast structural
walls, coupled and uncoupled, of the prototype structure.
9.6.4.1.1. Procedures shall be specified for calculating the effective initial stiffness of the precast
structural walls, and of coupled structural walls, that are applicable to all the walls of the prototype
structure.
9.6.4.1.2. Procedures shall be specified for calculating the lateral strength of the precast structural
walls, and of coupled structural walls, applicable to all precast walls of the prototype structure.
9.6.4.1.3. Procedures shall be specified for designing and detailing the precast structural walls so that
they have adequate ductility capacity. These procedures shall cover wall shear strength, sliding shear
strength, boundary tie spacing to prevent bar buckling, concrete confinement, reinforcement strain, and
any other actions or elements of the wall system that can affect ductility capacity.
9.6.4.1.4. Procedures shall be specified for determining that an undesirable mechanism of nonlinear
response, such as a story mechanism due to local buckling of the reinforcement or splice failure, or
overall instability of the wall, does not occur.
9.6.4.2. The design procedure shall be used to design the test modules and shall be documented in the
test report.
166

9.6.4.3. The design procedure used to proportion the test specimens shall define the mechanism by
which the system resists gravity and earthquake effects and shall establish acceptance values for
sustaining that mechanism. Portions of the mechanism that deviate from code requirements shall be
contained in the test specimens and shall be tested to determine acceptance values.
9.6.5 Test Modules
9.6.5.1. At least two modules shall be tested. At least one module shall be tested for each limiting
engineering design criteria (shear, axial load and flexure) for each characteristic configuration of precast
structural walls, including intersecting structural walls or coupled structural walls. If all the precast
walls of the structure have the same configuration and the same limiting engineering design criterion,
then two modules shall be tested. Where intersecting precast wall systems are to be used, the response
for the two orthogonal directions shall be tested.
9.6.5.2. Where the design requires the use of coupling elements, those elements shall be included as part
of the test module.
9.6.5.3. Modules shall have a scale large enough to represent the complexities and behavior of the real
materials and of the load transfer mechanisms in the prototype walls and their coupling elements, if any.
Modules shall have a scale not less than one half and shall be full-scale if the validation testing has not
been preceded by an extensive analytical and experimental development program in which critical
details of connections are tested at full scale.
9.6.5.4. The geometry, reinforcing details, and materials properties of the walls, connections, and
coupling elements shall be representative of those to be used in the prototype structure.
9.6.5.5. Walls shall be at least two panels high unless the prototype structure is one for which a single
panel is to be used for the full height of the wall.
9.6.5.6. Where precast walls are to be used for bearing wall structures, as defined in SEI/ASCE 7-02,
the test modules shall be subject during lateral loading to an axial load stress representative of that
anticipated at the base of the wall in the prototype structure.
9.6.5.7. The geometry, reinforcing, and details used to connect the precast walls to the foundation shall
replicate those to be used in the prototype structure.
9.6.5.8. Foundations used to support the test modules shall have geometric characteristics, and shall be
reinforced and supported, so that their deformations and cracking do not affect the performance of the
modules in a way that would be different than in the prototype structure.
9.6.6 Testing Agency. Testing shall be carried out by an independent testing agency approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. The testing agency shall perform its work under the supervision of a
registered design professional experienced in seismic structural design.
9.6.7 Test Method
9.6.7.1 Test modules shall be subjected to a sequence of displacement-controlled cycles representative
of the drifts expected under earthquake motions for the prototype structure. If the module consists of
coupled walls, approximately equal drifts (within 5 percent of each other) shall be applied to the top of
each wall and at each floor level. Cycles shall be to predetermined drift ratios as defined in Sec. 9.6.7.2
through 9.6.7.6.
9.6.7.2 Three fully reversed cycles shall be applied at each drift ratio.
9.6.7.3 The initial drift ratio shall be within the essentially linear elastic response range for the module.
See 9.6.7.11. Subsequent drift ratios shall be to values not less than 5/4 times, and not more than 3/2
times, the previous drift ratio.
9.6.7.4 For uncoupled walls, testing shall continue with gradually increasing drift ratios until the drift
ratio in percent equals or exceeds the larger of :(a) 1.5 times the drift ratio corresponding to the design
167

displacement or (b) the following value:
0.80 0.67 [ h w l w ] + 0.5 2.5
(9.6-1)
where:
hw = height of entire wall for prototype structure, in.
lw = length of entire wall in direction of shear force, in.
9.6.7.5 For coupled walls, hw/lw in Eq. 9.6.1 shall be taken as the smallest value of hw/lw for any
individual wall of the prototype structure.
9.6.7.6 Validation by testing to limiting drift ratios less than those given by Eq. 9.6.1 shall be acceptable
provided testing is conducted in accordance with this document to drift ratios equal or exceeding of
those determined for the response to a suite of nonlinear time history analyses conducted in accordance
with Sec. 9.5.8 of SEI/ASCE 7-02 for maximum considered ground motions.
9.6.7.7 Actual yield strength of steel reinforcement shall be obtained by testing coupons taken from the
same reinforcement batch as used in the test module. Two tests, conforming to the ASTM specifications
cited in Sec. 3.5 of ACI 318, shall be made for each reinforcement type and size.
9.6.7.8 Actual compressive strength of concrete shall be determined by testing of concrete cylinders
cured under the same conditions as the test module and tested at the time of testing the module. Testing
shall conform to the applicable requirements of Sec.5.6.1 through 5.6.4 of ACI 318.
9.6.7.9 Where strength and deformation capacity of coupling devices does not depend on reinforcement
tested as required in Sec. 9.6.7.7, the effective yield strength and deformation capacity of coupling
devices shall be obtained by testing independent of the module testing.
9.6.7.10 Data shall be recorded from all tests such that a quantitative interpretation can be made of the
performance of the modules. A continuous record shall be made of test module drift ratio versus
applied lateral force, and photographs shall be taken that show the condition of the test module at the
peak displacement and after each key testing cycle.
9.6.7.11 The effective initial stiffness of the test module shall be calculated based on test cycles to a
force between 0.6Ent and 0.9Ent, and using the deformation at the strength of 0.75Ent to establish the
stiffness.
9.6.8. Test Report
9.6.8.1 The test report shall contain sufficient evidence for an independent evaluation of all test
procedures, design assumptions, and the performance of the test modules. As a minimum, all of the
information required by Sec. 9.6.8.1.1 through 9.6.8.1.11 shall be provided.
9.6.8.1.1 A description shall be provided of the design procedure and theory used to predict test module
strength, specifically the test module nominal lateral resistance, En, and the test module actual lateral
resistance Ent.
9.6.8.1.2 Details shall be provided of test module design and construction, including fully dimensioned
engineering drawings that show all components of the test specimen.
9.6.8.1.3 Details shall be provided of specified material properties used for design, and actual material
properties obtained by testing in accordance with Sec. 9.6.7.7.
9.6.8.1.4 A description shall be provided of test setup, including fully dimensioned diagrams and
photographs.
9.6.8.1.5 A description shall be provided of instrumentation, its locations, and its purpose.
168

9.6.8.1.6 A description and graphical presentation shall be provided of applied drift ratio sequence.
9.6.8.1.7 A description shall be provided of observed performance, including photographic
documentation, of the condition of each test module at key drift ratios including, (as applicable), the
ratios corresponding to first flexural cracking or joint opening, first shear cracking, and first crushing of
the concrete for both positive and negative loading directions, and any other significant damage events
that occur. Photos shall be taken at peak drifts and after the release of load.
9.6.8.1.8 A graphical presentation shall be provided of lateral force versus drift ratio response.
9.6.8.1.9 A graphical presentation shall be provided of relative energy dissipation ratio versus drift ratio.
9.6.8.1.10 A calculation shall be provided of effective initial stiffness for each test module as observed
in the test and as determined in accordance with Sec. 9.6.7.11 and a comparison made as to how
accurately the design procedure has been able to predict the measured stiffness. The design procedure
shall be used to predict the overall structural response and a comparison made as to how accurately that
procedure has been able to predict the measured response.
9.6.8.1.11 The test date, report date, name of testing agency, report author(s), supervising registered
design professional, and test sponsor shall be provided.
9.6.9 Test module acceptance criteria
9.6.9.1 The test module shall be deemed to have performed satisfactorily when all of the criteria Sec.
9.6.9.1.1 through 9.6.9.1.3 are met for both directions of in-plane response. If any test module fails to
pass the validation testing required by these provisions for any test direction, then the wall system has
failed the validation testing.
9.6.9.1.1 Peak lateral strength obtained shall be at least 0.9Ent and not greater than 1.2 Ent.
9.6.9.1.2 In cycling up to the drift level given by Sec. 9.6.7.4 through 9.6.7.6, fracture of reinforcement
or coupling elements, or other significant strength degradation, shall not occur. For a given direction,
peak lateral strength during any cycle of testing to increasing displacement shall not be less than 0.8
times Emax for that direction.
9.6.9.1.3 For cycling at the given drift level for which acceptance is sought in accordance with
Sec.9.6.7.4, 9.6.7.5 or 9.6.7.6, as applicable, the parameters describing the third complete cycle shall
have satisfied the following:
1. The relative energy dissipation ratio shall have been not less than 1/8; and
2. The secant stiffness between drift ratios of -1/10 and +1/10 of the maximum applied drift
shall have been not less than 0.10 times the stiffness for the initial drift ratio specified in Sec.
9.6.7.3.
9.6.10. Reference
Minimum Design Loads on Buildings and Other Structures Standards Committee, Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Structures (SEI/ASCE 7-02) - Earthquake Loads, Structural Engineering Institute,
American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, VA, 2002.
169
170
UNTOPPED PRECAST DIAPHRAGMS
PREFACE: Reinforced concrete diaphragms constructed using untopped precast concrete
elements are permitted in the text of the Provisions for Seismic Design Categories A, B, and C but
not for Categories D, E, and F. For the latter, the precast elements must be topped and the topping
designed as the diaphragm. For resisting seismic forces, a composite topping slab cast in place on
precast concrete elements must have a thickness of not less than 2 in. (51 mm) and a topping slab
not relying on composite action with the precast elements must have a thickness of not less than 21/2 in. (64 mm).
There are two principal reasons why a framework for the design of untopped diaphragms for
Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F may be desirable. One relates to the performance of
topping slab diaphragms in recent earthquakes and the other to durability considerations. The 1997
Provisions incorporated ACI 318-95 for which the provisions for topping slab diaphragms on
precast elements were essentially the same as those in ACI 318-89. In the 1994 Northridge
earthquake, performance was poor for structures where demands on the topping slab diaphragms
on precast elements were maximized and the structures had been designed using ACI 318-89. The
topping cracked along the edges of the precast elements and the welded wire reinforcement
crossing those cracks fractured. The diaphragms became the equivalent of an untopped diaphragm
with the connections between precast concrete elements, the connectors, and the chords not
detailed for that condition. Another problem found with topping slab diaphragms was that the
chords often utilized large diameter bars, grouped closely together at the topping slab edge. Under
severe loading, these unconfined chord bars lost bond with the concrete and thus lost the ability to
transfer seismic forces.
ACI 318-99 was significantly revised for structural diaphragms to add new detailing provisions in
response to the poor performance of some cast-in-place composite topping slab diaphragms during
the 1994 Northridge earthquake. New code and commentary sections 21.7 and R21.7 were added
to Chapter 21. Cast-in-place composite topping slabs and cast-in-place topping slab diaphragms
were permitted by ACI 318-99, but no mention was made of untopped precast diaphragms. The
diaphragm provisions of ACI 318-99 were carried over unchanged into ACI 318-02 and placed in
Sec. 21.9 rather than Sec. 21.7, where they had been in ACI 318-99.
The evidence from the recently completed PRESSS 5-story building test (M. J. NM. Priestley, D.
Sritharan, J. R. Conley, and S. Pampanin, Preliminary Results and Conclusions from the PRESSS
Five-Story Precast Concrete Test Building, PCI Journal, Vol. 44, No. 6, November-December
1999), from Italian and English tests (K. S. Elliott, G. Davies, and W. Omar, Experimental
Hollow-cored Slabs Used as Horizontal Floor Diaphragms, The Structural Engineer, Vol. 70, No.
10, May 1992, pp. 175-187; M. Menegotto, Seismic Diaphragm Behavior of Untopped HollowCore Floors, Proceedings, FIP Congress, Washington, D. C., May 1994), and from the 1999
Turkey earthquake is that such diaphragms can perform satisfactorily if they are properly detailed
and if they and their connections remain elastic under the force levels the diaphragms experience.
However, further additions to the ACI 318-02 requirements are needed if such performance is to be
achieved. In particular, the diaphragm design forces and detailing requirements for ductility of
connections (as a second line of defense) require revision.
These Provisions incorporate ACI 318-02, which recognizes that for topping slab diaphragms a
controlling condition is the in-plane shear in concrete along the edges of the precast elements.
Ductility is provided by requiring that the topping slab reinforcement crossing those edges be
spaced at not less than 10 inches on center. While those requirements are based on the best
171

available engineering judgment and evidence, they have not as yet been proven to provide
adequate safety either by laboratory testing or field performance. Due to the dimensions of the
precast element relative to the thickness of the topping slab, it may well be prudent to have seismic
provisions for diaphragms incorporating precast elements controlled by untopped diaphragm
considerations and to have those provisions modified for topped diaphragms. Further, in
geographic areas where corrosive environments are a significant concern, the construction of
untopped diaphragms using pre-topped precast elements rather than topped elements, can be
desirable.
This appendix provides a compilation of current engineering judgment on a framework for seismic
provisions for untopped diaphragms. That framework does not, however, adequately address all
the concerns needed for its incorporation into the text of the Provisions. This appendix proposes
that a diaphragm composed of untopped elements be designed to remain elastic, and that the
connectors be designed for limited ductility, in the event that design forces are exceeded during
earthquake response and some inelastic action occurs where the demands on the diaphragm are
maximized. By contrast, for all other systems assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E, or F, the
philosophy of the Provisions is to require significant ductility. For the approach of this appendix,
critical issues are how best to define:
The design forces for the diaphragm so that they are large enough to result in essentially elastic
behavior when the demands on the diaphragm are maximized, or whether that criterion is even
achievable;
1. The relation between the response of the diaphragm, its dimensions, and the ductility demands
on the connectors;
2. The ductility changes that occur for connectors under various combinations of in-plane and outof-plane shear forces, and tensile and compressive forces;
3. The boundary conditions necessary for testing and for application of the loading for the
validation testing of connectors; and
4. The constraints on connector performance imposed by their size relative to the size of the
diaphragm elements.
The use of this appendix as a framework for laboratory testing, analyses of the performance of
diaphragms in past earthquakes, analytical studies, and trial designs is encouraged. Users should
also consult the Commentary for guidance and references. Please direct all feedback on this
appendix and its commentary to the BSSC.
In this appendix, the untopped precast diaphragm is designed to remain elastic by requiring that its
design forces be based on Eq. 4.6-2, and be not less than a minimum value dependent upon the
seismic response coefficient, with both values multiplied by the overstrength and redundancy
factors associated with the seismic-force-resisting system. In addition, the connections are
required to be able to perform in a ductile manner in the unlikely event that the diaphragm is forced
to deform inelastically.
A9.1 GENERAL
A9.1.1 Scope. This appendix provides guidelines for the design of diaphragms using untopped precast
concrete elements for Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F.
A9.1.2 References
ACI 318
ACI T1.1-01
172

2002
Acceptance Criteria for Moment Frames Based on Structural Testing, American
Concrete Institute, 2001.
Untopped Precast Diaphragms

ATC-24
Guidelines for Seismic Testing of Components of Steel Structures, Applied

Technology Council, 1992.
A9.1.3 Definitions
Boundary elements: See Sec. 2.1.3.
Chord: See Sec. 12.1.3.
Collector: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Quality assurance plan: See Sec. 2.1.3.
Untopped precast diaphragm: A diaphragm consisting of precast concrete components that does not
have a structural topping meeting the requirements of these Provisions.
A9.1.4 Notation.
CS
See Sec. 5.1.3.
Fpx
See Sec. 4.1.4.
wpx
See Sec. 4.1.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
See Sec. 5.1.3.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
A9.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Untopped precast floor or roof diaphragms in Seismic Design Category D, E, or F shall satisfy the
requirements of this section.
A9.2.1 Configuration. Untopped diaphragms shall not be permitted in structures with plan irregularity
Type 4 as defined in Table 4.3-2. For diaphragms in structures having plan irregularities Type 1a, 1b, 2,
or 5 as defined in Table 4.3-2, the analysis required by Sec. A9.2.2 shall explicitly include the effect of
such irregularities as required by Sec. 4.6.
A9.2.2 Diaphragm demand. Rational elastic models shall be used to determine the in-plane shear,
tension, and compression forces acting on connections that cross joints. For any given joint, the
connections shall resist the total shear and total moment acting on the joint assuming an elastic
distribution of stresses.
The diaphragm design force shall be taken as the lesser of the following two criteria:
1. 0 times the Fpx value calculated from Eq. 4.6-2, but not less than 0 CSwpx; or
2.
A shear force corresponding to 1.25 times that corresponding to yielding of the seismic-force173

resisting system, calculated using value(s) equal to unity.
In item 1 above, the overstrength factor, 0, shall be that for the seismic-force-resisting system as
specified in Table 4.3-1, the redundancy factor, , shall be as specified in Provisions Sec. 4.3.3, and the
seismic response coefficient, Cs, shall be as determined in accordance with Provisions Sec. 5.2.1.1.
A9.2.3 Mechanical connections. Mechanical connections shall have design strength, for the body of
the connector, greater than the factored forces determined in accordance with Sec. A9.2.2.
Mechanical connections used at joints shall be shown by analysis and testing, under reversed cyclic
loading, to develop adequate capacity in shear, tension, and compression (or a combination of these
effects) to resist the demands calculated in accordance with Sec. A9.2.2. Testing of connections and
evaluation of results shall be made in accordance with the principles specified in ACI T1.1 and ATC-24.
When subjected to the specified loading, connections shall develop ductility ratios equal to or greater
than 2.0. The behavior of connection embedments shall be governed by steel yielding and not by
fracture of concrete or welds.
Connections shall be designed using the strength reduction factors, , specified in ACI 318. Where the
factor is modified by Sec. 9.3.4 of ACI 318, the modified value shall be used for the diaphragm
connections.
Where the design relies on friction in grouted joints for shear transfer across the joints, shear friction
resistance shall be provided by mechanical connectors or reinforcement.
A9.2.4 Cast-in-place strips. Cast-in place strips shall be permitted in the end or edge regions of
precast components as chords or collectors. These strips shall meet the requirements for topping slab
diaphragms. The reinforcement in the strips shall comply with Sec. 21.9.8.2 and 21.9.8.3 of ACI 318.
A9.2.5 Deformation compatibility. In satisfying the compatibility requirement of Sec. 4.5.3, the
additional deformation that results from the diaphragm flexibility shall be considered. The assumed
flexural and shear stiffness properties of the elements that are part of the seismic-force-resisting system
shall not exceed one-half of the gross-section properties, unless confirmed by a rational, cracked-section
analysis.
A9.2.6 Beam connections. Ties to supporting members and bearing lengths shall satisfy the
requirements for design force and geometry characteristics specified for the connections in Sec. 21.11.4
of ACI 318.
A9.2.7 Quality assurance. Diaphragms shall have a quality assurance plan in accordance with Sec.
2.2.1 of these Provisions.
174
Chapter 10
COMPOSITE STEEL AND CONCRETE STRUCTURE DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Scope. The design, construction, and quality of composite steel and concrete components that
resist seismic forces shall comply with the requirements of the references in Sec. 10.1.2 and the
additional requirements of this chapter.
ACI 318

2002, excluding Appendix C (Alternative Load and Strength Reduction Factors) and
Chapter 22 (Structural Plain Concrete).
AISC LRFD
AISC Seismic Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Parts I and II, American Institute of
Steel Construction, 2002.
10.1.3 Definitions
10.1.4 Notation
R
See Sec. 4.1.4.

An R factor as set forth in Table 4.3-1 for the appropriate composite steel and concrete system is
permitted when the structure is designed and detailed in accordance with the provisions of AISC
Seismic, Part II.
10.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES B AND C

For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category B or C, the design of such systems shall comply
with the requirements of AISC Seismic, Part II.

Composite structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D, E, or F are permitted, subject to the
limitations in Table 4.3-1, where substantiating evidence is provided to demonstrate that the proposed
system will perform as intended by AISC Seismic, Part II. The substantiating evidence shall be subject
to approval by the authority having jurisdiction. Where composite elements or connections are required
to sustain inelastic deformations, the substantiating evidence shall be based upon cyclic testing.
10.5 MODIFICATIONS TO AISC SEISMIC, PART II

10.5.1 Changes to nomenclature. Change throughout the document Seismic Force Resisting System to
Seismic Load Resisting System.
175

10.5.2 Changes to definitions in the AISC Glossary.
Composite Beam. A structural steel beam that is in contact with and acts compositely with reinforced
concrete via bond or shear connectors.
Encased Composite Beam. A composite beam that is completely enclosed in reinforced concrete.
Unencased Composite Beam. A composite beam wherein the steel section is not completely enclosed
in reinforced concrete and relies on mechanical connectors for composite action with a reinforced slab
or slab on metal deck.
10.5.3 Changes to Section 1 - SCOPE
These Provisions shall be applied in conjunction with the AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, hereinafter referred to as the LRFD Specification.
The applicable requirements in Part I shall be used for the design of structural steel components in
composite Seismic Load Resisting Systems. The applicable requirements in ACI 318 shall be used for
the design of reinforced concrete components in composite Seismic Load Resisting Systems, except as
modified in these provisions. The applicable requirements in Part II shall be used for the design of
composite components in composite Seismic Load Resisting Systems. When the design is based upon
elastic analysis, the stiffness properties of the component members of composite systems shall reflect
their condition at the onset of significant yielding of the building.
10.5.4 Changes to Section 2 - REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
The documents referenced in these provisions shall include those listed in Part I, Section 2, with the
following additions and modifications:
American Society of Civil Engineers, Standard for the Structural Design of Composite Slabs, ASCE 391
American Welding Society, AWS D1.4-98 Standard for the Welding of Reinforcement
10.5.5 Changes to Section 3 - SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES
The required strength and other seismic provisions for Seismic Design Categories (SDCs), Seismic Use
Groups or Seismic Zones and the limitations on height and irregularity shall be as specified in the
Applicable Building Code (see Glossary).
10.5.6 Changes to Section 4 - LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS
The loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated by the Applicable Building Code. Where
Amplified Seismic Loads are required by these provisions, the horizontal earthquake load E (as defined in
the Applicable Building Code) shall be multiplied by the overstrength factor o prescribed by the
Applicable Building Code. In the absence of a specific
10.5.7 Changes to Section 5.2 - Concrete and Steel Reinforcement
Concrete and steel reinforcement used in composite components in composite Seismic Load Resisting
Systems shall meet the requirements in ACI 318, Sections 25.4 through 25.8.
Exception: Concrete and steel reinforcement used in the composite Ordinary Seismic Load Resisting
Systems described in Sections 11, 12, and 15 shall meet the requirements in AISC LRFD Chapter I and
ACI 318, excluding Chapter 21.
10.5.8 Changes to Section 6.3 - COMPOSITE BEAMS
Composite Beams shall meet the requirements in LRFD Specification Chapter I. Composite Beams that
are part of C-SMF shall also meet the requirements of Section 9.3.
10.5.9 Changes to Section 6.4 - Reinforced-Concrete-Encased Composite Columns
This Section is applicable to columns that meet the limitations in LRFD Specification Section I2.1.
176
Composite Steel and Concrete Structures Design Requirements

Such columns shall meet the requirements in LRFD Specification Chapter I, except as modified in this
Section. Additional requirements, as specified for intermediate and special seismic systems in Sections
6.4b and 6.4c, shall apply as required in the descriptions of the composite seismic systems in Sections 8
through 17.
Columns that consist of reinforced-concrete-encased structural steel sections shall meet the requirements
for reinforced concrete columns in ACI 318 except as modified for:
(1)
The steel shape shear connectors in Section 6.4a.2
(2) The contribution of the reinforced-concrete-encased structural steel section to the strength of the
column as provided in ACI 318.
(3) The seismic requirements for reinforced concrete columns as specified in the description of the
composite seismic systems in Sections 8 through 17.
10.5.10 Changes to Section 6.4a - Ordinary Seismic System Requirements
(5)Splices and end bearing details for reinforced-concrete-encased composite columns in ordinary
systems shall meet the requirements in the LRFD Specification and ACI 318 Section 7.8.2. The
design for intermediate and special systems shall also comply with ACI 318-02 Sections 21.2.6-7
and 21.10. The design shall consider any adverse behavioral effects due to abrupt changes in either
the member stiffness or nominal tensile strength. Such locations shall include transitions to
reinforced concrete sections without embedded structural steel members, transitions to bare
structural steel sections, and column bases.
10.5.11 Changes to Section 6.5 - CONCRETE-FILLED COMPOSITE COLUMNS
This Section is applicable to columns that meet the limitations in LRFD Specification Section I2.1.
Such columns shall be designed to meet the requirements in LRFD Specification Chapter I, except as
modified in this Section.
6.5a. The design shear strength of the composite column shall be the design shear strength of the
structural steel section alone.
6.5b. In addition to the requirements in Section 6.5a, in the special seismic systems described in
Sections 9, 13 and 14, the design forces and column splices for concrete-filled composite
columns shall also meet the requirements in Part I Section 8.
6.5c. Concrete-filled composite columns used in C-SMF shall meet the following requirements in
addition to those in Sections 6.5a. and 6.5b:
1.
The minimum required shear strength of the column shall meet the requirements in ACI 318
Section 21.4.5.1.
2.
The strong-column/weak-beam design requirements in Section 9.5 shall be met. Column bases
shall be designed to sustain inelastic flexural hinging
3.
The minimum wall thickness of concrete-filled rectangular HSS shall equal
b Fy (2 E s )
(6-3)
for the flat width b of each face, where b is as defined in LRFD Specification Table B5.1, unless
adequate means to prevent local buckling of the steel shape is demonstrated by tests or analysis.
10.5.12 Changes to Section 6.5a - CONCRETE-FILLED COMPOSITE COLUMNS
6.5a. The design shear strength of the composite column shall be the design shear strength of the
structural steel section alone, based on its effective shear area. The concrete shear capacity may
be used in conjunction the shear strength from the steel shape provided the design includes an
appropriate load transferring mechanism.
177

10.5.13 Changes to Section 7.3 - NOMINAL STRENGTH OF CONNECTIONS
The nominal strength of connections in composite structural systems shall be determined on the basis
of rational models that satisfy both equilibrium of internal forces and the strength limitation of
component materials and elements based upon potential limit states. Unless the connection strength is
determined by analysis and testing, the models used for analysis of connections shall meet the
requirements in Sections 7.3a through 7.3e.
7.3a. When required, force shall be transferred between structural steel and reinforced concrete through
direct bearing of headed shear studs or suitable alternative devices, by other mechanical means, by
shear friction with the necessary clamping force provided by reinforcement normal to the plane of
shear transfer, or by a combination of these means. Any potential bond strength between structural
steel and reinforced concrete shall be ignored for the purpose of the connection force transfer
mechanism. The contribution of different mechanism can be combined only if the stiffness and
deformation capacity of the mechanisms is compatible.
The nominal bearing and shear-friction strengths shall meet the requirements in ACI 318 Chapters
10 and 11.
7.3b. The required strength of structural steel components in composite connections shall not exceed the
design strengths as determined in Part I and the LRFD Specification. Structural steel elements that
are encased in confined reinforced concrete are permitted to be considered to be braced against
out-of-plane buckling. Face Bearing Plates consisting of stiffeners between the flanges of steel
beams are required when beams are embedded in reinforced concrete columns or walls unless tests
or analysis demonstrates otherwise.
7.3c. The nominal shear strength of reinforced-concrete-encased steel panel-zones in beam-to-column
connections shall be calculated as the sum of the nominal strengths of the structural steel and
confined reinforced concrete shear elements as determined in Part I Section 9.3 and ACI 318
Section 21.5, respectively.
7.3d. Reinforcement shall be provided to resist all tensile forces in reinforced concrete components of
the connections. Additionally, the concrete shall be confined with transverse reinforcement. All
reinforcement shall be fully developed in tension or compression, as appropriate, beyond the point
at which it is no longer required to resist the forces. Development lengths shall be determined in
accordance with ACI 318 Chapter 12. Additionally, development lengths for the systems
described in Sections 9, 13, 14, 16 and 17 shall meet the requirements in ACI 318 Section 21.5.4.
Connections shall meet the following additional requirements:
1.
When the slab transfers horizontal diaphragm forces, the slab reinforcement shall be designed and
anchored to carry the in-plane tensile forces at all critical sections in the slab, including
connections to collector beams, columns, braces and walls.
2.
For connections between structural steel or composite beams and reinforced concrete or
reinforced-concrete-encased composite columns, transverse hoop reinforcement shall be provided
in the connection region to meet the requirements in ACI 318 Section 21.5, except for the
following modifications:
a.
Structural steel sections framing into the connections are considered to provide confinement over a
width equal to that of face bearing stiffener plates welded to the beams between the flanges.
b.
Lap splices are permitted for perimeter ties when confinement of the splice is provided by Face
Bearing Plates or other means that prevents spalling of the concrete cover in the systems described
in Sections 10, 11, 12 and 15.
3.
The longitudinal bar sizes and layout in reinforced concrete and composite columns shall be
detailed to minimize slippage of the bars through the beam-to-column connection due to high
force transfer associated with the change in column moments over the height of the connection.
178

10.5.14 Changes to Section 8.2 - COLUMNS
Structural steel columns shall meet the requirements in Part I Section 8 and the LRFD Specification.
Composite beams shall be unencased, fully composite, and shall meet the requirements in LRFD
Specification Chapter I, except I.2. For the purposes of frame analysis, the stiffness of beams shall be
determined with an effective moment of inertia of the composite section that accounts for the negative
and positive moments along the composite beams.
10.5.16 Changes to Section 8.4 - Partially Restrained (PR) Moment Connections
The required strength for the beam-to-column PR moment connections shall be determined using
strength load combinations considering the effects of connection flexibility and second-order moments.
In addition, composite connections shall have a nominal strength that is at least equal to 50 percent of
RyMp, where Mp is the nominal plastic flexural strength of the connected structural steel beam ignoring
composite action. Connections shall meet the requirements in Section 7 and shall have a minimum
inelastic interstory drift angle of 0.025 radians and a total interstory drift angle of 0.04 radians that is
substantiated by cyclic testing as described in Part I Section 9.2a.
10.5.17 Changes to Section 9.3 - BEAMS
Composite beams that are part of C-SMF as described in Section 9 shall also meet the following
requirements:
1.
The distance from the maximum concrete compression fiber to the plastic neutral axis shall not
exceed:
Ycon + d b
1700 F y
1 +
Es
where
2.
Ycon
= distance from the top of the steel beam to the top of concrete, in.
db
= depth of the steel beam, in.
Fy
= specified minimum yield strength of the steel beam, ksi.
Es
= elastic modulus of the steel beam, ksi.
Beam flanges shall meet the requirements in Part I Section 9.4, except when fully reinforcedconcrete-encased compression elements have a reinforced concrete cover of at least 2 in. and
confinement is provided by hoop reinforcement in regions where plastic hinges are expected to
occur under seismic deformations. Hoop reinforcement shall meet the requirements in ACI 318
Section 21.3.3.
Neither structural steel nor composite trusses are permitted as flexural members to resist seismic loads
in C-SMF unless it is demonstrated by testing and analysis that the particular system provides adequate
ductility and energy dissipation capacity.
10.5.18 Changes to Section 9.4 - MOMENT CONNECTIONS
The required strength of beam-to-column moment connections shall be determined from the shear and
flexure associated with the expected plastic flexural strength, RyMn, of the beams framing into the
connection. The nominal connection strength shall meet the requirements in Section 7. In addition, the
connections shall be capable of sustaining a minimum inelastic interstory drift angle of 0.025 radians
and a total interstory drift angle of 0.04 radians. When the beam flanges are interrupted at the
179

connection, the inelastic rotation capacity shall be demonstrated as specified in Part I Section 9 for
connections in SMF. For connections to reinforced concrete columns with a beam that is continuous
through the column so that welded joints are not required in the flanges and the connection is not
otherwise susceptible to premature fractures, the inelastic rotation capacity shall be demonstrated by
testing or other substantiating data.
10.5.19 Changes to Section 9.5 - COLUMN-BEAM MOMENT RATIO
The minimum flexural strength of reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements in ACI 318
Section 21.4.2. The column-to-beam moment ratio of composite columns shall meet the requirements in
Part I Section 9.6 with the following modifications:
1.
The flexural strength of the composite column M*pc shall meet the requirements in LRFD
Specification Chapter I with consideration of the applied axial load, Pu.
2.
The force limit for the exceptions in Part I Section 9.6a shall be Pu < 0.1Po.
3.
Composite columns exempted by Part I Section 9.6 shall have transverse reinforcement that meets
the requirements in Section 6.4c.3.
10.5.20 Changes to Section 10.2 - COLUMNS

Composite columns shall meet the requirements for intermediate seismic systems in Section 6.4 or 6.5.
Reinforced concrete columns shall meet the requirements in ACI 318 Section 21.12.
10.4 Beam-to-Column Moment Connections
The nominal connection strength shall meet the requirements in Section 7. The required strength of
beam-to-column connections shall meet the following requirements:
a. The connection design strength shall meet or exceed the forces associated with plastic hinging of
the beams adjacent to the connection.
b. The connections shall demonstrate an interstory drift angle of at least 0.02 radians in cyclic
tests.
Connections shall be designed for the applicable factored load combinations and their design strength
shall meet the requirements in Section 7 and Section 11.2 of Part I.
10.5.23 Changes to Section 12.4 - BRACES
12. COMPOSITE SPECIAL CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (C-SCBF)
12.4. Braces
Structural steel braces shall meet the requirements for SCBF in Part I Section 13. Composite braces
shall meet the requirements for composite columns in Section 12.2.
13. COMPOSITE ORDINARY BRACED FRAMES (C-OBF)
13.1. Scope
This section is applicable to concentrically braced frame systems that consist of either composite or
reinforced concrete columns, structural steel or composite beams, and structural steel or composite
braces. C-OBF shall be designed assuming that under the Design Earthquake limited inelastic action
will occur in the beams, columns, braces, and/or connections.
180

10.5.24 Change title for Section 15.3 to 15.3 Steel Coupling Beams.
10.5.25 Change title for Section 16.3 to 16.3 Steel Coupling Beams.
10.5.26 Add new Section 15.4 as follows:
15.4. Encased Composite Coupling Beams
Encased composite sections serving as Coupling Beams shall meet the requirements in Section
15.3 as modified in this Section:
15.4a. Coupling Beams shall have an embedment length into the reinforced concrete wall that is
sufficient to develop the maximum possible combination of moment and shear capacities
of the encased steel Coupling Beam.
15.4b. The nominal shear capacity of the encased steel Coupling Beam shall be used to meet the
requirement in Section 15.3b.
15.4c. The stiffness of the encased steel Coupling Beams shall be used for calculating the shear
wall and Coupling Beam design forces.
10.5.27 Add new Section 16.4 as follows:
16.4. Encased Composite Coupling Beams
Encased composite sections serving as Coupling Beams shall meet the requirements in Section 16.3,
except the requirements in Part I Section 15.3 need not be met.
181
182
Chapter 11
MASONRY STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 Scope. The design and construction of reinforced and plain masonry components and systems
and the materials used therein shall comply with the requirements of this chapter. Masonry shall be
designed in accordance with the requirements of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402. Masonry construction
and materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Inspection
and testing of masonry materials and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Chapter 2.
ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 53002/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02), American Concrete Institute/American
Society of Civil Engineers/The Masonry Society, 2002.
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
Specification for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS

602-02), American Concrete Institute/American Society of Civil
Engineers/The Masonry Society, 2002.
ACI 318
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, American

Concrete Institute, 2002, excluding Appendix A.

11.2.1 Classification of shear walls. Masonry walls, unless isolated from the lateral force resisting
system, shall be considered shear walls and shall be classified in accordance with this section.
11.2.1.1 Ordinary plain (unreinforced) masonry shear walls. Ordinary plain (unreinforced) masonry
shear walls shall satisfy the requirements of Section 1.13.2.2.1 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402.
11.2.1.2 Detailed plain (unreinforced) masonry shear walls. Detailed plain (unreinforced) masonry
shear walls shall satisfy the requirements of Section 1.13.2.2.2 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402.
11.2.1.3 Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls. Ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls shall
satisfy the requirements of Section 1.13.2.2.3 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402.
11.2.1.4 Intermediate reinforced masonry shear walls. Intermediate reinforced masonry shear walls
shall satisfy the requirements of Section 1.13.2.2.4 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402.
11.2.1.5 Special reinforced masonry shear walls. Special reinforced masonry shear walls shall satisfy
the requirements of Section 1.13.2.2.5 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402.
11.2.1.6 Shear keys. Add the following new Sec. 1.13.2.2.5 (d) to the Sec. 1.13.2.2.5 of ACI
530/ASCE 5/TMS 402. The surface of concrete upon which a special reinforced masonry shear wall is
constructed shall have a minimum surface roughness of 1/8 in. (3 mm). Shear keys are required when
the calculated tensile strain in vertical reinforcement from in-plane loads exceeds the yield strain under
load combinations that include seismic forces based on an R factor equal to 1.5. Shear keys that satisfy
the following requirements shall be placed at the interface between the wall and the foundation:
1.
The width of the keys shall be at least equal to the width of the grout space,
2.
The depth of the keys shall be at least 1.5 in. (38 mm),
3.
The length of the key shall be at least 6 in. (152 mm),
4.
The spacing between keys shall be at least equal to the length of the key,
183

5.
The cumulative length of all keys at each end of the shear wall shall be at least 10
percent of the length of the shear wall (20 percent total),
6.
At least 6 in. (150 mm) of a shear key shall be placed within 16 in. (406 mm) of each
end of the wall, and
7.
Each key and the grout space above each key in the first course of masonry shall be
grouted solid.
11.2.2 Modifications to ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
11.2.2.1 Additional definitions. Add the following definitions to Sec. 1.6 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS
402:
Actual dimension The measured dimension of a designated item (e.g., a designated masonry unit or
wall).
Cleanout An opening to the bottom of a grout space of sufficient size and spacing to allow removal of
debris.
Cover Distance between surface of reinforcing bar and face of member.
Effective period Fundamental period of the structure based on cracked stiffness.
Hollow masonry unit A masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the
bearing surface is less than 75 percent of the gross cross-sectional area in the same plane.
Plastic hinge The zone in a structural member in which the yield moment is anticipated to be
exceeded under loading combinations that include earthquake. The zone in a masonry element in which
earthquake energy is dissipated through the development of inelastic strains and curvatures.
Reinforced masonry Masonry construction in which reinforcement acts in conjunction with the
masonry to resist forces. Masonry in which the tensile resistance of masonry is neglected and the
resistance of the reinforcing steel is considered in resisting applied loads.
Solid masonry unit A masonry unit whose net cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing
surface is 75 percent or more of the gross cross-sectional area in the same plane.
Special moment frame A moment resisting frame of masonry beams and masonry columns within a
plane with special reinforcement details and connections that provides resistance to lateral and gravity
loads.
Specified Required by construction documents.
Stirrup Shear reinforcement in a beam or flexural member.
11.2.2.2 Additional notation. Add the following notation to Sec. 1.5 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
dbb =
diameter of the largest beam longitudinal reinforcing bar passing through, or anchored in,
the special moment frame beam-column intersection.
dbp
diameter of the largest column (pier) longitudinal reinforcing bar passing through, or
anchored in, the special moment frame beam-column intersection.
hx
height of structure above the base level to level x.
hb
beam depth in the plane of the special moment frame.
hc
cross-sectional dimension of grouted core of special moment frame member measured

center to center of confining reinforcement.
Lc
length of coupling beam between coupled shear walls.
nominal moment strength at the ends of the coupling beam.
unfactored shear force due to gravity loads.
M1,M2
Vg
184
Masonry Structure Design Requirements

11.2.2.3. Delete Article 1.3 AE from ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
11.2.2.4. Add the following exception after the second paragraph of Sec. 3.2.5.5 of ACI 530/ASCE
5/TMS 402.
Exception: A nominal thickness of 4 in. (102 mm) shall be permitted where load-bearing reinforced
hollow clay unit masonry walls satisfy all of the following conditions.
1. The maximum unsupported height-to-thickness or length-to-thickness ratios do not exceed 27,
2. The net area unit strength exceeds 8,000 psi (55 MPa),
3. Units are laid in running bond,
4. Bar sizes do not exceed No. 4 (13 mm),
5. There are no more than two bars or one splice in a cell, and
6. Joints are not raked.
11.2.2.5. Add the following new Sec. 1.15.3 to ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
1.15.3 Separation joints. Where concrete abuts structural masonry and the joint between the materials
is not designed as a separation joint, the concrete shall be roughened so that the average height of
aggregate exposure is 1/8 in. (3 mm) and shall be bonded to the masonry in accordance with these
requirements as if it were masonry. Vertical joints not intended to act as separation joints shall be
crossed by horizontal reinforcement as required by Sec. 1.9.4.2.
11.2.2.6. Add the following new Article 3.5 G to ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602:
3.5 G. Construction procedures or admixtures shall be used to facilitate placement and control
shrinkage of grout.
11.2.2.7. Replace Sec. 3.2.3.4(b) and 3.2.3.4(c) of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 with the following:
(b) A welded splice shall be capable of developing in tension 125 percent of the specified yield
strength, fy, of the bar. Welded splices shall only be permitted for ASTM A706 steel reinforcement.
Welded splices shall not be permitted in plastic hinge zones of intermediate or special reinforced walls
or special moment frames of masonry.
(c) Mechanical splices shall be classified as Type 1 or Type 2 according to Sec. 21.2.6.1 of ACI 318.
Type 1 mechanical splices shall not be used within a plastic hinge zone or within a beam-column joint
of intermediate or special reinforced masonry shear walls or special moment frames. Type 2 mechanical
splices shall be permitted in any location within a member.
11.2.2.8. Add the following new Sec. 3.2.3.4.1 and 3.2.3.4.2 to ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
3.2.3.4.1 Lap splices shall not be used in plastic hinge zones. The length of the plastic hinge zone shall
be taken as at least 0.15 times the distance between the point of zero moment and the point of maximum
moment.
3.2.3.4.2 Bars spliced by non-contact lap splices shall not be spaced transversely farther apart than the
lesser of one-fifth the required length or 8 in. (203 mm).
11.2.2.9. Add the following new Sec. 3.2.2(h) to ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
(h) For out-of-plane bending, the width of the equivalent stress block shall not be taken greater than 6
times the nominal thickness of the masonry wall or the spacing between reinforcement, whichever is
less.
3.2.7 Flanged shear walls
3.2.7.1 Effective width. Where wall intersections are constructed in accordance with Sec. 1.9.4, the
effective flange width for design shall be determined in accordance with this section.
185

3.2.7.2 Compression. The width of flange considered effective in compression on each side of the web
shall be taken equal to 6 times the thickness of the flange or the actual width of the flange on that side,
whichever is less.
3.2.7.3 Tension. The width of flange considered effective in tension on each side of the web shall be
taken equal to 3/4 of the wall height or the actual width of the flange on that side, whichever is less.
11.2.2.11. Add the following new Sec. 3.2.4.2.6 to ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
3.2.4.2.6 Coupling beams. Structural members that provide coupling between shear walls shall be
designed to reach their moment or shear nominal strength before either shear wall reaches its moment or
shear nominal strength. Analysis of coupled shear walls shall comply with accepted principles of
mechanics.
The design shear strength, Vn, of the coupling beams shall satisfy the following criterion:
Vn
1.25 ( M 1 + M 2 )
Lc
+ 1.4Vg
where:
M1 and M2
nominal moment strength at the ends of the beam;
Lc
length of the beam between the shear walls; and
Vg
unfactored shear force due to gravity loads.
The calculation of the nominal flexural moment shall include the reinforcement in reinforced concrete
roof and floor systems. The width of the reinforced concrete used for calculations of reinforcement
shall be six times the floor or roof slab thickness.
3.2.5 Deep flexural member detailing. Flexural members with overall-depth-to-clear-span ratio
greater than 2/5 for continuous spans or 4/5 for simple spans shall be detailed in accordance with this
section.
3.2.5.1. Minimum flexural tension reinforcement shall conform to Sec. 3.2.4.3.2.
3.2.5.2. Uniformly distributed horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall be provided throughout the
length and depth of deep flexural members such that the reinforcement ratios in both directions are at
least 0.001. Distributed flexural reinforcement is to be included in the determination of the actual
reinforcement ratios.
11.2.2.13. Add the following new Sec. 1.13.7.4 to ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
1.13.7.4 For structures in Seismic Design Category E or F, corrugated sheet metal anchors shall not be
used.
11.2.2.14. Revise Sec. 1.13.3.2 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402/ to read as follows.
The calculated story drift of masonry structures due to the combination of design seismic forces and
gravity loads shall not exceed the allowable story drift a for masonry walls shown in Table 4.5-1 of
the 2003 NEHRP Recommended Provisions.
11.2.2.15. Add the following section to ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
1.13.4.3 Anchoring to masonry. Anchorage assemblies connecting masonry elements that are part of
the seismic force resisting system to diaphragms and chords shall be designed so that the strength of the
186

anchor is governed by steel tensile or shear yielding. Alternatively, the anchorage assembly may be
designed to be governed by masonry breakout or anchor pullout provided that the anchorage assembly is
designed to resist not less than 2.5 times the factored forces transmitted by the assembly.
11.2.2.16. Revise the following Sec. 3.1.4.4 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
3.1.4.4 Anchor bolts For cases where the nominal strength of an anchor bolt is controlled by masonry
breakout or masonry pryout, shall be taken as 0.50. For cases where the nominal strength of an anchor
bolt is controlled by anchor bolt steel, shall be taken as 0.90. For cases where the nominal strength of
an anchor bolt is controlled by anchor pullout, shall be taken as 0.65.
11.2.2.17. Revise the following Sec. 3.1.6.3 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
3.1.6.3 Nominal shear strength of headed and bent-bar anchor bolts The nominal shear strength,
Bvn, shall be computed by Eq. (3-8) (strength governed by masonry breakout) and Eq. (3-9) (strength
governed by steel), and shall not exceed 2.0 times that computed by Eq. (3-4) (strength governed by
masonry pryout). In computing the capacity, the smallest of the design strengths shall be used.
11.2.2.18. Revise the following commentary to Sec. 3.1.6.3 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402:
3.1.6.3 Nominal shear strength of headed and bent-bar anchor bolts The shear strength of a headed
or bent-bar anchor bolt is governed by yield and fracture of the anchor steel, or by masonry shear
breakout, or by masonry shear pryout. Steel strength is calculated conventionally using the effective
tensile stress area (that is, threads are conservatively assumed to lie in the critical shear plane). Under
static shear loading, bent-bar anchor bolts (J- or L-bolts) do not exhibit straightening and pullout. Under
reversed cyclic shear however, available research3.1 suggests that straightening and pullout may occur.
11.3 SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES OF MASONRY

Special moment frames of masonry shall be designed and detailed in accordance with the requirements
of Sec. 3.2 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and this section.
Special moment frames shall be fully grouted and constructed using open-end hollow -unit concrete
masonry or hollow-unit clay masonry.
Column nominal moment strength shall not be less than 1.6 times the column moment corresponding to
the development of beam plastic hinges, except at the foundation level. The column axial load
corresponding to the development of beam plastic hinges and including factored dead and live loads
shall not exceed 0.15 An f m The plastic hinge zone shall be assumed equal to the depth of the member.
11.3.1 Calculation of required strength. The calculation of required strength of the members shall
be in accordance with principles of engineering mechanics and shall consider the effects of the relative
stiffness degradation of the beams and columns.
11.3.2 Flexural yielding. Flexural yielding shall be limited to the beams at the face of the columns and
to the bottom of the columns at the base of the structure.
11.3.3 Materials. Neither Type N mortar nor masonry cement shall be used.
11.3.4 Reinforcement
11.3.4.1. The nominal moment strength at any section along a member shall not be less than 1/2 of the
higher moment strength provided at the two ends of the member.
11.3.4.2. Lap splices are permitted only within the center half of the member length. Lap splices are not
permitted in transverse reinforcement in beams, in plastic hinge zones in the column or in the beamcolumn joint.
11.3.4.3. Welded splices and mechanical connections may be used for splicing the reinforcement at any
section, provided that not more than alternate longitudinal bars are spliced at a section and the distance
between splices on alternate bars is at least 24 in. (610 mm) along the longitudinal axis and shall comply
with the requirements of Section 11.3.7.4.
187

11.3.4.4. Reinforcement shall have a specified yield strength of 60,000 psi (414 MPa). The actual yield
strength shall not exceed 1.3 times the specified yield strength.
11.3.5 Beams
11.3.5.1 Compression limit. The factored axial compression force on the beam shall not exceed 0.10
times the net cross-sectional area of the beam, An, times the specified compressive strength, f m .
11.3.5.2 Shear. The value of Vm shall be zero within any plastic hinge zone and in any columns
subjected to net factored tension loads. The depth of the plastic hinge zone shall be assumed equal to the
member depth..
11.3.5.3 Reinforcement ratio. The reinforcement ratio for beams that connect vertical elements of the
seismic-force-resisting system shall not exceed the lesser of 0.15
f m
fy
or that determined in
accordance with Sec. 3.2.3.5.1 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402. All reinforcement in the beam and
adjacent to the beam in a reinforced concrete roof or floor system shall be used to calculate the
reinforcement ratio.
11.3.5.4 Proportions. The clear span for the beam shall not be less than 4 times its depth.
The nominal depth of the beam shall not be less than 4 units or 32 in. (813 mm), whichever is greater.
The nominal depth to nominal width ratio shall not exceed 4.
Nominal width of the beams shall equal or exceed all of the following criteria:
1.
8 in. (203 mm),
2.
width required by Sec. 3.2.4.2.5 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 , and
3.
1/26 of the clear span between column faces.
11.3.5.5 Longitudinal reinforcement.

11.3.5.5.1. Longitudinal reinforcement shall not be spaced more than 8 in. (203 mm) on center.
11.3.5.5.2. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed along the depth of the beam.
11.3.5 5.3. The minimum reinforcement ratio shall be 130/fy, where fy is in psi (the metric equivalent is
0.90/fy, where fy is in MPa).
11.3.5. 5.4. At any section of a beam, each masonry unit through the beam depth shall contain
longitudinal reinforcement.
11.3.5.6 Transverse reinforcement
11.3.5.6.1. Transverse reinforcement shall be one-piece and shall be hooked around top and bottom
longitudinal bars and shall be terminated with a standard 180-degree hook.
11.3.5.6.2. Within an end region extending one beam depth from Special Moment Frame column faces
and in any region at which beam plastic hinges may form during seismic or wind loading, the maximum
spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not exceed one-fourth the nominal depth of the beam.
11.3.5.6.3. The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of 1/2 the
nominal depth of the beam or the spacing required for shear strength.
11.3.5.6.4. The minimum transverse reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0015.
11.3.5.6.5. The first transverse bar shall not be more than 4 in. (102 mm) from the face of the column.
11.3.6 Columns
188

11.3.6.1 Compression limit. Factored axial compression force on the Special Moment Frame column
corresponding to the development of beam plastic hinges shall not exceed 0.15 times the net crosssectional area of the column, An, times the specified compressive strength. The compressive stress shall
also be limited by the maximum reinforcement ratio.
11.3.6.2 Proportions. The nominal dimension of the column parallel to the plane of the Special
Moment Frame shall not be less than two full units or 32 in. (810 mm), whichever is greater and shall
not exceed 96 in.
The nominal dimension of the column perpendicular to the plane of the Special Moment Frame shall not
be less than 8 in. (203 mm) or 1/14 of the clear height between beam faces, whichever is greater.
The clear-height-to-depth ratio of column members shall not exceed 5.
11.3.6.3 Longitudinal reinforcement
11.3.6.3.1. A minimum of 4 longitudinal bars shall be provided at all sections of every Special Moment
Frame column member.
11.3.6.3.2. The flexural reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed across the member depth.
11.3.6.3.3. The nominal moment strength at any section along a member shall be not less than 1.6 times
the cracking moment strength and the minimum reinforcement ratio shall be 130/fy, where fy is in psi
(the metric equivalent is 0.90/fy, where fy is in MPa).
11.3.6.3.4. Vertical reinforcement in wall-frame columns shall be limited to a maximum reinforcement
ratio equal to the lesser of
0.15
f m
fy
or that determined in accordance with Sec. 3.2.3.5 of Section
1.13.2.2.5 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402. The minimum vertical reinforcement in wall-frame columns
shall be 0.002 times the gross cross section.
11.3.6.4 Lateral reinforcement.
11.3.6.4.1. Transverse reinforcement shall be hooked around the extreme longitudinal bars and shall be
terminated with a standard 180-degree hook.
11.3.6.4.2. The spacing of transverse reinforcement shall not exceed 1/4 the nominal dimension of the
column parallel to the plane of the Special Moment Frame.
11.3.6.4.3. The minimum transverse reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0015.
11.3.6.4.4. Lateral reinforcement shall be provided to confine the grouted core when compressive
strains caused by the factored axial and flexural loads at the design story drift, ), exceed 0.0015. The
unconfined portion of the cross section with a strain exceeding 0.0015 shall be neglected when
computing the nominal strength of the section. The total cross sectional area of rectangular tie
reinforcement for the confined core shall be not less than 0.9 shc
f m
. Alternatively, equivalent
f yh
confinement which can develop an ultimate compressive strain of 0.006 may substituted for rectangular
tie reinforcement.
11.3.7 Beam-column intersections
11.3.7.1 Proportions. Beam-column intersection dimensions in masonry special moment frames shall
be proportioned such that the special moment frame column depth in the plane of the frame satisfies Eq.
11.3-1:
hc >
4800d bb
f g
(11.3-1)
189

where:
hp
column depth in the plane of the special moment frame, in.;
dbb
diameter of the largest beam longitudinal reinforcing bar passing through, or

anchored in, the special moment frame beam-column intersection, in.; and
f g
specified compressive strength of grout, psi (shall not exceed 5,000 psi
(34.5MPa) for use in Eq. 11.3-1).
The metric equivalent of Eq. 11.3-1 is
hc >
400d bb
f g
where hp and dbb are in mm and f g is in MPa.

Beam depth in the plane of the frame shall satisfy Eq. 11.3-2:
hb >
1800d bp
f g
(11.3-2)
where:
hb
beam depth in the plane of the special moment frame, in.;
dbp
diameter of the largest column longitudinal reinforcing bar passing through, or

anchored in, the special moment frame beam-column intersection, in.; and
f g
specified compressive strength of grout, psi (shall not exceed 5,000 psi (34.5
MPa) for use in Eq. 11.3-2).
The metric equivalent of Eq. 11.3-2 is
hb >
150d bp
f g
where hb and dbp are in mm and f g is in MPa.

11.3.7.2 Shear strength. The design shear strength, Vn, of the beams and columns shall not be less
than the shear corresponding to the development of 1.4 times the nominal flexural strength of the
member, except that the nominal shear strength need not exceed 2.5 times Vu. The nominal shear
strength of beam-column intersections shall exceed the shear calculated assuming that the stress in all
flexural tension reinforcement of the special moment frame beams at the column face is 1.4 fy .
Vertical shear forces may be considered to be carried by a combination of masonry shear-resisting

mechanisms and truss mechanisms involving intermediate column reinforcing bars.
The nominal horizontal shear stress at the beam-column intersection shall not exceed the lesser of 350
psi (2.5 MPa) or 7 f m (the metric equivalent is 0.58 f m MPa)
11.3.7.3 Horizontal reinforcement. Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminating in a special moment
frame column shall be extended to the far face of the column and shall be anchored by a standard hook
bent back into the special moment frame column.
190

Special horizontal shear reinforcement crossing a potential diagonal beam-column shear crack shall be
provided such that:
As
0.5V
fy
jh
(11.3-3)
where:
As
cross-sectional area of reinforcement;
Vjh
total horizontal joint shear; and
fy
specified yield strength of the reinforcement .
Special horizontal shear reinforcement shall be anchored by a standard hook around the extreme special
moment frame column reinforcing bars.
11.4 GLASS-UNIT MASONRY AND MASONRY VENEER

11.4.1 Design lateral forces and displacements. Glass-unit masonry and masonry veneer shall be
designed and detailed to satisfy the force and displacement requirements of Sec. 6.3.
11.4.2 Glass-unit masonry design.
11.4.2.1. The requirements of Chapter 7 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402. shall apply to the design of
glass unit masonry. The out-of-plane seismic strength shall be considered to be the same as the strength
to resist wind pressure as specified in Sec. 7.3 of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402.
11.4.3 Masonry veneer design.
11.4.3.1. The requirements of Chapter 6 of ACI 530 shall apply to the design of masonry veneer.
11.4.3.2. For structures in Seismic Design Category E, corrugated sheet metal anchors shall not be
used.
11.5 PRESTRESSED MASONRY

11.5.1. Prestressed masonry shall be designed in accordance with of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402
Chapter 4.
191
This page is intentionally left blank
192
Chapter 12
WOOD STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
12.1 GENERAL
12.1.1 Scope. The design and construction of wood structures to resist seismic forces and the material
used therein shall comply with the requirements of this chapter.
12.1.2 References. Documents containing requirements for the quality, testing, design, and
construction of members and their fastenings in wood systems that resist seismic forces are listed in this
section The provisions of this chapter may add to, modify or exempt portions of the referenced
documents.
12.1.2.1 Engineered wood construction
AF&PA/ASCE 16
Standard for Load and Resistance Factor Design for Engineered Wood
Construction, American Forest & Paper Association/American Society of Civil
Engineers, 1995, including supplements.
AF&PA SDPWS
ASD/LRFD Supplement, Special Design Provisions for Wind and Seismic,

American Forest & Paper Association, 2001.
APA Y510T
Plywood Design Specifications, American Plywood Association, 1998.
APA N375B
Design Capacities of APA Performance-Rated Structural-Use Panels,

American Plywood Association, 1995.
APA E315H
Diaphragms (APA Research Report 138), American Plywood Association,

1991.
12.1.2.2 Conventional light-frame construction

IRC
International Residential Code, International Code Council (ICC), 2003.
NF&PA T903
Span Tables for Joists and Rafters, National Forest and Paper Association,
1992.
12.1.2.3 Material standards

PS 20
American Softwood Lumber Standard, U.S. Department of Commerce, National

Institute of Standards and Technology, 1999.
AITC A190.1
American National Standard for Wood Products Structural Glued Laminated

Timber, American National Standards Institute/American Institute of Timber
Construction, 1992.
ASTM A 653
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AlloyCoated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-dip Process (A 653-97a), American Society
for Testing and Materials, 1997.
ASTM A 792
Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-dip

Process (A 792-97a), American Society for Testing and Materials, 1997.
ASTM A 875
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy-Coated by the Hot-dip

Process (A 875-97a), American Society for Testing and Materials, 1997.
193
ASTM D 5055
194
Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities

of Prefabricated Wood I-Joists (D 5055-971), American Society of Testing and
Materials, 1997.
Wood Structure Design Requirements

PS 1
Construction and Industrial Plywood, U.S. Department of Commerce, National

Institute of Standards and Technology, 1995.
PS 2
Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels, U.S.

Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology,
1992.
ANSI 05.1
Wood Poles, American National Standards Institute, 1992.
ANSI A208.1
Wood Particleboard, American National Standards Institute, 1992.
AWPA C1, 2, 3, 9, 28 Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process, American Wood Preservers

Association, AWPA C1, C2, C3, and C28, 1991; C9, 1990.
12.1.3 Definitions
Bearing wall: See Sec. 4.1.3.
Blocked diaphragm: A diaphragm in which all sheathing edges not occurring on a framing member
are supported on and fastened to blocking.
Boundary elements: See Sec. 2.1.3.
Braced wall line: A series of braced wall panels in a single story that satisfies the requirements of Sec.
12.4.1.
Braced wall panel: A section of wall braced in accordance with Sec. 12.4.1.
Cripple wall: A framed stud wall, less than 8 ft (2.4 m) tall, extending from the top of the foundation
to the underside of the lowest floor framing. Cripple walls can occur in both engineered structures and
conventional construction.
Grade plane: See Sec. 6.1.3.
Light-framed shear wall: A wall constructed with wood or cold-formed steel studs and sheathed with
material approved for shear resistance.
Light-framed wall: A wall with wood or steel studs.
Perforated shear wall: A wood structural panel sheathed wall with openings, but which has not been
specifically designed and detailed for force transfer around wall openings.
Perforated shear wall segment: A section of shear wall with full height sheathing and which satisfies
the aspect ratio limits of Sec.4.3.4.1 of the AF&PA SDPWS.
Story above grade: See Figure 12.4-1.
Tie-down: A device used to resist uplift of the chords of shear walls. These devices are intended to
resist load without significant slip between the device and the shear wall chord or be shown with cyclic
testing to not reduce the wall capacity and ductility.
195

Wood structural panel: A wood-based panel product that satisfies the requirements of PS 1 or PS 2
and is bonded with a waterproof adhesive. Included under this designation are plywood, oriented stand
board, and composite panels.
12.1.4 Notation
A
Total area of openings in the perforated shear wall calculated such that opening height is
assigned wall height, h, where structural sheathing is not present above or below openings and
openings with height less than h/3 are assigned a height of h/3;
h
Height of the perforated shear wall.
Ltot
Total length of a perforated shear wall including the lengths of perforated shear wall segments
and the lengths of segments containing openings;
Sheathing area ratio. Perforated shear walls shall have a minimum sheathing area ratio of 0.1.
Vwall
Nominal shear capacity of a perforated shear wall.
wall
Nominal unit shear capacity for wood structural panel from Table 4.3A.
Li
Sum of lengths of perforated shear wall segments.
12.2 DESIGN METHODS

Structures constructed in accordance with Sec. 12.5 are deemed to satisfy Sec. 1.5. Where a structure of
otherwise conventional construction contains structural elements that do not comply with the
requirements of Sec. 12.5, such elements shall be designed in accordance with Sec. 12.3 and 12.4.
12.2.1 Seismic Design Categories B, C, and D. Unless excepted by Sec. 1.1.2.1, structures assigned to
Seismic Design Category B, C, or D shall satisfy the requirements for engineered wood construction in
accordance with LRFD provisions of AF&PA SDPWS as modified by Sec. 12.2.3 or shall satisfy the
requirements for conventional light-frame construction in accordance with Sec. 12.5.
12.2.2 Seismic Design Categories E and F. Unless excepted by Sec. 1.1.2.1, structures assigned to
Seismic Design Category E or F shall satisfy the requirements for engineered wood construction in
accordance with LRFD provisions of AF&PA SDPWS as modified by Sec. 12.2.4.
12.2.3 Modifications to AF&PA SDPWS for Seismic Design Categories B, C and D
12.2.3.1 Revise second sentence of Sec. 4.1.2 of AF&PA SPDWS as follows:
Alternatively, shear capacity of diaphragms and shear walls shall be permitted to be calculated by
principles of mechanics using values of fastener strength and sheathing shear capacity provided
consideration is given to the combined fastener and sheathing performance under cyclic loading.
12.2.3.2 Replace last paragraph of Sec. 4.2.2 of AF&PA SDPWS with the following:
The mid-span deflection of a single span blocked wood structural panel diaphragm uniformly
loaded and uniformly nailed throughout shall be calculated using a rational analysis accounting for
bending deformation, panel shear deformation, non-linear slip in the sheathing to framing
connections, and boundary member connections. Adjustments shall be made for other span,
blocking, loading and nailing configurations.
12.2.3.3 In Table 4.2.4 of AF&PA SDPWS, modify aspect ratio for Double-layer diagonal lumber
sheathing from 4:1 to 3:1.
12.2.3.4 Add sentence to 4.2.7.1(1) of AF&PA SDPWS as follows:
Sheathing shall be arranged so that the width shall not be less than 2 ft (0.6 m).
196

12.2.3.5 Add Sec. 4.2.7.1(5) to AF&PA SDPWS as follows:
4.2.7.1(5) It is advised that the edge distance be increased where possible to reduce the potential
for splitting of the framing and nail pull through in the sheathing.
12.2.3.6 Delete 4.2.7.4 and related design values from Tables 4.2C from AF&PA SDPWS.
12.2.3.7 Replace last paragraph of Sec. 4.3.2 of AF&PA SDPWS with the following:
The deflection of a wood structural panel shear wall shall be calculated using a rational analysis
accounting for bending deformation, panel shear deformation, non-linear slip in the sheathing to
framing connections and boundary member connections.
12.2.3.8 Replace first 3 paragraphs of Sec. 4.3.3.2 of AF&PA SDPWS (keep wind exception) with the
following:
The shear values for wood structural panel sheathing of different capacities applied to the same
side of the wall are not cumulative except as allowed in Table 12.2-3a and 12.2-3b. The shear
values for structural panel sheathing of the same capacity applied to both faces of the same wall are
cumulative. Where the structural panel sheathing capacities are not equal, the allowable shear shall
be either two times the smaller shear capacity or the capacity of the stronger side, whichever is
greater. Shear capacities shall not be summed where dissimilar materials are applied to opposite
faces or to the same wall line.
12.2.3.9 Add paragraph to Sec. 4.3.3.4 of AF&PA SDPWS as follows:
The nominal shear capacity of a perforated shear wall is permitted to be calculated in accordance
with the following:
Vwall =
r
Ltot wall
3 2r
1
r=
1+
h Li
where:
Vwall = nominal shear capacity of a perforated shear wall;
r
= sheathing area ratio. Perforated shear walls shall have a minimum sheathing area
ratio of 0.1;
Ltot = total length of a perforated shear wall including the lengths of perforated shear
wall segments and the lengths of segments containing openings;
wall = nominal unit shear capacity for wood structural panel from Table 4.3A;
A
= total area of openings in the perforated shear wall calculated such that opening
height is assigned wall height, h, where structural sheathing is not present above
or below openings and openings with height less than h/3 are assigned a height
of h/3;
h
= height of the perforated shear wall; and,
Li = sum of lengths of perforated shear wall segments.
12.2.3.10 Replace Sec. 4.3.5.2b of AF&PA SDPWS with the following:
b. The nominal shear value for wood structural panels used in a perforated shear wall shall not
exceed 980 lb/ft (14.5 kN/m).
12.2.3.11 Replace paragraph 1 of 4.3.6.4b of AF&PA SDPWS with the following:
b. Where net uplift is induced, tie-down devices shall be used. Nuts on tie-down bolts shall be
tightened without crushing the wood prior to covering the framing. Tie-down devices shall be
attached to the end posts with nails, screws, or other fasteners. All tie-down devices shall only be
197

used where the uplift resistance values are based on cyclic testing of wall assemblies and the test
results indicate that the tie-down device does not reduce the stiffness, ductility, or capacity of the
shear wall where compared to nailed-on devices. Nominal strength of the tie-down assemblies shall
be equal to or greater than the forces resulting from the nominal strength of the wall. The stiffness
of the tie-down assemblies shall be such as to prevent premature failure of the sheathing fasteners,
and the effect of the tie-down displacement shall be included in drift calculations. End posts shall be
selected such that failure across the net section of the post is not a limit state for the connection of
the tie-down.
12.2.3.12 Replace 4.3.6.4c of AF&PA SDPWS with the following:
c. Shear wall bottom plate connections to floor framing or foundations shall have a nominal
strength equal to or greater than the nominal strength of the shear wall.
Foundation anchor bolts shall have a plate washer under the nut. The minimum plate washer sizes
shall be determined in accordance with the following (Table 12.2-1):
Table 12.2.1 Minimum Plate Washers for Foundation Anchor Bolts
Anchor bolt size
Plate washer size
1/2 and 5/8 in.
1/4 by 3 by 3 in.
(13 and 16 mm)
(6 by 75 by 75 mm)
3/4, 7/8, and 1 in.
3/8 by 3 by 3 in.
(19, 22, and 25 mm)
(10 by 75 by 75 mm)
The hole in a plate washer is permitted to be diagonally slotted with a width of up to 3/16 inches
(5mm) larger than the bolt diameter and a slot length not to exceed 1.75 inches (44mm), if a
standard cut washer is placed between the plate washer and the nut.
Foundation anchor bolts shall be placed a maximum of 2 in. (50 mm) from the sheathed side of
walls sheathed on one face. Walls sheathed on both faces shall have the bolts staggered with each
bolt a maximum of 2 in. (50 mm) from either side of the wall. Alternatively, for walls sheathed on
both faces, the bolts shall be placed at the center of the foundation sill with the edge of the plate
washer within 0.5 in. (13 mm) of each face of the wall. Where this alternative is used, the plate
washer width shall be a minimum of 3 in. (75 mm) and the plate thickness shall be determined by
analysis using the upward force on the plate equal to the tension capacity of the bolt.
Nuts on foundation anchor bolts shall be tightened without crushing the wood prior to covering the
framing.
12.2.3.13 Replace second sentence of 4.3.7.1a of AF&PA SDPWS as follows:
Sheathing panels not less than 4ft x 8ft. Sheathing shall be arranged so that the width shall not be
less than 2 ft (0.6 m).
Exception: For sheathing attached with the long direction of the panels perpendicular to the studs, a
single sheathing panel with a minimum vertical dimension of 1 ft (0.3 m) and a minimum horizontal
dimension of 4 ft (1.2 m) is permitted to be used if it is located at mid-height of the wall, and is fully
blocked and fastened.
12.2.3.14 Add Sec. 4.3.7.1f and 4.3.7.1g to AF&PA SDPWS as follows:
f. It is advised that the edge distance be increased where possible to reduce the potential for
splitting of the framing and nail pull through in the sheathing. Sheathing fasteners shall be driven
flush with the surface of the sheathing.
g. Where wood structural panel sheathing is used as the exposed finish on the exterior of outside
198

walls, it shall have an exterior exposure durability classification. Where wood structural panel
sheathing is used on the exterior of outside walls but not as the exposed finish, it shall be of a type
manufactured with exterior glue. Where wood structural panel sheathing is used elsewhere, it shall
be of a type manufactured with intermediate or exterior glue.
12.2.3.15 Delete 4.3.7.2, 4.3.7.3, 4.3.7.4, 4.3.7.7 and 4.3.7.8 and related design values from Tables
4.3A, 4.3B, and 4.3C from AF&PA SDPWS.
12.2.3.16 Add Table 12.2-2a and 12.2-2b as addendum to Table 4.2A.
12.2.3.17 Add Table 12.2-3a and 12.2-3b as addendum to Table 4.3A.
12.2.4 Modifications to AF&PA SDPWS for Seismic Design Categories E and F
Structures assigned to Seismic Design Categories E and F shall conform to the requirements of Sec.
12.2.3 for Seismic Design Categories B, C and D, and the requirements of this section.
12.2.4.1 Add second sentence to Sec. 4.2.7.1 of AF&PA SDPWS as follows:
Unblocked diaphragms sheathed with wood structural panels shall not be considered to be part of
the seismic-force-resisting system for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category E or F.
For structures assigned to Seismic Design Category E or F, tabulated nominal unit shear capacities
for wood structural panel sheathed shear walls used to resist seismic forces in structures with
concrete or masonry walls shall be one-half the values set forth in Table 4.3A.
Wood structural panel sheathing used for shear walls that are part of the seismic-force-resisting
system shall be applied directly to the framing members for structures assigned to Seismic Design
Category E or F.
199
Table 12.2-2a Nominal Unit Shear Values (lb/ft) for Seismic Forces on Horizontal Wood Diaphragms
Fastener
Panel Grade
Structural I
Sheathing,
single floor and
other grades
covered in PS 1
and PS 2
a
Type
10de
common
14 ga
staples
10dc
common
14 ga
staples
Minimum
nominal
panel
thickness
(in.)
Minimum
nominal width of
framing (in.)
Lines of
fasteners
1-1/2
23/32
3
4
4
2
2
3
23/32
1-1/2
23/32
3
4
3
4
4
2
3
2
2
3
23/32
3
4
2
3
Minimum
penetration
in framing
(in.)
Blocked Diaphragmsa,b
Fastener spacing (in.) at diaphragm boundaries (all Cases),
at continuous panel edges parallel to load (Cases 3 and 4)
and at all panel edges (Cases 5 and 6)c,d
4
2-1/2
2
Spacing per line at other panel edges (in.)
6
4
4
3
3
2
C
C
2460
1880
1740
1310
C
C
2820
2150
1950
1510
C
C
3620
2750
2620
1880
1200
1680
1290
1510
1880
1200
1650
1200
1800
1740
1950
2620
1200
1800
1680
2280
1880
2150
2740
1650
2250
1800
2710
2450
2780
3020
1800
2710
2080
2880
C
C
C
2400
3600
C
C
C
2050
2800
2400
3020
Nominal unit shear values shall be adjusted in accordance with AF&PA SDPWS Sec. 4.2.3 to determine LRFD factored unit resistance.
For framing grades other than Douglas-Fir Larch or Southern Pine, reduced nominal shear capacities shall be determined by multiplying
the tabulated nominal unit shear capacity by the Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor = [1- (0.5 - G)], where G = Specific Gravity of the
framing lumber from the NDS. The Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor shall not be greater than 1.c Fasteners at intermediate framing
members shall be spaced at 12 in. on center except that where spans are greater than 32 in. they shall be spaced at 6 in. on center.
c
Fasteners at intermediate framing members shall be spaced at 12 in. on center except that where spans are greater than 32 in. they shall
be spaced at 6 in. on center.
d
Maximum nominal shear for Cases 3 through 6 is limited to 2310 lb/ft.
e
Where 10d nails are spaced at 3 in. or less on center and penetrate framing by more than 1-5/8 in., adjoining panel edges shall have 3 in.
nominal width framing and panel edge nails shall be staggered.
b
200
Table 12.2-2b Nominal Unit Shear Values (kN/m) for Seismic Forces on Horizontal Wood Diaphragms
Fastener
Panel Grade
Structural I
Sheathing,
single floor and
other grades
covered in PS 1
and PS 2
Type
10de
common
14 ga
staples
10dc
common
14 ga
staples
Minimum
nominal
panel
thickness
(mm)
Minimum
nominal width of
framing (mm)
Lines of
fasteners
38
18
75
100
100
2
2
3
50
18
38
18
75
100
75
100
100
2
3
2
2
3
50
18
75
100
2
3
Minimum
penetration
in framing
(mm)
Blocked Diaphragmsa,b
Fastener spacing (mm) at diaphragm boundaries (all Cases),
at continuous panel edges parallel to load (Cases 3 and 4)
and at all panel edges (Cases 5 and 6)c,d
100
65
50
Spacing per line at other panel edges (mm)
150
100
100
75
75
50
C
C
35.9
27.4
25.4
19.1
C
C
41.2
31.4
28.5
22.0
C
C
52.8
40.1
38.2
27.4
17.5
24.5
18.8
22.0
27.4
17.5
24.1
17.5
26.3
25.4
28.5
38.2
17.5
26.3
24.5
33.3
27.4
31.4
40.0
24.1
32.8
26.3
39.5
35.8
40.6
44.1
26.3
39.5
30.4
42.0
C
C
C
35.0
52.5
C
C
C
29.9
40.9
35.0
44.1
Nominal unit shear values shall be adjusted in accordance with AF&PA SDPWS Sec. 4.2.3 to determine LRFD factored unit resistance.
For framing grades other than Douglas-Fir Larch or Southern Pine, reduced nominal shear capacities shall be determined by multiplying
the tabulated nominal unit shear capacity by the Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor = [1- (0.5 - G)], where G = Specific Gravity of the
framing lumber from the NDS. The Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor shall not be greater than 1.
c
Fasteners at intermediate framing members shall be spaced at 300 mm on center except that where spans are greater than 810 mm they
shall be spaced at 150 mm on center.
d
Maximum nominal shear for Cases 3 through 6 is limited to 2310 lb/ft.
e
Where 10d nails are spaced at 75 mm or less on center and penetrate framing by more than 41 mm, adjoining panel edges shall have 75
mm nominal width framing and panel edge nails shall be staggered.
b
201
Table 12.2-3a Nominal Unit Shear Values (lb/ft) for Seismic Forces on Wood Structural Panel Shear Walls a,b,c
Panel Grade
Fastener Spacing at Panel Edges (in.)
Panel Thickness
(in.)
Minimum Penetration in
Framing (in.)
Fastener Size
3/8
1-1/4
8d
2d
600
720
780
860
600
650
710
750
780
920
1020
1110
780
820
910
980
1020
1220
1340
1460
1020
1060
1170
1280
480
550
620
720
820
6
4
Panel Applied Over 1/2 in. or 5/8 in. Gypsum Sheathing (common or hot-dipped galvanized box nails)
Structural I
Sheathing, Panel Siding, and

Other Grades Covered in PS
1 and PS 2
3/8
1-3/8
10d
7/16
1-3/8
10de
15/32
1-3/8
10de
3/8
1-1/4
8d
3/8
1-3/8
10de
7/16
1-3/8
10de
400
460
510
550
400
450
480
520
15/32
1-3/8
10de
Panel Applied Over 1/2 in. or 5/8 in. Gypsum Sheathing (hot-dipped galvanized casing nails)
8d
280
420
3/8
1-1/4
Panel Siding as Covered in
PS 1
3/8
10de
1-3/8
Panel Applied Directly to Framing
320
290
450
600
890
420
620
820
1230
260
380
510
770
3/8
2
14 ga staple
350
550
720
1080
7/16
2
14
ga
staple
1 and PS 2
420
620
820
1230
15/32
2
14 ga staple
a
Nominal unit shear values shall be adjusted in accordance with AF&PA SDPWS Sec. 4.3.3 to determine LRFD factored unit
resistance.
b
For framing grades other than Douglas-Fir Larch or Southern Pine, reduced nominal shear capacities shall be determined by
multiplying the tabulated nominal unit shear capacity by the Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor = [1- (0.5 - G)], where G = Specific
Gravity of the framing lumber from the NDS. The Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor shall not be greater than 1.
c
Where panels are applied on both faces of a wall and fastener spacing is less than 6 in. on center on either side, panel joints shall be
offset to fall on different framing members or framing shall be 3 in. nominal or wider and fasteners on each side of joint shall be
staggered.
d
Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 3 in. nominal or wider and fasteners shall be staggered where nails are spaced 2 in. on
center.
e
Where 10d nails are spaced at 3 in. or less on center and penetrate framing by more than 1-5/8 in., adjoining panel edges shall have 3
in. nominal width framing and panel edge nails shall be staggered.
Structural I
3/8
14 ga staple
7/16
14 ga staple
Table 12.2-3b Nominal Unit Shear Values (kN/m) for Seismic Forces on Wood Structural Panel Shear Walls a,b,c
202
Panel Grade
Fastener Spacing at Panel Edges (mm)
Panel Thickness
(mm)
Minimum Penetration in
Framing (mm)
9.5
32
8d
9.5
35
10de
11
35
10de
12
35
10de
9.5
32
8d
9.5
35
10de
11
35
10de
Fastener Size
150
100
75
Panel Applied Over 12.7 mm or 15.9 mm Gypsum Sheathing (common or hot-dipped galvanized box nails)
Structural I

1 and PS 2
5.8
6.7
7.4
8
5.8
6.6
7.0
7.6
8.8
10.5
11.4
12.6
8.8
9.5
10.4
10.9
11.4
13.4
14.9
16.2
11.4
12.0
13.3
14.3
14.9
17.8
19.6
21.3
14.9
15.5
17.1
18.7
4.7
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.5
12
12
35
10de
Panel Applied Over 12.7 mm or 15.9 mm Gypsum Sheathing (hot-dipped galvanized casing nails)
32
8d
4.1
6.1
9.5
Panel Siding as Covered in
PS 1
9.5
10de
35
Panel Applied Directly to Framing
50d
4.2
6.6
8.8
13.0
6.1
9.0
12.0
18.0
11
2
14 ga staple
3.8
5.5
7.4
11.2
9.5
2
14 ga staple
5.1
8.0
10.5
15.8
11
2
14 ga staple
1 and PS 2
6.1
9.0
12.0
18.0
12
2
14 ga staple
a
Nominal unit shear values shall be adjusted in accordance with AF&PA SDPWS Sec. 4.3.3 to determine LRFD factored unit
resistance.
b
For framing grades other than Douglas-Fir Larch or Southern Pine, reduced nominal shear capacities shall be determined by
multiplying the tabulated nominal unit shear capacity by the Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor = [1- (0.5 - G)], where G = Specific
Gravity of the framing lumber from the NDS. The Specific Gravity Adjustment Factor shall not be greater than 1.
c
Where panels are applied on both faces of a wall and fastener spacing is less than 150 mm on center on either side, panel joints shall
be offset to fall on different framing members or framing shall be 75 mm nominal or wider and fasteners on each side of joint shall be
staggered.
d
Framing at adjoining panel edges shall be 75 mm nominal or wider and fasteners shall be staggered where nails are spaced 50 mm on
center.
e
Where 10d nails are spaced at 75 mm or less on center and penetrate framing by more than 41 mm, adjoining panel edges shall have
75 mm nominal width framing and panel edge nails shall be staggered.
9.5
14 ga staple
Structural I
203
12.3 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ENGINEERED WOOD

CONSTRUCTION
The proportioning, design, and detailing of engineered wood systems, members, and connections shall
be in accordance with the reference documents, except as modified by Sec. 12.2.3 and 12.2.4.
12.3.1 Framing. All wood columns and posts shall be framed to provide full end bearing.
Alternatively, column and post end connections shall be designed to resist the full compressive loads,
neglecting all end bearing capacity. Continuity of wall top plates or provision for transfer of induced
axial load forces is required. When offsets occur in the wall line, portions of the shear wall on each side
of the offset shall be considered as separate shear walls unless provisions for force transfer around the
offest are provided.
12.4 CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION

Conventional light-frame construction is a system constructed entirely of repetitive horizontal and
vertical wood light-framing members selected from tables in NF&PA T903 and complying with the
framing and bracing requirements of the IRC except as modified by the provisions in this section.
The requirements of this section are based on platform construction. Other framing systems must have
equivalent detailing to ensure force transfer, continuity, and compatible deformation.
Where a structure of otherwise conventional light-frame construction contains structural elements that
do not comply with the requirements of this section, such elements shall satisfy the requirements for
engineered wood construction as indicated in Sec. 12.2.
12.4.1 Limitations
12.4.1.1 General. Structures with concrete or masonry walls above the basement story shall not be
considered to be conventional light-frame construction. Construction with concrete and masonry
basement walls shall be in accordance with the IRC or equivalent.
Conventional light-frame construction is limited to structures with bearing wall heights not exceeding
10 ft (3 m) and the number of stories prescribed in Table 12.4-1. The gravity dead load of the
construction is limited to 15 psf (0.7 kN/m2) for roofs and exterior walls and 10 psf (0.5 kN/m2) for
floors and partitions and the gravity live load is limited to 40 psf (1.9 kN/m2). Figure 12.4-1 illustrates
the definition of story above grade.
Exceptions: Masonry veneer is acceptable for:
1. The first story above grade, or the first two stories above grade where the lowest story has
concrete or masonry walls, for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category B or C.
2. The first two stories above grade, or the first three stories above grade where the lowest
story has concrete or masonry walls, for structures assigned to Seismic Design Category B,
if wood structural panel wall bracing is used and the length of bracing provided is 1.5 times
the length required by Table 12.4-2.
Table 12.4-1 Braced Walls for Conventional Light-Frame Construction

Seismic Design Category
Maximum Distance Between Braced

Walls
Maximum Number of Stories

Permitted Above Grade a
Ab
35 ft (10.7 m)
35 ft (10.7 m)
25 ft (7.6 m)
D and
25 ft (7.6 m)
1c
204

Table 12.4-1 Braced Walls for Conventional Light-Frame Construction
Seismic Design Category
Maximum Distance Between Braced

Walls
Maximum Number of Stories

Permitted Above Grade a
E (Seismic Use Group I)

E (Seismic Use Group II)
and F
Conventional construction is not permitted; design in accordance with Sec.

12.2 is required.
A cripple stud wall is considered to be a story above grade. Maximum bearing wall height shall not exceed
10 ft (3 m).
b
See exceptions in Sec. 1.1.2.1.
c
Detached one- and two-family dwellings are permitted to be two stories above grade.
Figure 12.4-1 Definition of Story Above Grade.

12.4.1.2 Irregular structures. In Seismic Design Categories C, D, and E (Seismic Use Group I),
irregular structures of conventional light-frame construction shall have a seismic-force-resisting system
that is designed in accordance with Sec. 12.2 to resist the forces determined in accordance with Sec. 4.4.
A structure shall be considered to have an irregularity where at least one of the conditions described in
this section is present.
12.4.1.2.1 Out-of-plane offset. A structure shall be considered to have an irregularity where exterior
braced wall panels are not in one plane vertically from the foundation to the uppermost story in which
they are required. See Figure 12.4-2.
205
Figure 12.4-2 Out-of-Plane Offset Irregularity.

Exception: Floors with cantilevers or setbacks not exceeding four times the nominal depth of
the floor joists (see Figure 12.4-3) are permitted to support braced wall panels provided that:
1. Floor joists are 2 by 10 in. nominal (actual: 1.5 by 9.25 in.; 38 by 235 mm) or larger and
spaced not more than 16 in. (405 mm) on center.
2. The ratio of the back span to the cantilever is at least 2 to 1.
3. Floor joists at ends of braced wall panels are doubled.
4. A continuous rim joist is connected to the ends of all cantilevered joists. The rim joist shall
be permitted to be spliced using a metal tie not less than 0.058 in. (16 gauge; 2 mm) thick
and 1 in. (38 mm) wide fastened with six 16d (0.162 by 3 in.; 4 by 89 mm) common
nails on each side. Steel used shall have a minimum yield of 33,000 psi (228 MPa), such as
ASTM A 653 SS, Grade 33, ASTM A 792 SS, Grade 33, or ASTM A 875 SS, Grade 33.
5. Gravity loads carried by joists at setbacks or by the end of cantilevered joists are limited to
single story uniform wall and roof loads and the reactions from headers having a span of 8
ft (2440 mm) or less.
206
Figure 12.4-3 Permitted Cantilevers and Setbacks.

12.4.1.2.2 Unsupported diaphragm. A structure shall be considered to have an irregularity where a
section of floor or roof is not laterally supported by braced wall lines on all edges. See Figure 12.4-4.
Figure 12.4-4 Unsupported Diaphragm Irregularity.

Exception: Portions of roofs or floors that support braced wall panels above shall be permitted to
extend up to 6 ft (1.8 m) beyond a braced wall line. See Figure 12.4-5.
207
Figure 12.4-5 Permitted Diaphragm Extension.

12.4.1.2.3 Opening in wall below. A structure shall be considered to have an irregularity where the
end of a required braced wall panel extends more than 1 ft (0.3 m) over an opening in the wall below.
This requirement is applicable to braced wall panels offset in plane and to braced wall panels offset out
of plane as permitted by the exception to Sec. 12.4.1.2.1. See Figure 12.4-6.
Exception: Braced wall panels shall be permitted to extend over an opening not more than 8 ft
(2.4 m) in width where the header is a 4 by 12 in. nominal (actual: 3.5 by 11.25 in.; 89 by 286
mm) or larger member.
Figure 12.4-6 Opening in Wall Below Irregularity.

12.4.1.2.4 Vertical offset in diaphragm. A structure shall be considered to have an irregularity where
portions of a floor level are vertically offset such that the framing members on either side of the offset
cannot be lapped or tied together in an approved manner. See Figure 12.4-7.
Exception: This condition need not be considered for framing supported directly by
foundations.
208
Figure 12.4-7 Vertical Offset Irregularity.

12.4.1.2.5 Non perpendicular walls. A structure shall be considered to have an irregularity where
braced wall lines are not perpendicular to each other. See Figure 12.4-8.
Figure 12.4-8 Non perpendicular Walls Irregularity.

12.4.1.2.6 Large diaphragm opening. A structure shall be considered to have an irregularity where
floor or roof diaphragms have openings with a maximum dimension greater than 50 percent of the
distance between lines of bracing or with an area greater than 25 percent of the area between orthogonal
pairs of braced wall lines. See Figure 12.4-9.
209
Figure 12.4-9 Diaphragm Opening Irregularity.

12.4.1.2.7 Stepped foundation. A structure shall be considered to have an irregularity where the shear
walls from the foundation to the floor above vary in height by more than 6 ft (1.8 m).
12.4.2 Braced walls. The following are the minimum braced wall requirements.
12.4.2.1 Spacing between braced wall lines. Interior and exterior braced wall lines shall be located at
the spacing indicated in Table 12.4-1.
12.4.2.2 Braced wall line sheathing. All braced wall lines shall be braced by one of the types of
sheathing prescribed in Table 12.4-2. The required sum of lengths of braced wall panels at each braced
wall line is prescribed in Table 12.4-2. Braced wall panels shall be distributed along the length of the
braced wall line with sheathing placed at each end of the wall or partition or as near thereto as possible.
All panel sheathing joints shall occur over studs or blocking. Sheathing shall be fastened to all studs
and top and bottom plates and at panel edges occurring over blocking. All wall framing to which
sheathing used for bracing is applied shall be 2 in. nominal (actual: 1.5 in.; 38 mm) or thicker members.
Cripple walls shall be braced as required for braced wall lines and shall be considered an additional
story. Where interior post-and-girder framing is used, the capacity of the braced wall panels at exterior
cripple walls shall be increased to compensate for the length of interior braced wall eliminated by
increasing the length of the sheathing or by increasing the number of fasteners.
210
Table 12.4-2 Minimum Length of Wall Bracing for each 25 ft (7.6 m) of Braced Wall Line a
Story Location
Sheathing
Typeb
SDS < 0.25
0.25 SDS
< 0.375
0.375 SDS
< 0.50
0.50 SDS
< 0.75
0.75 SDS
1.0c
G-Pd
8'-0"
(2440 mm)
8'-0"
(2440 mm)
10'-8"
(3250 mm)
14'-8"
(4470 mm)
18'-8"e
(5690 mm)
S-Wf
4'-0"
(1220 mm)
4'-0"
(1220 mm)
5'-4"
(1625 mm)
8'-0"
(2440 mm)
9'-4"e
(2845 mm)
G-Pd
10'-8"
(3250 mm)
14'-8"
(4470 mm)
18'-8"e
(6590 mm)
NP
NP
S-Wf
5'-4"
(1625 mm)
6'-8"
(2030 mm)
10'-8"e
(3250 mm)
13'-4"e
(4065 mm)
17'-4"e
(5280 mm)
G-Pd
14'-8
(4470 mm)
S-Wf
8'-0"
(2440 mm)
Top or only story

above grade
Story below top

story above grade
Bottom story of 3
stories above grade
Conventional construction is not permitted; design in

accordance with Sec. 12.2 is required.
Minimum length of panel bracing on one face of wall for S-W sheathing or both faces of wall for G-P sheathing;
h/b ratio shall not exceed 2/1, except that structures in Seismic Design Category B need only meet the requirements
of Sec. R602.10.3 of the IRC. For S-W panel bracing of the same material on two faces of the wall, the minimum
length is permitted to be one half the tabulated value but the h/b ratio shall not exceed 2/1 and design for uplift is
required.
G-P = gypsumboard, fiberboard, particleboard, lath and plaster, or gypsum sheathing boards; S-W = wood
structural panels and diagonal wood sheathing. NP = not permitted.
Where SDS is greater than 1.0, conventional construction is not permitted.
Nailing of G-P sheathing shall be provided as follows at all panel edges at studs, at top and bottom plates, and at
blocking, where it occurs:
For 1/2 in. (13 mm) gypsum board, 5d (0.086 in.; 2.2 mm) coolers at 7 in. (178 mm) on center;
For 5/8 in. (16mm) gypsum board, 6d ( 0.092 in.; 2.3 mm) at 7 in. (178 mm) on center;
For gypsum sheathing board, 1-3/4 in. (44 mm) long by 7/16 in. (11 mm) head, diamond point galvanized at 4 in.
(100 mm) on center;
For gypsum lath, No. 13 gauge (0.092 in.; 2.3 mm) by 1-1/8 in. (29 mm) long, 19/64 in. (7.5 mm) head,
plasterboard at 5 in. (125 mm) on center;
For Portland cement plaster, No. 11 gauge (0.120 in.; 3 mm) by 1-1/2 in. (89 mm) long, 7/16 in. (11 mm) head at 6
in. (150 mm) on center;
For fiberboard and particleboard, No. 11 gauge (0.120 in.; 3 mm) by 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) long, 7/16 in. (11 mm)
head, galvanized at 3 in. (76 mm) on center.
Applies to one- and two-family detached dwellings only.
Nailing of S-W sheathing at a maximum of 6 inch spacing shall be provided at all panel edges to studs, to top and
bottom plates, and blocking, where it occurs. At intermediate supports space nails at 6 inch spacing where 3/8 inch
and 7/16 inch thick panels are installed on studs spaced 24 inches on center with the strong axis parallel to studs,
and at a maximum 12 inch spacing for all other conditions. Minimum nail sizes are 6d common for 3/8" thick
sheathing, and 8d common for 7/16 inch and 15/32 inch thick sheathing.
12.4.2.3 Attachment
12.4.2.3.1 Fastening of wall panel sheathing. Fastening of braced wall panel sheathing shall not be
less than the minimum indicated by footnotes d and f of Table 12.4-2.
211

12.4.2.3.2 Nailing of diagonal boards. Diagonal boards of 1 inch nominal thickness and 6 inch
nominal width shall be nailed to top and bottom plates and to studs located at braced wall ends with not
less than three 8d common nails, and at intermediate supports with not less than two 8d common nails.
Diagonal boards of 1 inch nominal thickness and 8 inch or greater nominal width shall be nailed to top
and bottom plates and to studs located at braced wall ends with not less than four 8d common nails, and
at intermediate supports with not less than three 8d common nails.
12.4.2.3.3 Adhesives. Adhesive attachment of wall sheathing is not permitted.
12.4.3 Detailing requirements. The following requirements for framing and connection details shall
apply as a minimum.
12.4.3.1 Wall anchorage. Anchorage of braced wall line sills to concrete or masonry foundations shall
be provided. Anchors shall be spaced at not more than 4 ft (1.2 m) on center for structures over two
stories in height. For Seismic Design Categories C, D, and E, plate washers not smaller than 3 by 3 by
3 in. in size shall be provided between the foundation sill plate and the nut. Other anchorage devices
having equivalent capacity shall be permitted.
12.4.3.2 Top plates. Stud walls shall be capped with double top plates installed to provide overlapping
at corners and intersections. End joints in double top plates shall be offset at least 4 ft (1220 mm).
Single top plates shall be permitted to be used where they are spliced by framing devices providing
capacity equivalent to the lapped splice prescribed for double top plates (Sec.12.4.3.4).
12.4.3.3 Bottom plates. Studs shall have full bearing on a 2 in. nominal (actual: 1.5 in.; 38 mm) or
thicker plate or sill having a width at least equal to the width of the studs.
12.4.3.4 Braced wall panel connections. Provision shall be made to transfer forces from roofs and
floors to braced wall panels and from the braced wall panels in upper stories to the braced wall panels in
the story below. Where platform framing is used, such transfer at braced wall panels shall be
accomplished in accordance with the following:
1. All braced wall panel top and bottom plates shall be fastened to joists, rafters, or full depth
blocking. Braced wall panels shall be extended and fastened to roof framing at intervals not to
exceed 50 ft (15 m).
Exception: Where roof trusses are used, provision shall be made to transfer lateral forces from
the roof diaphragm to the braced wall.
2. Bottom plate fastening to joists or blocking below shall be with not fewer than three 16d (0.162
by 3 in.; 4 by 89 mm) nails at 16 in. (400 mm) on center.
3. Blocking shall be nailed to the top plate below with not fewer than three 8d (0.131 by 2 in.; 3
by 64 mm) toenails per block.
4. Joists parallel to the top plates shall be nailed to the top plate with not fewer than 8d (0.131 by
2 in.; 3 by 64 mm) toenails at 6 in. (150 mm) on center.
In addition, top plate laps shall be nailed with not fewer than eight 16d (0.162 by 32 in.; 4 by 89 mm)
face nails on each side.
12.4.3.5 Foundations supporting braced wall panels. For structures with maximum plan dimensions
not over 50 ft (15 m), foundations supporting braced wall panels are required at exterior walls only.
Structures with plan dimensions greater than 50 ft (15 m) shall, in addition, have foundations supporting
all required interior braced wall panels. Foundation-to-braced-wall connections shall be made at every
foundation supporting a braced wall panel. The connections shall be distributed along the length of the
braced wall line. Where all-wood foundations are used, the force transfer shall be determined based on
calculation and shall have capacity greater than or equal to that for the connections required by
Sec. 12.4.3.1.
212

12.4.3.6 Stepped foundations. Where the height of a required braced wall panel extending from
foundation to floor above varies more than 4 ft (1.2 m) (see Figure 12.4-10), the following construction
shall be used:
1. Where only the bottom of the footing is stepped and the lowest floor framing rests directly on a
sill bolted to the footings, the requirements of Sec. 12.4.3.1 shall apply.
2. Where the lowest floor framing rests directly on a sill bolted to a footing not less than 8 ft (2.4 m)
in length along a line of bracing, the line shall be considered to be braced. The double plate of the
cripple stud wall beyond the segment of footing extending to the lowest framed floor shall be
spliced to the sill plate with metal ties, one on each side of the sill and plate, not less than 0.058
in. (16 gauge; 2 mm) thick by 1.5 in. (38 mm) wide by 48 in. (1220 mm) long with eight 16d
(0.162 by 3.5 in.; 4 by 89 mm) common nails on each side of the splice location. Steel used shall
have a minimum yield of 33,000 psi (228 MPa), such as ASTM A 653 SS, Grade 33, ASTM A
792 SS, Grade 33, or ASTM A 875 SS, Grade 33.
3. Where cripple walls occur between the top of the footing and the lowest floor framing, the bracing
requirements for a story shall apply.
Figure 12.4-10 Detail for Stepped Foundation.

12.4.3.7 Detailing for openings in diaphragms. For openings with a dimension greater than 4 ft (1.2
m), or openings in structures assigned to Seismic Design Category D or E, the following minimum
detail shall be provided. Blocking beyond headers and metal ties not less than 0.058 in. (16 gauge; 2
mm) thick by 1.5 in. (38 mm) wide by 48 in. (1220 mm) long with eight 16d (0.162 by 3.5 in.; 4 by 89
mm) common nails on each side of the header-joist intersection shall be provided (see Figure 12.4-11).
Steel used shall have a minimum yield of 33,000 psi (228 MPa), such as ASTM A 653 SS, Grade 33,
ASTM A 792 SS, Grade 33, or ASTM A 875 SS, Grade 33.
213
Figure 12.4 -11 Detail for Diaphragm Opening.
214
Chapter 13
SEISMICALLY ISOLATED STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 Scope.
Every seismically isolated structure and every portion thereof shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with the requirements of these Provisions as modified by this chapter.
13.1.2 Definitions.
Design displacement: The design earthquake lateral displacement, excluding additional displacement
due to actual and accidental torsion, required for design of the isolation system.
Displacement restraint system: A collection of structural elements that limits lateral displacement of
seismically isolated structures due to maximum considered earthquake ground shaking.
Effective damping: The value of equivalent viscous damping consistent with the energy dissipated
during cyclic response of the isolation system.
Effective stiffness: The value of lateral force in the isolation system, or an element thereof, divided by
the corresponding lateral displacement.
Isolation interface: The boundary between the upper portion of the structure, which is isolated, and the
lower portion of the structure, which is assumed to move rigidly with the ground.
Isolation system: The collection of structural elements that includes all individual isolator units, all
structural elements that transfer force between elements of the isolation system, and all connections to
other structural elements. The isolation system also includes the wind-restraint system, energydissipation devices, and/or the displacement restraint system where such systems or devices are used to
satisfy the design requirements of Chapter 13.
Isolator unit: A horizontally flexible and vertically stiff structural element of the isolation system that
permits large lateral deformations under design seismic load. An isolator unit is permitted to be used
either as part of or in addition to the weight-supporting system of the structure.
Maximum displacement: The maximum considered earthquake lateral displacement, excluding
additional displacement due to actual and accidental torsion.
215
Total design displacement: The design earthquake lateral displacement, including additional
displacement due to actual and accidental torsion, required for design of the isolation system or an
element thereof.
Total maximum displacement: The maximum considered earthquake lateral displacement, including
additional displacement due to actual and accidental torsion, required for verification of the stability of
the isolation system or elements thereof, design of structure separations, and vertical load testing of
isolator unit prototypes.
Wind-restraint system: The collection of structural elements that provides restraint of the seismically
isolated structure for wind loads. The wind-restraint system may be either an integral part of isolator
units or a separate device.
13.1.3 Notation
BD
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 13.3-1 for effective damping equal to D.
BM
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 13.3-1 for effective damping equal M
The shortest plan dimension of the structure measured perpendicular to d.
Cd
See Sec. 4.1.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
DD
Design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction under
consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-1.
D'D
Design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction under
consideration applicable to dynamic procedures, as prescribed by Eq. 13.4-1.
DM
Maximum displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction
under consideration, as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-3.
D'M
Maximum displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction
under consideration applicable to dynamic procedures, as prescribed by Eq. 13.4-2.
DTD
Total design displacement of an element of the isolation system including both translational
displacement at the center of rigidity and the component of torsional displacement in the
direction under consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-5.
DTM
Total maximum displacement of an element of the isolation system including both

translational displacement at the center of rigidity and the component of torsional
displacement in the direction under consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-6.
The longest plan dimension of the structure.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Eloop
Energy dissipated in an isolator unit or damping device during a full cycle of reversible load
over a test displacement range from + to - as measured by the area enclosed by the loop
of the force-deflection curve.
The actual eccentricity measured in plan between the center of mass of the structure above
the isolation interface and the center of rigidity of the isolation system, plus accidental
eccentricity taken as 5 percent the maximum building dimension perpendicular to the
direction of the force under consideration.
F+
Positive force in an isolator unit during a single cycle of prototype testing at a displacement
amplitude of +.
216
Seismically Isolated Structure Design Requirements

F-
Maximum negative force in an isolator unit during a single cycle of prototype testing a
displacement amplitude of -.
Acceleration due to gravity.
hi
See Sec. .5.1.3
hsx
See Sec. 4.1.4.
hx
See Sec. 5.1.3.
Level i
See Sec. 4.1.4.
KDmax
Maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement in the
horizontal direction under consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.6-3.
KDmin
Minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement in the
KMmax
Maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the maximum displacement in the
horizontal direction under consideration as prescribed by Eq 13.6-5.
KMmin
Minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the maximum displacement in the
horizontal direction under consideration, as prescribed by Eq. 13.6-6.
keff
Effective stiffness of an isolator unit, as prescribed by Eq. 13.6-1.
The effect of live load.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
R1
Numerical coefficient related to the type of seismic-force-resisting system above the

isolation system as defined in Sec. 13.3.3.2 for seismically isolated structures.
S1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SD1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SM1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
TD
Effective period, in seconds, of the seismically isolated structure at the design displacement
in the direction under consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-2.
TM
Effective period, in seconds, of the seismically isolated structure at the maximum

displacement in the direction under consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-4.
Vb
The total lateral seismic design force on elements of the isolation system or elements below
the isolation system as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-7.
Vs
The total lateral design force on elements above the isolation system as prescribed by
Eq. 13.3-8.
See Sec. 1.1.5. For calculation of the period of seismically isolated structures, the seismic
weight above the isolation system.
wi
See Sec. 4.1.4.
wx
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Level x
See Sec. 1.1.5.
The distance between the center of rigidity of the isolation system rigidity and the element
of interest measured perpendicular to the direction of seismic loading under consideration.
217
Effective damping of the isolation system at the design displacement as prescribed by Eq.
13.6-7.
Effective damping of the isolation system at the maximum displacement as prescribed by

Eq. 13.6-8.
eff
Effective damping of the isolation system as prescribed by Eq. 13.6-2.
The maximum considered earthquake lateral displacement of the structure above the
isolation system.
Maximum positive displacement of an isolator unit during each cycle of prototype testing.
Maximum negative displacement of an isolator unit during each cycle of prototype testing.
ED
Total energy dissipated in the isolation system during a full cycle of response at the design
displacement, DD.
EM
Total energy dissipated on the isolation system during a full cycle of response at the
maximum displacement, DM.
|FD+|max
Sum, for all isolator units, of the maximum absolute value of force at a positive
displacement equal to DD.
|FD+|min
Sum, for all isolator units, of the minimum absolute value of force at a positive
|FD-|max
Sum, for all isolator units, of the maximum absolute value of force at a negative
|FD-|min
Sum, for all isolator units, of the minimum absolute value force at a negative displacement
equal to DD.
|FM-|max
Sum, for all isolator units, of the maximum absolute value of force at a positive
displacement equal to DM.
|FM-|min
Sum, for all isolator units, of the minimum absolute value of force at a positive
|FM-|max
Sum, for all isolator units, of the minimum absolute value of force at a negative
|FM-|min
Sum, for all isolator units, of the minimum absolute value of force at a negative

13.2.1 Occupancy importance factor. The Occupancy Importance Factor shall be taken as 1.0 for a
seismically isolated structure, regardless of the Seismic Use Group assigned in accordance with Sec.
1.2.
13.2.2 Configuration. The determination of structural configuration in accordance with Sec. 4.3.2
shall be based on the structural configuration above the isolation system.
13.2.3 Ground motion
13.2.3.1 Design spectra. Properly substantiated site-specific spectra shall be used for the design of all
seismically isolated structures located on a Class F site or located at a site with S1 greater than 0.6.
Where site-specific spectra are used, the design spectrum for the design earthquake shall be developed
in accordance with Sec. 3.4. Where site-specific spectra are not used, the design spectrum for the design
218

earthquake shall be developed in accordance with Sec. 3.3. The design spectrum for the maximum
considered earthquake shall be taken as not less than 1.5 times the design spectrum for the design
earthquake.
13.2.3.2 Time histories. Where response history procedures are used, ground motions shall consist of
pairs of appropriate horizontal ground motion acceleration components that shall be selected and scaled
from individual recorded events. Appropriate ground motions shall be selected from events having
magnitudes, fault distance, and source mechanisms that are consistent with those that control the
maximum considered earthquake. Where the required number of recorded ground motion pairs are not
available, appropriate simulated ground motion pairs shall be used to make up the total number
required. For each pair of horizontal ground motion components, an SRSS spectrum shall be
constructed by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the five-percent-damped response
spectra for the scaled components (where an identical scale factor is applied to both components of a
pair). Each pair of motions shall be scaled such that for each period between 0.5TD and 1.25TM (where
TD and TM are defined in Sec. 13.3.2) the average of the SRSS spectra from all horizontal component
pairs does not fall below 1.3 times the corresponding ordinate of the design response spectrum,
determined in accordance with Sec. 13.2.3.1, by more than 10 percent.
13.2.4 Procedure selection. All seismically isolated structures shall be designed using the procedure
in Sec. 13.3 or one of the procedures in Sec. 13.4, as permitted in this section.
13.2.4.1 Equivalent lateral force procedure. The equivalent lateral force procedure of Sec. 13.3 is
permitted to be used for design of a seismically isolated structure provided that:
1. The structure is located at a site with S1 less than or equal to 0.6 ;
2. The structure is located on a Class A, B, C, or D site;
3. The structure above the isolation interface is not more than four stories or 65 ft (20 m) in height;
4. The effective period of the isolated structure, TM, is less than or equal to 3.0 sec.
5. The effective period of the isolated structure, TD, is greater than three times the elastic, fixed-base
period of the structure above the isolation system as determined in Sec. 5.2.2.1;
6. The structure above the isolation system is of regular configuration; and
7. The isolation system meets all of the following criteria:
a. The effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement is greater than one
third of the effective stiffness at 20 percent of the design displacement,
b. The isolation system is capable of producing a restoring force as specified in Sec. 13.2.5.4,
c. The isolation system does not limit maximum considered earthquake displacement to less than
the total maximum displacement.
13.2.4.2 Dynamic procedures. The dynamic procedures of Sec. 13.4 are permitted to be used for
design of seismically isolated structures as indicated in this section.
13.2.4.2.1 Response spectrum procedure. The response spectrum procedure is permitted to be used
for design of a seismically isolated structure provided that:
1. The structure is located on a Class A, B, C, or D site, and
2. The isolation system meets the criteria of Item 7 of Sec. 13.2.4.1.
13.2.4.2.2 Response history procedure. The response history procedure is permitted to be used for
design of any seismically isolated structure.
13.2.4.3 Variations in material properties. The analysis of seismically isolated buildings, including
the substructure, isolators and superstructure, shall consider variations in seismic isolator material
219
properties over the projected life of the building including changes due to aging, contamination,
environmental exposure, loading rate, scragging, and temperature.
13.2.5 Isolation system
13.2.5.1 Environmental conditions. In addition to satisfying the requirements related to vertical and
lateral loads induced by wind and earthquake, the isolation system shall be designed with consideration
given to other environmental conditions including aging effects, creep, fatigue, operating temperature,
and exposure to moisture or damaging substances.
13.2.5.2 Wind forces. Isolated structures shall resist design wind loads at all levels above the isolation
interface. At the isolation interface, a wind restraint system shall be provided to limit lateral
displacement in the isolation system to a value equal to that required between floors of the structure
above the isolation interface.
13.2.5.3 Fire resistance. The fire resistance rating for the isolation system shall be consistent with the
requirements of columns, walls, or other such elements in the same area of the structure.
13.2.5.4 Lateral-restoring force. The isolation system shall be configured to produce a restoring force
such that the lateral force at the total design displacement is at least 0.025W greater than the lateral force
at 50 percent of the total design displacement.
13.2.5.5 Displacement restraint. The isolation system is permitted to be configured to include a
displacement restraint that limits lateral displacement due to the maximum considered earthquake to less
than SM1/SD1 times the total design displacement if the seismically isolated structure is designed in
accordance with the following criteria where more stringent than the other requirements of Sec. 13.2:
1. Maximum considered earthquake response is calculated in accordance with Sec. 13.4 including
explicit consideration of the nonlinear characteristics of both the isolation system and the structure
above the isolation system;
2. The ultimate capacities of the isolation system and structural elements below the isolation system
shall exceed the strength and displacement demands due to the maximum considered earthquake;
3. The structure above the isolation system is adequate for the stability and ductility demands due to
the maximum considered earthquake; and
4. The displacement restraint does not become effective at a displacement less than 0.75 times the total
design displacement unless it is demonstrated by analysis that earlier engagement does not result in
unsatisfactory performance.
13.2.5.6 Vertical-load stability. Each element of the isolation system shall be designed to be stable
under the maximum vertical load (1.2D + 1.0L + E) and the minimum vertical load (0.8D - E) when
subjected to a horizontal displacement equal to the total maximum displacement. The dead load, D, and
the live load, L, are defined in Sec. 13.1.2. The effect of seismic load, E, shall be determined in
accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.1 except that SMS shall be used in place of SDS and the vertical loads that
result from application of horizontal seismic forces, QE, shall be based on peak response due to the
maximum considered earthquake.
13.2.5.7 Overturning. The factor of safety against global structural overturning at the isolation
interface shall not be less than 1.0 for required load combinations. All gravity and seismic loading
conditions shall be investigated. Seismic forces for overturning calculations shall be based on the
maximum considered earthquake and the vertical restoring force shall be based on W, the seismic
weight above the isolation interface, as defined in Sec. 5.2.1.
Local uplift of individual elements is permitted if the resulting deflections do not cause overstress or
instability of the isolator units or other elements of the structure.
220
13.2.5.8 Inspection and replacement

Access for inspection and replacement of all components of the isolation system shall be provided.
1. A registered design professional shall complete a final series of inspections or observations of
structure separation areas and components that cross the isolation interface prior to the issuance of
the certificate of occupancy for the seismically isolated structure. Such inspections and observations
shall confirm that the conditions allow free and unhindered displacement of the structure to
maximum design levels and that all components that cross the isolation interface as installed are
able to accommodate the stipulated displacements.
2. The registered design professional responsible for the design of the isolation system shall establish a
periodic monitoring, inspection, and maintenance program for such system.
3. Remodeling, repair, or retrofitting at the isolation interface, including that of components that cross
the isolation interface, shall be performed under the direction of a registered design professional.
13.2.5.9 Quality control. As part of the quality assurance plan developed in accordance with Sec.
2.2.1, the registered design professional responsible for the structural design shall establish a quality
control testing program for isolator units.
13.2.6 Structural system
13.2.6.1 Horizontal distribution of force. A horizontal diaphragm or other structural elements shall
provide continuity above the isolation interface and shall have adequate strength and ductility to
transmit forces (due to nonuniform ground motion) from one part of the structure to another.
13.2.6.2 Building separations. Minimum separations between the isolated structure and surrounding
retaining walls or other fixed obstructions shall not be less than the total maximum displacement.
13.2.6.3 Nonbuilding structures. Nonbuilding structures shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with the requirements of Chapter 14 using design displacements and forces calculated in
accordance with this chapter.
13.2.7 Elements of structures and nonstructural components. Parts or portions of an isolated
structure, permanent nonstructural components and the attachments to them, and the attachments for
permanent equipment supported by a structure shall be designed to resist seismic forces and
displacements as prescribed in this section and shall satisfy the applicable requirements of Chapter 6.
13.2.7.1 Components below the isolation interface. Elements of seismically isolated structures and
nonstructural components, or portions thereof, that are below the isolation interface shall be designed
for the forces and displacements indicated in Chapter 4 or Chapter 6, as appropriate.
13.2.7.2 Components crossing the isolation interface. Elements of seismically isolated structures and
nonstructural components, or portions thereof, that cross the isolation interface shall be designed to
withstand the total maximum displacement.
13.2.7.3 Components at or above the isolation interface. Elements of seismically isolated structures
and nonstructural components, or portions thereof, that are at or above the isolation interface shall be
designed to resist a total lateral force consistent with the maximum dynamic response of the element or
component under consideration.
Exception: Elements of seismically isolated structures and nonstructural components or
portions thereof are permitted to be designed for the forces and displacements indicated in
Chapter 4 or Chapter 6, as appropriate.
221

Where the equivalent lateral force procedure is used to design seismically isolated structures, the
requirements of this section shall apply.
13.3.1 Deformational characteristics of the isolation system. Minimum lateral earthquake design
displacement and forces on seismically isolated structures shall be based on the deformational
characteristics of the isolation system. The deformational characteristics of the isolation system shall
explicitly include the effects of the wind-restraint system if such a system is used to meet the design
requirements of these Provisions. The deformational characteristics of the isolation system shall be
based on properly substantiated tests performed in accordance with Sec. 13.6.
13.3.2 Minimum lateral displacements
13.3.2.1 Design displacement. The isolation system shall be designed and constructed to withstand
minimum lateral earthquake displacements that act in the direction of each of the main horizontal axes
of the structure and such displacements shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 13.3-1 as follows:
g S T
DD = 2 D1 D
4 BD
(13.3-1)
where:
g
acceleration due to gravity.
SD1 =
design five-percent-damped spectral acceleration parameter at one second period as

determined in Chapter 3.
TD =
effective period of seismically isolated structure at the design displacement in the direction
under consideration, as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-2.
BD =
numerical coefficient related to the effective damping of the isolation system at the design
displacement, D, as set forth in Table 13.3-1.
Table 13.3-1 Damping Coefficient, BD or BM
Effective Damping, D or M
(Percentage of Critical)a,b
BD or BM
Factor
0.8
1.0
10
1.2
20
1.5
30
1.7
40
1.9
50
2.0
The damping coefficient shall be based on the effective damping of the isolation system
determined in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 13.6.4.2.
b
The damping coefficient shall be based on linear interpolation for effective damping values
other than those given.
222

13.3.2.2 Effective period at design displacement. The effective period of the isolated structure, TD,
shall be determined using Eq. 13.3-2 as follows:
TD = 2
k Dmin g
(13.3-2)
where:
W
seismic weight above the isolation interface as defined in Sec. 5.2.1.
kDmin
minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement in the
13.3.2.3 Maximum displacement. The maximum displacement of the isolation system, DM, in the
most critical direction of horizontal response shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 13.3-3 as
follows:
g S T
DM = 2 M1 M
4 BM
(13.3-3)
where:
g
SM1
maximum considered five-percent-damped spectral acceleration parameter at 1 sec

period as determined in Chapter 3.
TM
effective period of seismic-isolated structure at the maximum displacement in the

direction under consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-4.
BM
numerical coefficient related to the effective damping of the isolation system at the
maximum displacement, M, as set forth in Table 13.3-1.
13.3.2.4 Effective period at maximum displacement. The effective period of the isolated structure at
maximum displacement, TM, shall be determined using Eq. 13.3-4 as follows:
TM = 2
W
k Mmin g
(13.3-4)
where:
W
seismic weight above the isolation interface as defined in Sec. 5.2.1.
kMmin
minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the maximum displacement in the
13.3.2.5 Total displacements. The total design displacement, DTD, and the total maximum
displacement, DTM, of elements of the isolation system shall include additional displacement due to
inherent and accidental torsion calculated considering the spatial distribution of the lateral stiffness of
the isolation system and the most disadvantageous location of eccentric mass.
The total design displacement, DTD, and the total maximum displacement, DTM, of elements of an
isolation system with uniform spatial distribution of lateral stiffness shall not be taken less than that
prescribed by Eq. 13.3-5 and Eq. 13.3-6, respectively, as follows:
DTD = DD 1 +
12e
y 2
2
b + d
(13.3-5)
223
12e
DTM = DM 1 + y 2
2
b + d
(13.3-6)
where:
DD =
design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction under
consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-1.
DM =
maximum displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction
under consideration as prescribed in Eq. 13.3-3.
the distance between the center of rigidity of the isolation system and the element of interest
measured perpendicular to the direction of seismic loading under consideration.
the actual horizontal eccentricity between the center of mass of the structure above the
isolation interface and the center of rigidity of the isolation system, plus the accidental
eccentricity, taken as 5 percent of the longest plan dimension of the structure perpendicular
to the direction of force under consideration.
the shortest plan dimension of the structure measured perpendicular to d.
the longest plan dimension of the structure.
Exception: The total design displacement, DTD, and the total maximum displacement, DTM, are
permitted to be taken less than the values prescribed by Eq. 13.3-5 and Eq. 13.3-6, respectively, but
not less than 1.1 times DD and DM, respectively, if the isolation system is shown by calculation to be
configured to resist torsion accordingly.
13.3.3 Minimum lateral forces
13.3.3.1 Isolation system and structural elements below the isolation system. The isolation system,
the foundation, and all structural elements below the isolation system shall be designed and constructed
to withstand a minimum lateral force, Vb, using all of the appropriate provisions for a nonisolated
structure. Vb shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 13.3-7 as follows:
Vb = k Dmax DD
(13.3-7)
where:
kDmax
maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement in the
DD
design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction
under consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-1.
In all cases, Vb shall not be taken less than the maximum force in the isolation system at any
displacement up to and including the design displacement.
13.3.3.2 Structural elements above the isolation system. The structure above the isolation system
shall be designed and constructed to withstand a minimum lateral force, Vs, using all of the appropriate
provisions for a nonisolated structure. Vs shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 13.3-8 as follows:
Vs =
k Dmax DD
RI
(13.3-8)
where:
kDmax
224
maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system at the design displacement in the

DD
design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction
under consideration as prescribed by Eq. 13.3-1.
RI
numerical coefficient related to the type of seismic-force-resisting system above the

isolation system.
RI shall be based on the type of seismic-force-resisting system used for the structure above the isolation
system and shall be taken as the lesser of 2.0 or 3/8 of the R value given in Table 4.3-1, but need not be
taken less than 1.0.
In no case shall Vs be taken less than the following:

1. The lateral force required by Sec. 5.2 for a fixed-base structure of the same weight, W, and a period
equal to the isolated period, TD;
2. The base shear corresponding to the factored design wind load; and
3. The lateral force required to fully activate the isolation system (e.g., the yield level of a softening
system, the ultimate capacity of a sacrificial wind-restraint system, or the break-away friction level
of a sliding system) multiplied by 1.5.
13.3.4 Vertical distribution of forces. The total force shall be distributed over the height of the
structure above the isolation interface in accordance with Eq. 13.3-9 as follows:
Fx = Vs
wx hx
n
(13.3-9)
wi hi
i =1
where:
Vs
total lateral design force on elements above the isolation system.
Wx
portion of W that is located at or assigned to Level x.
hx
height above the base Level x.
wi, wx =
hi
portion of W that is located at or assigned to Level i or Level x, respectively.

height, above the base, to Level i.
At each Level x the force, Fx, shall be applied over the area of the structure in accordance with the
distribution of mass at the level. Stresses in each structural element shall be determined by applying to
an analytical model the lateral forces, Fx, at all levels above the base.
13.3.5 Drift limits. The drift limits specified in this section shall supercede those found in Sec. 4.5.1.
The maximum story drift of the structure above the isolation system shall not exceed 0.015hsx. The drift
shall be calculated using Eq. 5.2-15 except that Cd for the isolated structure shall be taken equal to RI as
defined in Sec. 13.3.3.2.
13.4 DYNAMIC PROCEDURES

Where dynamic analysis is used to design seismically isolated structures, the requirements of this
section shall apply.
13.4.1 Modeling. The mathematical models of the isolated structure including the isolation system, the
seismic-force-resisting system, and other structural elements shall be developed in accordance with Sec.
5.3.1 and this section.
13.4.1.1 Isolation system. The isolation system shall be modeled using deformational characteristics
developed and verified by testing in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 13.3.1. The isolation
system shall be modeled with sufficient detail to:
1. Account for the spatial distribution of isolator units;

225
2. Calculate translation, in both horizontal directions, and torsion of the structure above the isolation
interface considering the most disadvantageous location of eccentric mass;
3. Assess overturning/uplift forces on individual isolator units; and
4. Account for the effects of vertical load, bilateral load, and the rate of loading if the force-deflection
properties of the isolation system are dependent on such attributes.
The total design displacement and total maximum displacement across the isolation system shall be
calculated using a model of the isolated structure that incorporates the force-deflection characteristics of
nonlinear elements of the isolation system and the seismic-force-resisting system.
13.4.1.2 Isolated structure
The maximum displacement of each floor and design forces and displacements in elements of the
seismic-force-resisting system are permitted to be calculated using a linear elastic model of the isolated
structure provided that:
1. Stiffness properties assumed for the nonlinear components of the isolation system are based on the
maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system, and
2. No elements of the seismic-force-resisting system of the structure above the isolation system are
nonlinear.
Seismic-force-resisting systems with nonlinear elements include, but are not limited to, irregular
structural systems designed for a lateral force less than 100 percent of Vs and regular structural systems
designed for a lateral force less than 80 percent of Vs, where Vs is determined in accordance with Sec.
13.3.3.2.
13.4.2 Description of procedures. The response spectrum procedure, linear response history
procedure, and nonlinear response history procedure shall be performed in accordance with Sec. 5.3,
5.4, and 5.5, respectively, and the requirements of this section.
13.4.2.1 Input earthquake. The design earthquake shall be used to calculate the total design
displacement of the isolation system and the lateral forces and displacements of the isolated structure.
The maximum considered earthquake shall be used to calculate the total maximum displacement of the
isolation system.
13.4.2.2 Response spectrum procedure. Response spectrum analysis shall be performed using a
modal damping value for the fundamental mode in the direction of interest not greater than the effective
damping of the isolation system or 30 percent of critical, whichever is less. Modal damping values for
higher modes shall be selected consistent with those that would be appropriate for response spectrum
analysis of the structure above the isolation system assuming a fixed base.
Response spectrum analysis used to determine the total design displacement and the total maximum
displacement shall include simultaneous excitation of the model by 100 percent of the ground motion in
the critical direction and 30 percent of the ground motion in the perpendicular, horizontal direction. The
maximum displacement of the isolation system shall be calculated as the vectorial sum of the two
orthogonal displacements.
The design shear at any story shall not be less than the story shear resulting from application of the story
forces calculated using Eq. 13.3-9 and a value of Vs equal to the base shear obtained from the
response-spectrum analysis in the direction of interest.
13.4.2.3 Response history procedure. Where a response history procedure is performed, a suite of not
fewer than three appropriate ground motions shall be used in the analysis and the ground motions shall
be selected and scaled in accordance with Sec. 13.2.3.2. Each pair of ground motion components shall
be applied to the model considering the most disadvantageous location of eccentric mass. The
226

maximum displacement of the isolation system shall be calculated from the vectorial sum of the two
orthogonal displacement components at each time step.
For each ground motion analyzed, the parameters of interest shall be calculated. If at least seven ground
motions are analyzed, the average value of the response parameter of interest shall be permitted to be
used for design. If fewer than seven ground motions are analyzed, the maximum value of the response
parameter of interest shall be used for design.
13.4.3 Minimum lateral displacements and forces
13.4.3.1 Isolation system and structural elements below the isolation system. The isolation system,
the foundation, and all structural elements below the isolation system shall be designed and constructed
using all of the appropriate requirements for a nonisolated structure and the forces obtained from the
dynamic analysis without reduction, but the design lateral force shall not be taken less than 90 percent
of Vb determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.3.1.
The total design displacement of the isolation system shall be taken as not less than 90 percent of DTD.
The total maximum displacement of the isolation system shall be taken as not less than 80 percent of
DTM. These limits shall be evaluated using values of DTD and DTM determined in accordance with Sec.
13.3.2.5 except that DD and DM , as calculated using Eq. 13.4-1 and 13.4-2, shall be permitted to be
used in lieu of DD and DM, respectively.
DD =
DM =
DD
T
1+
TD
DM
T
1+
TM
(13.4-1)
(13.4-2)
where:
DD =
design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction under
consideration, determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.2.1.
DM =
maximum displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation system in the direction
under consideration, determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.2.3.
elastic, fixed-base period of the structure above the isolation system, determined in
accordance with Sec. 5.2.2.
TD =
effective period of the seismically isolated structure at the design displacement in the
direction under consideration, determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.2.2.
TM =
effective period of the seismically isolated structure at the maximum displacement in the
direction under consideration, determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.2.4.
13.4.3.2 Structural elements above the isolation system. Subject to the procedure-specific limits of
this section, structural elements above the isolation system shall be designed using the appropriate
provisions for a nonisolated structure and the forces obtained from the dynamic analysis divided by RI,
where RI is determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.3.2.
Where the response spectrum procedure is used and the structure is regular in configuration, the design
lateral force on the structure above the isolation system shall be taken as not less than 80 percent of Vs
as determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.3.2. Where the response spectrum procedure is used and the
227
structure is irregular in configuration, the design lateral force on the structure above the isolation system
shall be taken as not less than 100 percent of Vs as determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.3.2.
Where the response history procedure is used and the structure is regular in configuration, the design
lateral force on the structure above the isolation system shall be taken as not less than 60 percent of Vs
as determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.3.2. Where the response history procedure is used and the
structure is irregular in configuration, the design lateral force on the structure above the isolation system
shall be taken as not less than 80 percent of Vs as determined in accordance with Sec. 13.3.3.2.
13.4.3.3 Scaling of results. Where the design lateral force on structural elements, determined using
either the response spectrum or response history procedure, is less than the minimum level required by
Sec. 13.4.3.1 and 13.4.3.2, all response parameters, including member forces and moments, shall be
adjusted proportionally upward.
13.4.4 Drift limits. The drift limits specified in this section shall supercede those found in Sec. 4.5.1.
The maximum story drift of the structure above the isolation system corresponding to the design lateral
force, including displacement due to vertical deformation of the isolation system, shall not exceed
0.015hsx where the response spectrum procedure is used, or 0.020hsx where the response history
procedure is used.
Drift shall be calculated using Eq. 5.3-8 with Cd for the isolated structure taken equal to RI as defined in
Sec. 13.3.3.2.
The secondary effects of the maximum considered earthquake lateral displacement, , of the structure
above the isolation system combined with gravity forces shall be investigated if the story drift ratio
exceeds 0.010/RI.
13.5 DESIGN REVIEW

A design review of the isolation system and related test programs shall be performed by an independent
team of registered design professionals in the appropriate disciplines and others experienced in seismic
analysis methods and the theory and application of seismic isolation. Isolation system design review
shall include, but need not be limited to, the following:
1. Review of site-specific seismic criteria including the development of site-specific spectra and
ground motion time histories and all other design criteria developed specifically for the project;
2. Review of the preliminary design including the determination of the total design displacement of the
isolation system and the lateral force design level;
3. Overview and observation of prototype testing, performed in accordance with Sec. 13.6;
4. Review of the final design of the entire structural system and all supporting analyses; and
5. Review of the isolation system quality control testing program developed in accordance with
Sec. 13.2.5.9.
13.6 TESTING
The deformation characteristics and damping values of the isolation system used in the analysis and
design of seismically isolated structures shall be based on tests of a selected sample of the components
prior to construction as described in this section.
The isolation system components to be tested shall include the wind-restraint system if such a system is
used in the design.
The tests specified in this section are for establishing and validating the design properties of the
isolation system and shall not be considered as satisfying the manufacturing quality control tests of Sec.
13.2.5.9.
228

13.6.1 Prototype tests. Prototype tests shall be performed separately on two full-size specimens (or
sets of specimens, as appropriate) for each predominant type and size of isolator unit of the isolation
system. The test specimens shall include the wind restraint system as well as individual isolator units if
such system is used in the design. Specimens tested shall not be used for construction unless accepted
by the registered design professional.
13.6.1.1 Record. For each cycle of tests, the force-deflection behavior of the test specimen shall be
recorded.
13.6.1.2 Sequence and cycles. For all isolator units of a common type and size, the following
sequence of tests shall be performed for the prescribed number of cycles while the test specimen is
subjected to a vertical load equal to the average dead load plus one-half the average live load:
1. Twenty fully reversed cycles of loading at a lateral force corresponding to the wind design force;
2. Three fully reversed cycles of loading at each of the following increments of displacement: 0.25DD,
0.5DD, 1.0DD, and 1.0DM;
3. Three fully reversed cycles of loading at the total maximum displacement, DTM; and
4. 30SD1 /BDSDS but not less than ten, fully reversed cycles of loading at the total design displacement,
DTD.
If an isolator unit is also a vertical-load-carrying element, then Item 2 of the sequence of cyclic tests
specified above shall be performed for two additional vertical load cases: 1) 1.2D + 0.5L + |E| and
2) 0.8D - |E|, where each vertical load case is based on the average downward force on all isolator units
of a common type and size. The dead load, D, and the live load, L, are defined in Sec. 13.1.2. The
effect of seismic load, E, shall be determined in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.1 and the vertical loads that
result from application of horizontal seismic forces, QE, shall be based on peak response corresponding
to the test displacement being evaluated.
13.6.1.3 Units dependent on loading rates. If the force-deflection properties of the isolator units are
dependent on the rate of loading, then each set of tests specified in Sec. 13.6.1.2 shall be performed
dynamically at a frequency equal to the inverse of the effective period of the isolated structure, TD. The
force-deflection properties of an isolator unit shall be considered to be dependent on the rate of loading
if the measured property (effective stiffness or effective damping) at the design displacement where
tested at any frequency in the range of 0.1 to 2.0 times the inverse of TD is different from the property
where tested at a frequency equal to the inverse of TD by more than 15 percent.
If reduced-scale prototype specimens are used to quantify rate-dependent properties of isolators, the
reduced-scale prototype specimens shall be of the same type and material and be manufactured with the
same processes and quality as full-scale prototypes and shall be tested at a frequency that represents
full-scale prototype loading rates.
13.6.1.4 Units dependent on bilateral load. If the force-deflection properties of the isolator units are
dependent on bilateral load, the tests specified in Sec. 13.6.1.2 and 13.6.1.3 shall be augmented to
include bilateral load at the following increments of the total design displacement, DTD: 0.25 and 1.0,
0.50 and 1.0, 0.75 and 1.0, and 1.0 and 1.0. The force-deflection properties of an isolator unit shall be
considered to be dependent on bilateral load if the effective stiffness where subjected to bilateral loading
is different from the effective stiffness where subjected to unilateral loading by more than 15 percent.
If reduced-scale prototype specimens are used to quantify bilateral-load-dependent properties, then such
specimens shall be of the same type and material and manufactured with the same processes and quality
as full-scale prototypes.
13.6.1.5 Maximum and minimum vertical load. In addition to the cyclic testing requirements of
Sec. 13.6.1.2, isolator units that are vertical-load-carrying elements shall be statically tested by
subjecting them to the total maximum displacement while under the maximum and minimum vertical
229
load. In these tests, the maximum vertical load shall be taken as the maximum effect of 1.2D + 1.0L +
|E| and the minimum vertical load shall be taken as the minimum effect of 0.8D - |E| for any one
isolator of a common type and size. The dead load, D, and the live load, L, are defined in Sec. 13.1.2.
The effect of seismic load, E, shall be determined in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2.1 except that SMS shall
be used in place of SDS and the vertical loads that result from application of horizontal seismic forces,
QE, shall be based on peak response due to the maximum considered earthquake.
13.6.1.6 Sacrificial wind-restraint systems. If a sacrificial wind-restraint system is to be utilized, the
ultimate capacity shall be established by test.
13.6.1.7 Testing similar units. The prototype tests are not required if an isolator unit is of similar
dimensional characteristics and of the same type and material as a prototype isolator unit that has been
previously tested using the specified sequence of tests.
13.6.2 Determination of force-deflection characteristics. The force-deflection characteristics of the
isolation system shall be based on the cyclic load tests of isolator prototypes specified in Sec. 13.6.1.
As required, the effective stiffness of an isolator unit, keff, shall be calculated for each cycle of loading
by Eq. 13.6-1 as follows:
keff =
F+ + F
(13.6-1)
+ +
where F+ and F- are the positive and negative forces at + and -, respectively.
As required, the effective damping, eff, of an isolator unit shall be calculated for each cycle of loading
by Eq. 13.6-2 as follows:
eff
Eloop
2
=
k + +
eff
(13.6-2)
where the energy dissipated per cycle of loading, Eloop, and the effective stiffness, keff, shall be based on
peak test displacements of + and -.
13.6.3 Test specimen adequacy. The performance of the test specimens shall be deemed adequate if
the following conditions are satisfied:
1. The force-deflection plots for all tests specified in Sec. 13.6.1 have a positive incremental force
carrying capacity. For each increment of test displacement specified in Item 2 of Sec. 13.6.1.2 and
for each vertical load case specified in Sec. 13.6.1.2,
a. For each test specimen, the difference between the effective stiffness at each of the three cycles
of test and the average value of effective stiffness is no greater than 15 percent; and
b. For each cycle of test, the difference between effective stiffness of the two test specimens of a
common type and size of the isolator unit and the average effective stiffness is no greater than
15 percent.
2. For each specimen there is no greater than a 20 percent change in the initial effective stiffness over
the cycles of test specified in Item 4 of Sec. 13.6.1.2;
3. For each specimen there is no greater than a 20 percent decrease in the initial effective damping
over the cycles of test specified in Item 4 of Sec. 13.6.1.2; and
4. All specimens of vertical-load-carrying elements of the isolation system remain stable when tested
in accordance with Sec. 13.6.1.5.
230

13.6.4 Design properties of the isolation system
13.6.4.1 Maximum and minimum effective stiffness. At the design displacement, the maximum and
minimum effective stiffness of the entire isolated system, kDmax and kDmin, shall be based on the cyclic
tests of individual isolator units in accordance with Item 2 of Sec. 13.6.1.2 and calculated using Eq.
13.6-3 and 13.6-4 as follows:
k Dmax =
k Dmin =
+
FD
+ FD
max
max
2 DD
+
FD
min
+ FD
min
2 DD
(13.6-3)
(13.6-4)
At the maximum displacement, the maximum and minimum effective stiffness of the entire isolation
system, kMmax and kMmin, shall be based on the cyclic tests of individual isolator units in accordance with
Item 2 of Sec. 13.6.1.2 and calculated using Eq. 13.6-5 and 13.6-6 as follows:
k Mmax =
k Mmin =
+
FM
max
+ FM
max
2 DM
+
FM
min
+ FM
2 DM
min
(13.6-5)
(13.6-6)
The maximum effective stiffness of the isolation system, kDmax (or kMmax), shall be based on forces from
the cycle of prototype testing at a test displacement equal to DD (or DM) that produces the largest value
of effective stiffness. Minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system, kDmin (or kMmin), shall be based
on forces from the cycle of prototype testing at a test displacement equal to DD (or DM) that produces the
smallest value of effective stiffness.
For isolator units that are found by the tests of Sec. 13.6.1.2, 13.6.1.3 and 13.6.1.4 to have forcedeflection characteristics that vary with vertical load, rate of loading, or bilateral load, respectively, the
values of kDmax and kMmax shall be increased and the values of kDmin and kMmin shall be decreased to bound
the effects of measured variation in effective stiffness.
13.6.4.2 Effective damping. At the design displacement, the effective damping of the entire isolation
system, D, shall be based on the cyclic tests of individual isolator units in accordance with Item 2 of
Sec. 13.6.1.2 and calculated using Eq. 13.6-7 as follows:
D =
1
2
ED
2
k Dmax DD
(13.6-7)
In Eq. 13.6-7, the total energy dissipated per cycle of design displacement response, ED, shall be taken
as the sum of the energy dissipated per cycle in all isolator units measured at a test displacement equal
to DD, and shall be based on forces and deflections from the cycle of prototype testing that produces the
smallest value of effective damping.
At the maximum displacement, the effective damping of the entire isolation system, M, shall be based
on the cyclic tests of individual isolator units in accordance with Item 2 of Sec. 13.6.1.2 and calculated
using Eq. 13.6-8 as follows:
M =
1 EM
2 k Mmax DM2
(13.6-8)
231

In Eq. 13.6-8, the total energy dissipated per cycle of maximum displacement response, EM, shall be
taken as the sum of the energy dissipated per cycle in all isolator units measured at a test displacement
equal to DM, and shall be based on forces and deflections from the cycle of prototype testing that
produces the smallest value of effective damping.
232
Chapter 14
NONBUILDING STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 Scope. Nonbuilding structures considered by these Provisions include all self-supporting
structures which carry gravity loads, with the exception of buildings, vehicular and railroad bridges,
electric power substation equipment, overhead power line support structures, buried pipelines, conduits
and tunnels, lifeline systems, nuclear power generation plants, offshore platforms, and dams.
Nonbuilding structures supported by the earth or by other structures shall be designed and detailed in
accordance with these Provisions as modified by this chapter. Nonbuilding structures for which this
chapter does not provide explicit direction shall be designed in accordance with engineering practices
that are approved by the authority having jurisdiction and are applicable to the specific type of
nonbuilding structure.
Architectural, mechanical, and electrical components supported by nonbuilding structures within the
scope of chapter 14, and their supports and attachments, shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 6
of these Provisions.
Exception: Storage racks, cooling towers, and storage tanks shall be designed in accordance with
Chapter 14 of these Provisions.
14.1.2 References
14.1.2.1 Adopted references. The following references form a part of these Provisions to be used for
the applications indicated in Table 14.1-1 as specified in this chapter.
ACI 313
Standard Practice for the Design and Construction of Concrete Silos and
Stacking Tubes for Storing Granular Materials, American Concrete Institute,
1997.
ACI 350.3
Seismic Design of Liquid-Containing Concrete Structures, American Concrete

Institute, 2001.
API 620
Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low Pressure Storage Tanks,

American Petroleum Institute, 2002.
API 650
Welded Steel Tanks For Oil Storage, American Petroleum Institute, 1998.
ASME BPV
Boiler And Pressure Vessel Code, American Society of Mechanical Engineers,

including addenda through 2003.
AWWA D100
Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage, American Water Works Association,
1996.
AWWA D103
Factory-Coated Bolted Steel Tanks for Water Storage, American Water Works
Association, 1997.
AWWA D110
Wire- and Strand-Wound Circular Prestressed Concrete Water Tanks, American

Water Works Association, 1995.
AWWA D115
Circular Prestressed Concrete Tanks with Circumferential Tendons, American

Water Works Association, 1995.
RMI
Specification for the Design, Testing, and Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage
Racks, Rack Manufacturers Institute, 1997 (Reaffirmed 2002).
233

NCEL R-939
Ebeling, R. M., and Morrison, E. E., The Seismic Design of Waterfront Retaining
Structures, Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory, 1993.
Table 14.1-1 Adopted References
Application
Steel storage racks
Welded steel tanks for water storage
Welded steel tanks for petroleum and petrochemical storage
Bolted steel tanks for water storage
Piers and Wharves
Concrete tanks for water storage
Pressure vessels
Concrete silos and stacking tubes
Reference
RMI
AWWA D100
API 650, API 620
AWWA D103
AWWA D115, AWWA D110, ACI
350.3
ASME BPV
ACI 313
14.1.2.2 Other references

ACI 371R
Guide for the Analysis, Design, and Construction of Concrete Pedestal Water
Towers, American Concrete Institute, 1998.
API 653
Tank Inspection, Repair, Alteration, and Reconstruction, American Petroleum

Institute, 2001.
API Spec 12B
Bolted Tanks for Storage of Production Liquids, American Petroleum Institute, 1995
(Reaffirmed 2000).
14.1.3 Definitions
Attachments: See Sec. 6.1.3.
Container: A large-scale independent component used as a receptacle or a vessel to accommodate plants,
refuse, or similar uses.
Flexible component: See Sec. 6.1.3.
Flexible equipment connections: Those connections between equipment components that permit rotational
and/or transitional movement without degradation of performance. Examples included universal joints,
bellows, expansion joints, and flexible metal hose.
Nonbuilding structure: A structure, other than a building, constructed of a type included in Chapter 14 and
within the limits of Sec. 14.1.1.
Nonbuilding structure similar to building: A nonbuilding structure that is designed and constructed in a
manner similar to buildings, with a basic seismic-force-resisting-system conforming to one of the types
indicated in Table 4.3-1, usually with diaphragms or other elements to transfer lateral forces to the vertical
seismic force resisting system.
234
Nonbuilding Structure Design Requirements

P-delta effect: See Sec. 5.1.2.
Plain masonry: See Sec. 11.1.3.
Reinforced masonry: See Sec. 11.1.3.
Rigid component: See Sec. 6.1.3.
Seismic force-resisting system: See Sec. 1.1.4.
Seismic Use Group: A classification assigned to the structure based on its use as defined in Sec. 1.3.
Storage racks: Industrial pallet racks, moveable shelf racks, and stacker racks made of cold-formed and
hot-rolled structural members. Other types of racks such as drive-in and drive-through racks, cantilever
racks, portable racks, or racks made of materials other than steel are not included.
Supports: See Sec. 6.1.3.
14.1.4 Notation.
Ag
See Sec. 7.1.4.
Inside length of a rectangular tank, perpendicular to the direction of the earthquake force being
investigated.
ap
See Sec. 6.1.4.
Cd
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Cv
A coefficient defined in 14.4.7.1(3) [Eq. (14.4-2)].
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Di
Inside diameter of tank or vessel.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Et
Modulus of elasticity of tank or vessel wall material.
Fh
Total unbalanced lateral dynamic earth and groundwater pressure acting on the outer wall of the tank or
vessel.
Fy
The yield stress.
See Sec. 13.1.3.
The height of liquid in a tank.
HL
Design liquid height inside tank or vessel.
Hw
Height of tank or vessel wall (shell).
Depth of tank wall embedment.
hi, hx
The height above the base Level i or x, respectively.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Ip
See Sec. 6.1.4.
See Sec. 5.1.3.

235

kh
Horizontal ground acceleration (as used in the design of buried tanks and vessels).
Inside length of a rectangular tank, parallel to the direction of the earthquake force being investigated.
Overturning moment.
Nh
Hydrodynamic hoop force in the wall of a cylindrical tank or vessel
See Sec. 4.1.4.
Rp
See Sec. 6.1.4.
Sa
See Sec. 3.1.4.
Sac
The design spectral response acceleration for a convective mode.
Sai
The design spectral response acceleration for an impulsive mode.
SD1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
T0
See Sec. 3.1.4.
Tc
The natural period of the first convective mode.
Ti
The natural period of the first impulsive mode.
TS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
Tv
The natural period of vertical vibration of the liquid and tank structural system.
tw
Thickness of tank or vessel wall.
See Sec. 5.1.3.
Vc
The total convective shear at the base of the structure in the direction of interest.
Vi
The total impulsive shear at the base of the structure in the direction of interest.
Vmax
The peak local tangential shear per unit length as determined by Eq. 14.4-10.
V%
See Sec. 5.1.3.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Wc
The convective component of seismic weight.
Wi
The impulsive component of seismic weight.
WL
Weight of the stored liquid.
Wp
See Sec. 6.1.4.
Wr
Weight of the tank roof.
Ww
Weight of the tank or vessel wall (shell).
Distance from base of the tank to level being investigated.
Unit weight of stored liquid.
The height of a sloshing wave.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
xe
The deflection of Level x at the center of the mass at and above Level x determined by an elastic
analysis.
236
See Sec. 4.1.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
14.1.5 Nonbuilding structures supported by other structures. If a nonbuilding structure is supported

above the base by another structure and the weight of the nonbuilding structure is not more than 25 percent
of the seismic weight, W, as defined in Sec. 5.2.1, the design seismic forces for the supported nonbuilding
structure shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 6.
Exception: Storage racks, cooling towers, and storage tanks shall be designed in accordance with
Chapter 14 of these Provisions.
If the weight of a supported nonbuilding structure is more than 25 percent of the seismic weight, W, as
defined in Sec. 5.2.1, the design seismic forces shall be determined based on an analysis of the combined
system (comprising the nonbuilding structure and supporting structure). For supported nonbuilding
structures that have rigid component dynamic characteristics, the R factor for the supporting structural
system shall be used for the combined system. For supported nonbuilding structures that have flexible
component dynamic characteristics, the R factor for the combined system shall not be greater than 3. The
supported nonbuilding structure, and its supports and attachments, shall be designed for the forces
determined from the analysis of the combined system.

14.2.1 Seismic Use Groups and importance factors. The Seismic Use Group and importance factor, I, for
nonbuilding structures shall be determined based on the function of the structure and the relative hazard of its
contents. The value of I shall be the largest of the values determined using approved standards, Table 14.2-1,
and other provisions in this chapter.
Table 14.2-1 Seismic Use Groups and Importance Factors for Nonbuilding Structures
Seismic Use Group
II
III
F-I
F-II
F-III
Hazard b
H-I
H-II
H-III
Importance Factor
I = 1.0
I = 1.25
I = 1.5
Function
Function shall be classified as follows:

F-I
Nonbuilding structures not classified as F-III.
F-II
Not applicable for nonbuilding structures.
F-III Nonbuilding structures that are required for post-earthquake recovery or as emergency backup facilities for Seismic Use Group III structures.
b
Hazard shall be classified as follows:
H-I
Nonbuilding structures that are not assigned to H-II or H-III.
H-II
Nonbuilding structures that have a substantial public hazard due to contents or use as
determined by the authority having jurisdiction.
H-III Nonbuilding structures containing sufficient quantities of toxic or explosive substance
deemed to be hazardous to the public as determined by the authority having jurisdiction.
14.2.2 Ground motion. Where a site-specific study is required by an approved standard or the authority
having jurisdiction, the design ground motion shall be determined in accordance with Sec. 3.4.
If a longer recurrence interval is defined in the adopted reference or other approved standard for a
nonbuilding structure (such as LNG tanks), the recurrence interval required in the standard shall be used.
14.2.3 Design basis. Nonbuilding structures shall be designed to have sufficient stiffness, strength, and
ductility to resist the effects of seismic ground motions. Where adopted references or other approved
standards establish specific seismic design criteria for nonbuilding structures, the design shall satisfy those
237

criteria as amended in this chapter. When adopted references or other approved standards are not available,
nonbuilding structures shall be designed in accordance with these Provisions.
Unless otherwise noted in this chapter, the effects on the nonbuilding structure due to gravity loads and
seismic forces shall be combined in accordance with the factored load combinations as presented in ASCE 7
except that the seismic loads, E, shall be as defined in Sec. 4.2.2.1.
Where specifically required by these Provisions, the design seismic force on nonbuilding structure
components sensitive to the effects of structural overstrength shall be as defined in Sec. 4.2.2.2. The system
overstrength factor, o, shall be taken from Table 14.2-2.
14.2.4 Seismic-force-resisting system selection and limitations. The basic seismic-force-resisting system
shall be selected as follows:
1. For nonbuilding structures similar to buildings, a system shall be selected from among the types
indicated in Table 14.2-2 subject to the system limitations and height limits, based on Seismic
Design Category, indicated in the table. The appropriate values of R, 0, and Cd indicated in Table
14.2-2 shall be used in determining the base shear, element design forces, and design story drift as
indicated in these Provisions. Design and detailing requirements shall comply with the sections
referenced in table 14.2-2.
2. For nonbuilding structures not similar to buildings, a system shall be selected from among the types
indicated in Table 14.2-3 subject to the system limitations and height limits, based on Seismic design
Category indicated in the table. The appropriate values of R, 0, and Cd indicated in Table 4.3-1
shall be used in determining the base shear, element design forces, and design story drift as indicated
in these Provisions. Design and detailing requirements shall comply with the sections referenced in
Table 14.2-3.
3, Where neither Table 14.2-2 nor Table 14.2-3 contains an appropriate entry, applicable strength and
other design criteria shall be obtained from an adopted reference that is applicable to the specific
type of nonbuilding structure. Design and detailing requirements shall comply with the adopted
reference.
Where an approved standard provides a basis for the earthquake-resistant design of a particular type of
nonbuilding structure, such a standard may be used subject to the following limitations:
1. The design ground motion shall be determined in accordance with Chapter 3.
2. The values for total lateral force and total base overturning moment used in design shall not be less
than 80 percent of the base shear and overturning moment that would be obtained using Chapter 5 of
these Provisions.
3. Where the approved standard defines acceptance criteria in terms of allowable stresses (as opposed
to strengths), the design seismic forces shall be obtained from the Provisions and reduced by a factor
of 1.4 for use with allowable stresses and allowable stress increases used in the approved standard
are permitted.
238

Table 14.2-2 Design Coefficients and Factors for Nonbuilding Structures Similar to Buildings
Nonbuilding Structure Type
Steel Storage Racks

Building frame systems:
Special steel concentrically braced
frames
Ordinary steel concentrically braced
frame
With Building Structure Height
Limits
With Non-building Structure
Height Limits
Moment resisting frame systems:
Special reinforced concrete moment

frames
Intermediate steel moment frames
Limits
Height Limits
Intermediate reinforced concrete
moment frames
Limits
Height Limits
Ordinary moment frames of steel
Limits
Height Limits
Ordinary reinforced concrete moment
frames
Required
Detailing
Provisions
Cd
Sec. 14.3.5
3.5
AISC
Seismic, Part
I, Sec. 13
NL
NL
160
160
100
AISC
Seismic, Part
I, Sec. 14
AISC
Seismic, Part
I, Sec. 14
4.5
NL
NL
35b
35b
NPb
3.5
3.5
NL
NL
160
160
100
5.5
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
5.5
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
AISC
Seismic, Part
I, Sec. 10
AISC
Seismic, Part
I, Sec. 10
4.5
NL
NL
35c,d
NPc,d
NPc,d
2.5
2.5
NL
NL
160
160
100
9.2.2.3 and
ACI 318,
Chapter 21
9.2.2.3 and
ACI 318,
Chapter 21
4.5
NL
NL
NP
NP
NP
3.5
2.5
NL
NL
50
50
50
3.5
NL
NL
NPc,d
NPc,d
NPc,d
2.5
2.5
NL
NL
100
100
NPc
2.5
NL
NP
NP
NP
NP
AISC
Seismic, Part
I, Sec. 9
Sec. 9.2.2.2
& ACI 318,
Chapter 21
AISC
Seismic, Part
I, Sec. 10
AISC
Seismic, Part
I, Sec. 10
Sec. 9.3.1 &
ACI 318,
Chapter 21
System Limitations and Height

Limits (ft) by Seismic Design
Categorya
B
C
D
E
F
NL NL
NL
NL
NL
NL = no limit and NP = not permitted. If using metric units, 50 ft approximately equals 15 m.

Heights are measured from the base of the structure as defined in Sec. 14 1.3.
b
Steel ordinary braced frames are permitted in pipe racks up to 65 feet (20 m).
c
Steel ordinary moment frames and intermediate moment frames are permitted in pipe racks up to a height of 65 feet (20 m) where the moment joints
of field connections are constructed of bolted end plates.
d
Steel ordinary moment frames and intermediate moment frames are permitted in pipe racks up to a height of 35 ft (11 m).
239

Table 14.2-3 Design Coefficients and Factors for Nonbuilding Structures NOT Similar to Buildings
R
Cd
System Limitations and Height

Limits (ft) by Seismic Design
Categorya
B
C
D
E
F
3
2
2b
2b
2.5
2.5
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
160
100
100
60
Sec. 14.4.7.13
3
3b
3
2b
2b
2b
2
2
2.5
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Sec. 14.3.2
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
3
2.5
2b
2b
2.5
2
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
2
3.25
1.5
2b
2b
1.5b
2
2
1.5
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Sec. 14.4.3
1.5
3
1.5b
1.75
1.5
3
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Chapter 11
2.5
NL
NL
NL
50
50
Chapter 11
1.25
1.5
NL
NL
50
50
50
Adopted
References
2.5
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
Adopted
References
Adopted
References
2.5
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
3.5
3.5
2
1.75
3
2
3
3
2
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
50
NL
NL
50
NL
3.5
1.75
NL
NL
NL
NL
NL
1.25
2.5
NL
NL
50
50
50
Nonbuilding Structure Type
Required
Detailing
Provisions
Elevated tanks, vessels, bins, or hoppers:

On symmetrically braced legs
On unbraced or asymmetrically braced
legs
Single pedestal or skirt supported
- welded steel
- prestressed or reinforced concretec
Horizontal, saddle supported welded steel
vessels
Tanks or vessels supported on structural
towers similar to buildings
Flat bottom, ground supported tanks, or
vessels:
Steel or fiber-reinforced plastic:
Mechanically anchored
Self-anchored
Reinforced or prestressed concrete:
with reinforced nonsliding base
with anchored flexible base
with unanchored and
unconstrained flexible base
Other material
Cast-in-place concrete silos, stacks, and
chimneys having walls continuous to the
foundation
Reinforced masonry structures not similar to
buildings
Plain masonry structures not similar to
buildings
Steel and reinforced concrete distributed
mass cantilever structures not covered herein
(including stacks, chimneys, silos, and skirtsupported vertical vessels that are not similar
to buildings)
Trussed towers (freestanding or guyed),
guyed stacks and chimneys
Cooling towers:
Concrete or steel
Wood frames
Inverted pendulum type structures (except
elevated tanks, vessels, bins and hoppers)
Signs and billboards
Sec. 14.4.7.9
Self-supporting structures that are not similar

to buildings and are not covered above or by
approved standards
Sec. 14.4.7
Adopted
References
Adopted
References
Adopted
References
a
NL = no limit and NP = not permitted. If using metric units, 50 ft approximately equals 15 m.
Heights are measured from the base of the structure as defined in Sec. 14 1.3.
b
In the case of tanks and vessels, the overstrength factors, 0, tabulated above apply only to connections, anchorages and other seismic-forceresisting tank components or elements, which shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 14.4.7.2 and 14.4.7.4 (except that
anchor bolts or anchor cables that are designed to yield shall be permitted to be designed using an overstrength value, 0, = 1.0 ). The
overstrength provisions of Sec. 4.2.2.2 and the, 0, values tabulated above, do not apply to the design of walls, including interior walls of tanks
and vessels.
c
Detailing in accordance with Sec. 9.2.1.6 of these Provisions for special reinforced concrete shear walls is required, or R shall be taken as 2.
240

14.2.5 Structural analysis procedure selection. Structural analysis procedures for nonbuilding
structures that are similar to buildings shall be selected in accordance with Sec. 4.4.1 of these
Provisions.
Nonbuilding structures that are not similar to buildings shall be analyzed by using either the equivalent
lateral force procedure in accordance with Sec. 5.2 of these Provisions, the response spectrum procedure
in accordance with Sec. 5.3 of these Provisions, or the procedure prescribed in the specific adopted
reference.
14.2.6 Seismic weight. The seismic weight, W, for nonbuilding structures shall include all dead loads
as defined for structures in Sec. 5.2.1. For the purposes of calculating design seismic forces in
nonbuilding structures, W also shall include all normal operating contents for items such as tanks,
vessels, bins, hoppers, and piping. W shall include snow and ice loads where these loads constitute 25
percent or more of W or where required by the authority having jurisdiction based on local
environmental conditions.
14.2.7 Rigid nonbuilding structures. Nonbuilding structures that have a fundamental period, T, less
than 0.06 sec, including their anchorages, shall be designed for the base shear, V, obtained using
Eq. 14.2-1 as follows:
V = 0.3S DS IW
(14.2-1)
where:
SDS
the short period spectral response acceleration parameter, as determined in Sec. 3.3.3,
the importance factor, as determined from Table 14.2-1, and
the seismic weight.
In this case, the force shall be distributed with height in accordance with Sec. 5.2.3.
14.2.8 Minimum base shear. For nonbuilding systems that have an R value provided in Table 14.2-2,
the minimum value specified in Sec. 5.2.1.1 shall be replaced by:
Cs = 0.03
(14.2-2)
and the minimum value specified in Eq. 5.2-5 shall be replaced by:
Cs =
0.8S1
R I
(14.2-3)
Exceptions:
1. Nonbuilding systems that have an R value provided in Table 14.2-3 and are designed to an
adopted reference as modified by these Provisions shall be subject to the minimum base shear
values defined by Equations 5.2-4 and 5.2-5.
2. Minimum base shear requirements need not apply to the convective (sloshing) component of
liquid in tanks.
14.2.9 Fundamental period. The fundamental period of the nonbuilding structure shall be determined
using the structural properties and deformation characteristics of the resisting elements in a properly
substantiated analysis, such as the method described in Sec. 5.3.2.
When adopted references or other approved standards are not available, the fundamental period T may
be computed using the following formula:
241

n
T = 2
wi i
i =1
n
g f i i
(14.2-4)
i =1
The values of fi represent any lateral force distribution in accordance with the principles of structural
mechanics. The elastic deflections, i, shall be calculated using the applied lateral forces, fi.
Equations 5.2-6, 5.2-7 and 5.2-8 shall not be used for determining the period of a nonbuilding structure.
14.2.10 Vertical distribution of seismic forces. In addition to the methods prescribed in Chapter 5 of
these Provisions, it shall be permitted to determine the vertical distribution of lateral seismic forces in
accordance with an adopted reference or other standard that is approved by the authority having
jurisdiction and is applicable to the specific type of nonbuilding structure.
14.2.11 Deformation requirements. The drift limits of Sec. 4.5.1 need not apply to nonbuilding
structures if a rational analysis indicates they can be exceeded without adversely affecting structural
stability or attached or interconnected components and elements (such as walkways and piping). P-delta
effects shall be considered where critical to the function or stability of the structure.
Structures shall satisfy the separation requirements as determined in accordance with Sec. 4.5.1 unless
specifically amended in this chapter.
14.2.12 Nonbuilding structure classification. Nonbuilding structures with structural systems that are
designed and constructed in a manner similar to buildings and that have dynamic response similar to
building structures shall be classified as similar to buildings and shall be designed in accordance with
Sec. 14.3. All other nonbuilding structures shall be classified as not similar to buildings and shall be
designed in accordance with Sec. 14.4.
14.3 NONBUILDING STRUCTURES SIMILAR TO BUILDINGS

Nonbuilding structures similar to buildings, as defined in Sec. 14.1.3, shall be designed in accordance
with these Provisions as modified by this section and the specific adopted references.
14.3.1 Electrical power generating facilities. Electrical power generating facilities are power plants
that generate electricity by steam turbines, combustion turbines, diesel generators, or similar turbo
machinery. Such structures shall be designed in accordance with Sec. 14.2 of these Provisions.
14.3.2 Structural towers for tanks and vessels. Structural towers that support tanks and vessels shall
be designed in accordance with Sec. 14.1.5. In addition, the following special considerations shall be
included:
1. The distribution of the lateral base shear from the tank or vessel onto the supporting structure shall
consider the relative stiffness of the tank and resisting structural elements.
2. The distribution of the vertical reactions from the tank or vessel onto the supporting structure shall
consider the relative stiffness of the tank and resisting structural elements. Where the tank or vessel
is supported on grillage beams, the calculated vertical reaction due to weight and overturning shall
be increased at least 20 percent to account for nonuniform support. The grillage beam and vessel
attachment shall be designed for this increased design value.
3. Calculation of the seismic displacements of the tank or vessel shall consider the deformation of the
support structure where determining P-delta effects or evaluating required clearances to prevent
pounding of the tank on the structure.
14.3.3 Piers and wharves. Piers and wharves are structures located in waterfront areas that project
into a body of water. Two categories of these structures are:
242

a. Piers and wharves with general public occupancy, such as cruise ship terminals, retail or
commercial offices, restaurants, fishing piers and other tourist attractions.
b. Piers and wharves where occupancy by the general public is not a consideration and economic
considerations (on a regional basis, or for the owner) are a major design consideration, such as
container wharves, marine oil terminals, bulk terminals, etc., or other structures whose primary
function is to moor vessels and barges.
These structures shall conform to the building or building-like structural requirements of the Provisions
or other rational criteria and methods of design and analysis. Any methods used for design of these
structures should recognize the unique importance of liquefaction and soil failure collapse mechanisms,
as well as consider all applicable marine loading combinations, such as mooring, berthing, wave and
current. Structural detailing shall be carefully considered for the marine environment.
14.3.3.1 Additional seismic mass. Seismic forces on elements below the water level shall include the
inertial force of the mass of the displaced water. The additional seismic mass equal to the mass of the
displaced water shall be included as a lumped mass on the submerged element, and shall be added to the
calculated seismic forces of the pier or wharf structure.
14.3.3.2 Soil effects. Seismic dynamic forces from the soil shall be determined by the registered design
professional. The design shall account for the effects of liquefaction on piers and wharves, as
appropriate.
14.3.4 Pipe racks. Pipe racks supported at the base shall be designed for the forces defined in Chapter
5 of these Provisions.
Displacements of the pipe rack shall be calculated using Eq. 5.2-15. The potential for interaction effects
(pounding of the piping system) shall be considered based on these amplified displacements.
Piping systems, and their supports and attachments, shall be designed in accordance with Sec. 6.4.7.
Friction resulting from gravity loads shall not be considered to provide resistance to seismic forces.
14.3.5 Steel storage racks. Steel storage racks supported below, at, or above grade shall be designed
in accordance with this section.
14.3.5.1 Testing. Unless higher values of R are justified by test data, the seismic-force-resisting system
shall be subject to the requirements and limitations of Sec. 14.2.4.
14.3.5.2 Importance factor. For storage racks in occupancies open to the general public, the
importance factor, I, shall be taken as 1.5.
14.3.5.3 Operating weight. Steel storage racks shall be designed for each of the following conditions
of operating weight, W.
1. Weight of the rack plus every storage level loaded to 67 percent of its rated load capacity.
2. Weight of the rack plus the highest storage level only loaded to 100 percent of its rated load
capacity.
The design shall consider the actual height of the center of mass of each storage load component.
14.3.5.4 Vertical distribution of seismic forces. For all steel storage racks, the vertical distribution of
seismic forces shall be as specified in Sec. 5.2.3 and in accordance with the following:
1. The base shear, V, of the steel storage rack shall be determined considering the loading conditions
defined in Sec. 14.3.5.3.
2. The base of the structure shall be the floor supporting the steel storage rack. Each storage level of
the rack shall be treated as a level of the structure, with heights hi and hx measured from the base of
the structure.
243

3. The factor k may be taken as 1.0.
14.3.5.5 Seismic displacements. Steel storage rack installations shall accommodate the seismic
displacement of the storage racks and their contents relative to all adjacent or attached components and
elements. The assumed total relative displacement for storage racks shall not be less than 5 percent of
the height above the base unless a smaller value is justified by test data or a properly substantiated
analysis.
14.3.5.6 RMI storage racks. Steel storage racks designed in accordance with Sec. 2.7 of RMI shall be
deemed to satisfy the seismic force and displacement requirements of these Provisions if all of the
following conditions are met:
1. Where determining the value of Ca in Sec. 2.7.3 of RMI, the value of Cs is taken as equal to SDS/2.5,
the value of Cv is taken as equal to SD1, and the value of Ip is taken equal to the importance factor, I,
determined in accordance with Sec. 14.3.5.2;
2. The value of Cs in RMI is not taken less than 0.14SDS; and
3. For storage racks supported above grade, the value of Cs in RMI is not taken less than the value
determined for Fp in accordance with Sec. 6.2.6 of these Provisions where Rp taken equal to R, ap
taken equal to 2.5, and Ip is taken equal to the importance factor, I, determined in accordance with
Sec. 14.3.5.2.
14.4 NONBUILDING STRUCTURES NOT SIMILAR TO BUILDINGS

The following nonbuilding structures usually do not have lateral and vertical seismic-force-resistingsystems that are similar to buildings and shall be designed in accordance with these Provisions as
modified by this section and the specific references.
14.4.1 General
14.4.1.1 Loads. Loads and load distributions that are less severe than those determined in accordance
with these Provisions shall not be used.
14.4.1.2 Redundancy. The redundancy factor, , shall be permitted to be taken as 1.
14.4.2 Earth retaining structures. This section applies to all earth retaining walls. The applied
seismic forces shall be based on the recommendations in a geotechnical report prepared by a registered
design professional in accordance with Sec. 7.5.1.
14.4.3 Stacks and chimneys. Stacks and chimneys are permitted to be either lined or unlined, and
shall be constructed of concrete, steel, or masonry.
Steel stacks, concrete stacks, steel chimneys, concrete chimneys, and liners shall be designed to resist
seismic lateral forces determined from a substantiated analysis using approved standards. Interaction of
the stack or chimney with the liners shall be considered. A minimum separation shall be provided
between the liner and chimney equal to Cd times the calculated differential lateral drift.
14.4.4 Amusement structures. Amusement structures are permanently fixed structures constructed
primarily for the conveyance and entertainment of people. Such structures shall be designed to resist
seismic lateral forces determined from a substantiated analysis using approved standards.
14.4.5 Special hydraulic structures. Special hydraulic structures are structures that are within liquidcontaining structures and are exposed to liquids on both wall surfaces at the same head elevation under
normal operating conditions. Under earthquake excitation, such structures are subjected to out-of-plane
forces which arise due to differential hydrodynamic pressures. Special hydraulic structures include
separation walls, baffle walls, weirs, and other similar structures.
Special hydraulic structures shall be designed for out-of-phase movement of the fluid. Unbalanced
forces from the motion of the liquid must be applied simultaneously in front of and behind these
elements.
244

Structures subject to hydrodynamic pressures induced by earthquakes shall be designed for rigid body
and sloshing liquid forces and their own inertia force. The height of sloshing shall be determined and
compared to the freeboard height of the structure.
Interior elements, such as baffles or roof supports, also shall be designed for the effects of unbalanced
forces and sloshing.
14.4.6 Secondary containment systems. Secondary containment systems, such as impoundment dikes
and walls, shall meet the requirements of the applicable standards for tanks and vessels and any
additional requirements imposed by the authority having jurisdiction.
Secondary containment systems shall be designed to withstand the effects of a maximum considered
earthquake when empty and a maximum considered earthquake when full, including all hydrodynamic
forces.
Sloshing of the liquid within the secondary containment area shall be considered in determining the
height of the impound. The freeboard provided shall not be less than the sloshing height, s, determined
using Eq. 14.4-9. For circular impoundment dikes, D shall be the diameter of the impoundment. For
rectangular impoundment dikes, D shall be the longer horizontal plan dimension.
14.4.7 Tanks and vessels. This section applies to all tanks, vessels, bins, silos, and similar containers
storing liquids, gases, or granular solids supported at the base (hereinafter referred to as tanks and
vessels). Tanks and vessels covered herein include those constructed of reinforced concrete,
prestressed concrete, steel, and fiber-reinforced plastic materials. The supports and attachments for
tanks supported on elevated levels in buildings shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 6.
14.4.7.1 Design basis. Tanks and vessels storing liquids, gases, or granular solids shall satisfy the
analysis and design requirements set forth in the applicable references as indicated in Table 14.1-1 and
the additional requirements of these Provisions including the following:
1. Damping for the convective (sloshing) force component shall be taken as 0.5 percent unless
otherwise define in an adopted reference or other approved standard.
2. Impulsive and convective components may be combined by taking the square root of the sum of the
squares of the components.
3. Vertical earthquake effects shall be considered in accordance with the applicable approved standard.
If the approved standard permits the user the option of including or excluding the vertical
earthquake effects, to comply with these Provisions, they shall be included. For tanks and vessels
not covered by an approved standard, the forces due to the vertical acceleration shall be defined as
follows:
a. Hydrodynamic vertical and lateral forces in tank walls: The increase in hydrostatic
pressures due to the vertical excitation of the contained liquid shall correspond to an
effective increase in density, L, of the stored liquid equal to 0.2SDS L.
b. Hydrodynamic hoop forces in cylindrical tank walls: In a cylindrical tank wall, the hoop
force per unit height, Nh, at level y from the base, associated with the vertical excitation of
the contained liquid, shall be computed in accordance with Eq. 14.4-1
N h = 0.2 S DS L ( H L y )( D i 2 ) .
(14.4-1)
where:
Di = inside tank diameter (ft)
HL = liquid height inside the tank (ft).
y = distance from base of the tank to level being investigated (ft).
245

L = unit weight of stored liquid (lb/ft3)
c. Vertical inertia forces in cylindrical and rectangular tank walls: Vertical inertia forces
associated with the vertical acceleration of the structure itself shall be taken equal to
0.2SDS W.
14.4.7.2 Strength and ductility. Structural components and members that are part of the lateral
support system shall be designed to provide the following:
1. Connections and attachments for anchorage and other seismic-force-resisting components shall be
designed to develop the lesser of the yield strength of the anchor or 0 times the calculated element
design load.
2. Penetrations, manholes, and openings in shell components shall be designed to maintain the strength
and stability of the shell to carry tensile and compressive membrane shell forces.
3. Support towers for tanks and vessels with irregular bracing, unbraced panels, asymmetric bracing,
or concentrated masses shall be designed using the provisions of Sec. 4.3.2 for irregular structures.
Support towers using chevron or eccentric braced framing shall satisfy the appropriate requirements
of these Provisions. Support towers using tension only bracing shall be designed such that the full
cross section of the tension element can yield during overload conditions.
4. Compression struts that resist the reaction forces from tension braces shall be designed to resist the
lesser of the yield strength of the brace (AgFy), or 0 times the calculated tension load in the brace.
5. The vessel stiffness relative to the support system (foundation, support tower, skirt, etc.) shall be
considered in determining forces in the vessel, the resisting components, and the connections.
6. For concrete liquid-containing structures, system ductility and energy dissipation under unfactored
loads shall not be allowed to be achieved by inelastic deformations to such a degree as to jeopardize
the serviceability of the structure. Stiffness degradation and energy dissipation shall be allowed to
be obtained either through limited microcracking, or by means of lateral-force resistance
mechanisms that dissipate energy without damaging the structure.
14.4.7.3 Flexibility of piping attachments. Design of piping systems connected to tanks and vessels
shall consider the potential movement of the connection points during earthquakes and provide
sufficient flexibility to avoid release of the product by failure of the piping system. The piping system
and supports shall be designed so as not to impart significant mechanical loading on the attachment to
the tank or vessel shell. Local loads at piping connections shall be considered in the design of the tank
or vessel shell. Mechanical devices which add flexibility, such as bellows, expansion joints, and other
flexible apparatus, may be used where they are designed for seismic displacements and defined
operating pressure.
Unless otherwise calculated, the minimum displacements in Table 14.4-1 shall be assumed. For
attachment points located above the support or foundation elevation, the displacements in Table 14.4-1
shall be increased to account for drift of the tank or vessel.
Table 14.4-1 Minimum Design Displacements for Piping Attachments
Condition
Mechanically-anchored tanks and vessels:

Upward vertical displacement relative to support or foundation
Downward vertical displacement relative to support or foundation
Range of displacement (radial and tangential) relative to support or foundation:
Self-anchored tanks and vessels (at grade):
Upward vertical displacement relative to support or foundation
246
Displacement
(in.)
1
0.5
0.5

1
4
If designed in accordance with an adopted reference.

Anchorage ratio less than or equal to 0.785 (indicates no uplift):
Anchorage ratio greater than 0.785 (indicates uplift):
If designed for seismic loads in accordance with these Provisions but not
covered by an adopted reference:
For tanks and vessels with a diameter less than 40 ft:
For tanks and vessels with a diameter equal to or greater than 40 ft:
Downward vertical displacement relative to support of foundation
For tanks with a ringwall/mat foundation:
For tanks with a berm foundation:
Range of horizontal displacement (radial and tangential) relative to support or
foundation
8
12
0.5
1
2
The anchorage ratio, J, for self-anchored tanks is defined as:
J=
M rw
D (wt + wa )
(14.4-2)
Where:
wt =
Ws
+ wrs
D
wrs
= roof load acting on the shell in pounds per foot. Only permanent roof loads shall be
included. Roof live load shall not be included.
wa = weight of annular plate participating

Mrw = the ringwall overturning moment due to the seismic design loads
D
= tank diameter
J
anchorage ratio
J < 0.785
0.785 < J <1.54

J > 1.54
Anchorage Ratio
Criteria
No uplift under the design seismic overturning moment. The tank is self
anchored.
Tank is uplifting, but the tank is stable for the design load providing the shell
compression requirements are satisfied. Tank is self-anchored.
Tank is not stable and cannot be self-anchored for the design load. Modify
annular plate if L < 0.035D is not controlling or add mechanical anchors.
Where the elastic deformations are calculated, the minimum design displacements for piping
attachments shall be the calculated displacements at the point of attachment increased by the
amplification factor Cd.
The values given in Table 14.4-1 do not include the influence of relative movements of the foundation
and piping anchorage points due to foundation movements (such as settlement or seismic
displacements). The effects of foundation movements shall be included in the design of the piping
247

system design, including the determination of the mechanical loading on the tank or vessel
consideration of the total displacement capacity of the mechanical devices intended to add flexibility.
14.4.7.4 Anchorage. Tanks and vessels at grade are permitted to be designed without anchorage where
they meet the requirements for unanchored tanks in approved standards. Tanks and vessels supported
above grade on structural towers or building structures shall be anchored to the supporting structure.
The following special detailing requirements shall apply to steel tank anchor bolts in seismic regions
where SDS is greater than 0.5, or where the structure is assigned to Seismic Use Group III.
1. Hooked anchor bolts (L- or J-shaped embedded bolts) or other anchorage systems based solely on
bond or mechanical friction shall not be used where SDS is greater than 0.33. Post-installed anchors
may be used provided that testing validates their ability to develop the yield load in the anchor when
subjected to cyclic loads in cracked concrete.
2. Where anchorage is required, the anchor embedment into the foundation shall be designed to
develop the minimum specified yield strength of the anchor.
14.4.7.5 Ground-supported storage tanks for liquids
14.4.7.5.1 Seismic forces. Ground-supported, flat bottom tanks storing liquids shall be designed to
resist the seismic forces calculated using one of the following procedures:
1. The base shear and overturning moment calculated in accordance with Sec. 14.2.7 of these
Provisions assuming the tank and all its contents are a rigid mass system.
2. Tanks or vessels assigned to Seismic Use Group III or with a diameter greater than 20 ft shall be
designed considering the hydrodynamic pressures of the liquid in determining the equivalent lateral
forces and lateral force distribution in accordance with the appropriate references listed in Table
14.1-1 and Sec. 14.4.7 of these Provisions.
3. The force and displacement provisions of Sec 5.2 of these Provisions.
The design of tanks storing liquids shall consider the impulsive and convective (sloshing) effects and
consequences on the tank, foundation, and attached elements. The impulsive component corresponds to
the high frequency amplified response to the lateral ground motion of the tank roof, shell, and portion of
the contents that moves in unison with the shell. The convective component corresponds to the low
frequency amplified response of the contents in the fundamental sloshing mode. The following
definitions shall apply:
Tc =
natural period of the first (convective) mode of sloshing,
Ti =
fundamental period of the tank structure and impulsive component of the contents,
Tv =
natural period of vertical vibration of the liquid and tank structural system,
Vi =
base shear due to impulsive component from the weight of tank and its contents,
Vc =
base shear due to the convective component of the effective sloshing mass,
Wi =
impulsive weight (impulsive component of liquid, roof and equipment, shell, bottom and
internal components).
Wc =
the portion of the liquid weight sloshing.
The seismic base shear is the combination of the impulsive and convective components:
V = Vi 2 + Vc2
(14.4-3)
where:
Vi =
248
S ai
Wi
R
(14.4-4)
Vc =
S ac
Wc
Rc
(14.4-5)
where
Rc =
the force reduction factor for the convective force = 1.5
Sai =
the spectral acceleration, in terms of the acceleration due to gravity, including the site impulsive
components at period Ti and assuming 5 percent damping.
For Ti Ts , S ai = S DS .
(14.4-6)
S D1
Ti
(14.4-7)
For Ti > Ts , Sai =
Note: Where an adopted reference or other approved standard is used in which the spectral
acceleration for the tank shell and the impulsive component of the liquid is independent of
Ti, Sai shall be taken equal to SDS, for all cases.
Sac =
the spectral acceleration of the sloshing liquid based on the sloshing period Tc and assuming 0.5
percent damping.
For Tc 4.0 sec, Sac =
1.5S D1
S DS
Tc
For Tc > 4.0 sec, Sac =
6S D1
Tc2
(14.4-8)
(14.4-9)
The natural period of the first (convective) mode of sloshing shall be determined using Eq. 14.4-10 as
follows:
Tc = 2
D
3.68 H
3.68 g tanh
(14.4-10)
where D = the tank diameter, H = liquid height, and g = the acceleration due to gravity.
The general design response spectra for ground-supported liquid storage tanks is shown in Figure 14.41.
249
S1DS
S ac =
1.5S D1
T
Sai =
S D1
S D1
T
S ac =
T0
TS
1.0
1
4.0
4
6 S D1
T2
Period, T (sec)
Figure 14.4-1 Design Response Spectra for Ground-supported Liquid Storage Tanks
14.4.7.5.2 Distribution of hydrodynamic and inertia forces. Unless otherwise required by the
appropriate reference in Table 14.1-1, the method given ACI 350.3 may be used to determine the
vertical and horizontal distribution of the hydrodynamic and inertia forces on the walls of circular and
rectangular tanks.
14.4.7.5.3 Freeboard. Sloshing of the stored liquid shall be taken into account in the seismic design of
tanks and vessels in accordance with the following provisions:
1.
The height of the sloshing wave, s, shall be computed using Eq. 14.4-11 as follows:
s = 0.5DiISac
(14.4-11)
For cylindrical tanks, Di shall be the inside diameter of the tank; for rectangular tanks, the term
Di shall be replaced by the longer longitudinal plan dimension of the tank, L.
2. The effects of sloshing shall be accommodated by means of one of the following:
- A minimum freeboard in accordance with Table 14.4-2.
- A roof and supporting structure designed to contain the sloshing liquid in accordance with
subsection 3 below.
- For open-top tanks or vessels only, an overflow spillway around the tank or vessel perimeter.
3. If sloshing is restricted because the freeboard provided is less than the computed sloshing height, the
roof in the vicinity of the roof-to-wall joint shall be permitted to be designed for an equivalent
hydrostatic head equal to the computed sloshing height less the freeboard provided.
In addition, the design of the tank shall take into account the fact that a portion of the confined
convective (sloshing) mass becomes part of the impulsive mass in proportion to the degree of
confinement.
250

Table 14.4-2 Minimum Required Freeboard a
Value of SDS
Seismic Use Group

I
II
III
0.167 SDS <0.33
0.33 SDS < 0.50
0.7s
0.7s
SDS < 0.167
0.50 SDS
The noted freeboard is required unless one of the following conditions is satisfied:
1. Secondary containment in accordance with Sec. 14.4.6 is provided to control the product spill.
2. The roof and supporting structure are designed to contain the sloshing liquid.
b
No minimum freeboard is required.
14.4.7.5.4 Equipment and attached piping. Equipment, piping, and walkways or other appurtenances
attached to the structure shall be designed to accommodate the displacements imposed by seismic
forces. For piping attachments, see Sec. 14.4.7.3.
14.4.7.5.5 Internal components. The attachments of internal equipment and accessories that are
attached to the primary liquid or pressure retaining shell or bottom, or provide structural support for
major components (such as a column supporting the roof rafters) shall be designed for the lateral loads
due to the sloshing liquid in addition to the inertial forces.
14.4.7.5.6 Sliding resistance. The transfer of the total lateral shear force between the tank or vessel
and the subgrade shall be considered as follows:
1. For unanchored, flat-bottom steel tanks, the overall horizontal seismic shear force shall be resisted
by friction between the tank bottom and the foundation or subgrade. Unanchored storage tanks
must be designed such that sliding will not occur when the tank is full of stored product. The
maximum calculated seismic base shear, V, shall not exceed N tan(30E).
N shall be determined using the effective weight of the tank, roof, and contents, after reduction for
vertical earthquake effects. Values of the friction factor lower than tan(30E) should be used if the
condition at the bottom of the tank (such as a leak detection membrane beneath the bottom with a
lower friction factor, smooth bottoms, etc.) is not consistent with such a friction value.
2. No additional lateral anchorage is required for anchored steel tanks designed in accordance with
approved standards.
3. The lateral shear transfer behavior for special tank configurations (such as shovel bottoms, highly
crowned tank bottoms, or tanks on grillage) can be unique and is beyond the scope of these
Provisions.
14.4.7.5.7 Local shear transfer. Local transfer of the shear from the roof to the wall and for the wall
of the tank into the base shall be considered. For cylindrical tanks and vessels, the peak local tangential
shear per unit length shall be calculated using Eq. 14.4-12 as follows:
Vmax =
2V
D
(14.4-12)
Shear transfer shall be accomplished as follows:

1. Tangential shear in flat-bottom steel tanks shall be transferred through the welded connection to the
steel bottom. This transfer mechanism is deemed acceptable where Sas is less than 1.0 and the tank
is designed in accordance with the approved standards.
251

2. For concrete tanks with a sliding base where the lateral shear is resisted by friction between the tank
wall and the base, the friction coefficient shall not exceed tan(30 degrees).
3. In fixed-base or hinged-base concrete tanks, the total horizontal seismic base shear is transferred to
the foundation by a combination of membrane (tangential) shear and radial shear. For anchored
flexible-base concrete tanks, the majority of the base shear is resisted by membrane (tangential)
shear through the anchoring system with only insignificant vertical bending in the wall. The
connection between the wall and floor shall be designed to resist the maximum tangential shear.
14.4.7.5.8 Pressure stability. For steel tanks, the internal pressure from the stored product stiffens thin
cylindrical shell structural elements subjected to membrane compression forces. This stiffening effect
may be considered in resisting seismically induced compressive forces if permitted by the approved
standard or the authority having jurisdiction.
14.4.7.5.9 Shell support. Steel tanks resting on concrete ring walls or slabs shall have a uniformly
supported annulus under the shell. Uniform support shall be provided by one of the following methods:
1. Shimming and grouting the annulus,

2. Using fiberboard or other suitable padding,
3. Using butt-welded bottom or annular plates resting directly on the foundation, or
4. Using closely spaced shims (without structural grout) provided that the localized bearing loads are
considered in the design of the tank wall and foundation so as to prevent local crippling and
spalling.
Anchored tanks shall be shimmed and grouted. Local buckling of the steel shell for the peak
compressive force due to operating loads and seismic overturning shall be considered.
14.4.7.5.10 Repair, alteration, or reconstruction. Repairs, modifications, or reconstruction (such as
cut-down and re-erection) of a tank or vessel shall comply with industry standard practice and these
Provisions. For welded steel tanks storing liquids, see API 653 and the adopted reference in Table
14.1-1. Tanks that are relocated shall be re-evaluated for the seismic loads for the new site and the
requirements of new construction in accordance with the appropriate approved standard and these
Provisions.
14.4.7.6 Water and water treatment tanks and vessels
14.4.7.6.1 Welded steel. Welded steel water storage tanks and vessels shall be designed in accordance
with the seismic requirements of AWWA D100 except that the sloshing height shall be calculated in
accordance with Sec 14.4.7.5.3 (rather than using Eq. 13-26 of AWWA D100) and design input forces
shall be modified as follows:
1. The impulsive and convective components of the base shear for allowable stress design procedures
shall be determined using the following equations, which shall be substituted into Eq. 13-4 and 13-8
of AWWA D100:
For Ts < Tc < 4.0 sec, Vi =
For Tc 4.0 sec, Vc =
S DS I
S I
Wi and Vc = DS
1.4 R
1.4 RTc
6S DS I Ts
Wc
1.4 R Tc2
2. In Eq. 13-4, 13-8, and 13-20 through 13-25 of AWWA D100, the following changes shall be made:
S DS I
ZI
shall be replaced by
, and
Rw
2.5 (1.4 R )
the term S shall be replaced by the term B.

252

Where SDS and TS, are determined in accordance with Chapter 3, R is determined in accordance with
Sec. 14.2.4, and B is determined as follows:
For Ts < Tc < 4.0 sec, B = 1.11Ts

For Tc 4.0 sec, B = 1.25Ts
Thus, Eq. 13-4 of AWWA D100, for base shear at the bottom of the tank shell, becomes
VACT =
18S DS I
0.14 (Ws + Wr + W f + W1 ) + BC1W2
2.5 (1.4 R )
Alternatively,
For Ts < Tc < 4.0 sec, VACT =
For Ts 4.0 sec, VACT =
S DS I
Ts
(Ws + Wr + W f + W1 ) + 1.5 W2
Tc
1.4 R
S DS I
Ts
(Ws + Wr + W f + W1 ) + 6 2 W2
1.4 R
Tc
Similarly, Eq. 13-8 of AWWA D100, for overturning moment applied to the bottom of the tank shell,
becomes
M=
18S DS I
0.14 (Ws X s + Wr H t + W1 X 1 ) + BC1W2 X 2
2.5 (1.4 R )
14.4.7.6.2 Bolted steel. Bolted steel water storage structures shall be designed in accordance with the
seismic requirements of AWWA D103 except that the design input forces shall be modified in the same
manner as shown in Sec 14.4.7.6.1 of these Provisions.
14.4.7.6.3 Reinforced and prestressed concrete. Reinforced and prestressed concrete tanks shall be
designed in accordance with the seismic requirements of ACI 350.3 except that the design input forces
shall be modified as follows:
1. For Ti < T0 or Ti > Ts, the following terms shall be replaced by
Sa I
:
1.4 R
For shear and overturning moment equations of AWWA D110 and AWWA D115,
For base shear and overturning moment equations of ACI 350.3,

2. For To Ti Ts,
ZIC1
, and
R1
ZISC1
.
Ri
ZICi
ZISCi
S I
and
shall be replaced by DS .
1.4 R
R1
Ri
3. For all values of Tc (or Tw),
ZICc
ZISCc
6 S DS I
6 S D1 I
or
Ts .
and
shall be replaced by
2
Rc
Rc
Tc
Tc2
Thus, for To Ti Ts,

S DS I
(Ws + WR + WI ) , and
1.4 R
6S I T
Eq. 4-2 of AWWA D110 becomes Vc = DS s2 Wc .
1.4 R Tc
Where Sa, SD1, SDS, T0, and Ts are determined in accordance with Chapter 3 of these Provisions.
Eq. 4-1 of AWWA D110 becomes VI =
253

14.4.7.7 Petrochemical and industrial tanks and vessels storing liquids
14.4.7.7.1 Welded steel. Welded steel petrochemical and industrial tanks and vessels storing liquids
shall be designed in accordance with the seismic requirements of API 650 and API 620 except that the
design input forces shall be modified as indicated in this section.
Where using the equations in Sec. E.3 of API 650, the following substitutions shall be made in the
equation for overturning moment M:
For To < Ti Ts 4.0 sec, M = S DS I 0.24 (Ws X s + Wt H t + W1 X 1 ) + 0.80C2TsW2 X 2 , and
C2 =
0.75S
and S = 1.0
Tc
For Tc > 4.0 sec, M = S DS I 0.24 (Ws X s + Wt H t + W1 X 1 ) + 0.71C2TsW2 X 2 , and

C2 =
3.375S
and S = 1.0 .
Tc2
Where SDS and Ts are determined in accordance with Chapter 3 of these Provisions.
14.4.7.7.2 Bolted steel. Bolted steel tanks used for storage of production liquids are designed in
accordance with API 12B, which covers the material, design, and erection requirements for vertical,
cylindrical, above-ground, bolted tanks in nominal capacities of 100 to 10,000 barrels for production
service. Unless required by the authority having jurisdiction, these temporary structures need not be
designed for seismic loads. If design for seismic load is required, the loads may be adjusted for the
temporary nature of the anticipated service life.
14.4.7.7.3 Reinforced and prestressed concrete. Reinforced concrete tanks for the storage of
petrochemical and industrial liquids shall be designed in accordance with the force requirements of
Sec. 14.4.7.6.3.
14.4.7.8 Ground-supported storage tanks for granular materials
14.4.7.8.1 Design considerations. In determining the effective mass and load paths, consideration
shall be given to the intergranular behavior of the material as follows:
1. Increased lateral pressure (and the resulting hoop stress) due to loss of the intergranular friction of
the material during the seismic shaking,
2. Increased hoop stresses resulting from temperature changes in the shell after the material has been
compacted, and
3. Intergranular friction that can transfer seismic shear directly to the foundation.
14.4.7.8.2 Lateral force determination. The lateral forces for tanks and vessels storing granular
materials at grade shall be determined using the requirements and accelerations for short period
structures.
14.4.7.8.3 Force distribution to shell and foundation
14.4.7.8.3.1 Increased lateral pressure. The increase in lateral pressure on the tank wall shall be
added to the static design lateral pressure but shall not be used in the determination of pressure stability
effects on the axial buckling strength of the tank shell.
14.4.7.8.3.2 Effective mass. A portion of a stored granular mass will act with the shell (the effective
mass). The effective mass is related to the physical characteristics of the product, the height-to-diameter
(H/D) ratio of the tank and the intensity of the seismic event. The effective mass shall be used to
determine the shear and overturning loads resisted by the tank.
254

14.4.7.8.3.3 Effective density. The effective density factor (that part of the total stored mass of
product that is accelerated by the seismic event) shall be determined in accordance ACI 313.
14.4.7.8.3.4 Lateral sliding. For granular storage tanks that have a steel bottom and are supported
such that friction at the bottom to foundation interface can resist lateral shear loads, no additional
anchorage to prevent sliding is required. For tanks without steel bottoms (that is, where the material
rests directly on the foundation), shear anchorage shall be provided to prevent sliding.
14.4.7.8.3.5 Combined anchorage systems. If separate anchorage systems are used to prevent
overturning and sliding, the relative stiffness of the systems shall be considered in determining the load
distribution.
14.4.7.8.4 Welded steel. Welded steel granular storage structures shall be designed for seismic forces
determined in accordance with these Provisions. Component allowable stresses and materials shall be
in accordance with AWWA D100, except that the allowable circumferential membrane stresses and
material requirements in API 650 shall apply.
14.4.7.8.5 Bolted steel. Bolted steel granular storage structures shall be designed for seismic forces
determined in accordance with these Provisions. Component allowable stresses and materials shall be
in accordance with AWWA D103.
14.4.7.8.6 Reinforced and prestressed concrete. Reinforced and prestressed concrete structures for
the storage of granular materials shall be designed for seismic forces determined in accordance with
these Provisions and shall satisfy the requirements of ACI 313.
14.4.7.9 Elevated tanks and vessels for liquids and granular materials. This section applies to
tanks, vessels, bins, and hoppers that are elevated above grade where the supporting tower is an integral
part of the structure, or where the primary function of the tower is to support the tank or vessel. Tanks
and vessels that are supported within buildings or are incidental to the primary function of the tower are
considered mechanical equipment and shall be designed in accordance with Chapter 6 of these
Provisions.
Elevated tanks shall be designed to satisfy the force and displacement requirements of the applicable
approved standard, or these Provisions.
14.4.7.9.1 Effective mass. The design of the supporting tower or pedestal, anchorage, and foundation
for seismic overturning shall assume the material stored is a rigid mass acting at the volumetric center of
gravity. The effects of fluid-structure interaction may be considered in determining the forces,
effective period, and mass centroids of the system if the following requirements are met:
1. The sloshing period, Tc is greater than 3T where T is the natural period of the tank (with the contents
assumed to be rigid) and supporting structure.
2. The sloshing mechanism (percentage of convective mass and centroid) is determined for the specific
configuration of the container by detailed fluid-structure interaction analysis or testing.
3. Soil-structure interaction in accordance with Sec. 5.6 may be included in determining T.
14.4.7.9.2 P-delta effects. The lateral drift of the elevated tank shall be considered as follows:
1. For evaluating the additional load in the support structure due to P-delta effects, the design drift
shall be computed as the elastic lateral displacement at the center of gravity of the stored mass times
the deflection amplification factor, Cd.
2. The base of the tank shall be assumed to be fixed rotationally and laterally.
3. Deflections due to bending, axial tension, or compression shall be considered. For pedestal tanks
with a height-to-diameter ratio less than 5, shear deformations of the pedestal shall be considered.
4. The dead load effects of roof-mounted equipment or platforms shall be included in the analysis.
255

5. If constructed within the plumbness tolerances specified in the approved standard, initial tilt need
not be considered in the P-delta analysis.
14.4.7.9.3 Transfer of lateral forces into support tower. For post-supported tanks and vessels that
are cross-braced:
1. The bracing shall be installed in such a manner as to provide uniform resistance to the lateral load
(such as pre-tensioning or tuning to attain equal sag).
2. The additional load in the brace due to the eccentricity between the post-to-tank attachment and the
line of action of the bracing shall be included.
3. Eccentricity of compression strut lines of action with their attachment points shall be considered.
4. The connection of the post or leg with the foundation shall be designed to resist both the vertical
and lateral resultant from the yield load in the bracing assuming the direction of the lateral load is
oriented to produce the maximum lateral shear at the post-to-foundation interface. Where multiple
rods are connected to the same location, the anchorage shall be designed to resist the concurrent
tensile loads in the braces.
14.4.7.9.4 Evaluation of structures sensitive to buckling failure. Shell structures that support
substantial loads may exhibit a primary mode of failure from localized or general buckling of the
support pedestal or skirt during seismic loads. Such structures may include single pedestal water
towers, skirt-supported process vessels, and similar single member towers. Where the structural
assessment concludes that buckling of the support is the governing primary mode of failure, structures
and components assigned to Seismic Use Group III shall be designed to resist the seismic forces as
follows:
1. The seismic response coefficient for this evaluation shall be determined in accordance with
Sec. 5.2.1.1 with R/I taken equal to 1.0. Soil-structure and fluid-structure interaction may be
included when determining the structural response. Vertical or orthogonal combinations need not
be considered.
2. The resistance of the structure or component shall be defined as the critical buckling resistance of
the element with a factor of safety taken equal to 1.0.
3. The anchorage and foundation shall be designed to resist the load determined in item 1. The
foundation shall be proportioned to provide a stability ratio of 1.2 for the overturning moment. The
maximum toe pressure under the foundation shall not exceed the lesser of the ultimate bearing
capacity or 3 times the allowable bearing capacity. All structural components and elements of the
foundation shall be designed to resist the combined loads with a load factor of 1.0 on all loads,
including dead load, live load, and earthquake load. Anchors shall be permitted to yield.
14.4.7.9.5 Welded steel. Welded steel elevated water storage structures shall be designed and detailed
in accordance with the seismic requirements of AWWA D100 and these Provisions except that in using
Eq. 13-1 and 13-3 of AWWA D100 S shall be taken equal to 1.0 and the term shall be replaced by the
following:
For T < Ts,
S DS I
,
1.4 R
For Ts T 4.0 sec,
For T > 4.0 sec,
S D1 I
, and
T (1.4 R )
S D1 I
.
T (1.4 R )
2
14.4.7.9.5.1 Analysis procedures. The equivalent lateral force procedure may be used. A more
rigorous analysis shall be permitted. Analysis of single pedestal structures shall be based on a fixed-
256

base, single degree-of-freedom model. All mass, including the contents, shall be considered rigid unless
the sloshing mechanism (percentage of convective mass and centroid) is determined for the specific
configuration of the container by detailed fluid-structure interaction analysis or testing. Soil-structure
interaction may be included.
14.4.7.9.5.2 Structure period. The fundamental period of vibration of the structure shall be
established using the structural properties and deformational characteristics of the resisting elements in a
substantiated analysis. The period used to calculate the seismic response coefficient shall not exceed
4.0 seconds. See AWWA D100 for guidance on computing the fundamental period of cross-braced
structures.
14.4.7.9.6 Concrete pedestal (composite) tanks. Concrete pedestal (composite) elevated water
storage structures shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of ACI 371 except that the
design input forces shall be modified as follows:
1. In Eq. 4-8a of ACI 371,

For Ts T 4.0 sec,
1.2Cv
S I
shall be replaced by D1 , and
23
TR
RT
1.2Cv
4S I
shall be replaced by 2D1 .
23
RT
T R
2.5Ca
S I
shall be replaced by DS .
2. In Eq. 4-8b of ACI 371,
R
R
For T > 4.0 sec,
3. In Eq. 4-9 of ACI 371, 0.5Ca shall be replaced by 0.2SDS.

14.4.7.9.6.1 Analysis procedures. The equivalent lateral force procedure may be used for all
structures and shall be based on a fixed-base, single-degree-of-freedom model. All mass, including that
of the contents, shall be considered rigid unless the sloshing mechanism (percentage of convective mass
and centroid) is determined for the specific configuration of the container by detailed fluid-structure
interaction analysis or testing. Soil-structure interaction may be included. A more rigorous analysis is
permitted.
14.4.7.9.6.2 Structure period. The fundamental period of vibration of the structure shall be
established using the uncracked structural properties and deformational characteristics of the resisting
elements in a properly substantiated analysis. The period used to calculate the seismic response
coefficient shall not exceed 2.5 seconds.
14.4.7.10 Boilers and pressure vessels. Supports and attachments for boilers and pressure vessels
shall be designed to satisfy the requirements of Chapter 6 and the additional requirements of this
section. Boilers and pressure vessels assigned to Seismic Use Group II or III shall be designed to satisfy
the force and displacement requirements of Chapter 6.
14.4.7.10.1 ASME boilers and pressure vessels. Boilers and pressure vessels designed and
constructed in accordance with ASME BPV shall be deemed to satisfy the seismic force and relative
displacement requirements of these Provisions provided that the forces and displacements defined in
Chapter 6 are used in lieu of the seismic forces and displacements defined in ASME BPV.
14.4.7.10.2 Attachments of internal equipment and refractory. Attachments to the pressure
boundary for internal and external ancillary components (refractory, cyclones, trays, etc.) shall be
designed to resist the seismic forces in these Provisions to safeguard against rupture of the pressure
boundary. Alternatively, the element attached to the boiler or pressure vessel may be designed to fail
prior to damaging the pressure boundary provided that the pressure boundary is not jeopardized as a
consequence of the failure. For boilers or vessels containing liquids, the effect of sloshing on the
internal equipment shall be considered if the equipment can damage the pressure boundary.
257

14.4.7.10.3 Coupling of vessel and support structure. Where the mass of the operating vessel or
vessels supported is greater than 25 percent of the total mass of the combined system, the coupling of
the masses shall be considered. Coupling with adjacent, connected structures such as multiple towers
shall be considered if the structures are interconnected with elements that will transfer loads from one
structure to the other.
14.4.7.10.4 Effective mass. Fluid-structure interaction (sloshing) shall be considered in determining
the effective mass of the stored material provided that sufficient liquid surface exists for sloshing to
occur and the sloshing period, Tc, is greater than 3T. Changes to or variations in material density with
pressure and temperature shall be considered.
14.4.7.10.5 Other boilers and pressure vessels. Boilers and pressure vessels that are assigned to
Seismic Use Group III but are not designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of
ASME BPV shall satisfy the following requirements:
1. Provision shall be made to eliminate seismic impact for components vulnerable to impact, for
components constructed of nonductile materials, and in cases where material ductility will be
reduced due to service conditions (such as low temperature applications).
2. The design strength for seismic loads in combination with other service loads and appropriate
environmental effects (such as corrosion) shall be based on the material properties indicated in
Table 14.4-3.
Table 14.4-3 Design Material Properties

Design material strength
Material type
Minimum
ratio of Fu/Fy
Vessel
Threaded Connection a
Ductile (such as steel, aluminum,

or copper)
1.33 b
0.9Fy
0.7Fy
Semi-ductile
1.2 c
0.7Fy
0.5Fy
Nonductile (such as cast iron,

ceramics, or fiberglass)
NA
0.25Fu
0.20Fu
Threaded connection to vessel or support system.

Minimum 20 percent elongation per the appropriate ASTM material specification.
c
Minimum 15 percent elongation per the appropriate ASTM material specification.
b
14.4.7.10.6 Supports and attachments for boilers and pressure vessels. Supports for boilers and
pressure vessels and attachments to the pressure boundary shall satisfy the following requirements:
1. Supports and attachments transferring seismic loads shall be constructed of ductile materials
suitable for the intended application and environmental conditions.
2. Seismic anchorages embedded in concrete shall be ductile and detailed for cyclic loads.
3. Seismic supports and attachments to structures shall be designed and constructed so that the support
or attachment remains ductile throughout the range of reversing seismic lateral loads and
displacements.
4. In the design of vessel attachments, consideration shall be given to the potential effects on the vessel
and the support due to uneven vertical reactions based on variations in relative stiffness of the
support members, dissimilar details, non-uniform shimming, or irregular supports and uneven
distribution of lateral forces based on the relative distribution of the resisting elements, the behavior
of the connection details, and vessel shear distribution.
258

The requirements of Sec. 14.4.7.9.4 shall apply.
14.4.7.11 Liquid and gas spheres. Supports and attachments for liquid and gas spheres shall be
designed to satisfy the requirements of Chapter 6 and the additional requirements of this section.
Spheres assigned to Seismic Use Group II or III shall be designed to satisfy the force and displacement
requirements of Chapter 6.
14.4.7.11.1 ASME spheres. Spheres designed and constructed in accordance with Division VIII of
ASME BPV shall be deemed to satisfy the seismic force and relative displacement requirements of these
Provisions provided that the forces and displacements defined in Chapter 6 are used in lieu of the
seismic forces and displacements defined in ASME BPV.
14.4.7.11.2 Attachments of internal equipment and refractory. Attachments to the pressure or
liquid boundary for internal and external ancillary components (refractory, cyclones, trays, etc.) shall be
designed to resist the seismic forces in these Provisions to safeguard against rupture of the pressure
boundary. Alternatively, the element attached to the sphere may be designed to fail prior to damaging
the pressure or liquid boundary provided that the pressure boundary is not jeopardized as a consequence
of the failure. For spheres containing liquids, the effect of sloshing on the internal equipment shall be
considered if the equipment can damage the pressure boundary.
14.4.7.11.3 Effective mass. Fluid-structure interaction (sloshing) shall be considered in determining
the effective mass of the stored material provided that sufficient liquid surface exists for sloshing to
occur and the sloshing period, Tc, is greater than 3T. Changes to or variations in fluid density shall be
considered.
14.4.7.11.4 Post and rod supported. For post supported spheres that are cross-braced:
1. The requirements of Sec. 14.4.7.9.3 shall apply.

2. The stiffening effect (reduction in lateral drift) of pre-tensioning of the bracing shall be considered
in determining the natural period.
3. The slenderness and local buckling of the posts shall be considered.
4. Local buckling of the sphere shell at the post attachment shall be considered.
5. For spheres storing liquids, bracing connections shall be designed and constructed to develop the
minimum published yield strength of the brace. For spheres storing gas vapors only, bracing
connections shall be designed for 0 times the maximum design load in the brace. Lateral bracing
connections directly attached to the pressure or liquid boundary are prohibited.
14.4.7.11.5 Skirt supported. For skirt supported spheres, the following requirements shall apply:
1. The requirements of Section 14.4.7.9.4 shall apply.

2. The local buckling of the skirt under compressive membrane forces due to axial load and bending
moments shall be considered.
3. Penetrations of the skirt support (manholes, piping, etc.) shall be designed and constructed so as to
maintain the strength of the skirt without penetrations.
14.4.7.12 Refrigerated gas liquid storage tanks and vessels. The seismic design of the tanks and
facilities for the storage of liquefied hydrocarbons and refrigerated liquids is beyond the scope of this
section. The design of such tanks is addressed in part by various product and industry standards. See
Commentary Sec. 14.1.2.2.
Exception: Low-pressure, welded steel storage tanks for liquefied hydrocarbon gas (such as
LPG or butane) and refrigerated liquids (such as ammonia) may be designed in accordance
with the requirements of Sec. 14.4.7.7 and API 620.
259

14.4.7.13 Horizontal, saddle-supported vessels for liquid or vapor storage. Horizontal vessels
supported on saddles shall be designed to satisfy the force and displacement requirements of Chapter
6.
14.4.7.13.1 Effective mass. Changes to or variations in material density shall be considered. The
design of the supports, saddles, anchorage, and foundation for seismic overturning shall assume the
material stored is a rigid mass acting at the volumetric center of gravity.
14.4.7.13.2 Vessel design. Unless a more rigorous analysis is performed:
1. A horizontal vessel with a length-to-diameter ratio of 6 or more may be assumed to be a simply

supported beam spanning between the saddles for the purposes of determining the natural period of
vibration and global bending moment.
2. For horizontal vessels with a length-to-diameter ratio of less than 6, the effects of deep beam
shear shall be considered where determining the fundamental period and stress distribution.
3. Local bending and buckling of the vessel shell at the saddle supports due to seismic load shall be
considered. The stabilizing effects of internal pressure shall not be considered to increase the
buckling resistance of the vessel shell.
4. If the vessel is a combination of liquid and gas storage, the vessel and supports shall be designed
both with and without gas pressure acting (assume piping has ruptured and pressure does not exist).
260
OTHER NONBUILDING STRUCTURES
PREFACE: This appendix is a resource document for future voluntary standards and model code
development. The guidelines contained in this appendix represent the current industry design
practice for these types of nonbuilding structures.
These sections are included here so that the design community can gain familiarity with the
concepts and update their standards. It is hoped that the various consensus design standards will be
updated to include the design and construction methodology presented in this appendix. Please
direct all feedback on this appendix to the BSSC.
A14.1 GENERAL
A14.1.1 Scope. This appendix includes design requirements for electrical transmission, substation, and
distribution structures, telecommunications towers, and buried structures and performance criteria for
tanks and vessels.
A14.1.2 References
IEEE 693 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Recommended Practices for Seismic
Design of Substations, Power Engineering Society, Piscataway, New Jersey, 1997.
A14.1.3 Definitions
Buried structures: Subgrade structures such as tanks, tunnels, and pipes.
A14.1.4 Notation
Cd
See Sec. 4.1.4.
CS
See Sec. 5.1.3.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
SD1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
See Sec. 5.1.3.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
261
A14.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A14.2.1 Buried structures. Buried structures that are assigned to Seismic Use Group II or III, or
warrant special seismic design as determined by the registered design professional, shall be identified in
the geotechnical report. Such buried structures shall be designed to resist minimum seismic lateral
forces and expected differential displacements determined from a properly substantiated analysis using
approved procedures.
A14.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA FOR TANKS AND VESSELS

Tanks and vessels shall be designed to meet the minimum post-earthquake performance criteria as
specified in Table A14.3-1. These criteria depend on the Seismic Use Group and content-related hazards
of the tanks and vessels being considered.
Table A14.3-1 Performance Criteria for Tanks and Vessels
Performance
Category a
Minimum Post-earthquake Performance
The structure shall be permitted to fail if the resulting spill does not pose a threat to the
public or to adjoining Category I, II or III structures.
II
The structure shall be permitted to sustain localized damage, including minor leaks,
if (a) such damage remains localized and does not propagate; and (b) the resulting
leakage does not pose a threat to the public or to adjoining Category I, II or III
structures.
III
The structure shall be permitted to sustain minor damage, and its operational systems
or components (valves and controls) shall be permitted to become inoperative, if (a)
the structure retains its ability to contain 100% of its contents; and (b) the damage is
not accompanied by and does not lead to leakage.
IVb
The structure shall be permitted to sustain minor damage provided that (a) it shall
retain its ability to contain 100% of its contents without leakage; and (b) its
operational systems or components shall remain fully operational.
Performance Categories I, II, and III correspond to the Seismic Use Groups defined in Sec. 1.2 and
tabulated in Table 14.2-1.
b
For tanks and vessels in Performance Category IV, an Importance Factor, I = 1.0 shall be used.
262
Chapter 15
STRUCTURES WITH DAMPING SYSTEMS
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Scope. Every structure with a damping system and every portion thereof shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with the requirements of these Provisions as modified by this Chapter.
Where damping devices are used across the isolation interface of a seismically isolated structure,
displacements, velocities, and acceleration shall be determined in accordance with Chapter 13.
15.1.2 Definitions
Damping device: A flexible structural element of the damping system that dissipates energy due to
relative motion of each end of the device. Damping devices include all pins, bolts, gusset plates, brace
extensions, and other components required to connect damping devices to the other elements of the
structure. Damping devices may be classified as either displacement-dependent or velocity-dependent,
or a combination thereof, and may be configured to act in either a linear or nonlinear manner.
Damping system: The collection of structural elements that includes all the individual damping
devices, all structural elements or bracing required to transfer forces from damping devices to the base
of the structure, and the structural elements required to transfer forces from damping devices to the
seismic-force-resisting system.
Design displacement: See Sec. 13.1.2.
Displacement-dependent damping device: The force response of a displacement-dependent damping
device is primarily a function of the relative displacement, between each end of the device. The
response is substantially independent of the relative velocity between each of the device, and/or the
excitation frequency.
Maximum displacement: See Sec. 13.1.2.
Seismic response coefficient: See Sec. 5.1.2.
Site Class: See Sec. 3.1.3.
Total design displacement: See Sec. 13.1.2.
Total maximum displacement: See Sec. 13.1.2.
263
Velocity-dependent damping device: The force-displacement relation for a velocity-dependent

damping device is primarily a function of the relative velocity between each end of the device, and may
also be a function of the relative displacement between each end of the device.
15.1.3 Notation
B1D
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to ml (m=1) and
period of structure equal to T1D.
B1E
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for the effective damping equal to I+V1 and
period equal to T1.
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to mM (m=1) and
period of structure equal to T1M.
B1M
BmD
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to ml and period
of structure equal to Tm.
BmM
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to mM and period
of structure equal to Tm.
BR
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to R and the
period of structure equal to TR.
BV+I
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to the sum of
viscous damping in the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of
interest, Vm (m = 1), plus inherent damping, l, and period of structure equal to T1.
Cd
See Sec. 4.1.4.
CmFD
Force coefficient as set forth in Table 15.7-1.
CmFV
Force coefficient as set forth in Table 15.7-2.
CS1
Seismic response coefficient of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the
direction of interest, Sec. 15.4.2.4 or Sec. 15.5.2.4 (m = 1).
CSm
Seismic response coefficient of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of
interest, Sec. 15.4.2.4 (m = 1) or Sec. 15.4.2.6 (m > 1).
CSR
Seismic response coefficient of the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of
interest, Sec. 15.5.2.8.
D1D
Fundamental mode design displacement at the center rigidity of the roof level of structure in the
direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.2.
D1M
Fundamental mode maximum displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the
structure in the direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.5.
DmD
Design displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the structure due to the mth
mode of vibration in the direction under consideration, Sec. 15.4.3.2.
DmM
Maximum displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the structure due to the mth
mode of vibration in the direction under consideration, Sec. 15.4.3.5.
DRD
Residual mode design displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the structure in
the direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.2.
DRM
Residual mode maximum displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the structure
in the direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.5.
DY
Displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the structure at the effective yield
point of the seismic-force-resisting system, Sec. 15.6.3.
264
Strucutres with Damping Systems
Eloop
See Sec. 13.1.3.
fi
Lateral force at Level i of the structure distributed approximately in accordance with Sec. 5.2.3,
Sec. 15.5.2.3.
Fi1
Inertial force at Level i (or mass point i) in the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in
the direction of interest, Sec. 15.5.2.9.
Fim
Inertial force at Level i (or mass point i) in the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the
direction of interest, Sec. 15.4.2.7.
FiR
Inertial force at Level i (or mass point i) in the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the
hi
See Sec. 5.1.3.
hr
Height of the structure above the base to the roof level, Sec. 15.5.2.3.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
qH
Hysteresis loop adjustment factor as determined in Sec. 15.6.2.2.1.
See Sec. 5.1.3.
QDSD
Force in an element of the damping system required to resist design seismic forces of
displacement-dependent damping devices, Sec. 15.7.3.3.
QE
See Sec. 4.1.4.
QmDSV Forces in an element of the damping system required to resist design seismic forces of velocitydependent damping devices due to the mth mode of vibration of structure in the direction of
QmSFRS Force in a element of the damping system equal to the design seismic force of the mth mode of
vibration of the seismic force resisting system in the direction of interest, 15.7.3.3.
R
See Sec. 4.1.4.
S1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SD1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SDS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SM1
See Sec. 3.1.4.
SMS
See Sec. 3.1.4.
T0
See Sec. 3.1.4.
T1
See Sec. 15.5.2.3.
T1D
Effective period, in seconds, of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure at the design
displacement in the direction under consideration, as prescribed by Sec. 15.4.2.5 or Sec.
15.5.2.5.
T1M
Effective period, in seconds, of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure at the
maximum displacement in the direction under consideration, as prescribed by Sec. 15.4.2.5 or
Sec. 15.5.2.5.
Tm
See Sec. 5.1.3.
TR
Period, in seconds, of the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the direction under
consideration, Sec. 15.5.2.7.
TS
See Sec. 3.1.4.

265

V
See Sec. 5.1.3.
Vm
Design value of the seismic base shear of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the
direction of interest, Sec. 5.3.4 or Sec. 15.4.2.2.
Vmin
Minimum allowable value of base shear permitted for design of the seismic-force-resisting
system of the structure in the direction of interest, Sec. 15.2.2.1.
VR
Design value of the seismic base shear of the residual mode of vibration of the structure in a
given direction, as determined in Sec. 15.5.2.6.
See Sec. 1.1.5.
W1
Effective fundamental mode seismic weight determined in accordance with Eq. 5.3-2 for m = 1.
WR
Effective residual mode seismic weight determined in accordance with Eq. 15.5-13.
wi
See Sec. 4.1.4.
wx
See Sec. 1.1.5.
Velocity exponent relating damping device force to damping device velocity.
mD
Total effective damping of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest
at the design displacement, Sec. 15.6.2.
mM
Total effective damping of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest
at the maximum displacement , Sec. 15.6.2.
HD
Component of effective damping of the structure in the direction of interest due to post-yield
hysteric behavior of the seismic-force-resisting system and elements of the damping system at
effective ductility demand D, Sec. 15.6.2.2.
HM
Component of effective damping of the structure in the direction of interest due to post-yield
hysteric behavior of the seismic-force-resisting system and elements of the damping system at
effective ductility demand, M, Sec. 15.6.2.2.
Component of effective damping of the structure due to the inherent dissipation of energy by
elements of the structure, at or just below the effective yield displacement of the seismic-forceresisting system, Sec. 15.6.2.1.
Total effective damping in the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of
interest, calculated in accordance with Sec. 15.6.2 (D =1.0 and M = 1.0).
Vm
Component of effective damping of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of
interest due to viscous dissipation of energy by the damping system, at or just below the
effective yield displacement of the seismic-force-resisting system, Sec. 15.6.2.3.
Elastic deflection of Level i of the structure due to applied lateral force, fi, Sec. 15.5.2.3.
i1D
Fundamental mode design earthquake deflection of Level i at the center of rigidity of the
iD
Total design earthquake deflection of Level i at the center of rigidity of the structure in the
direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.
iM
Total maximum earthquake deflection of Level i at the center of rigidity of the structure in the
direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.
iRD
Residual mode design earthquake deflection of Level i at the center of rigidity of the structure in
the direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.
266
im
Deflection of Level i in the mth mode of vibration at the center of rigidity of the structure in the
direction under consideration, Sec. 15.6.2.3.
1D
Design earthquake story drift due to the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the
Total design earthquake story drift of the structure in the direction of interest, Sec. 15.5.3.3.
Total maximum earthquake story drift of the structure in the direction of interest, Sec. 15.5.3.
mD
Design earthquake story drift due to the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of
RD
Design earthquake story drift due to the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the
Effective ductility demand on the seismic-force-resisting system in the direction of interest.
Effective ductility demand on the seismic-force-resisting system in the direction of interest due
to the design earthquake, Sec. 15.6.3.
Effective ductility demand on the seismic-force-resisting system in the direction of interest due
to the maximum considered earthquake, Sec. 15.6.3.
max
Maximum allowable effective ductility demand on the seismic-force-resisting system due to

design earthquake, Sec. 15.6.4.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
i1
Displacement amplitude at Level i of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the
direction of interest, normalized to unity at the roof level, Sec. 15.5.2.3.
iR
Displacement amplitude at Level i of the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the
direction of interest normalized to unity at the roof level, Sec. 15.5.2.7.
Participation factor of fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest,
Sec. 15.4.2.3 or Sec. 15.5.2.3 (m = 1).
Participation factor on the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest,
Sec. 15.4.2.3.
Participation factor of the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest,
Sec. 15.5.2.7.
See Sec. 4.1.4.
1D
Design earthquake story velocity due to the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in
the direction of interest, Sec. 15.5.3.4.
Total design earthquake story velocity of the structure in the direction of interest, Sec. 15.4.3.4.
Total maximum earthquake story velocity of the structure in the direction of interest,
Sec. 15.5.3.
mD
Design earthquake story velocity due to the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the

15.2.1 Seismic Design Category A. Seismic Design Category A structures with a damping system
shall be designed using the design spectral response acceleration determined in accordance with Sec.
3.3.3 and the analysis methods and design provisions required for Seismic Design Category B
structures.
267

15.2.2 System requirements. Design of the structure shall consider the basic requirements for the
seismic-force-resisting system and the damping system as defined in the following sections. The
seismic-force-resisting system shall have the required strength to meet the forces defined in Section
15.2.2.1. The combination of the seismic-force-resisting system and the damping system may be used
to meet the drift requirement.
15.2.2.1 Seismic-force-resisting system. Structures that contain a damping system are required to
have a basic seismic-force-resisting system that, in each lateral direction, conforms to one of the types
indicated in Table 4.3-1.
The design of the seismic-force-resisting system in each direction shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec. 15.7 and the following:
1. The seismic base shear used for design of the seismic-force-resisting system shall not be less than
Vmin, where Vmin is determined as the greater of the values computed using Eq. 15.2-1 and 15.2-2 as
follows:
Vmin =
V
BV +1
(15.2-1)
Vmin = 0.75V
(15.2-2)
where:
V
seismic base shear in the direction of interest, determined in accordance with Sec.
5.2,
BV+1
numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to the
sum of viscous damping in the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in
the direction of interest, Vm (m = 1), plus inherent damping, I, and period of
structure equal to T1.
Exception: The seismic base shear used for design of the seismic-force-resisting system
shall not be taken as less than 1.0V, if either of the following conditions apply:
a. In the direction of interest, the damping system has less than two damping devices on each
floor level, configured to resist torsion.
b. The seismic-force-resisting system has plan irregularity Type 1b (Table 4.3-2) or vertical
irregularity Type 1b (Table 4.3-3).
2. Minimum strength requirements for elements of the seismic-force-resisting system that are also
elements of the damping system or are otherwise required to resist forces from damping devices
shall meet the additional requirements of Sec. 15.7.2.
15.2.2.2 Damping system. Elements of the damping system shall be designed to remain elastic for
design loads including unreduced seismic forces of damping devices as required in Sec. 15.7.2, unless it
is shown by analysis or test that inelastic response of elements would not adversely affect damping
system function and inelastic response is limited in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 15.7.2.4.
15.2.3.1 Design spectra. Spectra for the design earthquake and the maximum considered earthquake
developed in accordance with Sec. 13.2.3.1 shall be used for the design and analysis of all structures
with a damping system. Site-specific design spectra shall be developed and used for design of all
structures with a damping system if either of the following conditions apply:
1. The structure is located on a Class F site or

2. The structure is located at a site with S1 greater than 0.6.
268

15.2.3.2 Time histories. Ground-motion time histories for the design earthquake and the maximum
considered earthquake developed in accordance with Sec. 13.2.3.2 shall be used for design and analysis
of all structures with a damping system if either of the following conditions apply:
1. The structure is located at a site with S1 greater than 0.6.

2. The damping system is explicitly modeled and analyzed using the time history analysis method.
All structures with a damping system shall be designed using linear procedures, nonlinear procedures, or
a combination of linear and nonlinear procedures, as permitted in this section.
Regardless of the analysis method used, the peak dynamic response of the structure and elements of the
damping system shall be confirmed by using the nonlinear response history procedure if the structure is
located at a site with S1 greater than 0.6.
15.2.4.1 Nonlinear procedures. The nonlinear procedures of Sec. 15.3 are permitted to be used for
design of all structures with damping systems.
15.2.4.2 Response spectrum procedure. The response spectrum procedure of Sec. 15.4 is permitted
to be used for design of structures with damping systems provided that:
1. In the direction of interest, the damping system has at least two damping devices in each story,
configured to resist torsion; and
2. The total effective damping of the fundamental mode, mD (m = 1), of the structure in the direction
of interest is not greater than 35 percent of critical.
15.2.4.3 Equivalent lateral force procedure. The equivalent lateral force procedure of Sec. 15.5 is
permitted to be used for design of structures with damping systems provided that:
1. In the direction of interest, the damping system has at least two damping devices in each story,
configured to resist torsion;
2. The total effective damping of the fundamental mode, mD (m = 1), of the structure in the direction
of interest is not greater than 35 percent of critical;
3. The seismic-force-resisting system does not have plan irregularity Type 1a or 1b (Table 4.3-2) or
vertical irregularity Type 1a, 1b, 2, or 3 (Table 4.3-3);
4. Floor diaphragms are rigid as defined in Sec. 4.3.2.1; and
5. The height of the structure above the base does not exceed 100 ft (30 m).
15.2.5 Damping system
15.2.5.1 Device design. The design, construction, and installation of damping devices shall be based
on maximum earthquake response and the following conditions:
1. Low-cycle, large-displacement degradation due to seismic loads;

2. High-cycle, small-displacement degradation due to wind, thermal, or other cyclic loads;
3. Forces or displacements due to gravity loads;
4. Adhesion of device parts due to corrosion or abrasion, biodegradation, moisture, or chemical
exposure; and
5. Exposure to environmental conditions, including but not limited to temperature, humidity, moisture,
radiation (e.g., ultraviolet light), and reactive or corrosive substances (e.g., salt water).
Damping devices subject to failure by low-cycle fatigue shall resist wind forces without slip, movement,
or inelastic cycling.
269

The design of damping devices shall incorporate the range of thermal conditions, device wear,
manufacturing tolerances, and other effects that cause device properties to vary during the design life of
the device.
15.2.5.2 Multi-axis movement. Connection points of damping devices shall provide sufficient
articulation to accommodate simultaneous longitudinal, lateral, and vertical displacements of the
damping system.
15.2.5.3 Inspection and periodic testing. Means of access for inspection and removal of all damping
devices shall be provided.
The registered design professional responsible for design of the structure shall establish an appropriate
inspection and testing schedule for each type of damping device to ensure that the devices respond in a
dependable manner throughout the design life. The degree of inspection and testing shall reflect the
established in-service history of the damping devices, and the likelihood of change in properties over the
design life of devices.
15.2.5.4 Quality control. As part of the quality assurance plan developed in accordance with
Sec. 2.2.1, the registered design professional responsible for the structural design shall establish a
quality control plan for the manufacture of damping devices. As a minimum, this plan shall include the
testing requirements of Sec. 15.9.2.
15.3 NONLINEAR PROCEDURES

The stiffness and damping properties of the damping devices used in the models shall be based on or
verified by testing of the damping devices as specified in Sec. 15.9. The nonlinear force-deflection
characteristics of damping devices shall be modeled, as required, to explicitly account for device
dependence on frequency, amplitude, and duration of seismic loading.
15.3.1 Nonlinear response history procedure. A nonlinear response history (time history) analysis
shall utilize a mathematical model of the structure and the damping system as provided in Sec. 5.5.1 and
this section. The model shall directly account for the nonlinear hysteretic behavior of elements of the
structure and the damping devices to determine its response, through methods of numerical integration,
to suites of ground motions compatible with the design response spectrum for the site.
The analysis shall be performed in accordance with Sec. 5.5 together with the requirements of this
section. Inherent damping of the structure shall not be taken greater than five percent of the critical
unless test data consistent with the levels of deformation at or just below the effective yield
displacement of the seismic-force-resisting system support higher values.
If the calculated force in the element of the seismic-force-resisting system does not exceed 1.5 times its
nominal strength, that element may be modeled as linear.
15.3.1.1 Damping device modeling. Mathematical models of displacement-dependent damping
devices shall include the hysteretic behavior of the devices consistent with test data and accounting for
all significant changes in strength, stiffness, and hysteretic loop shape. Mathematical models of
velocity-dependent damping devices shall include the velocity coefficient consistent with test data. If
this coefficient changes with time and/or temperature, such behavior shall be modeled explicitly. The
elements of damping devices connecting damper units to the structure shall be included in the model.
Exception: If the properties of the damping devices are expected to change during the duration
of the time history analysis, the dynamic response may be enveloped by the upper and lower
limits of device properties. All these limit cases for variable device properties must satisfy the
same conditions as if the time dependent behavior of the devices were explicitly modeled.
15.3.1.2 Response parameters. In addition to the response parameters given in Sec. 5.5.3 for each
ground motion analyzed, individual response parameters consisting of the maximum value of the
discrete damping device forces, displacements, and velocities, in the case of velocity-dependent devices,
shall be determined.
270

If at least seven ground motions are analyzed, the design values of the damping device forces,
displacements, and velocities shall be permitted to be taken as the average of the values determined by
the analyses. If fewer than seven ground motions are analyzed, the design damping device forces,
displacements, and velocities shall be taken as the maximum value determined by the analysis. A
minimum of three ground motions shall be used.
15.3.2 Nonlinear static procedure. The nonlinear modeling described in Sec. A5.2.1 and the lateral
loads described in Sec. A5.2.2 shall be applied to the seismic-force-resisting system. The resulting
force-displacement curve shall be used in lieu of the assumed effective yield displacement, DY, of Eq.
15.6-10 to calculate the effective ductility demand due to the design earthquake, D, and due to the
maximum considered earthquake, M, in Equations 15.6-8 and 15.6-9, respectively. The value of (R/Cd)
shall be taken as 1.0 in Eq. 15.4-4, 15.4-5, 15.4-8, and 15.4-9 for the response spectrum procedure, and
in Eq. 15.5-6, 15.5-7 and 15.5-15 for the equivalent lateral force procedure.

Where the response spectrum procedure is used to design structures with a damping system, the
15.4.1 Modeling. A mathematical model of the seismic-force-resisting system and damping system
shall be constructed that represents the spatial distribution of mass, stiffness and damping throughout
the structure. The model and analysis shall comply with the requirements of Sec. 5.3.1 through 5.3.3 for
the seismic-force-resisting system and to the requirements of this section for the damping system. The
stiffness and damping properties of the damping devices used in the models shall be based on or verified
by testing of the damping devices as specified in Sec. 15.9.
The elastic stiffness of elements of the damping system other than damping devices shall be explicitly
modeled. Stiffness of damping devices shall be modeled depending on damping device type as follows:
1. Displacement-Dependent Damping Devices: Displacement-dependent damping devices shall be
modeled with an effective stiffness that represents damping device force at the response displacement
of interest (e.g., design story drift). Alternatively, the stiffness of hysteretic and friction damping
devices may be excluded from response spectrum analysis provided design forces in displacementdependent damping devices, QDSD, are applied to the model as external loads (Sec. 15.7.2.3).
2. Velocity-Dependent Damping Devices: Velocity-dependent damping devices that have a stiffness
component (e.g., visco-elastic damping devices) shall be modeled with an effective stiffness
corresponding to the amplitude and frequency of interest.
15.4.2 Seismic-force-resisting system
15.4.2.1 Seismic base shear. The seismic base shear, V, of the structure in a given direction shall be
determined as the combination of modal components, Vm, subject to the limits of Eq. 15.4-1 as follows:
V Vmin
(15.4-1)
The seismic base shear, V, of the structure shall be determined by the square root sum of the squares or
complete quadratic combination of modal base shear components, Vm.
15.4.2.2 Modal base shear. Modal base shear of the mth mode of vibration, Vm, of the structure in the
direction of interest shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 15.4-2 as follows:
Vm = CsmWm
(15.4-2)
where:
Csm
= seismic response coefficient of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of
interest as determined from Sec. 15.4.2.4 (m = 1) or Sec. 15.4.2.6 (m > 1), and
271

Wm
= the effective gravity load of the mth mode of vibration of the structure determined in
15.4.2.3 Modal participation factor. The modal participation factor of the mth mode of vibration, m,
of the structure in the direction of interest shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 15.4-3 as follows:
m =
Wm
(15.4-3)
wiim
i =1
where:
im
= displacement amplitude at the ith level of the structure for the fixed base condition in the
mth mode of vibration in the direction of interest, normalized to unity at the roof level.
15.4.2.4 Fundamental mode seismic response coefficient. The fundamental mode (m = 1) seismic
response coefficient, CS1, in the direction of interest shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 15.4-4
and 15.4-5 as follows:
R
For T1D < TS, Cs1 =
Cd
S DS
0 B1D
R
For T1D TS, Cs1 =
Cd
S D1
T
1D ( 0 B1D )
(15.4-4)
(15.4-5)
15.4.2.5 Effective fundamental mode period determination. The effective fundamental mode
(m = 1) period at the design earthquake, T1D, and at the maximum considered earthquake, T1M, shall be
based either on explicit consideration of the post-yield nonlinear force deflection characteristics of the
structure or determined in accordance with Eq. 15.4-6 and 15.4-7 as follows:
T1D = T1 D
(15.4-6)
T1M = T1 M
(15.4-7)
15.4.2.6 Higher mode seismic response coefficient. Higher mode (m > 1) seismic response
coefficient, CSm, of the mth mode of vibration (m > 1) of the structure in the direction of interest shall be
determined in accordance with Eq. 15.4-8 and 15.4-9 as follows:
R S DS
For Tm < TS, CSm =
Cd 0 BmD
(15.4-8)
R
For Tm TS, CSm =
Cd
(15.4-9)
S D1
Tm ( 0 BmD )
where:
Tm
period, in seconds, of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction under
consideration, and
BmD
numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to mD and
period of the structure equal to Tm.
15.4.2.7 Design lateral force. Design lateral force at Level i due to mth mode of vibration, Fim, of the
structure in the direction of interest shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 15.4-10 as follows:
Fim = wiim
272
m
Wm
Vm
(15.4-10)

Design forces in elements of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be determined by the square root
of the sum of the squares or complete quadratic combination of modal design forces.
15.4.3 Damping system. Design forces in damping devices and other elements of the damping system
shall be determined on the basis of the floor deflection, story drift and story velocity response
parameters described in the following sections.
Displacements and velocities used to determine maximum forces in damping devices at each story shall
account for the angle of orientation from horizontal and consider the effects of increased response due to
torsion required for design of the seismic-force-resisting system.
Floor deflections at Level i, iD and iM, design story drifts, D and M, and design story velocities, LD
and LM, shall be calculated for both the design earthquake and the maximum considered earthquake,
respectively, in accordance with this section.
15.4.3.1 Design earthquake floor deflection. The deflection of structure due to the design earthquake
at Level i in the mth mode of vibration, imD, of the structure in the direction of interest shall be
determined in accordance with Eq. 15.4-11 as follows:
imD = DmDim
(15.4-11)
The total design earthquake deflection at each floor of the structure shall be calculated by the square
root of the sum of the squares or complete quadratic combination of modal design earthquake
deflections.
15.4.3.2 Design earthquake roof displacement. Fundamental (m = 1) and higher mode (m > 1) roof
displacements due to the design earthquake, D1D and DmD, of the structure in the direction of interest
shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 15.4-12 and 15.4-13 as follows:
For m=1,
2
2
g S T
g S T
D1D = 2 1 DS 1D 2 1 DS 1 , T1D < TS
B1D
B1E
4
4
(15.4-12a)
g S T
g S T
D1D = 2 1 D1 1D 2 1 D1 1 , T1D TS
B1D
B1E
4
4
(15.4-12b)
S T
S T2
g
g
For m > 1, DmD = 2 m D1 m 2 m DS m
BmD 4
BmD
4
(15.4-13)
15.4.3.3 Design earthquake story drift. Design earthquake story drift of the fundamental mode, 1D,
and higher modes, mD (m > 1), of the structure in the direction of interest shall be calculated in
accordance with Sec. 5.2.6.1 using modal roof displacements of Sec. 15.4.3.2.
Total design earthquake story drift, D , shall be determined by the square root of the sum of the squares
or complete quadratic combination of modal design earthquake drifts.
15.4.3.4 Design earthquake story velocity. Design earthquake story velocity of the fundamental
mode, 1D , and higher modes, mD (m > 1), of the structure in the direction of interest shall be
calculated in accordance with Eq. 15.4-14 and 15.4-15 as follows:
For m = 1, 1D = 2
1D
T1D
(15.4-14)
273

For m > 1, mD = 2
mD
Tm
(15.4-15)
Total design earthquake story velocity, D , shall be determined by the square root of the sum of the
squares or complete quadratic combination of modal design earthquake velocities.
15.4.3.5 Maximum earthquake response. Total modal maximum earthquake floor deflection at
Level i, design story drift values and design story velocity values shall be based on Sec. 15.4.3.1,
15.4.3.3 and 15.4.3.4, respectively, except design earthquake roof displacement shall be replaced by
maximum earthquake roof displacement. Maximum earthquake roof displacement of the structure in
the direction of interest shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 15.4-16 and 15.4-17 as follows:
For m=1,
2
2
g S T
g S T
D1M = 2 1 MS 1M 2 1 MS 1 , T1M < TS
B1M
B1E
4
4
(15.4-16a)
g S T
g S T
D1M = 2 1 M 1 1M 2 1 M 1 1 , T1M TS
B1M
B1E
4
4
(15.4-16b)
S T
S T2
g
g
For m > 1, DmM = 2 m M1 m 2 m MS m
BmM
BmM
4
4
(15.4-17)
where:
BmM
numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to mM and
period of the structure equal to Tm.

Where the equivalent lateral force procedure is used to design structures with a damping system, the
15.5.1 Modeling. Elements of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be modeled in a manner
consistent with the requirements of Sec. 5.2. For purposes of analysis, the structure shall be considered
to be fixed at the base.
Elements of the damping system shall be modeled as required to determine design forces transferred
from damping devices to both the ground and the seismic-force-resisting system. The effective stiffness
of velocity-dependent damping devices shall be modeled.
Damping devices need not be explicitly modeled provided effective damping is calculated in accordance
with the procedures of Sec. 15.6 and used to modify response as required in Sec. 15.5.2 and 15.5.3.
The stiffness and damping properties of the damping devices used in the models shall be based on or
verified by testing of the damping devices as specified in Sec. 15.9.
15.5.2.1 Seismic base shear. The seismic base shear, V, of the seismic-force-resisting system in a
given direction shall be determined as the combination of the two modal components, V1 and VR, in
accordance with the following equation:
V = V12 + VR2 Vmin

where:
274
(15.5-1)
V1
design value of the seismic base shear of the fundamental mode in a given direction of
response, as determined in Sec. 15.5.2.2,
VR
design value of the seismic base shear of the residual mode in a given direction, as
determined in Sec. 15.5.2.6, and
Vmin
minimum allowable value of base shear permitted for design of the seismic-forceresisting system of the structure in direction of the interest, as determined in Sec.
15.2.2.1.
15.5.2.2 Fundamental mode base shear. The fundamental mode base shear, V1, shall be determined
in accordance with the following equation:
V1 = CS 1W1
(15.5-2)
where:
CS1 =
the fundamental mode seismic response coefficient, as determined in Sec. 15.5.2.4, and
W1 =
the effective fundamental mode gravity load including portions of the live load as defined
by Eq. 5.3-2 for m = 1.
15.5.2.3 Fundamental mode properties. The fundamental mode shape, i1, and participation factor,
1, shall be determined by either dynamic analysis using the elastic structural properties and
deformational characteristics of the resisting elements or using Eq. 15.5-3 and 15.5.-4 as follows:
i1 =
1 =
hi
hr
(15.5-3)
W1
(15.5-4)
wii1
i=1
where:
hi
the height of the structure above the base to Level i,
hr
the height of the structure above the base to the roof level,
wi
the portion of the total gravity load, W, located at or assigned to Level i.
The fundamental period, T1, shall be determined either by dynamic analysis using the elastic structural
properties and deformational characteristics of the resisting elements, or using Eq. 15.5-5 as follows:
n
wi i
T1 = 2
i =1
n
(15.5-5)
g f i i
i =1
where:
fi
lateral force at Level i of the structure distributed in accordance with Sec. 5.2.3, and
elastic deflection at Level i of the structure due to applied lateral forces fi.
15.5.2.4 Fundamental mode seismic response coefficient. The fundamental mode seismic response
coefficient, CS1, shall be determined using Eq. 15.5-6 or 15.5-7 as follows:
R
For T1D < TS, CS1 =
Cd
S D1
0 B1D
(15.5-6)
275

R
For T1D TS, CS1 =
Cd
S D1
T1D ( 0 B1D )
(15.5-7)
where:
SDS
the design spectral response acceleration parameter in the short period range,
SD1
the design spectral response acceleration parameter at a period of 1 second, and
B1D
numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to mD
(m = 1) and period of the structure equal to T1D.
15.5.2.5 Effective fundamental mode period determination. The effective fundamental mode period
at the design earthquake, T1D, and at the maximum considered earthquake, T1M, shall be based on
explicit consideration of the post-yield force deflection characteristics of the structure or shall be
calculated using Eq. 15.5-8 and 15.5-9 as follows:
T1D = T1 D
(15.5-8)
T1M = T1 M
(15.5-9)
15.5.2.6 Residual mode base shear. Residual mode base shear, VR, shall be determined in accordance
with Eq. 15.5-10 as follows:
VR = CSRWR
(15.5-10)
where:
CSR
the residual mode seismic response coefficient as determined in Sec. 15.5.2.8, and
WR
the effective residual mode gravity load of the structure determined using Eq. 15.5-13.
15.5.2.7 Residual mode properties. Residual mode shape, iR, participation factor, R, effective
gravity load of the structure, WR , and effective period, TR, shall be determined using Eq. 15.5-11
through 15.5-14 as follows:
iR =
1 1i1
1 1
(15.5-11)
R =1 1
(15.5-12)
WR = W W1
(15.5-13)
TR = 0.4T1
(15.5-14)
15.5.2.8 Residual mode seismic response coefficient. The residual mode seismic response
coefficient, CSR, shall be determined in accordance with the following equation:
R
CSR =
Cd
S DS
0 BR
(15.5-15)
where:
BR
Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to R, and
period of the structure equal to TR.
15.5.2.9 Design lateral force. The design lateral force in elements of the seismic-force-resisting
system at Level i due to fundamental mode response, Fi1, and residual mode response, FiR, of the
structure in the direction of interest shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 15.5-16 and 15.5-17 as
follows:
276

Fi1 = wii1
FiR = wiiR
1
W1
V1
R
WR
VR
(15.5-16)
(15.5-17)
Design forces in elements of the seismic-force-resisting system shall be determined by taking the square
root of the sum of the squares of the forces due to fundamental and residual modes.
15.5.3 Damping system. Design forces in damping devices and other elements of the damping system
shall be determined on the basis of the floor deflection, story drift, and story velocity response
parameters described in the following sections.
Displacements and velocities used to determine maximum forces in damping devices at each story shall
account for the angle of orientation from horizontal and consider the effects of increased response due to
torsion required for design of the seismic-force-resisting system.
Floor deflections at Level i, iD and iM, design story drifts, D and M, and design story velocities, D
and M , shall be calculated for both the design earthquake and the maximum considered earthquake,
respectively, in accordance with the following sections.
15.5.3.1 Design earthquake floor deflection. The total design earthquake deflection at each floor of
the structure in the direction of interest shall be calculated as the square root of the sum of the squares of
the fundamental and residual mode floor deflections. The fundamental and residual mode deflections
due to the design earthquake, i1D and iRD, at the center of rigidity of Level i of the structure in the
direction of interest shall be determined using Eq. 15.5-18 and 15.5-19 as follows:
i1D = D1Di1
(15.5-18)
iRD = DRDiR
(15.5-19)
where:
D1D
Fundamental mode design displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the
DRD
Residual mode design displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the
15.5.3.2 Design earthquake roof displacement. Fundamental and residual mode displacements due to
the design earthquake, D1D and D1R, at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the structure in the
direction of interest shall be determined using Eq. 15.5-20 and 15.5-21 as follows:
2
2
g S T
g S T
D1D = 2 1 DS 1D 2 1 DS 1 , T1D < TS
B1D
B1E
4
4
(15.5-20a)
g S T
g S T
D1D = 2 1 D1 1D 2 1 D1 1 , T1D TS
B1D
B1E
4
4
(15.5-20b)
S T2
S T
g
g
DRD = 2 R D1 R 2 R DS R
BR
BR
4
4
277
15.5.3.3 Design earthquake story drift. Design earthquake story drifts, D, in the direction of interest
shall be calculated using Eq. 15.5-22 as follows:
2
2
D = 1D
+ RD
(15.5-22)
where:
1D =
design earthquake story drift due to the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in
the direction of interest, and
RD =
design earthquake story drift due to the residual mode of vibration of the structure in the
direction of interest.
Modal design earthquake story drifts, 1D and RD, shall be determined in accordance with Eq. 5.3-8
using the floor deflections of Sec. 15.5.3.1
15.5.3.4 Design earthquake story velocity. Design earthquake story velocities, D , in the direction of
interest shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 15.5-23 through 15.5-25 as follows:
2
2
D = 1D
+ RD
1D
1D = 2
T1D
RD = 2
RD
TR
(15.5-23)
(15.5-24)
(15.5-25)
where:
1D = design earthquake story velocity due to the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure
in the direction of interest, and
RD = design earthquake story velocity due to the residual mode of vibration of the structure in
the direction of interest.
15.5.3.5 Maximum earthquake response. Total and modal maximum earthquake floor deflections at
Level i, design story drifts, and design story velocities shall be based on the equations in Sec. 15.5.3.1,
15.5.3.3 and 15.5.3.4, respectively, except that design earthquake roof displacements shall be replaced
by maximum earthquake roof displacements. Maximum earthquake roof displacements shall be
calculated in accordance with Eq. 15.5-26 and 15.5-27 as follows:
D1M
2
2
g S MS T1M g S MS T1
= 2 1
2 1
, T1M < TS
B1M
B1E
4
4
g S T
g S T
D1M = 2 1 M 1 1M 2 1 M 1 1 , T1M TS
B1M
B1E
4
4
S T2
S T
g
g
DRM = 2 R M1 R 2 R MS R
BR
BR
4
4
278
(15.5-26a)
(15.5-26b)
(15.5-27)

where:
SM1
= the maximum considered earthquake, 5-percent-damped, spectral response acceleration at

a period of 1 second, determined in accordance with Chapter 3.
SMS
= the maximum considered earthquake, 5-percent-damped, spectral response acceleration at

short periods, determined in accordance with Chapter 3.
B1M = Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 15.6-1 for effective damping equal to mM
(m = 1) and period of structure equal to T1M.
15.6 DAMPED RESPONSE MODIFICATION

As required in Sec. 15.4 and 15.5, response of the structure shall be modified for the effects of the
damping system.
15.6.1 Damping coefficient. Where the period of the structure is greater than or equal to T0, the
damping coefficient shall be as prescribed in Table 15.6-1. Where the period of the structure is less than
T0, the damping coefficient shall be linearly interpolated between a value of 1.0 at a 0-second period for
all values of effective damping and the value at period T0 as indicated in Table 15.6-1.
Table 15.6-1
Damping Coefficient, BV+I, B1D, BR, B1M, BmD, or BmM
BV+I, B1D, BR, B1M, BmD or BmM
Effective Damping,
(where period of the
(percentage of critical)
structure T0)
2
5
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.3
3.6
4.0
15.6.2 Effective damping. The effective damping at the design displacement, mD, and at the
maximum displacement, mM, of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction under
consideration shall be calculated using Eq. 15.6-1 and 15.6-2 as follows:
mD = I + Vm D + HD
(15.6-1)
mM = I + Vm M + HM
(15.6-2)
where:
HD =
component of effective damping of the structure in the direction of interest due to post-yield
hysteretic behavior of the seismic-force-resisting system and elements of the damping
system at effective ductility demand, D;
279

HM =
component of effective damping of the structure in the direction of interest due to post-yield
hysteretic behavior of the seismic-force-resisting system and elements of the damping
system at effective ductility demand, M;
I =
component of effective damping of the structure due to the inherent dissipation of energy by
elements of the structure, at or just below the effective yield displacement of the seismicforce-resisting system;
Vm =
component of effective damping of the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the
direction of interest due to viscous dissipation of energy by the damping system, at or just
below the effective yield displacement of the seismic-force-resisting system;
D =
effective ductility demand on the seismic-force-resisting system in the direction of interest

due to the design earthquake; and
M =

due to the maximum considered earthquake.
Unless analysis or test data supports other values, the effective ductility demand of higher modes of
vibration in the direction of interest shall be taken as 1.0.
15.6.2.1 Inherent damping. Inherent damping, I, shall be based on the material type, configuration,
and behavior of the structure and nonstructural components responding dynamically at or just below
yield of the seismic-force-resisting system. Unless analysis or test data supports other values, inherent
damping shall be taken as not greater than five percent of critical for all modes of vibration.
15.6.2.2 Hysteretic damping. Hysteretic damping of the seismic-force-resisting system and elements
of the damping system shall be based either on test or analysis, or shall be calculated using Eq. 15.6-3
and 15.6-4 as follows:
HD = qH ( 0.64 I ) 1
HM = qH ( 0.64 I ) 1
(15.6-3)
(15.6-4)
where:
qH =
hysteresis loop adjustment factor, as defined in Sec. 15.6.2.2.1,
D =

due to the design earthquake, as defined in Sec. 15.6.3, and
M =

due to the maximum considered earthquake, as defined in Sec. 15.6.3.
Unless analysis or test data supports other values, the hysteretic damping of higher modes of vibration
in the direction of interest shall be taken as zero.
15.6.2.2.1 Hysteresis loop adjustment factor. The calculation of hysteretic damping of the seismicforce-resisting system and elements of the damping system shall consider pinching and other effects that
reduce the area of the hysteresis loop during repeated cycles of earthquake demand. Unless analysis or
test data support other values, the fraction of full hysteretic loop area of the seismic-force-resisting
system used for design shall be taken as equal to the factor, qH, using Eq. 15.6-5 as follows:
qH = 0.67
TS
T1
where:
TS =
280
period defined by the ratio, SD1/SDS
(15.6-5)

T1 =
period of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of the interest
The value of qH shall not be taken as greater than 1.0, and need not be taken as less than 0.5.
15.6.2.3 Viscous damping. Viscous damping of the mth mode of vibration of the structure, Vm, shall
be calculated using Eq. 15.6-6 and 15.6-7 as follows:
Vm =
Wmj
j
(15.6-6)
4 Wm
1
Wm = Fim im
2 i
(15.6-7)
where:
Wmj =
work done by jth damping device in one complete cycle of dynamic response corresponding
to the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest at modal
displacements, im,
Wm =
maximum strain energy in the mth mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of
interest at modal displacements, im,
Fim =
mth mode inertial force at Level i,
im =
deflection of Level i in the mth mode of vibration at the center of rigidity of the structure in
the direction under consideration.
Viscous modal damping of displacement-dependent damping devices shall be based on a response

amplitude equal to the effective yield displacement of the structure.
The calculation of the work done by individual damping devices shall consider orientation and
participation of each device with respect to the mode of vibration of interest. The work done by
individual damping devices shall be reduced as required to account for the flexibility of elements,
including pins, bolts, gusset plates, brace extensions, and other components that connect damping
devices to other elements of the structure.
15.6.3 Effective ductility demand. The effective ductility demand on the seismic-force-resisting
system due to the design earthquake, D, and due to the maximum considered earthquake, M, shall be
calculated using Eq. 15.6-8, 15.6-9, and 15.6-10 as follows:
D =
D1D
1.0
DY
(15.6-8)
M =
D1M
1.0
DY
(15.6-9)
g C
DY = 2 0 d
4 R
2
1CS 1T1
(15.6-10)
where:
D1D =
fundamental mode design displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the
structure in the direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.2,
D1M =
fundamental mode maximum displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of
structure in the direction under consideration, Sec. 15.5.3.5,
DY
displacement at the center of rigidity of the roof level of the structure at the effective yield
point of the seismic-force-resisting system,
response modification factor from Table 4.3-1,
281

Cd
= deflection amplification factor from Table 4.3-1,
system overstrength factor from Table 4.3-1,
participation factor of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the direction
of interest, Sec. 15.4.2.3 or Sec. 15.5.2.3 (m = 1),
CS1
seismic response coefficient of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the
direction of interest, Sec. 15.4.2.4 or Sec. 15.5.2.4 (m = 1), and
T1
= period of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure in the direction of interest.
The design earthquake ductility demand, D, shall not exceed the maximum value of effective ductility
demand, max, given in Sec. 15.6.4.
15.6.4 Maximum effective ductility demand. For determination of the hysteresis loop adjustment
factor, hysteretic damping, and other parameters, the maximum value of effective ductility demand,
max, shall be calculated using Eq. 15.6-11 and 15.6-12 as follows:
For TID TS, max
For T1 TS, max =
1 R
=
+ 1
2 0 I
0 I
(15.6-11)
(15.6-12)
For T1 < TS < T1D, max shall be determined by linear interpolation between the values of Eq.
15.6-11 and 15.6-12
where:
I
= the occupancy importance factor determined in accordance with Sec. 1.3.
T1D
effective period of the fundamental mode of vibration of the structure at the design
displacement in the direction under consideration.
15.7 SEISMIC LOAD CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

For the nonlinear procedures of Sec. 15.3, the seismic-force-resisting system, damping system, loading
conditions and acceptance criteria for response parameters of interest shall conform with Sec. 15.7.1.
Design forces and displacements determined in accordance with the response spectrum procedure of
Sec. 15.4 or the equivalent lateral force procedure of Sec. 15.5 shall be checked using the strength
design criteria of the Provisions and the seismic loading conditions of Sec. 15.7.2 and 15.7.3.
15.7.1 Nonlinear procedures. Where nonlinear procedures are used in analysis, the seismic force
resisting system, damping system, seismic loading conditions and acceptance criteria shall conform to
the following subsections.
15.7.1.1 Seismic force resisting system. The seismic-force-resisting system shall satisfy the strength
requirements of Sec. 4.3 using the seismic base shear, Vmin , as given by Sec. 15.2.2.1.
15.7.1.2 Seismic loads. Seismic forces shall be based upon the design earthquake for damping system
strength. The damping devices and their connections shall be sized to resist the forces, displacements
and velocities from the maximum considered earthquake. The story drift shall be determined using the
design earthquake.
15.7.1.3 Combination of load effects. The effects on the damping system due to gravity loads and
seismic forces shall be combined in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2 using the effect of horizontal seismic
forces, QE, determined in accordance with the analysis. The redundancy factor, , shall be taken equal
to 1.0 in all cases and the seismic load effect with overstrength of Sec. 4.2.2.2 need not apply to the
design of the damping system.
282

15.7.1.4 Acceptance criteria for the response parameters of interest. The damping system
components shall be evaluated using the strength design criteria of the Provisions using the seismic
forces and seismic loading conditions determined from the nonlinear procedures and = 1.0. The
members of the seismic-force-resisting system need not be evaluated when using the nonlinear
procedure forces.
The story drift shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable story drift, a, as obtained from Table 4.51. The maximum story drift shall include torsional effects.
15.7.2 Seismic-force-resisting system. The seismic-force-resisting system shall satisfy the
requirements of Sec. 4.3 using seismic base shear and design forces determined in accordance with Sec.
15.4.2 or Sec. 15.5.2.
The design earthquake story drift, D, as determined in either Sec. 15.4.3.3 or Sec. 15.5.3.3 shall not
exceed (R/Cd) times the allowable story drift, as obtained from Table 4.5-1, considering the effects of
torsion as required in Sec. 4.5.1.
15.7.3 Damping system. The damping system shall satisfy the requirements of Sec. 4.3 for seismic
design forces and seismic loading conditions determined in accordance with this section.
15.7.3.1 Combination of load effects. The effects on the damping system and its components due to
gravity loads and seismic forces shall be combined in accordance with Sec. 4.2.2 using the effect of
horizontal seismic forces, QE, determined in accordance with Sec. 15.7.3.3. The redundancy factor, ,
shall be taken equal to 1.0 in all cases and the seismic load effect with overstrength of Sec. 4.2.2.2 need
not apply to the design of the damping system.
15.7.3.2 Modal damping system design forces. Modal damping system design forces shall be
calculated on the basis of the type of damping devices and the modal design story displacements and
velocities determined in accordance with either Sec. 15.4.3 or Sec. 15.5.3.
Modal design story displacements and velocities shall be increased as required to envelop the total
design story displacements and velocities determined in accordance with Sec. 15.3 where peak response
is required to be confirmed by time history analysis.
1. Displacement-Dependent Damping Devices: Design seismic force in displacement-dependent
damping devices shall be based on the maximum force in the device at displacements up to and
including the design earthquake story drift, D.
2. Velocity-Dependent Damping Devices: Design seismic force in each mode of vibration of velocitydependent damping devices shall be based on the maximum force in the device at velocities up to
and including the design earthquake story velocity for the mode of interest.
Displacements and velocities used to determine design forces in damping devices at each story shall
account for the angle of orientation from horizontal and consider the effects of increased floor response
due to torsional motions.
15.7.3.3 Seismic load conditions and combination of modal responses. Seismic design force, QE, in
each element of the damping system due to horizontal earthquake load shall be taken as the maximum
force of the following three loading conditions:
1. Stage of Maximum Displacement: Seismic design force at the stage of maximum displacement
shall be calculated in accordance with Eq. 15.7-1 as follows:
QE = o ( QmSFRS ) QDSD
2
(15.7-1)
where:
QmSFRS =
Force in an element of the damping system equal to the design seismic force of the
mth mode of vibration of the seismic-force-resisting system in the direction of
interest.
283

QDSD
Force in an element of the damping system required to resist design seismic forces
of displacement-dependent damping devices.
Seismic forces in elements of the damping system, QDSD, shall be calculated by imposing design
forces of displacement-dependent damping devices on the damping system as pseudo-static forces.
Design seismic forces of displacement-dependent damping devices shall be applied in both positive
and negative directions at peak displacement of the structure.
2. Stage of Maximum Velocity: Seismic design force at the stage of maximum velocity shall be
calculated in accordance with Eq. 15.7-2 as follows:
QE = ( QmDSV )
(15.7-2)
where:
QmDSV =
Force in an element of the damping system required to resist design seismic forces
of velocity-dependent damping devices due to the mth mode of vibration of structure
in the direction of interest.
Modal seismic design forces in elements of the damping system, QmDSV, shall be calculated by
imposing modal design forces of velocity-dependent devices on the non-deformed damping system
as pseudo-static forces. Modal seismic design forces shall be applied in directions consistent with
the deformed shape of the mode of interest. Horizontal restraint forces shall be applied at each floor
Level i of the non-deformed damping system concurrent with the design forces in velocitydependent damping devices such that the horizontal displacement at each level of the structure is
zero. At each floor Level i, restraint forces shall be proportional to and applied at the location of
each mass point.
3. Stage of Maximum Acceleration: Seismic design force at the stage of maximum acceleration shall
be calculated in accordance Eq. 15.7-3 as follows:
QE = ( CmFD o QmSFRS + CmFV QmDSV ) QDSD
2
(15.7-3)
The force coefficients, CmFD and CmFV, shall be determined from Tables 15.7-1 and 15.7-2,
respectively, using values of effective damping determined in accordance with the following
requirements:
For fundamental-mode response (m = 1) in the direction of interest, the coefficients, C1FD and C1FV,
shall be based on the velocity exponent, , that relates device force to damping device velocity. The
effective fundamental-mode damping, shall be taken equal to the total effective damping of the
fundamental mode less the hysteretic component of damping (1D - HD or 1M - HM) at the response
level of interest ( = D or = M).
For higher-mode (m > 1) or residual-mode response in the direction of interest, the coefficients,
CmFD and CmFV, shall be based on a value of equal to 1.0. The effective modal damping shall be
taken equal to the total effective damping of the mode of interest (mD or mM). For determination of
the coefficient CmFD, the ductility demand shall be taken equal to that of the fundamental mode ( =
D or = M).
284
Table 15.7-1 Force Coefficient, CmFDa, b

1.0
Effective
Damping
0.25
= 0.5
= 0.75
1.0
CmFD = 1.0c
0.05
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.0
0.1
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.0
0.2
1.00
0.95
0.94
0.93
1.1
0.3
1.00
0.92
0.88
0.86
1.2
0.4
1.00
0.88
0.81
0.78
1.3
0.5
1.00
0.84
0.73
0.71
1.4
0.6
1.00
0.79
0.64
0.64
1.6
0.7
1.00
0.75
0.55
0.58
1.7
0.8
1.00
0.70
0.50
0.53
1.9
0.9
1.00
0.66
0.50
0.50
2.1
1.0
1.00
0.62
0.50
0.50
2.2
Unless analysis or test data support other values, the force coefficient CmFD for visco-elastic
systems shall be taken as 1.0.
b
Interpolation shall be used for intermediate values of velocity exponent , and ductility demand, .
c
CmFD shall be taken equal to 1.0 for values of ductility demand, , greater than or equal to the
values shown.
a
Table 15.7-2 Force Coefficient, CmFV a, b

Effective
Damping
0.25
= 0.5
= 0.75
1.0
0.05
1.00
0.35
0.20
0.10
0.1
1.00
0.44
0.31
0.20
0.2
1.00
0.56
0.46
0.37
0.3
1.00
0.64
0.58
0.51
0.4
1.00
0.70
0.69
0.62
0.5
1.00
0.75
0.77
0.71
0.6
1.00
0.80
0.84
0.77
0.7
1.00
0.83
0.90
0.81
0.8
1.00
0.90
0.94
0.90
0.9
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.0
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Unless analysis or test data support other values, the force coefficient CmFD for visco-elastic
systems shall be taken as 1.0.
b
Interpolation shall be used for intermediate values of velocity exponent, .
a
285

15.7.3.4 Inelastic response limits. Elements of the damping system may exceed strength limits for
design loads provided it is shown by analysis or test that:
1. Inelastic response does not adversely affect damping system function.

2. Element forces calculated in accordance with Sec. 15.7.3.3, using a value of 0, taken equal to 1.0,
do not exceed the strength required to satisfy the load combinations of Sec. 4.2.2.1.
15.8 DESIGN REVIEW

A design review of the damping system and related test programs shall be performed by an independent
team of registered design professionals in the appropriate disciplines and others experienced in seismic
analysis methods and the theory of energy dissipation systems.
The design review shall include, but need not be limited to, the following:
1. Review of site-specific seismic criteria including the development of the site-specific spectra and
ground motion histories and all other design criteria developed specifically for the project;
2. Review of the preliminary design of the seismic-force-resisting system and the damping system,
including design parameters of damping devices;
3. Review of the final design of the seismic-force-resisting system and the damping system and all
supporting analyses; and
4. Review of damping device test requirements, device manufacturing quality control and assurance,
and scheduled maintenance and inspection requirements.
15.9 TESTING
The force-velocity-displacement and damping properties used for the design of the damping system
shall be based on the prototype tests as specified in this section.
The fabrication and quality control procedures used for all prototype and production damping devices
shall be identical.
15.9.1 Prototype tests
The following tests shall be performed separately on two full-size damping devices of each type and
size used in the design, in the order listed below.
Representative sizes of each type of device may be used for prototype testing, provided both of the
1. All pertinent testing and other damping device data are made available to, and are accepted by the
registered design professional responsible for the design of the structure.
2. The registered design professional substantiates the similarity of the damping device to previously
tested devices.
Test specimens shall not be used for construction, unless they are accepted by the registered design
professional responsible for design of the structure and meet the requirements for prototype and
production tests.
15.9.1.1 Data recording. The force-deflection relationship for each cycle of each test shall be
recorded.
15.9.1.2 Sequence and cycles of testing. For the following test sequences, each damping device shall
be subjected to gravity load effects and thermal environments representative of the installed condition.
For seismic testing, the displacement in the devices calculated for the maximum considered earthquake,
termed herein as the maximum earthquake device displacement, shall be used.
1. Each damping device shall be subjected to the number of cycles expected in the design windstorm,
but not less than 2000 continuous fully reversed cycles of wind load. Wind load shall be at
286

amplitudes expected in the design wind storm, and applied at a frequency equal to the inverse of the
fundamental period of the building (f1 = 1/T1).
Exception: Damping devices need not be subjected to these tests if they are not subject to
wind-induced forces or displacements, or if the design wind force is less than the device
yield or slip force.
2. Each damping device shall be loaded with 5 fully reversed, sinusoidal cycles at the maximum
earthquake device displacement at a frequency equal to 1/T1M as calculated in Sec. 15.4.2.5. Where
the damping device characteristics vary with operating temperature, these tests shall be conducted at
a minimum of 3 temperatures (minimum, ambient, and maximum) that bracket the range of
operating temperatures.
Exception: Damping devices may be tested by alternative methods provided all of the
a. Alternative methods of testing are equivalent to the cyclic testing requirements of this
section.
b. Alternative methods capture the dependence of the damping device response on ambient
temperature, frequency of loading, and temperature rise during testing.
c. Alternative methods are accepted by the registered design professional responsible for the
design of the structure.
3. If the force-deformation properties of the damping device at any displacement less than or equal
the maximum earthquake device displacement change by more than 15 percent for changes in
testing frequency from 1/T1M to 2.5/T1, then the preceding tests shall also be performed at
frequencies equal to 1/T1 and 2.5/T1.
If reduced-scale prototypes are used to qualify the rate dependent properties of damping
devices, the reduced-scale prototypes should be of the same type and materials, and
manufactured with the same processes and quality control procedures, as full-scale prototypes,
and tested at a similitude-scaled frequency that represents the full-scale loading rates.
15.9.1.3 Testing similar devices. Damping devices need not be prototype tested provided that both of
the following conditions are met:
1. All pertinent testing and other damping device data are made available to, and are accepted by
the registered design professional responsible for the design of the structure.
2. The registered design professional substantiates the similarity of the damping device to
previously tested devices.
15.9.1.4 Determination of force-velocity-displacement characteristics. The force-velocitydisplacement characteristics of a damping device shall be based on the cyclic load and displacement
tests of prototype devices specified above. Effective stiffness of a damping device shall be calculated
for each cycle of deformation using equation 13.6-1.
15.9.1.5 Device adequacy. The performance of a prototype damping device shall be deemed adequate
if all of the conditions listed below are satisfied. The 15-percent limits specified below may be
increased by the registered design professional responsible for the design of the structure provided that
the increased limit has been demonstrated by analysis not to have a deleterious effect on the response of
the structure.
15.9.1.5.1 Displacement-dependent damping devices. The performance of the prototype
displacement-dependent damping devices shall be deemed adequate if the following conditions, based
on tests specified in Sec. 15.9.1.2, are satisfied:
287
1.
For Test 1, no signs of damage including leakage, yielding, or breakage.
2.
For Tests 2 and 3, the maximum force and minimum force at zero displacement for a damping
device for any one cycle does not differ by more than 15 percent from the average maximum and
minimum forces at zero displacement as calculated from all cycles in that test at a specific
frequency and temperature.
3.
For Tests 2 and 3, the maximum force and minimum force at maximum earthquake device
displacement for a damping device for any one cycle does not differ by more than 15 percent from
the average maximum and minimum forces at the maximum earthquake device displacement as
calculated from all cycles in that test at a specific frequency and temperature.
4.
For Tests 2 and 3, the area of hysteresis loop (Eloop) of a damping device for any one cycle does
not differ by more than 15 percent from the average area of the hysteresis loop as calculated from
all cycles in that test at a specific frequency and temperature.
5.
The average maximum and minimum forces at zero displacement and maximum earthquake displacement,
and the average area of the hysteresis loop (Eloop), calculated for each test in the sequence of Tests 2 and 3,
shall not differ by more than 15 percent from the target values specified by the registered design
professional responsible for the design of the structure.
15.9.1.5.1 Velocity-dependent damping devices. The performance of the prototype velocitydependent damping devices shall be deemed adequate if the following conditions, based on tests
specified in Sec. 15.9.1.2, are satisfied:
1. For Test 1, no signs of damage including leakage, yielding, or breakage.

2. For velocity-dependent damping devices with stiffness, the effective stiffness of a damping device
in any one cycle of Tests 2 and 3 does not differ by more than 15 percent from the average effective
stiffness as calculated from all cycles in that test at a specific frequency and temperature.
3. For Tests 2 and 3, the maximum force and minimum force at zero displacement for a damping
device for any one cycle does not differ by more than 15 percent from the average maximum and
minimum forces at zero displacement as calculated from all cycles in that test at a specific
frequency and temperature.
4. For Tests 2 and 3, the area of hysteresis loop (Eloop) of a damping device for any one cycle does not
differ by more than 15 percent from the average area of the hysteresis loop as calculated from all
cycles in that test at a specific frequency and temperature.
5. The average maximum and minimum forces at zero displacement, effective stiffness (for damping
devices with stiffness only), and average area of the hysteresis loop (Eloop) calculated for each test in
the sequence of Tests 2 and 3, does not differ by more than 15 percent from the target values
specified by the registered design professional responsible for the design of the structure.
15.9.2 Production testing. Prior to installation in a building, damping devices shall be tested to ensure
that their force-velocity-displacement characteristics fall within the limits set by the registered design
professional responsible for the design of the structure. The scope and frequency of the productiontesting program shall be determined by the registered design professional responsible for the design of
the structure.
288
Appendix A
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE 2000 AND THE 2003 EDITIONS OF
THE NEHRP RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS
EDITORIAL AND ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGES
The 2003 Provisions and Commentary documents were developed in two phases. First, the 2000
Edition was thoroughly edited and reformatted to increase the usability of the documents and eliminate
inconsistencies that had crept in over the years. This reformatted version was approved by the BSSC
member organizations and became the base document used in the remainder of the update process.
The marked up version of the 2000 Provisions contents presented at the end of this appendix shows
the reformatting organizational changes made as well as those resulting from substantive proposals for
change.
The 2003 PUC also worked closely with those developing the seismic requirements for ASCE 7. The
goal was to begin to reduce the redundancy between the Provisions and ASCE 7. The longer term
goal, which should be achieved as a result of the next Provisions update, is to fully integrate ASCE 7
as a reference standard in the Provisions and thereby eliminate duplications.
2003 CHAPTER 1, GENERAL PROVISIONS

The manner in which Seismic Design Category is determined in Sec. 1.4.1 has been clarified by the
addition of an exception. Note that the Simplified Alternate Chapter 4 includes an explanation of how
to determine SDC using that procedure.
Section 1.5.3 has been modified to replace the term anchor with the term connector. This section
also has been broadened to apply to more than just the interface of walls to roofs or floors.
2003 CHAPTER 2, QUALITY ASSURANCE

The quality assurance requirements that appeared as Chapter 2 of the 2000 Provisions now appear as
Chapter 3. Definitions have been added for quality assurance, quality assurance plan, and quality
control.
2003 CHAPTER 3, GROUND MOTION

One of the most significant changes made for the 2003 edition affects the ground motion requirements.
First, the spectral acceleration maps distributed in a separate packet with past editions now are reduced
in number and size and appear in the 2003 Provisions volume. Further, the maps are based on the
newest version of the U.S. Geological Surveys hazard maps and long-period maps showing contours
for up to a 16-sec period have been added to permit designers to take longer period, TL, into account.
291
2003 Provisions, Appendix A

The site classification procedures have been clarified and commentary has been added on site class
definitions and on the procedure used to classify a site (Sec. 3.5.1 and 3.5.2).
Provisions Sec. 3.4 has been revised to strengthen and make more explicit the requirements for sitespecific determinations of earthquake ground motions and new text to support this section has been
added to the Commentary.
2003 CHAPTER 4, STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA
The redundancy provisions have been substantially revised for the 2003 Provisions to both simplify
the calculation effort and to provide provisions that result in requirements that are more consistent
with observed performance. Some minor modifications were made to the R factor table to provide for
more consistency with respect to nonductile systems and dual systems. The base shear equations have
been modified to take into account the new long-period ground motion maps, to adjust the minimum
base shear value, and to refine the requirements for when the near-source equations are to be used.
The P-delta and nonlinear static pushover analysis requirements have been modified to take into
account recent research results.
An alternate chapter has been prepared to provide simplified design procedures for a specific class of
structure. Low-rise buildings that are regular in plan and consist of rigid vertical seismic forceresisting systems may be designed using this alternative procedure, which significantly simplifies the
design process.
2003 CHAPTER 5, STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS PROCEDURE
Revisions were made to Sec. 5.6 to clarify that the provisions of this section to determine soilstructure-interaction effects on design earthquake forces and displacements should not be used if
foundation springs are incorporated in the analysis to directly model soil-structure interaction effects.
2003 CHAPTER 6, ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL
COMPONENTS
The provisions for anchorage have been modified to reflect the current state of practice. New
requirements for fire sprinkler system bracing and a new performance-based design approach for
piping have been added for the 2003 edition. Also added are design provisions for long-period
components. Requirements for suspended components have been updated and requirements
concerning direction of loading have been clarified.
2003 CHAPTER 7, FOUNDATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
New in the 2003 edition are provisions and commentary covering the geotechnical ultimate strength
design of foundations as a proposed replacement for allowable stress design. These procedures appear
as an appendix to Chapter 7 to provide for trial use and evaluation prior to incorporation in the main
text of the Provisions.
Also new in the 2003 edition are provisions and commentary concerning the modeling of the loaddeformation characteristics of the foundation-soil system (foundation stiffness) using soil springs.
Linear springs are addressed in the main text of the Provisions whereas nonlinear springs are treated in
an appendix.
292
Differences Between The 2000 And The 2003 Editions Of The NEHRP Recommended Provisions
Supplemental provisions and commentary have been added for minimum longitudinal reinforcement
requirements for uncased concrete piles, piles in a group containing both batter and vertical piles, and
steel H piles.
The provisions mandating assessments of seismically induced geohazards in Seismic Design
Categories (SDC) C, D, E, and F have been modified to wave these requirements when the authority
having jurisdiction determines that sufficient information is available for nearby sites to evaluate the
hazard for the proposed construction. Commentary text describing methods for geohazards
assessments has been updated and guidance added on hazard screening and determination of
earthquake magnitude.
2003 CHAPTER 8, STEEL STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Changes made for the 2003 edition include reference to the 2002 edition of the AISC Seismic
Provisions and other updated standards.
New provisions and commentary have been added to address buckling restrained braced frames
(BRBF). This system, initially developed in Japan and now gaining widespread use in areas of high
seismicity in the United States, provides for highly ductile bracing elements in concentrically braced
frames. Also included are new provisions and commentary to address special steel plate walls. This
system, which has been included in the National Building Code of Canada for a number of years based
on research conducted both in the United States and Canada, is gaining some limited use in areas of
high seismicity in the United States. The system provides for ductile thin steel plate wall elements.
Table 4.3-1 has been updated to better define the requirements for the design of steel intermediate
moment, ordinary moment, and ordinary concentrically braced frame systems.
2003 CHAPTER 9, CONCRETE STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Adoption of ACI 318-02 has permitted the elimination of many of the definitions and notations that
were included in the 2000 Provisions as well as the deletion of provisions related to precast gravity
load systems, emulation design of seismic-force-resisting precast frame and wall systems, nonemulative design of special moment frames constructed using precast concrete, precast concrete
connections, anchor bolts in the top of columns, and most of the provisions related to anchoring to
concrete.
Since ACI 318-02 includes a new type of seismic-force-resisting system termed an intermediate
precast structural wall, R, o, and Cd values were added for that system as well as for ordinary precast
shear wall systems. Intermediate precast shear wall systems are permitted as seismic-force-resisting
systems in SDC D, E and F provided the building height does not exceed 40ft. There are no height
limitations on that system for SDC B and C. Ordinary precast shear wall systems are allowed as
seismic-force-resisting systems in SDC B only. Tilt-up concrete walls are interpreted in accordance
with ACI 318 as precast shear walls and provisions are also introduced for wall piers and segments for
intermediate precast structural walls that parallel those of the 2000 Provisions for wall piers and
segments for special structural walls. Wall piers in both special and intermediate walls are required to
be designed as columns if their horizontal length to thickness ratio is less than 2.5. Finally, it is
specified that special reinforced concrete structural walls can be of either monolithic or precast
construction so that the same R, o, and Cd apply for both types of construction.
New requirements were added for acceptance criteria and the validation testing of special precast
structural walls that parallel those of ACI T1.1, Acceptance Criteria for Moment Frames Based on
293

Structural Testing. However, while the latter are applicable to both monolithic and precast frame
construction, the new provisions are restricted to precast wall construction only.
2003 CHAPTER 10, STEEL AND CONCRETE STRUCTURE

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Most of the requirements for composite structures appear in the reference standard, AISC Seismic Part
II; thus, Chapter 10 is very brief and lists only modifications to this standard.
2003 CHAPTER 11, MASONRY STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Adoption of the 2002 Masonry Society Joint Committee (MSJC) standards, ACI530/ASCE 5/TMS402
and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 stimulated a complete revision of Chapter 11. Additional changes
were made in the reinforcement requirements for special moment frames.
2003 CHAPTER 12, WOOD STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

In the 2003 Provisions, AF&PAs ASD/LRFD Supplement Special Design Provisions for Wind and
Seismic (AF&PA SDPWS) and AF&PA/ASCE 16 Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) for
Engineered Wood Construction serve as the primary reference documents for engineered design
provisions for wood. Adoption of AF&PA SDPWS permitted the deletion of significant portions of
Chapter 12 and stimulated the revision of the material that remains.
A reference to the 2003 International Residential Code replaces the reference to the 1995 CABO Oneand Two-Family Dwelling Code. Other basic requirements for conventional construction in Chapter
12 remain unchanged.
The wood design provisions also have been revised to address shear wall design and construction.
The intent of the requirements concerning the sizing of hold-down devices has been clarified and
extended to foundation shear anchorage. The equation format for calculating perforated shear wall
capacity is introduced into the body of the Provisions allowing some efficiencies in determination of
wall capacity relative to tabulated strength reduction factors. Guidance for shear wall and diaphragm
deflection calculations also has been added as had commentary on the effect of framing moisture
content on deflection calculations. Additional guidance also is provided to address constructability
issues regarding slotted holes in large plate washers.
2003 CHAPTER 13, SEISMICALLY ISOLATED STRUCTURES

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
For the 2003 Provisions, provisions for the analysis and design of structures with damping systems
move from an appendix to Chapter 13 to a new Chapter 15, Structures with Damping Systems, and a
short commentary is provided. A series of minor modifications to the 2000 text clarify the basic
philosophy of the chapter to prevent erroneous calculations.
In Chapter 13 on seismically isolated structures, an exception on isolation systems without sufficient
restoring force has been removed so that all isolation systems must have sufficient restoring force. A
new requirement calling for variations in seismic isolator material properties due to aging,
contamination, environmental exposure, loading rate, scragging and temperature to be considered in
294
analysis has been added while the requirement concerning the independence of isolation system
behavior vis--vis application of the equivalent lateral force procedure has been deleted. Related
changes have been made in the commentary text.
2003 CHAPTER 14, NONBUILDING STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Foe 2003 a new definition for nonbuilding structures similar to buildings has been added and the
design coefficient table has been splitinto two tables to cover structures similar to buildings and
structures not similar to buildings separately.
Table 14.2-2 has been separated into two tables for consistency with the definition. Furthermore, the
path to the applicable design and detailing requirements in the other chapters and in Chapter 14 has
been added to Tables 14.2-2 and the new Table 14.2-3.
Table 14.2-2 of the 2000 Provisions for nonbuilding structures similar to buildings prescribed R, o,
and Cd values to be taken from Table 4.3-1, but prescribed less restrictive height limitations than those
prescribed in Table 4.3-1. This inconsistency has been corrected. In addition, some nonbuilding
structures similar to buildings are permitted with less restrictive height limitations if lower R values
are used.
2003 CHAPTER 15, STRUCTURES WITH DAMPING SYSTEMS

See explanation above under Chapter 13.
295
CHANGES IN SECTION NUMBERS BETWEEN THE

2000 AND 2003 EDITIONS PROVISIONS
Chapter 1, GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 PURPOSE GENERAL
1.1.1 Purpose
1.1.2 Scope and application
1.1.3 References
1.1.4 Definitions
1.1.5 Notation
1.2 SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.2.1 Scope
1.2.2 Additions
1.2.3 Change of Use
1.2.4 Alterations
1.2.5 Alternate Materials and Alternate Means and Methods of Construction
1.32 SEISMIC USE GROUPS
1.32.1 Seismic Use Group III
1.32.2 Seismic Use Group II
1.32.3 Seismic Use Group I
1.32.4 Multiple Use
1.32.5 Seismic Use Group III Structure Access Protection
1.43 OCCUPANCY IMPORTANCE FACTOR
1.4.1 Determination of Seismic Design Category
1.4.2 Site limitation for Seismic Design Categories E and F
1.5 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY A
1.5.1 Lateral forces
1.5.2 Connections
1.5.3 Anchorage of concrete or masonry walls
1.5.4 Tanks assigned to Seismic use group III
Chapter 2, GLOSSARY AND NOTATIONS
2.1 GLOSSARY
2.2 NOTATIONS
Chapter 32 , QUALITY ASSURANCE
32.1 SCOPE GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
2.1.2 References
2.1.3 Definitions
2.1.4 Notation
32.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
3.2.1 Details of Quality Assurance Plan
3.2.2 Contractor Responsibility
296
2.2.1 Details of quality assurance plan
2.2.2 Contractor responsibility
32.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION
32.3.1 Piers, Piles, Caissons
32.3.2 Reinforcing Steel
32.3.3 Structural Concrete
32.3.4 Prestressed Concrete
32.3.5 Structural Masonry
32.3.6 Structural Steel
32.3.7 Structural Wood
32.3.8 ColdFormed Steel Framing
32.3.9 Architectural Components
32.3.10 Mechanical and Electrical Components
32.3.11 Seismic Isolation System
32.4 TESTING
32.4.1 Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel
32.4.2 Structural Concrete
32.4.3 Structural Masonry
3.24.4 Structural Steel
32.4.5 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
32.4.6 Seismically Isolated Structures
32.5 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS
32.6 REPORTING AND COMPLIANCE PROCEDURES
Chapter 43, GROUND MOTION
4.1 PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING MAXIMUM CONSIDERED EARTHQUAKE AND
DESIGN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION ACCELERATIONS AND RESPONSE SPECTRA
4.1.1 Maximum Considered Earthquake Ground Motions
4.1.2 General Procedure for Determining Maximum Considered Earthquake and Design Spectral
Response Accelerations
4.1.3 Site-Specific Procedure for Determining Ground Motion Accelerations
4.2.1 Determination of Seismic Design Category
4.2.2 Site Limitation for Seismic Design Categories E and F
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
3.1.2 References
3.1.3 Definitions
3.1.4 Notation
3.2.1 Site class
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURE
3.3.1 Mapped acceleration parameters
3.3.2 Site coefficients and adjusted acceleration parameters
3.3.3 Design acceleration parameters
3.3.4 Design response spectrum
3.4 SITE SPECIFIC PROCEDURE
3.4.1 Probabilistic maximum considered earthquake
3.4.2 Deterministic maximum considered earthquake
3.4.3 Site-specific maximum considered earthquake
297

3.4.4 Design response spectrum
3.5 SITE CLASSIFICATION FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
3.5.1 Site class definitions
Chapter 54, STRUCTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA
5.1 REFERENCE DOCUMENT
ASCE 7
5.2 DESIGN BASIS
5.2.1 General
5.2.2 Basic Seismic-Force-Resisting Systems
5.2.3 Structure Configuration
5.2.4 Redundancy
5.2.5 Analysis Procedures
5.2.6 Design and Detailing Requirements
5.2.7 Combination of Load Effects
5.2.8 Deflection and Drift Limits
5.3 INDEX FORCE ANALYSIS PROCEDURE
5.4.1 Seismic Base Shear
5.4.2 Period Determination
5.4.3 Vertical Distribution of Seismic Forces
5.4.4 Horizontal Shear Distribution
5.4.5 Overturning
5.4.6 Drift Determination and P-Delta Effects
5.5 MODAL ANALYSIS PROCEDURE
5.5.1 Modeling
5.5.2 Modes
5.5.3 Modal Properties
5.5.4 Modal Base Shear
5.5.5 Modal Forces, Deflections, and Drifts
5.5.6 Modal Story Shears and Moments
5.5.7 Design Values
5.5.8 Horizontal Shear Distribution
5.5.9 Foundation Overturning
5.5.10 P-Delta Effects
5.6 LINEAR RESPONSE HISTORY ANALYSIS PROCEDURE
5.6.1 Modeling
5.6.2 Ground Motion
5.6.3 Response Parameters
5.7 NONLINEAR RESPONSE HISTORY ANALYSIS PROCEDURE
5.7.1 Modeling
5.7.2 Ground Motion and Other Loading
5.7.3 Response Parameters
5.7.4 Design Review
5.8 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERACTION EFFECTS
5.8.1 General
5.8.2 Equivalent Lateral Force Procedure
5.8.3 Modal Analysis Procedure
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
4.1.2 References
298
4.1.3 Definitions
4.1.4 Notation
4.2.1 Design basis
4.2.2 Combination of load effects
4.3 SEISMIC-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM
4.3.1 Selection and limitations
4.3.2 Configuration
4.3.3 Redundancy
4.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
4.4.2 Application of loading
4.5 DEFORMATION REQUIREMENTS
4.5.1 Deflection and drift limits
4.5.2 Seismic Design Categories B and C
4.5.3 Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F
4.6 DESIGN AND DETAILING REQUIREMENTS
4.6.1 Seismic design Category B
4.6.2 Seismic design Category C
4.6.3 Seismic Design Category D, E, and F
ALTERNATIVE SIMPLIFIED CHAPTER 4
Chapter 5 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS PROCEDURES
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
5.1.2 Definitions
5.1.3 Notation
5.2.1 Seismic base shear
5.2.2 Period determination
5.2.3 Vertical distribution of seismic forces
5.2.4 Horizontal shear distribution
5.2.5 Overturning
5.2.6 Drift determination and P-delta effects
5.3.1 Modeling
5.3.2 Modes
5.3.3 Modal properties
5.3.4 Modal base shear
5.3.5 Modal forces, deflections and drifts
5.3.6 Modal story shears and moments
5.3.7 Design values
5.3.8 Horizontal shear distribution
5.3.9 Foundation overturning
5.3.10 P-delta effects
5.4 LINEAR RESPONSE HISTORY PROCEDURE
5.4.1 Modeling
5.4.2 Ground motion
5.4.3 Response parameters
5.5 NONLINEAR RESPONSE HISTORY PROCEDURE
299

5.5.1 Modeling
5.5.2 Ground motion and other loading
5.5.3 Response parameters
5.5.4 Design review
5.6 SOIL-STRUCTURE INTERATION EFFECTS
5.6.1 General
5.6.2 Equivalent lateral force procedure
5.6.3 Response spectrum procedure
Appendix to Chapter 5, NONLINEAR STATIC ANALYSIS

Chapter 6, ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 References and Standards
ASME A17.1
ASTM C635
ASME/BPV
ASTM C636
ANSI/ASME B31.1
ANSI/ASME B31.3
ANSI/ASME B31.4
ANSI/ASME B31.5
ANSI/ASME B31.9
ANSI/ASME B31.11
ANSI/ASME B31.8
NFPA 13
IEEE 344
ASHRAE SRD
CISCA Recs for Zones 0-2
CISCA Recs for Zones 3-4
SMACNA HVAC
SMACNA Rectangular
SMACNA Restraint
AAMA 501.4
6.1.1 Scope
6.1.2 References
6.1.3 Definitions
6.1.4 Notation
6.1.2 2.1 Component Force Transfer Seismic Design Category
6.1.32.2 Seismic Forces Component Importance Factor
6.1.2 2.3 Seismic Relative Displacements Consequential damage
6.1.2 2.4 Component Importance Factor Flexibility
6.2.5 Component force transfer
6.2.6 Seismic forces
6.2.7 Seismic relative displacements
6.1.62.8 Component Anchorage
6.1.72.9 Construction Documents
6.2 3 ARCHITECTURAL COMPONENT DESIGN
300
6.2.1General
6.2.2 3.1 Architectural Component Forces and Displacements
6.2.33.2 Architectural Component Deformation
6.2.43.3 Exterior Nonstructural Wall Elements and Connections
6.2.53.3 Out-of-Plane Bending
6.2.63.4 Suspended Ceilings
6.2.73.5 Access Floors
6.2.83.6 Partitions
6.3.7 General
6.2.9 Steel Storage Racks
6.2.103.8 Glass in Glazed Curtain Walls, Glazed Storefronts, and Glazed Partitions
6.34 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESIGN
6.34.1 General Component period
6.34.2 Mechanical and Electrical Component Forces and Displacements
6.34.3 Mechanical and Electrical Component Period
6.3.4 Mechanical and Electrical Component Attachments
6.3.54.4 Component Supports and attachments
6.3.6 Component Certification
6.3.74.5 Utility and Service Lines at Structure Interfaces
6.3.8 Site-Specific Considerations
6.3.9 Storage Tanks
6.3.104.6 HVAC Ductwork
6.3.114.7 Piping Systems
6.3.124.8 Boilers and Pressure Vessels
6.3.13 Mechanical Equipment Attachments, and Supports
6.3.14 Electrical Equipment Attachments, and Supports
6.3.15 Alternative Seismic Qualification Methods
6.3.164.9 Elevator Design Requirements
Appendix to Chapter 6, ALTERNATIVE PROVISIONS FOR THE DESIGN
OF PIPING SYSTEMS
Chapter 7, FOUNDATION DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Scope
7.1.2 References
7.1.3 Definitions
7.1.4 Notation
7.2 STRENGTH OF COMPONENTS AND FOUNDATIONS General Design
Requirements
7.2.1 Structural Materials Foundation components
7.2.2 Soil Capacities
7.2.3 Foundation load-deformation characteristics
7.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES A AND B
7.4.1 Investigation
7.4.2 Pole-Type Structures
7.4.3 Foundation Ties
7.4.4 Special Pile Requirements
7.5.1 Investigation
301

7.5.2 Foundation Ties
7.5.3 Liquefaction Potential and Soil Strength Loss
7.5.4 Special Pile and Grade Beam Requirements
Appendix to Chapter 7, GEOTECHNICAL ULTIMATE STRENGTH DESIGN
OF FOUNDATIONS AND FOUNDATION LOAD-DEFORMATION
MODELING
Chapter 8, STEEL STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
8.1 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS GENERAL
AISC LRFD
AISC ASD
AISC Seismic
AISI
ANSI/ASCE 8-90
SJI
ASCE 19
8.1.1 Scope
8.1.2 References
8.1.3 Definitions
8.1.4 Notation
8.2 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL STRUCTURES GENERAL DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
8.2.1 Seismic Design Categories B and C
8.2.2 Seismic Design categories D, E, and F
8.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES A, B, AND C STRUCTURAL STEEL
8.3.1 Material properties for determination of required strength
8.4.1 Modifications to AISC Seismic
8.5 4 COLD-FORMED STEEL SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
8.4.1 Modifications to references
8.4.2 Light-frame walls
8.4.3 Prescriptive framing
8.4.4 Steel deck diaphragms
8.5.1 Modifications to AISI
8.5.2 Modifications to ANSI/ASCE 8-90
8.6 LIGHT-FRAMED WALLS
8.6.1 Boundary Members
8.6.2 Connections
8.6.3 Braced Bay Members
8.6.4 Diagonal Braces
8.6.5 Shear Walls
8.7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL DECK DIAPHRAGMS
8.8 5 STEEL CABLES
8.6 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR BUCKLING-RESTRAINED
BRACED FRAMES
8.6.1 Symbols
8.6.2 Glossary
8.6.3 Buckling-restrained braced frames (BRBF)
8.7 RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR SPECIAL STEEL PLATE
WALLS
302
8.7.1 Symbols
8.7.2 Glossary
8.7.3 Scope
8.7.4 Webs
8.7.5 Connections of webs to boundary elements
8.7.6 Horizontal and vertical boundary elements (HBE and VBE)
Chapter 9, CONCRETE STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
ACI 318
ACI ITG/T1.1
ASME B1.1
ASME B18.2.1
ASME B18.2.6.9
ATC 24
9.1.1 Modifications to ACI 318 Ref. 9-1 Scope
9.1.2 References
9.1.3 General definitions
9.2 ANCHORING TO CONCRETE GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
9.2.1 Scope
9.2.2 Notations and Definitions
9.2.3 General Requirements
9.2.4 General Requirements for Strength of Structural Anchors
9.2.5 Design Requirements for Tensile Loading
9.2.6 Design Requirements for Shear Loading
9.2.7 Interaction of Tensile and Shear Forces
9.2.8 Required Edge Distances, Spacings, and Thicknesses to Preclude Splitting Failure
9.2.9 Installation of Anchors
9.2.1 Classification of shear walls
9.2.2 Modifications to ACI 318
9.3 CLASSIFICATION OF SHEAR WALLS
9.3.1 Ordinary Plain Concrete Shear Walls
9.3.2 Detailed Plain Concrete Shear Walls
9.5 3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY B
9.53.1 Ordinary Moment Frames
9.6.1 Seismic-Force-Resisting Systems
9.6.2 Discontinuous Members
9.6.34.2 Plain Concrete
9.6.4 Anchor Bolts in the Tops of Columns
9.75 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES D, E, OR F
9.7.1 Seismic-Force-Resisting Systems
9.7.2 Frame Members Not Proportioned to Resist Forces Induced by Earthquake Motions
9.6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR SPECIAL PRECAST STRUCTURAL
WALLS BASED ON VALIDATION TESTING
9.6.1 Notation
9.6.2 Definitions
9.6.3 Scope and general requirements
9.6.4 Design procedure
303

9.6.5 Test modules
9.6.6 Testing agency
9.6.7 Test method
9.6.8 Test report
9.6.9 Test module acceptance criteria
9.6.10 Reference
Appendix to Chapter 9, REINFORCED CONCRETE DIAPHRAGMS CONSTRUCTED USING

UNTOPPED PRECAST CONCRETE ELEMENTS
Chapter 10, STEEL AND CONCRETE STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
ACI 318
AISC/LRFD
AISC Seismic
AISI
10.1.1 Scope
10.1.2 References
10.1.3 Definitions
10.1.4 Notation
10.3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES B AND C
10.5 MODIFICATIONS TO AISC SEISMIC, PART II
10.5.1 Changes to nomenclature
10.5.2 Changes to definitions in the AISC Glossary
10.5.3 Changes to section 1-SCOPE
10.5.4 Changes to Section 2 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS,
CODES AND STANDARDS
10.5.5 Changes to Section 3 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES
10.5.6 Changes to Section 4 LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS
AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS
10.5.7 Changes to Section 5.2 Concrete and steel reinforcement
10.5.9 Changes to Section 6.4 Reinforced-Concrete-Encased
Composite Columns
10.5.10 Changes to Section 6.4a Ordinary Seismic System
Requirements
10.5.11 Changes to Section 6.5 CONCRETE-FILLED COMPOSITE
COLUMNS
10.5.12 Changes to Section 6.5a CONCRETE-FILLED COMPOSITE
COLUMNS
10.5.13 Changes to Section 7.3 NOMINAL STRENGTH OF
CONNECTIONS
10.5.14 Changes to Section 8.2 COLUMNS
10.5.15 Changes to Section 8.3 COMPOSITE BEAMS
10.5.16 Changes to Section 8.4 Partially Restrained (PR) Moment
Connections
10.5.17 Changes to Section 9.3 BEAMS
304
10.5.18 Changes to Section 9.4 MOMENT CONNECTIONS
10.5.19 Changes to Section 9.5 COLUMN-BEAM MOMENT
RATIO
10.5.20 Changes to Section 10.2 COLUMNS
10.5.23 Changes to Section 12.4 BRACES
10.5.24 Changes Title for Section 15.3
10.5.25 Changes Title for Section 16.3
10.5.26 Add New Section 15.4
10.5.27 Add New Section 16.4
Chapter 11, MASONRY STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 Scope
11.1.2 Reference Documents
ACI 318
ACI 530
ACI 530.1
11.1.3 Definitions
11.1.4 Notations
11.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
11.2.1 General
11.2.2 Quality Assurance
11.3 2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
11.3.1 Scope
11.3.2 Empirical Masonry Design
11.3.3 Plain (Unreinforced) Masonry Design
11.3.4 Reinforced Masonry Design
11.3.5 Seismic Design Category A
11.3.6 Seismic Design Category B
11.3.7 Seismic Design Category C
11.3.8 Seismic Design Category D
11.3.9 Seismic Design Categories E and F
11.3.10 Properties of Materials
11.3.11 Section Properties
11.3.12 Headed and Bent-Bar Anchor Bolts
11.2.2 Modifications to ACI 530/ADCE 5/TMS 402 and
ACI 530.1/ASCE 5/TMS 602
11.4 DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT
11.4.1 General
11.4.2 Size of Reinforcement
11.4.3 Placement Limits for Reinforcement
11.4.4 Cover for Reinforcement
11.4.5 Development of Reinforcement
11.5 STRENGTH AND DEFORMATION REQUIREMENTS
11.5.1 General
11.5.2 Required Strength
11.5.3 Design Strength
305

11.5.4 Deformation Requirements
11.6 FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOADS
11.6.1 Scope
11.6.2 Design Requirements of Reinforced Masonry Members
11.6.3 Design of Plain (Unreinforced) Masonry Members
11.7 SHEAR
11.7.1 Scope
11.7.2 Shear Strength
11.7.3 Design of Reinforced Masonry Members
11.7.4 Design of Plain (Unreinforced) Masonry Members
11.8 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BEAMS
11.9 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COLUMNS
11.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHEAR WALLS
11.10.1 Ordinary Plain Masonry Shear Walls
11.10.2 Detailed Plain Masonry Shear Walls
11.10.3 Ordinary Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls
11.10.4 Intermediate Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls
11.10.5 Special Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls
11.10.6 Flanged Shear Walls
11.10.7 Coupled Shear Walls
11.113 SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES OF MASONRY
11.1131 Calculation of Required Strength
11.113.2 Flexural Yielding
11.3.3
Materials
11.113.34 Reinforcement
11.113.4 5 Wall Frame Beams
11.113.5 6 Wall Frame Columns
11.113.67 Wall Frame Beam-Column Intersection
11.124 GLASS-UNIT MASONRY AND MASONRY VENEER
11.124.1 Design Lateral Forces and Displacements
11.124.2 Glass-Unit Masonry Design
11.124.3 Masonry Veneer Design
11.5 PRESTRESSED MASONRY
Chapter 12, WOOD STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
12.1 GENERAL
12.1.1 Scope
12.1.2 Reference Documents
ASCE 16
APA Y510T
APA N375B
APA E315H
CABO Code
NFoPA T903
PS20
ANSI/AITC A190.1
ASTM D5055-95A
PS 1
PS 2
ANSI 05.1
ANSI A208.1
306
AWPA C1, 2, 2, 3, 9, 28
12.1.3 Definitions
12.1.34 Notations
12.2 DESIGN METHODS
12.2.1 Engineered Wood Design
12.2.2 Conventional Light-Frame Construction
12.2.1 Seismic design categories B, C, and D
12.2.2 Seismic design Categories E and F
Categories B, C, and D
Categories E, and F
12.3 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ENGINEERED WOOD CONSTRUCTION
12.3.1 General
12.3.2 Shear Resistance Based on Principles of Mechanics
12.3.3 Deformation Compatibility Requirements
12.3.41 Framing Requirements
12.3.5 Sheathing Requirements
12.3.6 Wood Members Resisting Horizontal Seismic Forces Contributed by Masonry and Concrete
12.4 DIAPHRAGMS AND SHEAR WALLS
12.4.1 Diaphragms
12.4.2 Shear Walls
12.4.3 Perforated Shear Walls
12.5 4 CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION
12.54.1 Scope Limitations
12.54.2 Braced Walls
12.54.3 Detailing Requirements
12.7 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES B, C, AND D
12.7.1 Conventional Light-Frame Construction
12.7.2 Engineered Construction
12.8 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES E AND F
12.8.1 Limitations
Chapter 13, SEISMICALLY ISOLATED STRUCTURES DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 Scope
13.1.2 Definitions
13.1.3 Notation
13.2 CRITERIA SELECTION
13.2.1 Basis for Design
13.2.2 Stability of the Isolation System
13.2.3 Seismic Use Group
13.2.4 Configuration Requirements
13.2.5 Selection of Lateral Response Procedure
13.2.1 Occupancy importance factor
13.2.2 Configuration
307

13.2.5 Isolation system
13.2.6 Structural system
13.2.7 Elements of structures and nonstructural components
13.3.1 General
13.3.21 Deformation Characteristics of the Isolation System
13.3.3 2 Minimum Lateral Displacements
13.3.4 3 Minimum Lateral Forces
13.3.54 Vertical Distribution of Force
13.3.65 Drift Limits
13.4 DYNAMIC LATERAL RESPONSE PROCEDURE
13.4.1 General Modeling
13.4.2 Isolation System and Structural Elements Below the Isolation System Description of
procedures
13.4.3 Structural Elements Above the Isolation System Minimum lateral displacements and forces
13.4.4 Ground Motion Drift limits
13.4.5 Mathematical Model
13.4.6 Description of Analysis Procedures
13.4.7 Design Lateral Force
13.5 LATERAL LOAD ON ELEMENTS OF STRUCTURES AND NONSTRUCTURAL
COMPONENTS SUPPORTED BY BUILDINGS DESIGN REVIEW
13.5.1 General
13.5.2 Forces and Displacements
13.6 DETAILED SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
13.6.1 General
13.6.2 Isolation System
13.6.3 Structural System
13.7 FOUNDATIONS
13.8 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
13.8.1 General
13.8.2 Isolation System
13.9 6 REQUIRED TESTS OF THE ISOLATION SYSTEM TESTING
13.9.1 General
13.9.2 6.1 Prototype Tests
13.9.36.2 Determination of Force-Deflection Characteristics
13.9.46.3 Test Specimen Adequacy
13.9.56.4 Design Properties of the Isolation System
Appendix to Chapter 13, STRUCTURES WITH DAMPING SYSTEMS
Chapter 14, NONBUILDING STRUCTURE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
14.1 GENERAL
14.1.1 Scope
14.1.2 References
14.1.3 Definitions
14.1.4 Notation
14.1.5 Nonbuilding structures supported by other structures
14.2 REFERENCES
14.3 INDUSTRY DESIGN STANDARDS AND RECOMMENDED PRACTICE
308
14.4 NONBUILDING STRUCTURES SUPPORTED BY OTHER STRUCTURES
14.4.1 Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical Components
14.5 2 STRUCTURAL GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
14.5.1 Design Basis
14.5.2 Rigid Nonbuilding Structures
14.5.3 Loads
14.5.4 Fundamental Period
14.5.5 Drift Limitations
14.5.6 Materials Requirements
14.5.7 Deflection Limits and Structure Separation
14.5.8 Site-Specific Response Spectra
14.2.1 Seismic Use groups and importance factors
14.2.3 Design basis
14.2.4 Seismic-force-resisting system selection and limitations
14.2.5 Structural analysis procedure selection
14.2.6 Seismic weight
14.2.7 Rigid nonbuilding structures
14.2.8 Minimum base shear
14.2.9 Fundamental period
14.2.10 Vertical distribution of seismic forces
14.2.11 Deformation requirements
14.2.12 Nonbuilding structure classification
14.63 NONBUILDING STRUCTURES SIMILAR TO BUILDINGS
14.6.31 General Electrical Power Generating Facilities
14.63.2 Pipe Racks Structural Towers for Tanks and Vessels
14.633 Steel Storage Racks Piers and Wharves
14.63.4 Electrical Power Generating Facilities Pipe Racks
14.63.5 Structural Towers for Tanks and Vessels Steel Storage Racks
14.6.6 Piers and Wharves
14.7 NONBUILDING STRUCTURES NOT SIMILAR TO BUILDINGS
14.7.1 General
14.7.2 Earth Retaining Structures
14.7.3 Tanks and Vessels Stacks and Chimneys
14.7.4 Stacks and Chimneys Amusement Structures
14.7.5 Amusement Structures Special Hydraulic Structures
14.7.6 Special Hydraulic Structures Secondary Containment Systems
14.7.7 Secondary Containment Systems Tanks and Vessels
Appendix to Chapter 14 OTHER NONBUILDING STRUCTURES
Chapter 15 STRUCTURES WITH DAMPING SYSTEMS
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Scope
15.1.2 Definitions
15.1.3 Notation
15.2.1 Seismic Design Category A
15.2.2 System requirements
309

15.3 NONLINEAR PROCEDURES
15.3.1 Nonlinear response history procedure
15.3 2 Nonlinear static procedure
15.4.1 Modeling
15.5.1 Modeling
15.6 DAMPED RESPONSE MODIFICATION
15.6.1 Damping coefficient
15.6.2 Effective damping
15.6.3 Effective ductility demand
15.6.4 Maximum effective ductility demand
15.7 SEIMIC LOAD CONDITIONS AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
15.7.1 Nonlinear procedures
15.8 DESIGN REVIEW
15.9 TESTING
15.9.1 Prototype tests
15.9.2 Production testing
310
Appendix B
PARTICIPANTS IN THE BSSC 2003 PROVISIONS UPDATE PROGRAM
Chair
Charles Thornton, Ph.D., PE, The Thornton P Tomasetti Group, Inc., New York, New York
Vice Chair
S. K. Ghosh, Ph.D., S. K. Ghosh Associates, Inc., Northbrook, Illinois (representing the Portland
Cement Association)
Secretary
Charles Carter, PE, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, Illinois
Ex Officio
William W. Stewart, FAIA, Stewart-Schaberg Architects, Clayton, Missouri
Members
J. Gregg Borchelt, PE, Brick Institute of America, Reston, Virginia
Bradford K. Douglas, PE, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington, D.C.
Edwin Dean, PE, SE, Nishkian Dean, Portland, Oregon (representing the Applied Technology
Council)
Henry Green, Bureau of Construction Codes, State of Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry
Services, Okemos, Michigan (representing the National Institute of Building Sciences)
H. S. Lew, Ph.D., PE, National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, Maryland
(representing the Interagency Committee for Seismic Safety in Construction)
Joseph Nicoletti, PE, URS/John A. Blume and Associates, San Francisco, California (representing the
Earthquake Engineering Research Institute)
James Rinner, Turner Construction, Dixon, California (representing the Association General
Contractors of America)
James Rossberg, PE, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, Virginia
Jeffrey Sciaudone, PE, Institute for Building and Home Safety, Tampa, Florida
W. Lee Shoemaker, Ph.D., Metal Building Manufacturers Association, Cleveland, Ohio
Howard Simpson, Sc.D., P.E., Simpson, Gumpertz and Heger, Arlington, Massachusetts (representing
the National Council of Structural Engineers Associations)
Charles Spitz, NCARB, AIA, CSI, Architect/Planner Code Consultant, Wall, New Jersey
(representing the American Institute of Architects)
David Wismer, PE, CBO, Department of Licenses and Inspections, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
(representing the Building Officials and Code Administrators International)
BSSC Staff
Claret M. Heider, NIBS Vice President, BSSC/MMC
Bernard F. Murphy, PE, Director, Special Projects
Carita Tanner, Editorial and Public Relations Manager
311
2003 Provisions, Appendix B

Chair
Charles Thornton, Ph.D., PE, The Thornton P Tomasetti Group, Inc., New York, New York
Vice Chair
S. K. Ghosh, Ph.D., S. K. Ghosh Associates, Inc., Northbrook, Illinois (representing the Portland
Cement Association)
Secretary
Charles Carter, PE, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, Illinois
Ex Officio
William W. Stewart, FAIA, Stewart-Schaberg Architects, Clayton, Missouri
Members
David R. Bonneville, PE, SE, Degenkolb Engineers, San Francisco (representing the
EarthquakeEngineering Research Institute)
J. Gregg Borchelt, PE, Brick Institute of America, Reston, Virginia
Bradford K. Douglas, PE, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington, D.C.
Edwin Dean, PE, SE, Nishkian Dean, Portland, Oregon (representing the Applied Technology
Council)
Henry Green, Bureau of Construction Codes, State of Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry
Services, Okemos, Michigan (representing the National Institute of Building Sciences)
H. S. Lew, Ph.D., PE, National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, Maryland
(representing the Interagency Committee for Seismic Safety in Construction)
James Rinner, Turner Construction, Dixon, California (representing the Associated General
Contractors of America)
James Rossberg, PE, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, Virginia
Grover Lee Sawyer, Jr., PE, North Carolina Department of Insurance, Office of the State Fire
Marshall, Raleigh (representing the International Code Council)
Jeffrey Sciaudone, PE, Institute for Building and Home Safety, Tampa, Florida
W. Lee Shoemaker, Ph.D., Metal Building Manufacturers Association, Cleveland, Ohio
Howard Simpson, Sc.D., P.E., Simpson, Gumpertz and Heger, Arlington, Massachusetts (representing
the National Council of Structural Engineers Associations)
Charles Spitz, NCARB, AIA, CSI, Architect/Planner Code Consultant, Wall, New Jersey
(representing the American Institute of Architects)
BSSC Staff
Claret M. Heider, NIBS Vice President, BSSC/MMC
Bernard Murphy, PE, Director, Special Projects
Carita Tanner, Communications and Public Relations Manager
312
Participants in the 2003 Provisions Update Program

Chairman
Charles Thornton, Chairman/Principal, Thornton-Tomasetti Group, Inc., New York, New York
Vice Chairman
Secretary
Charles Carter, Chief Structural Engineer, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, Illinois
Ex-Officio
William W. Stewart, Stewart-Schaberg Architects, Clayton, Missouri (representing the American
Institute of Architects)
Members
J. Gregg Borchelt, Vice President, Brick Industry Association, Reston, Virginia
Edwin Dean, Nishkian Dean, Portland, Oregon
Bradford K. Douglas, Director of Engineering, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington,
D.C.
Henry Green, Executive Director, Bureau of Construction Codes and Fire Safety, State of Michigan,
Department of Labor and Economic Growth, Lansing, Michigan (representing the National Institute of
Building Sciences)
H.S. Lew, Senior Research Engineer, National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg,
Maryland (representing Interagency Committee on Seismic Safety in Construction)
Joseph Messersmith, Coordinating Manager, Regional Code Services, Portland Cement Association,
Rockville, Virginia (representing the Portland Cement Association)
Jim Rinner, Project Manager II, Kitchell CEM, Sacramento, California
James Rossberg, Manager, Technical Activities for the Structural Engineering Institute, American
Society of Civil Engineers, Reston Virginia
Jeffery Sciadone, Associate Director, of Engineering, Institute of Business and Home Safety, Tampa,
Florida
W. Lee Shoemaker, Director, Engineering and Research, Metal Building Manufacturers Association,
Cleveland, Ohio
Howard Simpson, Simpson Gumpertz and Heger, Arlington, Massachusetts (representing National
Council of Structural Engineers Associations)
Charles A. Spitz, Architect/Planner/Code Consultant, Wall New Jersey (representing the American
Institute of Architects)
BSSC STAFF
Claret M. Heider, Vice President for BSSC Programs
Bernard F. Murphy, Director, Special Projects
Carita Tanner, Communications/Public Relations Manager
313
2003 PROVISIONS UPDATE COMMITTEE

Chair
Ronald O. Hamburger, Simpson Gumpertz and Heger, San Francisco, California
Representing Technical Subcommittee 1, Design Mapping
C. B. Crouse, URS Corporation, Seattle, Washington
R. Joe Hunt, BWXT Y-12, LLC, Oak Ridge, Tennessee
E. V. Leyendecker, U.S. Geological Survey, Denver, Colorado
Representing Technical Subcommittee 2, Design Criteria and Analysis
John D. Hooper, Magnusson Klemencic, Seattle, Washington
James R. Harris, J. R. Harris and Company, Denver, Colorado
Charles Kircher, Charles Kircher and Associates Consulting Engineers, Palo Alto, California
Representing Technical Subcommittee 3, Foundations and Geotechnical Considerations
Maurice S. Power, Geomatrix Consultants, Oakland, California
Roger Borcherdt, U.S. Geological Survey, Menlo Park, California
Representing Technical Subcommittee 4, Concrete Structures
Neil Hawkins, Professor Emeritus, University of Illinois, Clyde Hill, Washington
Joseph J. Messersmith, Regional Code Services, Portland Cement Association, Rockville, Virginia
Jack P. Moehle, Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center, Richmond, California
Representing Technical Subcommittee 5, Masonry Structures
Daniel Shapiro, SOHA Engineers, San Francisco, California
Daniel P. Abrams, MAE Center, University of Illinois, Urbana
Jason J. Thompson, National Concrete Masonry Association, Herndon, Virginia
Representing Technical Subcommittee 6, Steel Structures
James O. Malley, Degenkolb Engineers, San Francisco, California
Harry W. Martin, American Iron and Steel Institute, Auburn, California
C. Mark Saunders, Rutherford and Chekene, Oakland, California
Representing Technical Subcommittee 7, Wood Structures
Philip Line, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington, D.C.
James E. Russell, Building Code Consultant, Concord, California
Erol Karacabeyli, Forintek Canada Corporation, Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada
Representing Technical Subcommittee 8, Mechanical/Electrical Systems and Building
Equipment and Architectural Elements
John D. Gillengerten, Office of Statewide Health and Planning and Development, Sacramento,
California
Pat Lama, Mason Industries, Hauppage, New York
314

John F. Silva, Hilti Incorporated, San Rafael, California
Representing Technical Subcommittee 9, Quality Assurance
Douglas M. Smits, Division of Building Inspections, City of Charleston, South Carolina
Jim W. Sealy, Jim W. Sealy/Architect/Consultant, Dallas, Texas
Representing Technical Subcommittee 10, Low Rise and Residential Structures
J. Daniel Dolan, Washington State University, Pullman, Washington
Representing Technical Subcommittee 11, Composite Steel and Concrete Structures
Roberto T. Leon, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, Georgia
Jerome Hajjar, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minnesota
Representing Technical Subcommittee 12, Base Isolation and Energy Dissipation
Michael Constantinou, University at Buffalo, State University of New York, Buffalo
Martin Johnson, ABS Consulting, Irvine, California
Representing Technical Subcommittee 13, Nonbuilding Structures
Stephen W. Meier, Tank Industry Consultants, Indianapolis, Indiana
John T. Hutton, Uzun and Case Engineers, Atlanta, Georgia
Richard Drake, J.S. Dyer and Associates, Irvine, California
Gayle Johnson, Han-Padron Associates, Oakland, California
Harold Sprague, Structural Engineer, Black and Veatch, Overland Park, Kansas
At-Large Member
Ed Sutton, National Association of Home Builders, Washington, D.C.
Robert McCluer, International Code Council, Country Club Hills, Illinois
Bonnie Manley, National Fire and Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts
Dominic Kelly, Simpson Gumpetz and Heger, Waltham, Massachusetts
Robert E. Bachman, Consulting Structural Engineer, Westlake Village, California
Ex-officio Voting Member
William T. Holmes, Rutherford and Chekene, Oakland, California
315
PUC TECHNICAL SUBCOMMITTEES

Technical Subcommittee 1, DESIGN MAPPING
Chair
C.B. Crouse, URS Corporation, Seattle, Washington
Members
Roger Borcherdt, U.S. Geological Survey, Menlo Park, Califiornia
R. Joe Hunt, BWXT Y-12, LLC, Oak Ridge, Tennessee
Jeffrey K. Kimball, Engineering and Operations Support, U.S. Department of Energy, Germantown,
Maryland
E.V. Leyendecker, U.S. Geological Survey, Denver, Colorado
Lance Manuel, University of Texas, Austin, Texas
Walter Silva, Pacific Engineering Analysis, El Cerrito, California
Paul G. Somerville, Woodward-Clyde Federal Services, Pasadena, California
Eugene L. Trahern, Coughlin Porter Lundeen, Seattle, Washington
Michael Valley, Magnusson Klemencic, Seattle, Washington
Corresponding Members
Nathan Gould, ABS Consulting, St Louis, Missouri
Richard McConnell, Consultant, Springfield, Virginia
Technical Subcommittee 2, DESIGN CRITERIA AND ANALYSIS

Chair
Members
Mark Ascheim, University of Illinois, Urban, Illinois
James R. Harris, J.R. Harris and Company, Denver, Colorado
Charles Kircher, Charles Kircher and Associates Consulting Engineers, Palo Alto, California
Richard J. Phillips, Martin and HBL, Los Angeles, California
Chia-Ming Uang, University of California, La Jolla, California
David Bonowitz, San Francisco, California
Finley Charney, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University, Blacksburg, Virginia
316

Gary Y.K. Chock, Martin and Chock, Honolulu, Hawaii
Anil K. Chopa, University of California, Berkeley, California
Mohammed M. Ettouney, Wedlinger Associates, New York, New York
Andrew Gayer, ABS Consulting, St. Louis, Missouri
S.K. Ghosh, S.K. Ghosh Associates, Palatine, Illinois
John D. Gilengerten, OSHPD, Facilities Development Division, Sacramento, California
Nathan Gould, ABS Consulting, St Louis, Missouri
Walter B. Grossman, Structural Consultant, Fairlawn, New Jersey
Ronald Hamburger, Simpson Gumpertz and Heger, San Francisco, California
Husein Hasan, Tennessee Valley Authority, Knoxville, Tennessee
William T. Holmes, Rutherford and Chekene Engineers, Oakland, California
John T. Hutton, Uzun and Case Engineers, Atlanta, Georgia
Marcelino Iglesias, Department of Community Development, Trenton, New Jersey
Robert I. Johnson, R.I. Johnson and Associates, Wheaton, Illinois
Leonard Joseph, Thornton-Tomasetti Engineers, New York, New York
Ghassem Khosrownia, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Sacramento, California
Uno Kula, Phoenix, Arizona
Joe Maffei, Rutherford and Chekene Consulting Engineers, Oakland, California
Scott E. Maxwell, Consulting Engineer, Ypsilanti, Michigan
Richard D. McConnell, Consultant, Springfield, Virginia
Vilas Mujumdar, National Science Foundation, Arlington, Virginia
Paul Murray, Structural Design Group, Nashville, Tennessee
Simin Naseeh, SEAoNC, San Francisco, California
Mark Pierepiekarz, MRP Engineering, Newcastle, Washington
David Pierson, ARW Engineers, Ogden, Utah
Andrei M. Reinhorn, State University of New York, Buffalo, New York
Frederick C. Schmitt, Consulting Civil Engineer, West Chester, Pennsylvania
Gary R. Searer, Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates, Emeryville, California
John G. Shipp, EQE International, Irvine, California
Thomas, D. Skaggs, APA-The Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma, Washington
Itzhak Tepper, American Structural Engineers, Alexandria, Virginia
Jason Thompson, National Concrete Masonry Association, Herndon, Virginia
Fred M. Turner, Seismic Safety Commission, Sacramento, California
317

Ed Wang, CH2M Hill, St. Louis, Missouri
Tom C. Xia, DCI Engineers, Bellevue, Washington
Howard Zee, ARUP, San Francisco, California
Technical Subcommittee 3, FOUNDATIONS AND GEOTECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS

Chair
Maurice S. Power, Geomatrix Consultants, San Francisco, California
Members
Donald G. Anderson, CH2M Hill, Bellevue, Washington
David Bonowitz, Consultant, San Francisco, California
Roger D. Borcherdt, U.S. Geological Survey, Menlo Park, California
Craig Comartin, Comartin-Reis, Stockton, California
Ricardo Dobry, Renssalaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New York
Tom H. Hale, California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development, Sacramento,
California
Jeffrey R. Keaton, AMEC Earth and Environmental, Anaheim, California
Geoffrey R. Martin, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California
Farhang Ostadan, Bechtel Corporation, San Francisco, California
Edward E. Rinne, Kleinfelder, Oakland, California
Jonathan P. Stewart, University of California, Los Angeles
Susan W. Chang, Shannon & Wilson, Seattle, Washington
Paul L. Cloke, Science Applications International Corporation, Las Vegas, Nevada
C.B. Crouse, URS Corporation, Seattle, Washington
Neil M. Hawkins, University of Illinois, Urbana
Klaus H. Jacob, Lamont Doherty Earth Observatory of Columbia University, Palisades, New York
Dominic Kelly, Simpson Gumpertz & Heger, Waltham, Massachusetts
Jeffrey K. Kimball, U.S. Department of Energy, Germantown, Maryland
Cetin Soydemir, Geotechnical Services, Goffstown, New Hampshire
Steven A. Wendland, GeoSystems Engineering, Lenexa, Kansas
Tom C. Xia, DCI Engineers, Bellevue, Washington
T. Leslie Youd, Brigham Young University, Provo, Utah
318
Technical Subcommittee 4, CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Chair
Neil M. Hawkins, University of Illinois, Urbana
Members:
David E. Arndt, KPFF Consulting Engineers, Seattle, Washington
Ned M. Cleland, Blue Ridge Design, Winchester, Virginia
W. Gene Corley, Construction Technology Laboratories, Skokie, Illinois
S. K. Ghosh, S.K. Ghosh Associates, Northbrook, Illinois
David P. Gustafson, Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Schaumburg, Illinois
H. S. Lew, National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, Maryland
Rene W. Luft, Simpson Gumpertz & Heger, San Francisco, California
Joe Maffei, Rutherford & Chekene Consulting Engineers, Oakland, California
Joseph J. Messersmith, Jr., Portland Cement Association, Rockville, Virginia
Jack P. Moehle, Pacific Earthquake Engineering Research Center, Richmond, California
Richard Wollmershauser, Hilti, Tulsa, Oklahoma
Sharon L. Wood, University of Texas, Austin
Corresponding Members:
Leo Argiris, Arup & Partners, New York, New York
Nathan Gould, ABS Consulting, St. Louis, Missouri
Mervyn Kowalsky, North Carolina State University, Raleigh, North Carolina
Scott E. Maxwell, Consulting Engineer, Ypsilanti, Michigan
Antonio Nanni, University of Missouri, Rolla, Missouri
John F. Silva, Hilti, San Rafael, California
Scott Tinker, EQE International, Seattle, Washington
Tom C. Xia, DCI Engineers, Bellvue, Washsington
Technical Subcommittee 5, MASONRY STRUCTURES

Chair
Daniel Shapiro, SOH and Associates, Structural Engineers, San Francisco, California
Members
Daniel P. Abrams, University of Illinois MAE Center, Urbana
Randall P. Bernhardt, Burns & McDonnell, St. Louis, Missouri
319

J. Gregg Borchelt, Brick Industry Association, Reston, Virginia
Robert Chittendon, DSA, Granite Bay, California
Richard E. Klingner, University of Texas, Austin
Max L. Porter, Department of Civil Engineering, Iowa State University, Ames
James R. Tauby, Mason Industries, Smithtown, New York
Terence A. Weigel, Department of Civil Engineering, University of Louisville, Kentucky
Dean D. Brown, Interstate Brick Company, West Jordan, Utah
Thomas A. Gangel, Wallace Engineering Structural Consultants, Tulsa, Oklahoma
S.K. Ghosh, S.K. Ghosh Associates, Palatine, Illinois
Eric N. Johnson, Brick Association of the Carolinas, Charlotte, North Carolina
Dilip Khatri, Khatri International, Pasadena, California
Laura Larson, Durant, Au Clair, Wisconsin
Scott Maxwell, Consulting Engineer, Ypsilanti, Michigan
Richard Silva, National Park Service, Lakewood, Colorado
Simin Naseeh, Structural Engineers Association of Northern California, San Francisco, California
Arturo E. Schultz, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis
John Tawresey, KPFF Consulting Engineers, Seattle, Washington
Diane Throop, Consultant, Cincinnati, Ohio
Technical Subcommittee 6, STEEL STRUCTURES

Chair
Members
Michel Bruneau, MCEER, State University of New York, Buffalo
Richard M. Drake, J.S. Dyer & Associates, Irvine, California
Clarkson W. Pinkham, S. B. Barnes Associates, Los Angeles, California
C. Mark Saunders, Rutherford and Chekene, San Francisco, California
W. Lee Shoemaker, Metal Building Manufacturers Association, Cleveland, Ohio
Bozidar Stojadinovic, University of California, Berkeley
320

Kurt D. Swensson, KSI Structural Engineers, Atlanta, Georgia
Chia-Ming Uang, University of California
Corresponding Members:
Hassan Astaneh, University of California at Berkeley
Michael Cochran, Brian L. Cochran Associates, Los Angeles, California
Andrew Gayer, ABS Consulting, St. Louis, Missouri
Subhash C. Goel, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor
Nathan Gould, ABS Consulting, St. Louis, Missouri
John L. Gross, National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg, Maryland
Y. Henry Huang, Los Angeles County Department of Public Works, Alhambra, California
Ghassem Khosrownia, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Sacramento, California
Cynthia Duncan, AISC, Chicago, Illinois
Terry R. Lundeen, Coughlin Porter Lundeen, Seattle, Washington
Robert T. Lyons, Brandow & Johnston Associates, Los Angeles, California
Paul C. Perrin, Burgess & Niple, Ltd., Cincinnati, Ohio
David L. Pierson, ARW Engineers, Ogden, Utah
Steven M. Thomas, Butler Construction, Kansas City, Missouri
James R. Thomas, Delich, Roth & Goodwillie, P.A., Kansas City, Missouri
Tom C. Xia, DCI Engineers, Bellvue, Washington
Technical Subcommittee 7, WOOD STRUCTURES

Chair
Members
Kelly Cobeen, Cobeen & Associates Structural Engineering, Lafayette, California
Vladimir Kochkin, National Association of Home Builders Research Center, Upper Marlboro,
Maryland
Erol Karacabeyli, Forintek Canada Corporation, Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada
James A. Mahaney, Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates, Emeryville, California
Frank K. H. Park, Guilford County Planning and Development, Greensboro, North Carolina
Steven E. Pryor, Simpson Strong-Tie, Dublin, California
321

James E. Russell, Consultant, Concord, California
Thomas D. Skaggs, APA - The Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma, Washington
Chuck Williams, CWA Consultants, Sammamish, Washington
Philip R. Brazil, Reid Middleton, Everett, Washington
Kevin C. K. Cheung, Western Wood Products Association, Portland, Oregon
John M. Coil, Thornton-Tomasetti, Cole & Walsh, Tustin, California
Jay Crandell, Applied Residential Engineering Associates, West River, Maryland
Thomas M. Corcoran, Carter-Burgess, Kirkland, Washington
Andre Filiatrault, University of California, San Diego
Robert S. George, Architect, San Bruno, California
Greg Gilda, EQE International, Seattle, Washington
Robert W. Glowinski, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington, DC
Zeno Martin, APA- The Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma, Washington
Gary L. Mochizuki, Structural Solutions, Walnut Creek, California
Rawn Nelson, R.F. Nelson and Associates, Hermosa Beach, California
Douglas Rammer, USDA Forest Products Laboratory, Madison, Wisconsin
Mike Rhodebeck, USP Lumber Connectors, Gambier, Ohio
Alan Robinson, Tuan and Robinson Structural Engineers, San Francisco, California
David V. Rosowsky, Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oregon
Stephen P. Schneider, Kramer-Gehlen and Associates, Vancouver, Washington
Douglas M. Smith, City of Charleston, South Carolina
Victor L. Taugher, Taugher and Associates, Castro Valley, California
David P. Tyree, American Forest and Paper Association, Colorado Springs, Colorado
Dennis S. Wish, Professional Engineer, La Quinta, California
Edwin G. Zacher, H.J. Brunnier and Associates, San Francisco, California
Technical Subcommittee 8, MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND BUILDING

EQUIPMENT AND ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS
Chair
John D. Gillengerten, Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development, Sacramento, California
Members
George Antaki, WSRC Savannah Site, Aiken, South Carolina
Robert E. Bachman, Consulting Structural Engineer, Sacramento, California
322

Richard A. Behr, Pennsylvania State University, University Park, Pennsylvania
Russell Fleming, National Fire Sprinkler Association, Patterson, New York
Ronald W. Haupt, Pressure Piping Engineering Associates, Foster City, California
Y. Henry Huang, Los Angeles County Department of Public Works, Alhambra, California
Pat Lama, Mason Industries, Hauppage, New York
John V. Loscheider, Loscheider Engineering Company, Renton, Washington
David A. Sheppard, Consulting Structural Engineer, Sonora, California
John F. Silva, Hilti, San Rafael, California
William W. Stewart, StewartSchaberg/Architects, Clayton, Missouri
Victor D. Azzi, Rack Manufacturers Institute, Rye, New Hampshire
Antonio Braga, FM Global, Woodland Hills, California
James A. Carlson, Fort Calhoun Station, Fort Calhoun, Nebraska
Paul J. Carrafa, Property Maintenance Specialists, Willingboro, New Jersey
Christian Dubay, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts
Mohammed M. Ettouney, Weidlinger Associates, New York, New York
Joseph R. Hetzel, Door & Access Systems Manufacturers, Cleveland, Ohio
John T. Hutton, Lockwood Greene Engineers, Atlanta, Georgia
Brian Kehoe, Consultant, Emeryville, California
Paul Meisel, Kinetics Noise Control, Dublin, Ohio
Antonio Nanni, University of Missouri, Rolla
Richard J. Phillips, Martin & HBL, Los Angeles, California
Mark R. Pierepiekarz, MRP Engineering, Newcastle, Washington
John Jack Prosek, Turner Construction Company, San Jose, California
Robert Simmons, Amber/Booth, Houston, Texas
Jean Smith, Schindler Elevator Corporation, Morristown, New Jersey
William Staehlin, Division of State Architect, Sacramento, California
Victoria Valentine, National Fire Sprinkler Association, Patterson, New York
Michael E. Werner, County of St. Louis, Missouri
Richard Wollmershauser, Hilti, Tulsa, Oklahoma
Maryann Phipps, ESTRUCTURE, El Cerrito, California
323

Technical Subcommittee 9, QUALITY ASSURANCE
Chair
Douglas M. Smits, City of Charleston, South Carolina
Members
Mark Kluver, Portland Cement Association, San Ramon, California
John Loscheider, Loscheider Engineering Company, Renton ,Washington
Jim W. Sealy, Jim W. Sealy/Architect/Consultant, Dallas, Texas
Charles A. Spitz, Architect/Planner/Code Consultant, Wall, New Jersey
Michael Constantinou, State University of New York, Buffalo
Neil Hawkins, Consultant, Clyde Hill, Washington
Roberto T. Leon, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, Georgia
Philip Line, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington, DC
R. William McNealy, McNealy-Burnberry Engineering, St. Louis, Missouri
Daniel Shapiro, SOHA Engineers, San Francisco, California
Ed Sutton, National Association of Home Builders, Washington, DC
James R. Thomas, Delich, Roth and Goodwillie, P.A., Kansas City, Missouri
Fred M. Turner, California Seismic Safety Commission, Sacramento, California
Technical Subcommittee 10, RESIDENTIAL AND LOW RISE STRUCTURES

Chair
Members
Mark Caldwell, Apex Engineering, Calvert City, Kentucky
Chip Clark, Brick Industry Association, Reston, Virginia
James R. Harris, J.R. Harris & Company, Denver, Colorado
Eric N. Johnson, Brick Association of the Carolinas, Charlotte, North Carolina
Joseph J. Messersmith, Portland Cement Association, Rockville, Virginia
Jim W. Sealy, Architect, Dallas, Texas
Lee Shoemaker, Metal Building Manufacturers Association, Cleveland, Ohio
David P. Tyree, American Forest and Paper Association, Colorado Springs, Colorado
Terence A. Weigel, University of Louisville, Kentucky
324

Robert J. Wills, American Iron & Steel Institute, Birmingham, Alabama
Sharon, L. Wood, University of Texas, Austin
S.K. Ghosh, S.K. Ghosh Assocaites, Palatine, Illinois
Wassem Khan, Brick Industry Association, Reston, Virginia
Ed Sutton, National Association of Home Builders, Washington, DC
Technical Subcommittee 11, COMPOSITE STEEL AND CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Chair
Roberto T. Leon, School of Civil and Environmental Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology,
Atlanta
Members
Jerome F. Hajjar, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis
Kevin LeSmith, Magnusson Klemencic, Seattle, Washington
Clarkson W. Pinkham, S. B. Barnes Associates, Los Angeles, California
Bahram M. Sharooz, University of Cincinnati, Ohio
Kurt D. Swensson, KSI Structural Engineers, Atlanta, Georgia
Scott A. Civjan, University of Massachusetts, Amherst
Greg Deierlein, Stanford University, Palo Alto, California
Subhash Goel, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor
Larry Griffis, Walter P. Moore and Associates, Austin, Texas
Neil Hawkins, Consultant, Clyde Hill, Washington
Technical Subcommittee 12, BASE ISOLATION AND ENERGY DISSIPATION

Chair
Michael Constantinou, Department of Civil, Structural and Environmental Engineering, University at
Buffalo, State University of New York, Buffalo, New York
Members
Tom H. Hale, Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development, Sacramento, California
Robert D. Hanson, Federal Emergency Management Agency, Pasadena, California
Saif Hussain, SHA Coffman Engineers, Encino, California
Martin W. Johnson, ABS Consulting, Irvine, California
Charles Kircher, Charles Kircher & Associates Consulting Engineers, Palo Alto, California
Kit Miyamoto, Marr Chatter & Miyamoto, West Sacramento, California
325

Andrew Whittaker, Department of Civil, Structural and Environmental Engineering, University at
Buffalo, State University of New York, Buffalo, New York
Ian Aiken, Seismic Isolation Engineering, Piedmont, California
Amarnath Kasalanati, DIS, Inc., Lafayette, California
Wenshen Pong, San Francisco State University, California
Mark Sinclair, Degenkolb Engineers, San Francisco, California
John Stewart, Rimkus Consulting Group, Atlanta, Georgia
Andrew W. Taylor, KPFF Consulting Engineers, Seattle, Washington
Jack Wiggins, EQE International, Seattle, Washington
Technical Subcommittee 13, NONBUILDING STRUCTURES

Chair
Stephen W. Meier,Tank Industry Consultants, Indianapolis, Indiana
Members
Wafic T. Ayoub, Specialized Engineering Services, Overland Park, Kansas
Robert E. Bachman, Consulting Structural Engineer, Sacramento, California
Richard M Drake, J.S. Dyer & Associates, Irvine, California
Robert M. Ebeling, U.S. Army Engineer Research and Development Center, Vicksburg, Mississippi
Martin L. Eskijian, California State Land Commission, Long Beach, California
Douglas G. Honegger, D.G. Honegger Consulting, Arroyo Grande, California
John T. Hutton, Uzun & Case Engineers, Atlanta, Georgia
Gayle S. Johnson, Han-Padron Asosciates, Oakland, California
Leon Kempner, Jr., Bonneville Power Administration, Vancouver, Washington
Nicholas A. Legatos, Preload, Hauppage, New York
Theodore, C. Lemoff, National Fire Protection Association International, Quincy, Massachusetts
Denis Radecki, Hamon Custodis, Brazil, Indiana
Carl Rivkin, National Fire Protection Association International, Quincy, Massachusetts
Harold Sprague, Black and Veatch Special Projects Corporation, Overland Park, Kansas
David K. Adams, Lane Engineers, Tulare, California
Scott Ashford, University of California, San Diego
Victor D. Azzi, Rack Manufacturers Institute, Rye, New Hampshire
Pete Carrato, Bechtel Corporation, Frederick, Maryland
326

Thomas Dahlgren, Ben E. Gerwick, San Francisco, California
John Ferrito, Consultant, Ventura, California
Henry Fong, Port of Long Beach, California
Donita K, Fredricks, Chicago Bridge and Iron, Clive, Iowa
Charles S. Hanskat, Hanskat and Associates, San Diego, California
Frank J. Hsiu, Chevron Texaco Research and Technology Company, Richmond, California
Jagadish Joshi, Westinghouse, Georgia
John V. Loscheider, Loscheider Engineering Company, Renton, Washington
Praveen K. Malhotra, Factory Mutual Research, Norwood, Massachusetts
Sanj Malhuste, Bechtel Corporation, Frederick, Maryland
Robert J. Masterson, RJM Associates, Fall River, Massachusetts
Anil Misra, University of Missouri, Kansas City
Doulgas J. Nyman, D.J. Nyman & Associates, Houston, Texas
Rolf Pawski, Landmark Structures, Wheaton, Illinois
Bob Porthouse, Chimney Consultants, West Lebanon, New Hampshire
Anshel J. Schiff, Stanford University, Stanford, California
Jerry Serventi, Port of Oakland, California
John D. Stevenson, Stevenson & Associates, Cleveland, Ohio
Harry E. Stewart, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York
Warren Stewart, Han-Padron Associates, Long Beach, California
Eric K. Thorkildsen, Collins Engineering, East Greenbush, New York
Stuart D. Werner, Seismic Systems & Engineering Consultants, Oakland, California
Peter Yin, Port of Los Angeles, San Pedro, California
BSSC SIMPLIFIED DESIGN TASK GROUP

Chair
William T. Holmes, Rutherford & Chekene, Oakland, California
Members
Gary Y.K. Chock, Martin and Chock, Honolulu, Hawaii
Ronald O. Hamburger, Simpson Gumpertz and Heger, San Francisco, California
James R. Harris, J.R. Harris & Company, Denver, Colorado
Richard J. Phillips, Martin & HBL, Los Angeles, California
327
328
REPRESENTATIVES OF BSSC MEMBER ORGANIZATIONS

AND THEIR ALTERNATES
AFL-CIO Building and Construction Trades Department

Representative
Pete Stafford, Center to Protect Workers Rights, Washington, D.C.
Alternate
None on Record
American Concrete Institute

Representative
Shuaib H. Ahmed, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, Michigan
Alternate
None on Record
American Consulting Engineers Council

Representative
Gregg E. Brandow, Brandow and Johnston Associates, Los Angeles, California
Alternate
Edward Bajer, American Council of Engineering Companies, Washington, D.C.
American Forest and Paper Association

Representative
David P. Tyree, American Forest and Paper Association, Colorado Springs,

Colorado
Alternate
Bradford K. Douglas, American Forest and Paper Association, Washington,

D.C.
American Institute of Architects

Representative
Charles A. Spitz, Architect/Planner/Code Consultant, Wall, New Jersey
Alternate
Perry A. Haviland, Haviland Associates Architects, Oakland, California
American Institute of Steel Construction

Representative
Charles J. Carter, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, Illinois
Alternate
Louis F. Geschwinder, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago,

Illinois
American Iron and Steel Institute

Representative
Alternate
None on Record
329

American Society of Civil Engineers
Representative
James A. Rossberg, American Society of Civil Engineers, Reston, Virginia
Alternate
Douglas E. Honegger, Consultant, Arroyo Grande, California
American Society of Civil Engineers Kansas City Chapter

Representative
F. Alan Wiley, Black and Veatch, Overland Park, Kansas
Alternate
Thomas Heausler, Heausler Structural Engineers, Kansas City, Missouri
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers

Representative
William Staehlin, Office of State Health Planning and Development,

Sacramento, California
Alternate
Bruce D. Hunn, American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and AirConditioning Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Representative
Ronald W. Haupt, Pressure Piping Engineering Associates, Inc., Foster City,

California
Alternate
Timothy M. Adams, Stevenson & Associates, Cleveland, Ohio
American Welding Society

Representative
John Gayler, American Welding Society, Miami, Florida
Alternate
William R. Oates, American Welding Society, Miami, Florida
APA - The Engineered Wood Association

Representative
Thomas D. Skaggs, APA - The Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma,

Washington
Alternate
Zeno A. Martin, APA - The Engineered Wood Association, Tacoma,

Washington
Applied Technology Council

Representative
Christopher Rojahn, Applied Technology Council, Redwood City, California
Alternate
Edwin T. Dean, Nishkian Dean, Portland, Oregon
Associated General Contractors of America

Representative
Jim Rinner, Kitchell CEM, Sacramento, California
Alternate
Dirk Haire, Haire Logan, LLP, Annapolis, Maryland
330

Association of Engineering Geologists
Representative
Ellis Krinitzsky, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Vicksburg, Mississippi
Alternate
Patrick J. Barosh, Patrick J. Barosh and Associates, Bristol, Rhode Island
Association of Major City Building Officials

Representative
Andrew A. Adelman, City of Los Angeles, California
Alternate
Steve Ikkanda, City of Los Angeles, California
Brick Industry Association

Representative
J. Gregg Borchelt, Brick Industry Association, Reston, Virginia
Alternate
Wassem Khan, Brick Industry Association, Reston, Virginia
Building Owners and Managers Association International

Representative
Ron Burton, Building Owners and Managers Association International,

Washington, D.C.
California Geotechnical Engineers Association

Representative
Alan Kropp, Alan Kropp and Associates, Berkeley, California
Alternate
Matt Rogers, Zeiser Kling Consultants, Inc., Santa Ana, California
California Seismic Safety Commission

Representative
Fred Turner, Seismic Safety Commission, Sacramento, California
Canadian National Committee on Earthquake Engineering

Representative
R.H. Devall, Canadian National Committee on Earthquake Engineering,

Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada
Alternate
Cathleen Taraschuk, National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario,

Canada
Concrete Masonry Association of California and Nevada

Representative
Paul D. Bambauer, Concrete Masonry Association of California and Nevada,

Citrus Heights, California
Alternate
None on Record
331

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Representative
David P. Gustafson, Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Schaumburg, Illinois
Alternate
Scott R. Humphries, Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Schaumburg, Illinois
California Division of the State Architect

Representative
Dennis Bellet, Division of State Architect, Sacramento, California
Alternate
Howard Chip Smith, Jr., Division of State Architect, Sacramento, California
Earthquake Engineering Research Institute

Representative
Alternate
F. Robert Preece, Consultant, San Francisco, California
General Services Administration (9PCT)

Representative
Bela I. Palfalvi, General Services Administration 9PCT, San Francisco,

California
Alternate
Catherine K. Lee, General Services Administration 9 PCT, San Francisco,

California
Hawaii State Earthquake Advisory Board

Representative
Gary Y. K. Chock, Martin and Chock, Inc., Honolulu, Hawaii
Alternate
Paul Okubo, Hawaii State Earthquake Advisory Board, Honolulu, Hawaii
Institute for Business and Home Safety

Representative
Jeffrey Sciaudone, Institute for Business and Home Safety, Tampa Florida
Alternate
None on Record
Interagency Committee on Seismic Safety in Construction

Representative
H. S. Lew, National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg,

Maryland
Alternate
Shyam Sunder, National Institute of Standards and Technology, Gaithersburg,

Maryland
International Code Council

Representative
Tom Frost, International Code Council, Country Club Hills, Illinois
Alternate
None on Record
332
International Masonry Institute

Representative
Diane Throop, Consultant, Cincinnati, Ohio
Alternate
Richard Filloramo, International Masonry Institute, Glastonbury, Connecticut
Masonry Institute of America

Representative
John Chrysler, Masonry Institute of America, Torrance, California
Metal Building Manufacturers Association

Representative
W. Lee Shoemaker, Metal Building Manufacturers Association, Cleveland, Ohio
Alternate
Joe N. Nunnery, VP Buildings, Memphis, Tennessee
Mid-America Earthquake Center

Representative
Daniel P. Abrams, Mid-America Earthquake Center, University of Illinois,

Urbana
Alternate
Amr Elnashai, Mid-America Earthquake Center, University of Illinois, Urbana
National Association of Home Builders

Representative
Joseph Knarich, National Association of Home Builders, Washington, D.C.
Alternate
None on Record
National Concrete Masonry Association

Representative
Alternate
Jeff Greenwald, National Concrete Masonry Association, Herndon, Virginia
National Conference of States on Building Codes and Standards

Representative
Richard T. Conrad, Division of State Architect, Sacramento, California
Alternate
Robert C. Wible, National Conference of States on Building Codes and

Standards, Herndon, Virginia
National Council of Structural Engineers Associations

Representative
Howard Simpson, Simpson, Gumpertz and Heger, Arlington, Massachusetts
Alternate
333
National Elevator Industry, Inc.

Representative
George A. Kappenhagen, Schindler Elevator Corporation, Morristown, New

Jersey
Alternate
Jean Smith, Schindler Elevator Corporation, Morristown, New Jersey
National Fire Sprinkler Association

Representative
Russell P. Fleming, National Fire Sprinkler Association, Patterson, New York
Alternate
Victoria Valentine, National Fire Sprinkler Association, Patterson, New York
National Institute of Building Sciences

Representative
Henry L. Green, State of Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry

Services, Okemos, Michigan
Alternate
Gerald H. Jones, Consultant, Kansas City, Missouri
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association

Representative
George Muste, National Ready Mixed Concrete Association, Silver Spring,

Maryland
Alternate
Colin L. Lobo, National Ready Mixed Concrete Association, Silver Spring,

Maryland
Portland Cement Association

Representative
Joseph J. Messersmith, Jr., Portland Cement Association, Rockville, Virginia
Alternate
S. K. Ghosh, S. K. Ghosh Associates, Inc., Palatine, Illinois
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute

Representative
Jason J. Krohn, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago, Illinois
Alternate
David A, Sheppard, Consulting Structural Engineer, Sonora, California
Rack Manufacturers Institute

Representative
Victor Azzi, Rack Manufacturers Institute, Rye, New Hampshire
Alternate
John Nofsinger, Rack Manufacturers Institute, Charlotte, North Carolina
Santa Clara University

Representative
334
Reynaud Serrette, Santa Clara University, Santa Clara, California

Alternate
Wendy Taniwangsa, Santa Clara University, Santa Clara, California
Steel Deck Institute, Inc.

Representative
Steven A. Roehrig, Steel Deck Institute, Algonquin, Illinois
Alternate
Walter Schultz, Nucor Research & Development, Norfolk, Nebraska
Structural Engineers Association of California

Representative
Alternate
Allan Porush, Dames & Moore, Los Angeles, California
Structural Engineers Association of Central California

Representative
Dennis Bellet, Structural Engineers Association of California, Fair Oaks,

California
Alternate
Tom H. Hale, Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development,

Sacramento, California
Structural Engineers Association of Colorado

Representative
James R. Harris, J. R. Harris and Company, Denver, Colorado
Alternate
Dave Houdeshell, JVA, Incorporated, Boulder, Colorado
Structural Engineers Association of Illinois

Representative
Alternate
None on Record
Structural Engineers Association of Kentucky

Representative
Mark A. Caldwell, Apex Engineering, Calvert City, Kentucky
Alternate
Jiin Long Huang, Consultant, Lexington, Kentucky
Structural Engineers Association of Northern California

Representative
Simin Naseeh, Structural Engineers Association of Northern California, San

Francisco, California
Alternate
Edwin G. Zacher, H. J. Brunnier Associates, San Francisco, California
Structural Engineers Association of Oregon

Representative
Michael R. Hagerty, Consulting Engineer, Portland, Oregon

335

Alternate
Joseph C. Gehlen, Kramer Gehlen Associates, inc., Vancouver, Washington
Structural Engineers Association of San Diego

Representative
Chris Kamp, Stedman Dyson Structural Engineers, San Diego, California
Alternate
None on Record
Structural Engineers Association of Southern California

Representative
Richard L. Hess, Hess Engineering, Los Alamitos, California
Alternate
Robert T. Lyons, Brandow & Johnston Associates, Los Angeles, California
Structural Engineers Association of Texas

Representative
Joseph Kallaby, OSI, Houston, Texas
Alternate
Michael D. Engelhardt, University of Texas, Austin
Structural Engineers Association of Utah

Representative
A. Parry Brown, Reaveley Engineers and Associates, Salt Lake City, Utah
Alternate
David L. Pierson, ARW Engineers, Ogden, Utah
Structural Engineers Association of Washington

Representative
Doug Wilson, Reid Middleton, Inc., Everett, Washington
Alternate
The Masonry Society

Representative
Arturo E. Schultz, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis
U.S. Army Construction & Engineering Research Laboratory

Representative
John R. Hayes, US Army CERL, Champaign, Illinois
Alternate
Steven C. Sweeney, US Army CERL, Champaign, Illinois
Western States Clay Products Association

Representative
Jeff I. Elder, Western State Clay Products Association, West Jordan, Utah
Alternate
None on Record
Western States Structural Engineers Association

336

Representative
Greg Shea, Moffat, Nichol and Bonney, Inc., Portland, Oregon
Alternate
William T. Rafferty, Structural Design North, Spokane, Washington
Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc.

Representative
Roy H. Reiterman, Roy H. Reiterman, PE & Asosciates, Troy, Michigan
Alternate
Robert C. Richardson, Consultant, Sun Lakes, Arizona
337

REPRESENTATIVES OF BSSC AFFILIATE MEMBERS
AND THEIR ALTERNATES
Bay Area Structural, Inc.

Representative
David Benaroya Helfant, Bay Area Structural, Inc., Oakland, California
Alternate
None on Record
Building Technology, Incorporated

Representative
David B. Hattis, Building Technology, Inc., Silver Spring, Maryland
Alternate
None on Record
City of Hayward
Representative
Paul O. Johnson, City of Hayward, California
Alternate
None on Record
Felten Engineering Group

Representative
Greg Felten, Felten Engineering Group, Phoenix, Arizona
Alternate
Ken Mulder, Felten Engineering Group, Phoenix, Arizona
H & H Group, Inc.

Representative
Les. L. Hegyi, H&H Group, Inc., McLean, Virginia
Alternate
None on Record
HLM Design
Representative
Philip J. Antis, Burns Engineering, McLean, Virginia
Alternate
Shawn M. Elliott, HLM Design, Bethesda, Maryland
LaPay Consulting, Inc.

Representative
William S. LaPay, LaPay Consulting, Inc., Export, Pennsylvania
Alternate
None on Record
Square D Company
Representative
Philip J. Caldwell, Square D Company, Seneca, South Carolina
Alternate
Jeffrey Gatscher, Square D Company, Nashville, Tennessee
338
Steel Joist Institute

Representative
Robert R. Hackworth, Steel Joist Institute, Myrtle Beach, South Carolina
Alternate
None on Record
Vibration Mountings and Controls

Representative
John P. Giuliano, Vibration Mountings and Controls, Bloomingdale, New Jersey
Alternate
Rajendra Prasad, Vibration Mountings and Controls, Bloomingdale, New Jersey
339
340

Fema 450

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fema 450

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fema 450

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Program on

Improved Seismic Safety

NEHRP RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS

2003 BSSC BOARD OF DIRECTION

David Bonneville, Degenkolb Engineers, San Francisco, California

William W. Stewart, Stewart-Schaberg Architects, Clayton, Missouri (representing the

J. Gregg Borchelt, Vice President, Brick Industry Association, Reston, Virginia

Claret M. Heider, Vice President for BSSC Programs

NEHRP RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS

FOR SEISMIC REGULATIONS

BUILDING SEISMIC SAFETY COUNCIL

This report was prepared under Contract EMW-2001-CO-0269

INTRODUCTION and ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

2.4.2 Structural concrete ...................................................................................... 14

4.6 DESIGN AND DETAILING REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 69

6.1.3 Definitions ................................................................................................ 113

7.5 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES D, E, AND F ................................................ 136

9.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY C...................................................................... 164

10.5.17 Changes to Section 9.3 Beams........................................................... 179

12.4 CONVENTIONAL LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION .................................. 203

14.2.7 Rigid nonbuilding structures................................................................... 241

15.7.1 Nonlinear procedures .............................................................................. 282

2003 Provisions, Chapter 1

The occupancy importance factor as defined in Sec. 1.3.

See Sec. 3.1.4.

See Sec. 3.1.4.

See Sec. 3.1.4.

See Sec. 3.1.4.

See Sec. 4.1.4.

The portion of the seismic weight, W, located or assigned to Level x.

2003 Provisions, Chapter 1

1.2 SEISMIC USE GROUPS

1.3 OCCUPANCY IMPORTANCE FACTOR

1.4 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY

2003 Provisions, Chapter 1

Table 1.4-1 Seismic Design Category Based on SDS

Table 1.4-2 Seismic Design Category Based on SD1

SD1 < 0.067

0.067 # SD1 < 0.133

0.133 # SD1 < 0.20

1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY A

the design lateral force applied at Level x,

the portion of the seismic weight, W, located or assigned to Level x, and

Total operating weight of permanent equipment.

2003 Provisions, Chapter 1

This page intentionally left blank.

Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, American Concrete Institute,

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530-99/ASCE 5-99/TMS

Specifications for Masonry Structures (ACI 530.1-99/ASCE 6-99/TMS 602-99),

Standard Specification for Straight Beam Ultrasound Examination of Steel Plates

2003 Provisions, Chapter 2

See Sec. 3.1.4.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2003 Provisions, Chapter 2

2.3 SPECIAL INSPECTION

2003 Provisions, Chapter 2

2.5 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS

2.6 REPORTING AND COMPLIANCE PROCEDURES

2003 Provisions, Chapter 2